NT 5000 5 20 Bridge Manual Eng PDF

NAVI-TRAINER 5000
(VERSION 5.20)
NAVIGATIONAL BRIDGE
© Transas Marine Ltd. June, 2011

©Transas Marine Ltd. 1991–2011. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas Marine Ltd. and shall not be duplicated in whole
or in part. The technical details contained in this manual are the best that are available at the date of issue but
are subject to change without notice.
Transas Marine Ltd. pursues the policy of continuous development. This may lead to the product described
in this manual being different from the product delivered after its publication.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
This document contains:
Preamble Preamble contains general information, brief outline of the simulator,

trainee and instructor capabilities. 3
Chapter 1 Conning Display

The chapter describes the Conning Display containing navigational
instruments and devices, ship controls, mooring display and alarm
system. 13
Chapter 2 Transas Radar/ARPA Imitators

The chapter contains operating instructions for handling control
panels of five radar imitators (BridgeMaster II, BridgeMaster E,
BridgeMaster E Tactical, Furuno, Nucleus). 111
Chapter 3 Navigational Aids

The chapter contains description of the imitators of the Furuno GPS
Navigator GP-90, UAIS MKD, Loran C receiver, Furuno direction
finder. 277
Chapter 4 Handling of Vessels with Specific Propulsion System

The chapter contains a description of specific features of controlling
models of tugboats (of 4 types), Ice breaker and Fast Ferry. 373
Chapter 5 Tow Winches Control Consoles

The chapter describes the consoles for the control diesel and
hydraulic tow winches. 425
Chapter 6 Ship Communication Aids

The chapter contains instructions for working with Intercom
and VHF-Station simulators. 441
Chapter 7 Fishing Module

The chapter contains the description of work with fish-finding
hydroacoustic devices and fishing gear (pelagic and bottom trawls,
purse seine and long line). 453
NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge 1

PREAMBLE
The preamble contains general information, brief outline
of the simulator, trainee and instructor capabilities.
Copyright Transas Marine Ltd., 2011

Annotation
ANNOTATION
This Manual is intended for use by the trainee of the navigational simulator
“Navi-Trainer Professional 5000” (NTPro 5000).
NTPro 5000 enables simulator training and certification of watch officers, chief
officers, captains and pilots serving on commercial and fishing ships with the gross
tonnage of 500 tons and more in compliance with requirements of IMO STCW 78/95
Convention and Model Courses 7.01 (Master and Chief Mate), 7.03 (Officer in
Charge of a Navigational Watch).
In addition simulator can be used for training the officers as per Model Courses:
1.07 (Radar Navigation, Radar Plotting and Use of ARPA), 1.08 (Radar, ARPA,
Bridge Teamwork and Search and Rescue), 1.22 (Ship Simulator and Bridge
Teamwork), 1.27 (Operational Use of Electronic Chart Display and Information
Systems (ECDIS)) and 1.34 (Automatic Identification Systems).
Model Course 6.09 for training the Instructors (Training Course for Instructors) can
be also performed using NTPRO 5000.
PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

Sample of notation Usage comments
NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). To highlight names of documents
INSTRUCTOR MANUAL
Chapter 5 To highlight sections of a document
CONFIG To highlight path to a file, folder
SYSTEM\EXIT To highlight menu items
<Enter> To highlight names of keyboard keys
“Next” To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Simulator Status
“Navi-Trainer Professional 5000” simulator has “Certificate of Type Approval
of equipment” from the Federal Service for Supervision of Transport of Russia’s
Ministry of Transport as a simulator, that can be used for training of navigators
in accordance with the programs: “Radar Observation and Plotting”, “Use of ARPA”,
“Radar Observation and Plotting & Use of ARPA”, “Use of ECDIS”, “Ship Handling
and Manoeuvring”, “Navigation and Watchkeeping”, “Training of VTS Operators”.
NTPro 5000 simulator has Statement of Compliance with Class A Standard
for Certification of Maritime Simulators No. 2.14, October 2007, based on
requirements of the STCW Convention, Regulation I/12, issued by DNV.
In additional Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 simulator has a Certificate
of Conformance, issued by the Shipping Register of Ukraine.
Preamble 5
Brief Outline of the Simulator Complex
Simulator Capabilities of NTPro 5000

Listed below are the tasks of the navigator simulator training and competency
assessment implemented in NTPro 5000 simulator:
• Plan and conduct a passage and determine position;
• Maintain a safe navigational watch with ECDIS, UAIS and SSAS;
• Use of radar and ARPA to maintain safety of navigation;
• Respond to emergencies;
• Respond to a distress signal at sea;
• Manoeuvre the ship;
• Conducting telephone conversations via Intercom and VHF station;
• Plan a voyage and conduct navigation;
• Determine position and the accuracy of resultant position fix by any means;
• Determine and allow for compass errors;
• Co-ordinate search and rescue operations;
• Establish watchkeeping arrangements and procedures;
• Maintain safe navigation through the use of radar and ARPA and modern
navigation systems to assist command decision-making;
• Manoeuvre and handle a ship in all conditions;
• Operate remote controls of propulsion plant and engineering systems
and services;
• Ice navigation;
• Fishing operations.
The correctly adjusted mathematical ship models ensure the required realism
of their behaviour during the mooring, towing and other port operations in any
adverse conditions.
To enable the Dynamic Positioning Operator training as per the Nautical Institute
requirements (Dynamic Positioning Operator Training, 2nd edition, London),
the NTPro 5000 provides for integration with IVCS 2002 DPS system produced by
Navis Co. NTPro 5000 simulator can, therefore, be considered as a DPS simulator.
NTPro 5000 is capable of re-constructing and analysing complex navigational
situations including emergencies in the actual seamanship.
BRIEF OUTLINE OF THE SIMULATOR COMPLEX

NTPro 5000 simulator is a hard and software system consisting of dedicated and
hands-on equipment of full mission navigation bridges operating under the instructor
station control on the basis of standard personal computers connected to form
a local computer network.
The simulator which has a modular structure of its own original software is readily
adjusted for any possible configuration of workplaces within the training bridges
for the required type of simulator training.
The training bridge is designed to incorporate consoles with built in monitors, panels with
realistic vessel controls and their readouts, large screens and projectors for visualisation
as well as an information tableau mounted in the top part of the front bulkhead.
6 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

Brief Outline of the Simulator Complex
The instructor workplace is in a separate room enabling him/her to work with

computers designed for the preparation of sailing areas, mathematical models
and exercises, control of training bridge operation and debriefing. It may be fit out
with intercom, facilities for the radar and visual monitoring of the bridge operation,
printers, projectors and other equipment.
The software includes the following program modules:
• Network operation manager;

• Module for calculating mathematical models of ownships, target vessels, drifting
objects, tugboats, model of 3D wind induced waves, mooring lines and fenders;
• Instructor’s Main Display;
• Conning Display;
• Visual channels;
• Imitators of the radars with ARPA functions (BridgeMaster II-340, BridgeMaster
E, BridgeMaster E Tactical, Nucleus 2, Furuno);
• Radio Navigation Systems (GPS/DGPS, Loran-C, UAIS MKD, SSAS
and Direction Finder);
• ECDIS “Navi-Sailor 3000 ECDIS-I”;
• Analyser and archiver of exercise results;
• The Model Wizard (spatial data modelling system) is an automated tool for
the production of integrated databases of simulator areas and mathematical
ship models for Navi-Trainer series 5000 (NTPro 5000) simulators;
• Interface with real ship’s equipment;
• Interface with other Transas simulators.
Preamble 7
Brief Outline of the Trainee Capabilities
The simulator uses the following ready-to-use databases which are permanently
extended and updated:
• Library of visual 3D scenes of specific gaming areas;

• Library of radar scenes of the same areas;
• Library of vessels’ mathematical models;
• World-wide database on the tidal currents;
• World-wide database on Loran-C stations;
• World-wide database on Loran-C corrections;
• World-wide database on the stations for determining DGPS corrections;
• World-wide database on the radio beacons.
BRIEF OUTLINE OF THE TRAINEE CAPABILITIES

1. Before the voyage, the trainee can do the following:
– refer to Help system for the operational procedures for each device
and navigational aid;
– use the Pilot Card for familiarising him/herself with the ownship
characteristics;
– familiarise him/herself with the task for completing a passage sent
by the instructor to Navi-Sailor for NTPro;
– perform route study and route planning.
2. During the voyage, the trainee can do the following:
– control the vessel using the rudder, thrusters and main engines;
– use the radar/ARPA;
– use the electronic navigational chart system;
– monitor the environment on the visualisation screen over the entire horizon;
– use the binoculars, log, magnetic and gyro compasses, Doppler log,
echosounder and wind indicator;
– use the radionavigation vessel positioning systems;
– command the tugboat operation and putting out of mooring lines;
– when GMDSS program module is available in the simulator, hold radio exchange
with other vessels and coastal stations, organise rescue operations.
3. After completing the voyage, the trainee can familiarise him/herself with
the results using the recorded log file in the instructor’ analyser and get
a printout of these results.

General Notes and Warnings
GENERAL NOTES AND WARNINGS
Compliance with International Standards

Training Type IMO document (s)
RADAR/ARPA Training • International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) 1974
with Amendments adopted by IMO Resolution MSC.99(73)
on 5 December 2000;
• International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972)
with amendments;
• Seafarers’ Training, Certification and Watchkeeping (STCW) Code
(1996 edition) with Amendment 1 (1997) adopted by IMO Resolutions
MSC.66(68), 67(68) and Amendment 2 (2001) adopted by Resolution
MSC.78(70);
• Performance standards for automatic radar plotting aids. IMO Resolution
A.422 (XI) – valid for equipment installed before 1 January 1997.
Adopted on 15 November 1979;
• Performance standards for radar equipment. IMO Resolution A.477 (XII) –
valid for equipment installed between 1 September 1984 and 31 December
1998. Adopted on 19 November 1981;
• Performance standards for automatic radar plotting aids. IMO Resolution
A.823(19) adopted on 23 November 1995;
• Recommendation on performance standards for radar equipment. IMO
Resolution MSC.64(67)) – valid for equipment installed on or after
1 January 1999. Adopted on 4 December 1996.
Transas documents:
• NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). INSTRUCTOR MANUAL;
• NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). NAVIGATIONAL BRIDGE, (Chapter 2)
ECDIS Training • International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) 1974 with
Amendments adopted by IMO Resolution MSC.99 (73) on 5 December 2000;
• Seafarers' Training, Certification and Watchkeeping (STCW) Code
MSC.78(70);
• Performance standards for electronic chart display and information
systems. IMO Resolution A.817(19) adopted on 23 November 1995;
• Adoption of new performance standards and amendments. IMO Resolution
MSC.86(70), Annex 4, 1998;
• Guidance on the voyage planning. IMO Resolution A.893(21), 1999;
• Specifications for chart content and display aspects of ECDIS. IHO Standard
S-52(5) adopted on December 1996;
• IHO transfer standard for digital hydrographic data. IHO Standard
S-57(Edition 3.1) adopted on November 2000;
• Maritime navigation and radiocommunication equipment and systems –
Electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) – Operational
and performance requirements, methods of testing and required test
results. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 61174
(2001-10) standard;
• Interim guidance on training and assessment in the operational use of
the electronic chart display and information system (ECDIS) simulators.
IMO STCW.7/Circ.10 adopted on 11 June 2001.
Transas documents:
• NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). NAVIGATIONAL BRIDGE;
• NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION;
• NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). USER MANUAL
Preamble 9
Training Type IMO document (s)

AIS Training • IMO SOLAS 1974 with Amendments adopted by IMO Resolution
MSC.99(73) on 5 December 2000;
• IMO STCW Code (1996 edition) with Amendment 1 (1997),
Amendment 2 (2001);
• IMO STW 34/9/4 Training of shipboard personnel in the use of AIS
equipment;
• MSC.74(69), Annex 3, Performance Standard for a Universal Shipborne
Automatic Identification System.
Transas documents:
Bridge Team • International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS) 1974 with
Management Training Amendments adopted by IMO Resolution MSC.99(73) on 5 December 2000;
• International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972)
with amendments;
• Seafarers’ Training, Certification and Watchkeeping (STCW) Code
MSC.78(70);
• ICS 1969 Edition (Revised 2003);
• 2000 HSC Code;
• MERSAR, IAMSAR;
• Bridge Team Management – A Practical Guide by Captain A.J. Swift FNI,
Nautical Institute in London.
Transas documents:
• NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION;
Courseware
TRANSAS, as manufacturer of “NAVI-TRAINER” marine navigational simulators,
offers the user the following features:
• facility for accumulating data on the training procedure;

• facility for creating one’s own exercises meeting the principal requirements
regarding simulation training procedure approved in the international practice;
• facility for printing out training reports containing all the data required for
the trainee’s certification.
At the same time, TRANSAS does not supply the users with:
• programs of the simulation training course;

• topics plan;
• teaching procedures;
• samples of certification documents.
Items listed above along with the required qualification of teachers, are subject
to certification by the college management.

Warnings on the Unauthorised Use

• No electronic chart used in the simulator, can be used in the electronic chart
systems on the ships;
• No database on depths, tides and currents database can be used otherwise
than in the simulator;
• No vessels’ mathematical models can be used anywhere but in the simulator.
Notice
Information in this document is subject to change in order to improve reliability,
design, or function without prior notification.
You Will Need for Your Work

1. ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION:
– NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
AND INSTALLATION MANUAL;
– NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). INSTRUCTOR MANUAL;
– MANOEUVRING BOOKLETS;
– NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION;
– NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). USER MANUAL.

2. BASIC TRAINING.
The trainee should be in command of the following fundamentals
of the navigator profession:
– Fundamentals of VESSEL THEORY AND LAYOUT;
– Fundamentals of SHIPHANDLING;
– Fundamentals of NAVIGATION AND SAILING DIRECTIONS;
– Principal NAVIGATIONAL AIDS;
– Fundamentals of RADIO DETECTION AND RANGING.
3. INTERNATIONAL IRPCS-72 REGULATIONS.
Preamble 11
CHAPTER 1
Conning Display
The chapter describes the Conning Display containing
navigational instruments and devices, ship controls, mooring
display and alarm system.

This chapter contains:
Conning Display Structure...................................................................................... 17
Description of the Display’s Common Part ........................................................... 19
Control of the Ship’s Main Engine ...................................................................... 19
Control of the Ship Steering Gear ...................................................................... 20
Rudder and Thruster Controls ................................................................. 20
Selecting Rudder Control Mode ............................................................... 21
Control of the Viewing Direction on the Visualization ........................................ 22
Default View Mode ................................................................................... 22
Advanced View Mode .............................................................................. 23
Ship Motion Parameter Displays ........................................................................ 24
Displays of the Log ............................................................................................. 24
Ship Control and Indicators Panel (Man. Info) ...................................................... 25
Information Card (Info Card) ................................................................................... 26
Particulars .......................................................................................................... 26
Turning Circles ................................................................................................... 27
Emergency Manoeuvres .................................................................................... 28
Stopping Tracks ................................................................................................. 28
Magnetic Deviation ............................................................................................. 29
Sensors .............................................................................................................. 30
Navigational Instruments Panel (Instrum)............................................................. 31
Nautopilot D Control Panel................................................................................. 31
Purpose and Construction ....................................................................... 31
Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 32
Control Elements ..................................................................................... 32
Carrying out Operation............................................................................. 34
Input of Course Control Parameters ........................................................ 35
Command Inputs ...................................................................................... 39
Alarms ...................................................................................................... 41
Transas Autopilot Control Panel ........................................................................ 42
Controls .................................................................................................... 42
Autopilot On ............................................................................................. 44
Operating Modes ..................................................................................... 45
Input of Course and Radius/Rate of Turn ................................................ 46
Parameter Management .......................................................................... 46
Alarm Acknowledgement ......................................................................... 49
Echo Sounder Control Panel.............................................................................. 49
Switching the System On/Off ................................................................... 49
Controls and Indicators ............................................................................ 49
Altering System Parameters and Settings ............................................... 50
Gyro Panel ......................................................................................................... 51
Log Control Panel............................................................................................... 52
SSAS Control Panel ........................................................................................... 52
Turn On .................................................................................................... 52
Standby Mode .......................................................................................... 53
Ship Security Alerting Mode..................................................................... 53
Mode of Interrupting Transmission of Ship Security Alert Signal ............ 53
System Operation Check Mode ............................................................... 54
ECO Panel ......................................................................................................... 54
Ship’s Signals and Flags Control Panel (Signals) ................................................ 55
Panel for Control of Navigation Signals ............................................................. 55
Control of Ship Navigational Lights .......................................................... 56
Control of Daytime Shapes ...................................................................... 57
Chapter 1. Conning Display 15

Flash and Searchlight Control ................................................................. 58
Giving Sound Signals .............................................................................. 58
Release Lifebuoy ..................................................................................... 59
International Signal Flag Control Panel ............................................................. 59
Navigational Aids Panel (Nav. Aids) ...................................................................... 61
Alarms Panel ............................................................................................................ 61
General Alarms .................................................................................................. 62
Engine Malfunction Alarms ................................................................................ 62
Slow Down............................................................................................... 63
Shut Down ............................................................................................... 63
Start Fail .................................................................................................. 64
Steering Gear Malfunction Alarms..................................................................... 64
Rudder Failures Set by the Instructor ..................................................... 64
Steering Alarms ....................................................................................... 65
Fire Alarms ........................................................................................................ 65
Control Panel for Joint Operation with ERS Simulator (PP & SG) ..................... 66
Mooring Operation Control Panel (Moor) ............................................................. 68
Anchor Control Panel......................................................................................... 70
Dropping the Anchor ............................................................................... 71
Anchorage ............................................................................................... 71
Weighing the Anchor ............................................................................... 72
Stopping Anchor Winch ........................................................................... 72
Tow/Mooring Line Control Panel ....................................................................... 72
Selection of Line Material ........................................................................ 73
Sending and Fastening Lines .................................................................. 73
Letting Go the Line .................................................................................. 75
Operating the Tow/Mooring Winches ...................................................... 75
Balloon Fender Control Panel ........................................................................... 76
Tugs Control Panel ............................................................................................ 77
Tug Reservation ...................................................................................... 78
Follow to Point ......................................................................................... 78
Escort ...................................................................................................... 79
Line Fastening ......................................................................................... 79
Push ........................................................................................................ 81
Pull ........................................................................................................... 82
Releasing the Tug ................................................................................... 82
Panel for Control of Distress Signals in SAR Operations (SAR)........................ 83
Distress Signals Panel ....................................................................................... 83
SAR Direction Finder Control Panel .................................................................. 84
Use and Characteristics .......................................................................... 84
Front View ............................................................................................... 85
Bearing Display ....................................................................................... 86
Bearing Operation ................................................................................... 87
Monitoring/Scanning Operation ............................................................... 90
Standby Operation .................................................................................. 91
Cospas/Sarsat Decoding Data Content .................................................. 91
Operating and Adjusting .......................................................................... 92
Menu (Setup) ......................................................................................... 103
CAS Panel .............................................................................................................. 107
Panel of Ice Monitoring System (Ice Load) ......................................................... 108

Conning Display Structure
CONNING DISPLAY STRUCTURE

The Conning Display enables the trainee to control the ship, to promptly obtain
necessary information on the vessel’s motion and on the process of the exercise
fulfillment.
The ship control facilities and navigational aids are arranged on several on-screen
pages (panels). To display the required panel on the screen, “press” the appropriate
button in the bottom part of the screen. “Pressing” of the button is understood
as a single mouse click with the cursor positioned on the picture of this button.
There is a multi-level system for calling the required panel. This means that a press
on the button for calling the required panel may display another row of buttons
for calling second level panels, etc. To return to the main level, press “Up” button.
The called panel is displayed in the left bottom part of the screen. The remaining
part of the display, common for all the panels, contains controls of the main engine,
rudder and viewing direction, as well as some information displays.
Listed below are available main level panels, the appropriate call buttons specified:
• Help for using the Conning Display (“Help” button);

• Information card (“Info card” button);
• Ship control and indicators panel (“Man. Info” button);
• Navigational instruments (“Instrum” button);
• Ship’s signals and flags (“Signals” button);
• Navigational aids (“Nav. Aids” button);
• Alarms (“Alarms” button);
• Mooring operation control panel (“Moor” button);
• Panel for the control of distress signals in search and rescue operations
(“SAR” button);
• Turning on of the visual channel built into the Conning Display (“Visual” button –
is not there unless the display is run with Bearing = 1 parameter);
• Panel with messages of the trainee competence assessment system (“CAS” button);
• Panel of ice monitoring system (only for Crude Oil Tanker object, “Ice Load” button);
• Intercom station simulator (“ICOM” button there is only when the special
parameters are set in the Configuration Editor);
• VHF station simulator (“VHF” button there is only when the special parameters
are set in the Configuration Editor).
Listed below are the panels available at “Instrum” level with the appropriate call buttons
specified:
• Help in using navigation instruments panels (“Help” button);

• Autopilot (“Auto” button);
• Echo sounder (“Echo” button);
• Gyro compass recorder and corrector (“Gyro” button);
• Log (“Log” button);
• Ship security alert system (“SSAS” button);
• Panel for monitoring ecological parameters (“Eco” button).

Conning Display Structure
Listed below are the panels available at “Signals” level with the appropriate call
buttons specified:
• Help in using ship signals panels (“Help” button);

• Ship navigation lights, daytime shapes and acoustic signals (“Nav. Signals” button);
• International signals flags (“Flags” button).
Listed below are the panels available at “Nav. Aids” level with the appropriate call
buttons specified:
• Help in using navigation aids panels (“Help” button);

• GPS Navigator (“GPS” button);
• Panel with the AIS transponder minimum keyboard display (“UAIS MKD” button);
• Loran-C receiver (“Loran-C” button);
• Direction Finder (“MF DF” button).
Listed below are the panels available at “Alarms” level with the appropriate call buttons
specified:
• Help in using alarm signals panels (“Help” button);

• General alarm signals (“General Alarms” button);
• Engine malfunction alarms (“Engine Alarms” button);
• Steering gear malfunction alarms (“Steering Alarms” button).
• Fire alarms (“Fire Alarms” button).
Listed below are the panels available at “SAR” level with the appropriate call buttons
specified:
• Help in using the panel for giving distress signals (“Help” button);
• Panel for giving distress signals (“Distress Signals” button);
• SAR Direction Finder (“SAR DF” button).
All the panels listed above can be switched to in any order with a trainee’s pointing
device (mouse).

Description of the Display’s Common Part
Note: “Run” and “Stop” buttons do not appear unless the display is run
with AllowAssign = 1 parameter.
It is possible to adjust the illumination brightness of all the panels to suit the
illumination level in the visualization gaming area. To do this, use “Light” button.
“Dimmer” button allows the brightness of instrument indicators to be adjusted.
These two buttons are arranged in the right-hand part of panel call buttons.
DESCRIPTION OF THE DISPLAY’S COMMON PART

Conning Display structure allows the trainee, no matter what panel, with which
controls might be called, to control the ship’s main engine, rudder and thrusters,
to select the viewing direction on the visualization screens, to turn on/off the binoculars
mode and to promptly obtain necessary information on the vessel’s motion and
exercise fulfillment process. The implementation of these functions is ensured by
the common (for all the panels) part of the display.
Control of the Ship’s Main Engine

The engine telegraph is shown to the right-hand part of the called panel.
It is modified depending on the vessel type. If the ship has a single engine, the engine
telegraph will have a single handle. If the ship has two engines, the engine telegraph will
have two handles (as shown in the drawing). To work with one of the engines, use
the mouse (tracker ball) to move the appropriate engine telegraph handle. To work
with both engines (portside and starboard) simultaneously, move the mouse
in the space between the handles.
Over the telegraph, there is an engine readiness indicator (“Engine Ready”)
which shows that it is ready for operation. For a more accurate setting of the engine
telegraph handles, use the buttons with arrows and digital displays arranged over
the engine telegraph.
The engine operation is shown by the digital displays of the propeller shaft (shafts)
rate of revolutions – “RPM” and the propeller (propellers) pitch angle – “Pitch”
(not for all the ships) as well as the analog “Start Air” gauge.
To the top of the buttons with arrows and digital displays, there is the indicator
of the clinometer.

Control of the Ship Steering Gear

Rudder and Thruster Controls
Arranged in the top right corner of the screen are the controls of the rudder and thrusters.
The rudder controls include:

1. Helm (for the control use a handle with a scale).
To have the helm over to the portside or starboard, position the mouse cursor on
the required scale reading in the appropriate direction and press the left mouse
button. The rudder angle will not move to the set angle immediately, but
with a delay required for the rudder response. Another way is to position
the cursor on the handle itself and drag it to the required position by using
the mouse in drag-and-drop mode.
2. Tiller (for the control use the “PORT” and “STBD” buttons on the panel).
The tiller will be turning the rudder to the starboard as long as “STBD” button
is pressed, or to the portside while “PORT” button is pressed. When the button
is released, the rudder angle will remain in its current position.
The rudder position and rate of turn are shown on the displays positioned
respectively under the helm control scale and between the tiller control buttons.
The duplicating analog gauges “Rudder Angle” and “Rate of Turn” are on
the “Man. Info” page.
Note: Selection of the rudder control is described below.
For ships with two rudders, it is possible to set the asynchronous rudder control
mode whereby rudders and tillers are controlled independently. To turn on
the mode, press the “ASYNC” button. To switch to the standard control mode,
press the “ASYNC” button again.

Under the controls of the rudder there are two scales with the ship thruster control
handles: for the “Bow Thruster” and for the “Stern Thruster”.
The availability of one or two scales, or their absence, is determined by the number
of thrusters for the given ship type. Control of the thruster is by moving the handle
in the required direction (to the left or to the right) by using the mouse
(drag-and-drop mode). Thruster displays show their power as the per cent
of the maximum power, and the direction of the ship’s bow or thruster turn.
Selecting Rudder Control Mode

In the top central part of the display (to the left of the thrusters panel), buttons
for switching the rudder control modes are located:
• “Auto” – in this mode the autopilot is turned on (see Autopilot Control Panel,
Navigational Instruments Panel section), is steering the ship along that course
which was set at the time of switching on; when the autopilot is operating, a green
light indicator is turned on to the right of the button;
• “FollowUp” – follow up mode (helm is used);
• “NonFollowUp” – non-follow up mode (tiller is used).
Note: For models of ships fitted out with the Dynamic Positioning System (DPS),
the panel has “DP System” button which, if pressed, makes the ship control
impossible other than from the station where Navis IVCS 2000 software
is installed.

Control of the Viewing Direction on the Visualization

The controls of the viewing direction on the visualization screen are arranged
in the top left corner of the display.
There are two modes for changing the viewing direction:
• Default view;
• Advanced view – to switch the viewing point.
Default View Mode

With the “Default view” button pressed, the following controls and indicators are shown:
• Gyro compass card azimuth disk with the following shown within it:
– relative wind vector (blue);
– relative current vector (green);
– binoculars turn-on button.
• Digital displays under the gyro compass card which show:

– true current direction and speed (on the left);
– relative wind direction and speed (on the right).
• “Visual Controls” – arrow-buttons with digital displays which set:
Horizontal direction of the view sector centre (bearing) in degrees.
This direction may be by the gyro or magnetic compass depending
on which compass on the “Man. Info” page is currently turned on.
Vertical direction of the line of sight in degrees.
Change of the View Direction

The current position of the viewing sector is shown with the light green
arc on the compass azimuth card.
The view direction can be changed by using the following ways:
• click the mouse in the required point of the azimuth disk;

• drag the light green arc along the azimuth disk using the mouse in the drag-and-
drop mode;
• use arrow buttons (“Visual Controls”).

Binocular Control
To turn on/off the binocular, press the button.
When the button is pressed, the buttons for switching the binocular control
modes are displayed above the gyrocompass card:
• “Norm” – normal control mode (switched on by default);

• “IR” – infrared night vision mode;
• “BW” – black-and-white night vision mode.
To change the binocular focal length, use the following buttons:
• – to increase the binocular focal length;
• – to decrease the binocular focal length.

The value of the binocular focal length is indicated on the digital indicator under
the gyrocompass card (in the centre).
Note: The change of the binocular focal length and switching on the black-and-
white night vision mode is not performed if the Seagull 5000 visualization
is used in the simulator.
To change the view direction during the work with the binocular, follow the steps
described above in paragraph Change of the View Direction.
Advanced View Mode

If the “Advanced view” button is pressed, the compass card is replaced with
a ship diagram with nine multicoloured buttons to select the view point:
• red buttons – to move the view point to different position along the port side;
• orange buttons – to move the view point to different position along the diametric
plane of the ship, including the navigational bridge;
• green buttons – to move the view point to different position along the starboard.

To change the viewing direction, you can either press at once the required button
on the diagram or press the “Next” button for selecting, one by one, all the available
viewing directions. After the final selection of the direction, press the “Done” button
in order to return to the compass card (Default view mode).
Rear Mode
In the Rear Mode, the Conning Display simulates the workplace on a bridge
with aft view.
To switch the Rear mode on, press the “Rear mode” button.
In a while, the “Rear mode” button is highlighted in red, the “Select view points”
buttons, the ship controls and the indicators of some devices are reversed.
To switch the Rear mode off and go back to the Advanced view mode, press the
“Rear mode” button again.
Ship Motion Parameter Displays

In the top part of the screen there are digital displays of the ship motion parameters:
• HDG – ship’s heading;
• MAG – ship’s magnetic heading;
• COG – course over ground;
• SOG – speed over ground;
• SET – drift angle;
• DRIFT – drift speed;
• ROT – rate of turn;
• RAD – radius on the turning circle.
Displays of the Log

Log displays show the ship’s longitudinal (in the centre) and transverse speed,
on the bow and on the stern. The lighting of an arrow indicator shows the direction
of the ship’s speed.

Ship Control and Indicators Panel (Man. Info)
SHIP CONTROL AND INDICATORS PANEL (MAN. INFO)

On the “Man. Info” (Manoeuvring information) page, there are additional ship controls
and various indicators. The main engine and the ship rudder are controlled direct from
the common part of the display (for the description see above).
Note: A view of the “Man. Info” page (availability and arrangement of displays
and buttons) depends on the ship type.
The following engine and steering gear operation, analogous gauges, may be
arranged on the page:
• “RPM” – rate of revolutions;
• “Pitch” – pitch angle;
• “Rudder Angle” – rudder blade angle.
Note: For ships with two rudders in the asynchronous operation mode, you can
switch the display readings. To display the state of the starboard rudder use
the “SB” button, for the portside rudder use the “PS” button.
• “RateOfTurn, °/min” – ship’s rate of turn.
During the vessel’s turn, the pointer of “RateOfTurn, °/min” gauge may
“tremble”. In this case, in order to steady the reading, use “F” (filter) button under
it. The button has three positions, and the number of the current position is shown
on the digital display to the right of the button.
In the centre of the panel for the control of the viewing direction, there is a gyrocompass
card if the “Gyro” button is pressed. It can be replaced with the magnetic compass
card if the “Magnetic” button is pressed. Above the gyro compass card, there are
buttons with arrows which are used for changing the view direction on the screen
“to the left” and “to the right”.
Between the gauges, in the bottom part of the panel, there are buttons of three
steering gear pumps: two principal pumps (“Pump 1” and “Pump 2”) and a “Standby”.
When the pumps are turned on, the buttons are lighted. Round light indicators over
the buttons are turned on when the respective pump is under operation. In the process
of the exercise, the trainee can disable one of the pumps, the rudder’s rate of turn
will then decrease.

Information Card (Info Card)
The ship’s main engine controls include the analog gauge of the engine start air –
“Start Air, bar”; “Emergency Run” and “Emergency Stop” which are used in case
of engine faults set by the Instructor during the exercise, as well as “Emergency
Program” and “Combinator” buttons (not for all the vessels).
“Emergency Run” button disables the automatic engine safety system cancelling
Slow Down mode (drop of the engine load) when the engine operation parameters
grow beyond the admissible limits. A lengthy engine operation with “Emergency
Run” button depressed may cause its break down (Shut Down).
“Emergency Stop” button allows the engine to be stopped instantaneously by cutting
off the fuel supply to the engine cylinders.
“Emergency Program” button is used for cancelling normal maneuvering program.
“Combinator” button is used exclusively on the vessels whose remote control
systems feature this function.
The trainee can obtain information on what has happened to the engine by referring
to “Alarms” page (see Alarms Panel section in this chapter).
INFORMATION CARD (INFO CARD)

Information card contains six pages:
• “Particulars” – main ship specifications;

• “Turning Circles” – information on the ship’s turning ability;
• “Emergency manoeuvres” – information on emergency manoeuvres;
• “Stopping Tracks” – information on the ship stopping characteristics;
• “Magnetic Deviation” – information on magnetic deviation;
• “Sensors” – information on the position (coordinates) of relevant ship sensor
antenna units.
Provided below is a description of the information card pages.
Particulars

The “Particulars” page shows:
• name, class, displacement, year of building, principal dimensions, draught;

• steering particulars (“Steering”);
• propulsion particulars (“Propulsion”);
• information on the anchors (“Anchor”);
• draught increase in the shallow water (“Draft increase”);
• engine telegraph table (“Telegraph”).
In the right bottom corner of the page there are the following buttons:
• “Pilot Card” – to call a window with the ship pilot card;

• “Wheelhouse Poster” – to call a window with a table of the ship manoeuvring
characteristics.
Turning Circles
The “Turning Circles” page contains:
• tabs for selecting a graphic picture of the turning circle on the deep water
(“Deep water”) and on the shallows water (“Shallow water”);
• tabs for selecting the ship’s initial speed in a manoeuvre (in knots);
• ship tracks graph;
• table of time for the selected tracks with rudder angles of ± 15, ± 35 degrees.

Emergency Manoeuvres
The “Emergency Manoeuvres” page contains:
• tabs for selecting the initial speed in emergency manoeuvres (in knots);
• graphic presentation of manoeuvres:
– dead ahead, full astern;
– aport (astarboard), full astern;
– aport (astarboard).
• table of time for the turning circles with rudder angles of ±15, ±35 degrees.
Stopping Tracks

Information on the ship stopping characteristics is presented in the form

of a diagram showing:
• distance in cables covered by the ship (vertical axis);

• initial and final telegraph position (under each column);
• speed relative to points (to the left of the column);
• time in seconds (to the right of the column);
• ship parameters in the end point (above the column):
– time;
– XTE;
– speed;
– relative bearing.
Magnetic Deviation
The “Magnetic Deviation” page provides a table with magnetic deviation values
from 0° to 350°.

Sensors
The “Sensors” page displays a table specifying 3D antenna position of sensors:
• X – “minus” from ship centre to stern, “plus” from ship centre to bow;
• Y – “minus” from ship centre to portside, “plus” from ship centre to starboard;
• Z – “minus” down from ship waterline, “plus” upwards from ship waterline.

Navigational Instruments Panel (Instrum)
NAVIGATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PANEL (INSTRUM)

The Navigational Instruments Panel (“Instrum” button) contains the following lower
level panels:
• Autopilot Control Panel (NAUTOPILOT D or TRANSAS) – “Auto” button;

• Echo Sounder Control Panel – “Echo” button;
• Gyro Panel – “Gyro” button;
• Log Control Panel – “Log” button;
• SSAS Control Panel – “SSAS” button;
• Panel for monitoring ecological parameters – “Eco” button.
Nautopilot D Control Panel
Autopilot control panel (“Auto”) presents an image of an actual digital ANSCHUTZ

NAUTOPILOT D panel. Its control is, therefore, similar to that of an actual device.
Purpose and Construction

Autopilot permits the following modes of operation:
• course control with gyro compass;

• course control with magnetic compass;
• course change manoeuvres at a given rate of turn.
To turn on the autopilot, use the appropriate button on the steer control panel.
The following controls are provided:
• a membrane keyboard for the selection of operating modes and functions;

• a large control knob for setting the set course and rudder limitation, etc.

The following indicators are provided:

• a large 4-digit LED display for the actual course;
• a smaller 4-digit LED display for the set course;
• a LED strip for the indication of course and track errors;
• several luminous panels for the indication of alarms and warnings.
Alarms and warnings are issued as audible signals and also by flashing
of the corresponding luminous panels.
Operating Modes
FU/NFU Control Operation
With this mode of operation, the rudder angle is preselected or adjusted by means
of a handwheel or a tiller. In case of FU control, the rudder is caused to automatically
take this position. In case of NFU control, the rudder moves in the preselected direction
as long as the tiller is being actuated. Checking the instantaneous rudder angle is to be
made in this case by observing the rudder position indicator.
With any type of hand control, autopilot makes the set course – indicated
on the operator unit – follow up the instantaneous actual course.
Thus, a rapid change between hand control and automatic control is possible,
as the set-course adjustment required for autopilot equipment of former generation,
is no longer necessary.
Course Control Operation (Autopilot)
With changing over from hand control to automatic control, the operating mode
“Course control” is activated. The instantaneous ship’s course is retained in the set
course window of the operator unit. The ship guided by the course controller
continues moving in its previous direction.
Adjusting the set course is required only when the course is intended to be changed.
On the operator unit, selection can be made between the course references
of magnetic compass and gyro compass.
In addition to this, an alarm threshold for the off-course and course monitor alarm
and a limit value for rudder limitation can be entered.
Control Elements
The operator unit has the following control and indication functions:
• Actual course (digital);

• Set course (digital);
• Off-course (indicated by the LED strip);
• Inputs, after a function has been selected;
• Alarms;
• Operating modes.
The front panel is divided into three areas for easier location of the control:
• Left-hand area (L);

• Middle area (M);
• Right-hand area (R).

Mode Selector Button

• “Autop. ON” pushbutton (R) – a function pushbutton with luminous
indicator for activation of the operator unit (only when handling
the operator unit via the take-over switch);
• “Magn./Gyro” pushbutton (R) – a function pushbutton with luminous
indicator for selection of “Course Reference from the Gyro Compass”
or “Course Reference from the Magnetic Compass”;
• “Course Control” pushbutton (R) – a pushbutton with luminous
indicator for “Steer Ship with Course Controller” function;
• “Track Control” pushbutton (R) – a pushbutton with luminous indicator for

“Steer Ship with Track Controller” function;
• “R.o.T. Radius” pushbutton (R) – a pushbutton with luminous

indicators for “Steer Ship according to Rate of Turn and Radius
of turn” function;
• “Set Course” pushbutton (M) for set course input.
Function Pushbuttons and Function Indications

• Selection “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” pushbuttons (L). As the
appropriate button is pushed, one of the following functions can
be selected, and the value can be observed or altered as required;
• “Yawing” with settings of 1 to 6 (L);
• “Rudder” with settings of 1 to 9 (L);
• “Count. Rud.” rudder with settings of 0 to 9 (L);
• “Speed” (L). Speed for adapting the controller response to the

ship’s speed: manual input; automatically specified by the LOG;
• “Radius” (L) – a pushbutton for setting the radius of turn in cb.
The turn radius should be set in accordance with the ship type
and its initial speed (see the pilot card);
• “Rud. Lim.” (L) – rudder limitation adjustment in rudder angle
degrees, 5... max range;
• “Off Course” (L) – a pushbutton for setting the course error alarm
threshold within the range of 5 to 30°;
• “R.o.T.” (L) – a pushbutton for setting the rate of turn in degrees/
minutes for course changes;
• “Dimmer” (L). This pushbutton is for infinitely variable adjustment
of the front panel illumination;
• “Set” pushbutton (R) – a pushbutton with flashing light for “Adoption
of Set Values” function, e.g. set course, rudder limitation, off-course.

Indications
• Heading. Digital 4-digit LED actual course indicator (gyro or
magnetic compass reference);
• Set course or indication of value inputs. Digital 4-digit LED

set course indicator or indicator for the input value;
• Off-course display. LED strip for indication of the set and actual course difference.
This display indicates the difference between the actual course and the set course.
If, e.g., the vessel deviates from the set course to starboard, the luminous beam
also moves in the starboard direction.
For example, a display with four marks alight indicates that the vessel has deviated
from the course by 3–4 degrees to starboard. The two right-hand marks flash in
the event of set course deviations of greater than +10 degrees. The same applies
analogously to deviations to the portside. If the vessel is within ±1 degree
of the set course, two marks in the centre of the difference display light up.
Value Inputs
If an input function has been selected with “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection
pushbutton, e.g. “Rudder Limitation” (the panel is illuminated), turn the rotary knob to
alter the displayed value.
“Test/Reset” pushbutton (R) – pushbutton for the resetting the audible

alarm.
Operational Indications (Pushbutton LED’s)

LED’s have been assigned to the control pushbuttons to indicate their operating states
(status display). The respective LED significance is indicated by the pushbutton
inscriptions. Pushbutton LED’s can assume OFF, FLASHING and ON states.
Carrying out Operation

General
Autopilot is turned on by pressing “Auto” button on the steering gear control panel
in Conning Display’s common part.
As Auto mode is switched to, the ship course is set on the autopilot panel as the set
course. This is why the ship does not change its previous direction. “Autop. ON”
indicator lights up on the control panel. Information on the input of data, commands
and change of parameters (like the set course) will be provided below.

Input of Values and Parameters

After pressing one of the selection pushbuttons and illumination of the desired
luminous panel, the corresponding current value appears in the set course display.
If required, this value can be altered by turning the knob.
The rotary knob must be turned in the corresponding direction to alter the value.
Turning to the left reduces the value, while turning to the right increases it.
The arrows flash as a reminder to enter a new value.
The displayed value is adopted after “Set” pushbutton has been pressed. The value
then disappears from the set course display. If “Set” pushbutton is not pressed after
altering a value in the set course display, or if a different parameter is called, the old
value is retained.
Check of Values or Parameters
Example:
If a setting, e.g. the rudder limitation value, is to be checked, it is only necessary
to press one of the selection pushbuttons: “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” until the desired
function lights up (“Rud. Lim.”).
The current value appears in the set course display. If no further operator actions take
place, the unit returns to idle state after a 15 seconds waiting period, i.e. the illuminated
function display is extinguished and the “Set Course” value again appears.
Prepared Course Change
Prepared course changes are implemented in accordance with the pre-selected
rate of turn:
• Press “Set Course” pushbutton, and the arrow will be flash;
• Turn the rotary knob until the desired course appears in the set course display;
• Press “Set” pushbutton.
The displayed course value is adopted by the autopilot. The new set course appears
in the set course display. The set/actual course difference is indicated by
the off-course display (LED strip).
The course change manoeuvre is now triggered off; in this case, the previously set
rate of turn is not exceeded, or it is kept to in the event of large-scale course changes.
When set courses are changed, the operator is requested to set a course by flashing
of the status indication “Set” and of the decimal point to press “Set” pushbutton.
If this is not done within 15 seconds, no course change is triggered off and the old
set course appears again.
Input of Course Control Parameters

Values and parameters must be set by the operator for optimum autopilot control.
These inputs are made in accordance with a standard basic pattern.
A parameter is selected by pressing “Arrow Up”, “Arrow Dn” selection pushbuttons
several times, whereupon the corresponding panel lights up. “Arrow Up” selection
pushbutton begins with “Dimmer” and sets the parameters in ascending sequence.
“Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton begins with “Yawing” and sets the parameters in
a descending sequence.
Once a function has been selected and the panel lights up with the name of the value
(e.g. “Rudder”), “Set Course” panel is extinguished and the current value corresponding
to the selected function appears here. This value can now be altered by operating
the rotary knob.

The flashing arrow next to the rotary knob requests the operator to alter the selected
value. After the value has been altered, the flashing status indication “Set” requests
the operator to press “Set” pushbutton.
The new value is adopted when “Set” pushbutton is pressed. The “Set Course” panel
lights up, the arrow is extinguished, and the set course again appears in the display.
Input can be aborted at all times by pressing “Set Course” pushbutton, thus switching
over to set course input. Again, parameter input is aborted if the operator does not
enter any values for 15 seconds. The unit assumes idle state, i.e. the arrows are not
lighted up.
Entering/Checking the Values for “Yawing”
“Yawing” parameter permits the sensitivity of the course controller to be adjusted.
The “Yawing” setting must be performed dependent on weather conditions. In bad
weather, higher values are to be selected in order that unnecessary rudder orders
might be avoided. In calm weather, low values are to be selected:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbuttons until “Yawing” function
panel lights up. The words “Set Course” are extinguished. The display panel
indicates the current value;
• Turn the rotary knob until the desired value appears in the display panel
(possible values: 1 to 6). “Set” status indication flashes;
• The new value is adopted by the autopilot when “Set” pushbutton is pressed.
The old value remains stored in the system if the pushbutton is not pressed.
The system returns to idle state after 15 seconds.
Entering/Checking the Values for “Rudder”
The proportional gain of the course controller is set with the “Rudder” value.
The higher the “Rudder” value, the larger the rudder angle during a course change.
Too high “Rudder” values result in overshooting of the vessel. In case of too low
values, the vessel turns in to the new course too slowly:
• Press either of “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “Rudder”
function panel lights up. The words “Set Course” are extinguished. The display
panel indicates the current value;
(possible values: 1 to 9). “Set” status indication flashes;
• The new value is adopted by the system when “Set” pushbutton is pressed.
Entering/Checking the Values for “Counter Rudder”
The differential component of the course controller is set with “Counter Rudder”
value. The higher the “Counter Rudder” value, the greater the counteraction during
a course change. Too low “Counter Rudder” values result in overshooting of the vessel.
In case of too high values, the vessel turns in to the new course too slowly:
• Press the selection pushbutton “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” until the “Count. Rud.”
(possible values are from 0 to 9), set status indication flashes;

Entering/Checking the Values for “Speed”

The course controller is adapted to the ship’s speed with the “Speed” parameter.
This input can be made manually or automatically by the LOG. A manual speed
value input is made by turning the rotary knob. The basic setting is a manual input
of 20 knots, and this should only be switched over to the log if the vessel is steered
at considerably differing speeds (e.g. supply vessels or ferries).
Manual input:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “Speed” function
panel lights up:
– By means of an “L” (log) before the number, the display panel indicates
the current value supplied by the log;
– The words “Set Course” disappear.
• Turn the rotary knob until the desired value appears in the display panel and “H”
(hand = manual) appears in front of the set value. “Set” status indication flashes;
If it is again intended to use, the speed signal supplied by the log:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “Speed” function
panel lights up. The words “Set Course” disappear. The display panel indicates
the last manually set value with an “H” in front of it;
• With the rotary knob, set the value of 0.0 in the display panel and then turn
to the left slightly beyond 0.0 until “LOG” appears in the display panel;
• The LOG pre-selection is entered by pressing “Set” the pushbutton. The input
is adopted by the system.
Entering/Checking the Value for “Radius”
The ship turn radius in cables is set with “Radius” parameter. The turn radius should
be set as appropriate to the ship type (see the pilot card) and its initial speed:
• Press the selection pushbutton “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” until the “Radius”
(possible values are from 0.2 to 50). Set status indication flashes;

Entering/Checking the Value for “Rudder Limitation”

The maximum permissible rudder position in degrees, which the steering gear must
not exceed in autopilot mode, is set with the “Rudder Limitation” value:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “Rud. Lim.” function
(possible values are from 5 to max). “Set” status indication flashes;
Entering/Checking the Values for “Off Course”
The course control error threshold is set with “Off Course” value.
The deviation between the set course and actual course is monitored in this way.
If “Off Course” value is exceeded in course control mode (status indication “Autop. ON”
lighted), “Off Course” alarm is triggered off:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “Off Course” function
(possible values are from 5 to 30). “Set” status indication flashes;
Entering/Checking the Value for “Rate of Turn”
The rate of turn for a course changing manoeuvre is set with “R.o.T.” value.
The rudder limitation remains effective irrespective of the R.o.T. value:
• Press “Arrow Up” or “Arrow Dn” selection pushbutton until “R.o.T.” function
(possible values are from 5 to max deg./min). “Set” status indication flashes;
ATTENTION!
In case of course changes with adjusted rate of turn and in conjunction with the adjusted
rudder limitation, the following is to be taken into consideration.
If – due to rudder limitation – the adjusted rate of turn is not reached, the rudder
limitation is to be extended only step by step (steps ≤ 5 deg.), as otherwise – because of
the integral component of the controller – the rate of turn could be considerably
exceeded.

Command Inputs
The mode selector pushbuttons alter the autopilot’s operating state. The assigned
status display (LED) indicates the operating state with continuous light. When it flashes,
it requests the operator to carry out an operator action.
Autopilot ON
Autopilot is turned on by pressing “Auto” button on the steering gear control panel.
“Autop. ON” indicator lights up on the control panel.
If other ship controls are selected, “Autop. ON” indicator goes out.
Magnetic Compass/Gyro Compass
It is possible to switch over between the magnetic compass course reference and
gyro compass for autopilot by means of “Magn./Gyro” mode selector pushbutton.
The activated course reference is indicated by “Magn.” or “Gyro” status display,
and the corresponding actual course is indicated in the display.
The heading display indicates:
• “Magn.” for the magnetic compass course;
• “Gyro” for the gyro compass course.
In the event of deviations between the magnetic and gyro compass course,
the difference is automatically added to the previous set course by the system
after switch-over, so that the followed course remains unchanged. It is thus possible
to safely switch between “Gyro” and “Magn”. With the operating mode of track
control, the set course correction may result in different indications between set
course and navigation receiver indication. Pay attention to that when changing over.
Course Control
Course control is the normal operating mode of an autopilot. “Course Control”
mode is always activated first when the ship’s steering is changed over from Manual
to Autopilot.
If the operator subsequently switches over to track control, you have possibility
to restore the course control – press “Course Control” pushbutton: “Course Control”
mode is activated.
Track Control
The mode is designed for the control of the own ship’s motion along the route.
The route is set by the WP coordinates which are transmitted to the autopilot from
the ECDIS. This route can be created by the trainees themselves or taken from
an exercise prepared by the Instructor.
The mode ensures:
1. Vessel’s start on the set route after “Track Control” button is pressed.
2. Offset of the vessel’s lateral deviation from a straight route segment. In the presence
of some disturbances from the wind, current, and sea, the autopilot ensures
an average zero XTE provided its control coefficients are correctly adjusted
and the vessel is controllable at very big disturbances.
3. Automatic smooth turn in to the next straight route segment with the minimum
re-adjustment and with the set limit for the maximum rudder angle.

The mode can be turned on if the following conditions are fulfilled simultaneously:
• the vessel’s lateral deviation from the current route segment is not more than
0.3 n mile;
• deviation in course at the given segment is not more than 30°.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the closest route segment is determined
automatically and the vessel is steering to this segment. If these conditions
are not fulfilled, there is an alarm indicating that the mode cannot be turned on.
After the vessel passes the last WP of the route, the autopilot automatically switches
to the Course Control mode, an alarm notifying the navigator about this fact.
The procedure to transmit the route to the autopilot is as follows:
1. After the exercise loading, the ECDIS obtains the route from the Instructor
workstation with default “Trainer” name. You can unload this route and route
plan (in ROUTE menu) at any time in the course of an exercise.
2. Switch to GRAPHIC EDITOR in the same menu and plot a new route, using the double
right mouse button click to complete it.
3. Save this new route under any name (not more than 8 characters)
in ROUTE\SAVE menu.
4. To activate the new route, press the “Monitor” button.
5. Press “Use Plotter route” button on “Nav. Aids” panel. The new route will appear
on the Instructor display, on the radars (if you switch on WP function), on the GPS
receiver.
6. If your autopilot was run in Track Control mode before: switch on Course Control
mode and Track Control mode again to load a new route into Autopilot.
After this procedure, the route loaded in the ECDIS, will be automatically transmitted
to the Autopilot, and all you will have to do is press its control button: “Track Control”
at the required moment of time.
Note: If the ECDIS is not included in the bridge configuration, the Instructor’s route
WP’s are always automatically transmitted to the autopilot; in this case,
no adjustments are required.
Rate-of-Turn/Radius Control
The selected mode determines how the automatic turn will be made.
If “R.o.T./Radius” button’s top green indicator is lighted, the autopilot will turn
in to a new course at a rate of turn not exceeding that set by “R.o.T” parameter.
A press on “R.o.T./Radius” button lights up the bottom green indicator, and the
autopilot will turn the ship in to a new course with a radius equal to the value, set
by “Radius” parameter.

Alarms
Off-course Alarm
Cause:
1. The off-course error is larger than the limit set. This alarm is not issued in case
of direct course setting or immediately after a deliberate course change.
2. The magnetic course has changed compared to the set course
(course monitor alarm).
3. Autopilot is defective.
Signaling:
• The LED in the “Off Course” field blinks+audible signal (continuous sound);
• The LED of the “Test/Reset” key blinks.
Measure:
• Canceling the audible signal by pressing the “Test/Reset” key. The two LED’s
change over from blinking to permanent light;
• Check or increase limit;
• Change over to manual control in case of operation error (Autopilot defective).
Speed Alarm
Cause:
1. Speed alarm is given in case the actual ship’s speed within a period of 10 sec
varies by > 7.2 knots (corresponding to > 4 log pulses), (e.g. by log errors or
defective electronics).
2. Speed alarm is given when the ship’s speed is reduced too much for performing
autopilot operation.
Signaling:
• The LED in the “Speed” field blinks+audible signal (continuous sound);
• The LED of the “Test/Reset” key blinks.
Measure:
• Canceling the audible signal by pressing “Test/Reset” key;
• Blinking of both LED’s changes to continuous light.
In case 1: Change over to manual speed input.
In case 2: Change to manual control, if required, due to reduced control quality

of the Autopilot.
ATTENTION!
The actual speed value is to be checked as a matter of principle. If this value falls
below 5 knots, change over to hand control immediately!

Transas Autopilot Control Panel
Controls
Command Keys
• “Control” – key for selecting the autopilot operating mode:
– Heading Control;
– COG Control;
– Track Control.
• “Track Mode” – key for selecting the mode steering the ship
on the route:
– “Route” – control of motion along the route implemented
in the autopilot;
– “Tracking” – control of motion along the route from an external
Track Control device (Navi-Sailor).
• “Turn Mode” – key for presetting of the course change manoeuvre:
– By definite radius value (“Radius”);
– By definite rate of turn limit value (“R.O.T.”).
• “Program Mode” – key for switching the autopilot to the mode
of programmable input of the course and radius (rate of turn);
• “Dodge” – key for switching the autopilot to the mode of instant input
of the course and radius (rate of turn).

Functional Keys for Parameter Management

• “Yawing” – key for setting the rudder deflection frequency
in the ship yawing; used for selecting standard settings
(Economy: yawing = 1; Medium: yawing = 2; Precise: yawing = 6);
• “Rudder” – key for setting the coefficient of correspondence
between the rudder angle and deviation-off-course value; used
for selecting standard settings (Ballast: rudder = 1; Medium:
rudder = 5; Loaded: rudder = 9);
• “Speed” – key for setting the ship speed; used for selecting
the parameter input mode (manual or automatic from the log);
• “Heading” – key for selecting the heading tracing sensor

(gyro or magnetic compass);
• “Count Rudder” – key for setting the ship counteraction coefficient

in turning in to a set course;
• “Rudder Limit” – key for setting the rudder angle limits; used
for selecting the parameter input mode (manual, automatic);
• “Off Course Limit” – key for setting the limit of the current course
deviation from the set course;
• “Dev. Limit” – key for setting the maximum possible deviation

between the readings of the gyro and magnetic compasses. When
this value is exceeded, the “GYRO Lock” alarm is generated.
General Function Keys

• “Enter” – key for confirming the data input;
• “Alarm Ack.” – key for acknowledging the alarm.
Displays
• “Heading\COG” – 4-digit display of the actual course from the gyro or magnetic
compass (Heading mode), or shows the course over the ground from the GPS
(COG mode);
• Off-course display – LED strip for showing the difference between the actual course
and the set course. E.g., if the vessel deviates from the set course to starboard,
the luminous beam also moves in the starboard direction;
• “Set Course” – 4-digit display which shows set course. There are two indicators:
“Off Course” alarm (red), “On Limit” (green);

• “Radius\Rudder” – 3-digit display which shows the turn radius (n mile) if the
“Radius” turn control mode is selected, or shows the rudder angle (degrees)
if the “Rudder Limit” parameter is selected;
• “Speed\R.O.T.” – 3-digit display which shows the speed value (knots) if the
Speed parameter is selected, or shows the rate-of-turn value (degrees/min)
if the “R.O.T.” turn control mode is selected;
• “SETTING” – 4-digit display showing the radius or rate of turn (depending

on the selected mode), or shows the entered or default parameter values.
Parameter Input Device

The joystick is used:
• for altering the ship course (“STBD” or “PORT”);

• for entering the radius or rate-of-turn values (“Increase” or “Decrease”);
• for changing the parameter settings (“Increase” or “Decrease”).
Autopilot On
The autopilot is turned on by pressing the “Auto” button on the steering gear control
panel in the Conning Display’s common part.
As the Auto mode is switched to, the ship course is set on the autopilot panel
as the set course. This is why the ship does not change its previous direction.

Operating Modes
When selecting an operating mode, use the keys in the right-hand part of the
autopilot panel. The operation of the assigned mode is indicated by the backlighting
of this key indicator.
Heading Control Mode

In this mode, the ship course is monitored by the magnetic or gyro compass.
The ship drift is not taken into account.
To select the mode, use the “Control” key (the “Heading” indicator is backlighted).
To switch between the heading readings from the magnetic and gyro compass
use the “Heading” key in the left-hand part of the panel.
Deviation between the gyro and magnetic compass readings is set by using
the “Dev. Limit” key (6 degrees by default). When the set parameter is exceeded,
an alarm is generated and the “GYRO Lock” indicator lights up.
The “Heading\COG” display shows the current heading.
Note: Heading is a default control mode.
Course Control Mode (COG)
In this mode, the course over the ground is steered along. Data is supplied
by the GPS. The ship drift is taken into account.
In the case of the GPS malfunction, the autopilot switches automatically
to the Heading control mode.
To select the mode, use the “Control” key (the “COG” indicator is backlighted).
The “Heading\COG” display shows the current course.

Track Control Mode
The mode is intended for the control of the own ship motion along the route.
To select the mode, use the “Control” key (the “Track” indicator is backlighted).
There are two control modes: Route and Tracking.
By default, the Route mode is set (to the left of the “Track Mode” key, the “Route”
indicator lights up).
Route mode
In this mode, the autopilot receives the ship route in the form of successive
waypoints (WP) from an external device: GPS/Instructor Station/ECDIS.
The route is proceeded by in accordance with the autopilot’s internal algorithm.
Tracking mode
In this operation mode, the autopilot receives commands from an external Transas
INS system.
To switch from the Tracking mode to the Route mode, press the “Track Mode” key.
Radius/Rate-of-Turn Control
The selected mode determines how the automatic turn with the maintaining
of the constant turn radius or rate of turn will be made.
The mode is selected by pressing the “Turn Mode” key.

Input of Course and Radius/Rate of Turn

There are two modes of entering the course and radius or rate of turn – instant
and programmable.
By default, the autopilot is in the mode of instant input of the course and radius/rate
of turn (the “Dodge” key lights up).
Note: Input of the course and radius (rate of turn) is not possible unless
the autopilot operates in the Heading, COG control modes.
Instant input mode:
1. The “Dodge” key is pressed by default (green backlighting is ON).
2. The “Set Course” display shows the actual course.
3. Move the joystick to the right (“STBD”) or to the left (“PORT”) to alter the ship course.
The new course will be shown on the “Set Course” display.
4. Move the joystick forward (to increase the value) or backwards
(to reduce the value) for changing the radius or rate of turn value.
The new value of the turn radius or rate of turn will be shown
on the “Radius”/“R.O.T.” display.
The autopilot immediately accepts the entered data.
Programmable input mode:
1. Press the “Program Mode” key.
The “Set Course” display shows the current course.
2. Move the joystick to the right (“STBD”) or to the left (“PORT”) to alter the ship course.
The new course will be shown on the “Set Course” display.
3. Move the joystick forward (to increase the value) or backwards
(to reduce the value) for changing the radius/rate of turn value.
The new value of the turn radius/rate of turn will be shown on the
“Radius”/“R.O.T.” display.
4. Press the “Enter” key.
The autopilot will receive new data.
Note: If the “Enter” key has not been pressed for 10 s, or the instant input mode is
selected, the autopilot memory saves the latest data on the course and
radius (rate of turn). It can be displayed for editing after the subsequent
activation of the programmable input mode.
Parameter Management
Keys for editing the autopilot parameters are in the left-hand part of the panel.
The active parameter key is marked with green lighting. The lighting is turned off by
pressing the “Enter” key or after 10 s.
Some keys have additional indicators (to the right). To select the necessary
indicator, press successively the relevant key. The active indicator has yellow
lighting. With the indicator flickering, it is necessary to confirm the parameter
value by pressing the “Enter” key or enter a new value by using the joystick.
The selected parameter value is shown on the “Setting” display.

Input of Yawing Parameter

To set the parameter:
1. Press the “Yawing” key.
2. To select the standard parameter setting, keep pressing the “Yawing” key
until the necessary indicator shows up: “Economy” – 1; “Medium” – 2
(default setting); “Precise” – 6.
The standard parameter setting value is shown on the “SETTING” display.
3. Press the “Enter” key to confirm the selection.
4. If the standard setting is required to be re-defined, use the joystick: up –
to increase, down – to reduce the parameter value (possible values: 1 to 6).
5. Press the “Enter” key to confirm changes.
Input of Rudder Parameter
1. Press the “Rudder” key.
2. To select the standard parameter setting, keep pressing the “Rudder” key until
the necessary indicator shows up: “Ballast” – 1; “Medium” – 5 (default setting);
“Loaded” – 9.
The standard parameter setting value is shown on the “SETTING” display.

4. If the standard setting is required to be re-defined, use the joystick: up –
to increase, down – to reduce the parameter value (possible values: 1 to 9).
Input of Speed Parameter

There are two modes of entering the speed: manual and automatic (Log) –
data is supplied by the log.
Note: By default, the Log mode is set.
1. Press the “Speed” key.
2. To select the mode of entering the speed, keep pressing the “Speed” key until
the necessary indicator shows up: “Manual” or “Log”.
3. If the Manual mode is selected, the “SETTING” display shows the latest speed value.
4. Press the “Enter” key to confirm the selection or use the joystick (up – to increase,
down – to reduce the parameter value) and press “Enter”.
5. When the Log mode is selected, there is no need to press the “Enter” key.
Selection of Heading Parameter
To select the gyro or magnetic compass for tracing ship heading, keep pressing
the “Heading” key until the necessary display shows up (“GYRO” or “MAGN”).
The “Heading\COG” display will show the actual course.
Note: By default, the “GYRO” parameter is selected.

Input of Count Rudder Parameter

1. Press the “Count Rudder” key.
The parameter setting value is shown on the “SETTING” display (5 is default value).
3. If the setting is required to be re-defined use the joystick: up – to increase,
down – to reduce the parameter value (possible values: 0 to 9).
Input of Rudder Limit Parameter

There are two modes of entering the Rudder Limit parameter:
• Manual – set by default;
• Auto – depends on the ship speed.
1. Press the “Rudder Limit” key.
2. If the Manual mode is selected, the “SETTING” display shows the latest
parameter value.
The backlighted key indicator will be flickering.

3. Press the “Enter” key to confirm the selection or use the joystick
(up – to increase, down – to reduce the parameter value) and press “Enter”.
4. If the Auto mode is selected, no confirmation is required. The rudder angle limit
will be selected automatically.
Input of Off Course Limit Parameter

1. Press the “Off Course Limit” key.
The parameter setting value is shown on the “SETTING” display.
3. If the setting is required to be re-defined, use the joystick: up – to increase,
down – to reduce the parameter value (possible values: 1 to 30).
Input of Dev. Limit Parameter
1. Press the “Dev. Limit” key to edit the value of deviation between the gyro
and magnetic compass readings.
The parameter setting value is shown on the “SETTING” display
(6 deg. is default value).
3. If the setting is required to be re-defined, use the joystick: up – to increase, down –
to reduce the parameter value (possible values: 0 to 15). Press the “Enter” key.
Note: When the set parameter is exceeded, an alarm is generated
and the “Gyro Lock” indicator lights up.

Alarm Acknowledgement
As an alarm is generated, an acoustic signal is sounded, and an appropriate
key or indicator starts flickering on the autopilot panel, whereas the “Alarm Ack”
key is backlighted with red and starts flickering.
To acknowledge an alarm, press the “Alarm Ack” key. As this is done, the acoustic
signal is muted, and the keys flickering stops.
Echo Sounder Control Panel

The Echo Sounder control panel (“Echo”) supplies the trainee with the information
on the depth under keel and on the time. This frame is divided into two parts: display
area and controls with indicators.
Switching the System On/Off

To switch the system ON, press “Power” button.
The system will switch ON and assume the parameter settings which
have been selected when the system was last time switched OFF.
To switch the system OFF, press the same button again. The system
will be switched OFF.
Controls and Indicators

The display area is situated in the left-hand side, and controls with indicators are at
the right-hand side of the frame. The display area is a chart of depths altering with
time. The Echo Sounder parameters can be modified using the following controls:
• “<<Param>>” – the button for selecting the parameter which has to be altered;
• “<<Value>>” – the button for increasing or reducing the selected parameter’s value;
• “Set” – the button for the confirmation and input of the selected parameter’s value.

There are some indicators and control buttons in the top right-hand side. They are
(from the top to the bottom):
• Current depth in chosen measuring units;
• Echo Sounder operating mode (“ACTUAL” or “REPLAY”);
• Current latitude and longitude indicators;
• Current date and time;
• <<Replay>> which allows viewing the soundings as of any past

moment of time;
• “Mark” which draws a vertical line for the current time mark
on the graph;
• Alarms indicators which inform about dangerous depths
and shallows;
• Switch from one sensor to another.
The Echo Sounder has two major modes: Actual and Replay.
To establish “Replay” mode, press “<<Replay>>” button. Press the left side of this button
(marked with <<) to shift the depth scale to the left, and the right side of the button
(marked with >>) to shift it to the right. All frame indicators’ readouts (date, time
and depth) will display the values, current for the selected position of the depth scale.
To return to the Actual mode, press “Set Actual” button.
Altering System Parameters and Settings

The list of Echo Sounder parameters is situated at the bottom of Display area:
• “Range” (10 m, 50 m, 250 m, 500 m, 2000 m);

• Measuring units (meters, feet, fathoms);
• “Gain” (0, 1, 2,…10);
• “Mode” (DBK, DBT, DBS);
• “Sound velocity” (1400…1700 m/s);
• “Draft” (0…10 units);
• “Trim” (0…5 units);
• “Depth alarm” (OFF or value);
• “Shallow alarm” (OFF or value).

To alter the Echo Sounder parameters, select one of them by clicking
the pointing device on the right (next, >>) or left (previous, <<) side of
“<<Param>>” button. The rectangular frame around the parameter will
highlight the current parameter in the list.

When the required parameter is selected, it can be modified by

pressing the left side of “<<Value>>” button (to decrease, <<) or its
right side (to increase, >>). Altering the selected parameter will be
continued with the fixed steps while the mouse button is pressed.
After all the necessary modifications, all parameters can be fixed by

pressing “Set” button. If “Set” button is not pressed for about
10 seconds, the previous values will be restored.
Gyro Panel
The Gyro panel (“Gyro”) consists of a window with a course recorder chart.
On its right is a window for the input of the vessel’s speed and latitude.
There is also a window with the value of the gyro velocity correction.
Immediately after the beginning of the exercise it is necessary

to set the course recorder chart to the start time by using
“<<Scroll>>” button in the bottom right corner of the panel.
The time scale on the course recorder chart is on the right and has 5 minute
graduation. The setting with an accuracy of up to a minute is made using
the interpolation by eye.
In the left-hand part of the course recorder chart, a broken line will be drawn which
allows determining the quarter (0°–90°, 90°–180°, 180°–270°, 270°–360°) in which
the course should be read off in the central part of the course recorder chart.
In the right-hand part, the position of the rudder blade is drawn (Rudder recorder
chart) for the current moment of time.
Press “Mark” button to draw a horizontal line for the current time mark
on the graph.
The automatic calculations of the gyro velocity correction require the vessel’s
speed and vessel’s position latitude. To this end “Speed”, “Latitude” windows
and double-arrow buttons are used. If a log and GPS receiver are used, the
required values will be entered automatically as demonstrated by the lighted
green “Auto” buttons.

The calculation results are displayed in “Correction” window.
The gyro failure set by the user, is indicated by the lighted red lamp on
“Failure” button. This alarm can be disabled by pressing “Failure” button.
Log Control Panel
The log control panel (“Log”) shows the ship’s longitudinal and transverse velocities
on the bow and on the stern relative to the bottom (the “BT” button) or only the ship’s
longitudinal speed through the water (the “WT” button) in metres per second
(the “m/s” button) or in knots (the “knots” button).
When an exercise is being completed, the “Total Distance” is counted from zero.
“Distance to WP”, whereby an alert is generated, can be entered by
pressing buttons marked with double arrows (“<<” and “>>”).
The alert is generated for notifying the trainee about passing the distance he/she
has set before. To acknowledging an alert, press “Ack” button.
SSAS Control Panel

The imitator of the Ship Security Alert System (“SSAS” panel) is intended for
providing ship security alert and checking the system operating capability.
Turn On
To turn on the SSAS power supply, set the three-position switch on the control/junction
box in “ON” or “TEST” position. The system responds by switching to the operating
status, the process taking two minutes during which the light indicator on the imitator
of INMARSAT D+ terminal is reflecting various internal checks and adjustments
of the communication channel.

Standby Mode
In the Standby mode, the three-position switch on the control/junction box is required
to be in “ON” position. At this stage, the security alert buttons are not activated.
Ship Security Alerting Mode

Two security alert buttons are provided for activating this mode. The three-position
switch on the control/junction box is required to be in “ON” position. To rule out
inadvertent pressing on the security alert buttons, a 3 seconds delay in sending
the activation signal is provided; during this time interval, the sending of the signal
can be cancelled by deactivating the pressed button.
Mode of Interrupting Transmission of Ship Security Alert Signal

To interrupt the ship security alert signal, deactivate all the security alert buttons.

System Operation Check Mode

The SSAS equipment operation is checked by setting the three-position switch on the
control/junction box in “TEST” position and pressing either of the security alert buttons.
ECO Panel
The “Eco” panel is designed for monitoring of ecological parameters of environment.
Note: The “Eco” panel is accessible for a limited number of ships.
The panel contains the indicators, displaying graphically changes of the values of
the following ecological parameters:
• CO2 emissions measured inside the funnel, %;

• CO2 emissions measured at the top of the funnel %;
• SOx emissions measured inside the funnel;
• SOx emissions measured at the top of the funnel;
• NOx emissions;
• Excess air measured inside the funnel, %;
• Excess air measured at the top of the funnel, %;
• CO concentration;
• Unburned fuel content;
• Soot content;

Ship’s Signals and Flags Control Panel (Signals)
• Fuel consumption, kg/hour;

• Air consumption, kg/hour.
The values of parameters are displayed on two scales (according to the selected
ship): AFT – aft, FWD – fore, or PS – portside and SB – starboard.
The following colors are used:
• green – the value of the parameter is normal;

• yellow – the value of the parameter is close to critical;
• red – the critical value of the parameter with respect to environment or to fuel
consumption.
Note: At will of the Instructor the panel of monitoring of ecological parameters can
be hidden.
The values of ecological parameters in a graphic or text form also can be seen on
the “Research” panel if the Instructor in the “Diagrams” window selects the
“Emission monitoring” parameter and sends the display of data to the Bridge.
Note: To display the “Research” panel, select the “Research console” task in the
Configuration Editor.
SHIP’S SIGNALS AND FLAGS CONTROL PANEL (SIGNALS)

The ship’s signals and flags control panel (“Signals”) contains the following lower
level panels:
• Panel for control of navigation signals (ship navigation lights, daytime shapes
and audible signals) – “Nav. Signals” button;
• International signal flag control panel – “Flags” button.
Panel for Control of Navigation Signals
Ship’s signals control panel (“Nav. Signals”) allows the trainee to turn on/off the
lights, flash signals, and search light, to set daytime shapes on the vessel, to give
sound signals appropriate to the simulated situation, to release the lifebuoy with
a signal light.

Control of Ship Navigational Lights

To turn on navigational lights on the ships of all types, press the appropriate buttons
on the “General Signals” panel. When the signals are turned on, the buttons
are backlighted.
If the exercise includes towing operations, buttons for turning on the “Towing masthead”
lights can be added in the top part of the panel.
Arranged below are buttons for turning on the following modes:
• “Lights Off” – to turn off all the lights;

• “Navigation lights” – to turn on main navigational lights;
• “Test” – to check operation of all the lights.
To turn on the deck lights, use the “Deck Lights” button.

When sailing in the inland waters, to turn on navigational lights on the river/sea
ships 1–8, use the “River Special” panel.
To the right, there are four buttons for turning on passing side indicating signals
on the river ships:
Control of Daytime Shapes

Daytime shapes can be set by placing them (with a mouse click) in turn in the
required position in the ship diagram. The order in which the shapes are selected
corresponds to that shown below the ship contour in the centre of the screen page.
If the Trainee sets a combination of shapes, which does not exist in reality, it is not
displayed on the visualization screen.
To cancel selected combination of shapes, press “Clear” button.
Note: The “red cone with the vertex down” shape is used in the carriage
of dangerous cargoes on the inland waterways.

Flash and Searchlight Control

A light flash signal can be given by using the “Flash” button. To select the signal
direction, click the mouse in the required point on the azimuth circle. Release
the “Flash” button to stop the signal.
To turn on/off a search light, press “Search Light” button under “Flash” button.
By using arrow buttons you can set the searchlight beam incline angle. The beam
direction can be selected on the azimuth circle.
Giving Sound Signals

The type of an audible signal to be given automatically (with a tyfon) can be selected
by pressing the appropriate button in the top right part of the panel.
“At anchor” and “Aground” buttons are designed for giving gong or bell signals when
at the anchor or aground vessel.
To stop automatic sound, press “No Auto Sound” button.
“Gong”, “Tyfon”, “Bell” “R. Bell” (repeatable bell) buttons are used to give signals
manually, during exercise.
For some ship models (e.g. Life boat) it is possible to turn on the siren by pressing
one of four buttons “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”. To turn off the siren, press the “Off” button.

Release Lifebuoy
In the right bottom part of the panel, there are buttons for
dropping a lifebuoy with a signal light (“Release Lifebuoy”) from
the portside (“Port” button) and starboard (“Starboard” button).
International Signal Flag Control Panel

The main purpose of the International Code of Signals (ICS-69) is to provide
communication methods and facilities in situations related primarily to the safety
of navigation, especially when there are some language difficulties.
Exchange of signals between any ships in accordance with ICS-69 is performed
by using flags, light (with searchlight) and sound (with tyfon) signals in Morse code.
The panel of ICS-69 flags and pennants (“Flags”) is divided into three main parts.
The left-hand part of the panel contains flags and pennants as well as page switch
buttons:
• alphabet flags;
• numeric pennants;
• special flags and pennants;
• combination of flags and pennants set by the instructor.
Note: For some models of naval ships in the simulator it is possible to give NATO
signals in addition to the ICS signals; they can be hoisted on six halyards
(three on each side). To enable giving NATO signals, the “Flags” panel has
a “NATO Navy” button. A press on this button opens up a panel containing
pages with NATO flags. To switch back to the mode of giving ICS signals,
press the “International Code of Signals” button.

The central panel part contains seven “baskets” for the preparation of a signal
and two buttons:
• separating halyard;
• clear all “baskets”.
To place a flag or a separating halyard in the “basket”:

1. Position the cursor on the picture of the flag and press the left mouse button.
2. Position the cursor on the picture of the “basket” and press the left mouse button.
Note: To clear single basket, click the mouse on it. And all flags placed below
of this “basket”, will be automatically moved upwards.
If require to put a signal from “Codes” page to the central part of the panel, select
the required signal in the left-hand part and press “Set” button.
The right-hand part of the panels is intended for hoisting/lowering the flags
(“Halyard” page) and giving light and/or sound signals by using Morse code
(“Morse” page). There are two buttons in the bottom part:
• schematic picture of the ship hull with portside and starboard

halyards for hoist/lowering flags;
• schematic picture of the ship hull with controls for giving Morse
signals.
On “Halyard” page, under each halyard there are three buttons for hoisting
and lowering a signal, first formed in the central part а the panel:
• raise the signal to the top;
• raise the signal to the middle;
• lower the signal.
Note: It should be noted that not other signal can be raised on a halyard before
the already hoisted signal is lowered.
“Morse” page is intended for giving Morse code sound or light signals.

Navigational Aids Panel (Nav. Aids)
“Morse” page has an azimuth circle for setting the relative bearing and controls
for giving a signal, first formed in the central part of the panel:
• to give a sound signal;
• to give a flash signal in the pre-selected direction. To set a relative

bearing, click the mouse in the required point of the azimuth circle;
• to give a sound or light signal automatically;
• buttons are used for more accurate setting of a relative bearing

for giving a light signal.
To give a signal, perform the following procedure:
• form the required signal in the central part of the panel;
• to hoist a signal on the halyard, select “Halyard” panel in the right-hand part
and press an appropriate control by using control buttons under each halyard;
• to give a Morse code signal automatically, in the right-hand part, select “Morse”
panel, press “Auto” button, and press “Flash” and/or “Tyfon” button.
NAVIGATIONAL AIDS PANEL (NAV. AIDS)

The Navigational Aids Panel (“Nav. Aids”) contains the following lower level panels:
• the imitator of the FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-90 – “GPS”;
• the imitator of the UAIS McMurdo/Transas T102 VDU – “UAIS MKD”;
• the imitator of the LORAN-C receiver (the LC-90 MARK-II) – “Loran-C”;
• the imitator of the FURUNO FD-177 direction finder – “MF DF”.
Navigational Aids may be installed on a separate computer (Host).
Note: A detailed description of the radio navigational aids panel is provided below
in the Chapter 3 of this Manual.
ALARMS PANEL
The “Alarms” panel contains the following pages:
• “General Alarms” – general alarm signals;
• “Engine Alarms” – engine malfunction alarms;
• “Steering Alarms” – steering gear malfunction alarms.
• “Fire Alarms” – fire alarms.
On each page, there is an alarm signal control panel (“Panel Control”) which contains:
• “Alarm Ackn.” button for acknowledging an alarm;
• “Buzzer Off” button for silencing acoustic alarms;
• “Lamp Test” button for conducting the lamp test;
• “Reset” button for checking condition of all the systems.

Alarms Panel
General Alarms
The “General Alarms” page contains:
• Set of alarm indicators (alarm indicators are displayed on the screen, only
if have been set by the Instructor in the alarm.xml setup file, or by use
of “Procedural alarms” panel):
• Indicator buttons for activating alarm signals from the bridge:

– “General Alarm” – to turn on/off the general alarm;
– “Life Boat Alarm” – to turn on/off the life boat alarm;
– “Fire Alarm” – to turn on/off fire alarm;
– “MOB Alarm” – to turn on/off “Man Overboard” alarm.
Engine Malfunction Alarms

The abnormal engine operation means that some parameters are out of normal
range. This situation is indicated by means of alarm indicators. Each alarm indicator
has its own label with the name of parameter which is beyond range.
Each alarm indicator has three operation states:
• Not lighted – No Alarm status;

• Lighted – Acknowledged Alarm status;
• Blinking – Unacknowledged Alarm status.
The general order of faults input is as follows:
• The Instructor inputs a fault;

• The alarm is actuated;
• The model responds to the fault input – a change of status and behaviour.
There are three groups of alarm indicators on the “ERS” page:
• Slow Down.
• Shut Down.
• Start Fail.

Alarms Panel
Slow Down
The safety system makes the diesel load drop by reducing the pre-set rate of revolutions
in case of an FPP (fixed pitch propeller), and if it is a diesel with CPP (controllable pitch
propeller) – by reducing the propeller pitch (for four-cycle diesels) and by reducing the
propeller pitch and pre-set RPM (for two-cycle diesels). An alarm can be set off some
time (e.g. 30 seconds) before the safety system’s actuation. The safety system’s
operation is disabled by means of “Emergency Run” button.
The safety system automatically reduces the diesel load in the following situations:
“OverLoad” – the diesel overload. It reduces the propeller pitch (for CPP)
until the diesel power is lower than the limit power for the given RPM.
For FPP only an alarm is available. More than one hour operation with
100–110% diesel overload, or more than 110% overload may cause
the diesel breakage.
“Oil Mist” – oil mist in the crankcase. Drop of the diesel load. If the alarm
stops, the load can be increased. The continuing operation may cause
the diesel breakdown (explosion in the crankcase), especially without
load reduction with “Emergency Run” button pressed.
“Cool. T High” – high temperature of cooling water at the diesel outlet.

Drop of the diesel load. After a while (15 min) the alarm stops
on its own. If the alarm stops, the load can be gradually increased.
The prolonged continuing operation (15–30 minutes) may cause
the diesel breakdown (piston seizure and jam, connecting-rod break)
without load reduction with “Emergency Run” button pressed.
“Cool. P Low” – low pressure of cooling water at the diesel outlet. Drop of
the diesel load. Short-time (5–10 min) diesel operation is possible at a slow
speed. Then “Cool. T High” alarm goes off (see above). If both alarms
stop, the load can be gradually increased.
“Exhaust T High” – high temperature of the exhaust gas. Drop of

the diesel load. Diesel operation is possible at a slow- and half-speed.
As a rule, the alarm dies away. This is accompanied by the reduced
diesel efficiency.
“Scav. Fire” – fire in the scavenging spaces. Drop of the diesel load.
The continuing operation may cause the diesel breakdown (cracks
and cylinder liner breakage), especially without load reduction with
“Emergency Run” button pressed. It is wise to stop the diesel
to extinguish the fire.
Shut Down
The safety system shuts down the diesel by stopping the fuel supply. An alarm can
be set off some time (e.g. 10 sec) before the safety system’s actuation. The operation
of the safety system is disabled by means of “Emergency Run” button.
The safety system automatically shuts down the diesel in the following situations:
“OverSpeed” – the maximum RPM exceeded. Diesel stop. Continuing

operation with “Emergency Run” button pressed causes the diesel
breakdown in 10–15 sec.

Alarms Panel
“Lub. Oil P Low” – low pressure of the lubricating oil. Diesel stop.
If the alarm dies away (the fault is corrected), the diesel can be run.
Continuing operation with “Emergency Run” button pressed causes
the diesel breakage in 2–3 minutes.
“Engine Failure” – engine failure detected by trainee.
Start Fail
An alarm activates on the diesel’s start failure or locking. The alarm actuation occurs
simultaneously with the lock-system actuation, i.e. on an attempted start
in a prohibited situation.
The start is impossible; the alarm is actuated in the following cases.
“Turn Gear” – the turn gear is not disabled. The Model’s response
is that the start is impossible.
“Reverse Fail” – the diesel cannot be reversed, only one (current)

direction of revolutions is possible. The direction of diesel rotation
cannot be changed. The Model’s response is that the start in original
direction is possible.
“Too Long Start” – the start is protracted. When the start duration is
longer than the pre-set time (appr. 10 sec), the attempt is considered
to have failed. The system is switched to “STOP” position and the start
attempt is repeated. After three failed attempts, the system is locked.
In order to unlock the system, press “Reset” or set the throttle to “STOP”
position. The Model’s response is that the air consumption for the start
increases, the start air pressure drops faster.
“Start Air P Low” – the pressure of start air is low. In this case, three
more diesel starts are provided (for the reversible diesel). The Model’s
response is that the start air receivers are not replenished.
“System Error” – control system breakdown. Control from the local console
should be switched to the Model’s response. The diesel stops responding
to the diesel commands and continues the operation set before the control
system breakdown. To effect the diesel emergency stop, use “Emergency
Stop” button. After this the diesel can only be started from the local control
console, or after the fault has been eliminated.
Steering Gear Malfunction Alarms

Rudder Failures Set by the Instructor
• Power failures – failure of the electric hydraulic drive (e.g. power supply failure)
which causes erratic behaviour of the rudder blade, i.e. the blade’s position
is determined by the oncoming water flow;
• Control failure – failure in the control circuit of the rudder’s actuating mechanism.
The result is that the rudder position controller is not actuated (the rudder blade
is immobile);
• Speed over reduction – lower rudder-over speed (as a result of working fluid pressure
drop in the hydraulic drive), set in per sent (from 0 to 50 per cent). The result is that
the rudder-over speed is reduced by a corresponding number of per cent;

Alarms Panel
• Rudder jamming – mechanic rudder jamming. The result is that the rudder blade
becomes immobile;
• Pump failure – failure of one of the pumps (No 1, No 2 or reserve). The result
is a lower rudder-over speed (e.g. with the operation of two pumps – No 1 and
No 2, the rudder-over speed will drop to half its value if pump No 1 fails; if pump
No 2 also fails, there will be no rudder-over).
Steering Alarms
The “Steering Alarms” page contains alarm indicators of the steering gear faults:
• “Power Failure” indicates the failure in the power supply circuit;
• “Control Failure” indicates a break in the control circuit of the rudder’s

actuating mechanism;
• “Pressure Reduction” indicates the pressure drop of the working fluid;
• “Pump 1(2) Failure” indicates the failure of a pump (No 1, No 2

or reserve);
• “Pump1(2) Overload” indicates the overload of a pump (No 1, No 2
or reserve).
Fire Alarms
The “Fire Alarms” page contains the “Fire Alarms” and “Fire Control” groups.
The “Fire Alarms” group contains fire alarm indicators which are highlighted and
start blinking in case of fire detection in certain zones of a vessel. After the alarm
signal is acknowledged (by means of the “Alarm Ackn” button), the alarm indicators
stop blinking and get highlighted only.
The “Fire Control” group contains the buttons for controlling the fire system:
• “Fire pump” – start/stop of the emergency fire pump;

• “Fire doors” – closing/opening of fire doors;

Control Panel for Joint Operation with ERS Simulator (PP & SG)
• “Fire pump sea chest” – seawater intake through the sea chest for power supply
of the emergency fire pump;
• “Engine room vent” – switching on/off of engine room ventilation;
• “Fire pump deck valve” – control of the deck drain valve.
CONTROL PANEL FOR JOINT OPERATION

WITH ERS SIMULATOR (PP & SG)
If NTPro and ERS simulators operate jointly, “Alarms” page is replaced with
“PP & SG” page which has a following view in the case of operation with
a two-stroke engine model (FPP):
“ME Responsibility” group contains a switch for passing control from the Bridge
to the local ERS post (and back). Control is passed by the coordinated switching
to the appropriate position (“Bridge Control” or “ECR Control”). The indicator
of the corresponding post is flickering until switches on both posts are placed
in the same position.
“ME & Remote Control System” group contains indicators of the main engine faults
and the remote automatic control (RAC) system power indicator (Remote Control
indicator). Emergency indicators have the following meanings:
• “ME OverLoad” – to indicate the diesel overload;

• “Start Air P. Low” – to indicate low air pressure in the engine start system;
• “Control Air P. Low” – to indicate low air pressure in the automatic remote
control system;
• “Start Att. Failed 1” – to indicate the first diesel start failure;
• “Start Att. Failed 2” – to indicate the second diesel start failure;
• “Start Att. Failed 3” – to indicate the third diesel start failure;
• “Start Failed” – to indicate the diesel start failure (the indicator lights up after
three unsuccessful start attempts);
• “Reverse Failed” – to indicate diesel reversing failure;
• “Remote Control” – to indicate power ON in the automatic remote control system.

Control Panel for Joint Operation with ERS Simulator (PP & SG)
“ME Safety System” group contains emergency warning indicators of the engine
safety system. “Safety Reset” button in intended for resetting safety system alerts.
Power indicator points at power ON in the safety system. Emergency indicators
have the following meanings:
• “ME Overspeed” – warning about the maximum shaft RPM being exceeded;
• “ME Slow Down” – warning about the load being reduced by the safety system;
• “ME Shut Down” – warning about the diesel operation being stopped
by the safety system.
“Steering System” group contains emergency indicators of the steering system.
Emergency indicators have the following meanings:
• “Pump 1 OverLoad” – to indicate overload on steering gear pump 1;

• “Pump 2 OverLoad” – to indicate overload on steering gear pump 2;
• “Power Failure” – to indicate absence of power in the steering gear pumps;
• “Control Failure” – to indicate failure of the steering gear pump control system;
• “Low Pressure” – to indicate low pressure in the steering gear pumps.
“ME Emergency Control” group contains the engine safety system emergency
shutdown and safety system actuation indicators:
• “EMCY Run” – to turn off the engine automatic safety system overruling Slow
Down mode (reducing the engine load) when the engine operating parameters
exceed the permissible limits;
• “EMCY Stop” – to instantly stop the engine by cutting fuel supply to the cylinders;
• “ME Slow Down” – to indicate load being reduced by the safety system;
• “ME Shut Down” – to indicate the diesel operation being stopped by the safety
system.
“ME Control” group contains “Manoeuvring Program” button. When the manoeuvring
program is on, engine rpm changeover occurs according to an accelerated program.
“Steering Responsibility” group contains the following indicators:
• “Bridge Control” – control from the bridge;

• “Local Control” – control from the local steering station.
“Panel Control” group contains the following buttons and indicators:
• “Alarm Ackn.” button – to acknowledge the alarm;

• “Buzzer Off” button – to silence the acoustic alarm;
• “Lamp Test” button – lamp test;
• “Fire Alarm” indicator – fire alarm.
“Alarms” group contains the following button indicators:
• “General Alarm” – to turn on/off the general alarm;
• “Life Boat Alarm” – to turn on/off the life boat alarm.
In the case of operation with four-stroke engine (CPP), “PP & SG” page has
the following view and contains additional groups of indicators and buttons.

Mooring Operation Control Panel (Moor)
“Emergency Pitch Control” group contains buttons for the emergency control
of the propeller pitch from the bridge:
• “EMCY Ctrl On/Off” button is intended for turning on/off emergency control
of the propeller pitch from the bridge;
• “Ahead”, “Astern” buttons are intended for the control of the propeller pitch from
the bridge. The propeller pitch changes if an appropriate button is pressed and
held depressed;
• “ER Local Control” indicator indicates CPP control from the local ERS post.
“CPP” group contains the following indicators:
• “CPP Ctrl Fault” – CPP control system fault;

• “CPP Pwr Fault” – CPP control system power supply fault;
• “Clutch Engaged” – indicates that the clutch is engaged.
“ME Control” group contains the engine remote ON (“Start Engine”) and OFF
(“Stop Engine”) buttons.
MOORING OPERATION CONTROL PANEL (MOOR)

The Mooring Operation Control Panel (“Moor”) allows the trainee to control
of the anchors, tow/mooring lines, balloon fenders and tugs.
Note: If the simulator version you have selected does not include mooring
operations in a license, on the trainee bridge consoles there will be
no buttons for the control of mooring operations on “Moor” page
(only the anchor control buttons: “Anchors” will remain).
The right-hand part of the panel contains a chart which shows:
• moving own ship and the surrounding target ships;

• own ship track in the form of successive dots connected with a dashed line
(the dot is displayed for 5 min, the dot plotting interval is 15 sec);
• own ship absolute speed vector (the vector length is 1 min, the interval between
time marks on the speed vector is 30 sec).

The picture on the chart moves relative to the own ship silhouette.
At the left of a chart there are eight buttons for the chart adjustment
(from the top to the bottom):
• adjustment of the chart palette (4 modes);
• increasing of the chart scale (arrows from the centre);
• reduction of the chart scale (arrows to the centre);
• 4 buttons for moving the chart image (arrows: to the left, to the right, up, down);
• trend.
A press on “Trend” button turns on the mode of predicting the ship motion 6 minutes
ahead for the current control parameters. This mode software takes into account
the currently effective environmental ship drift factors. Calculation results are
updated every second, which allows the trainee to promptly correct his/her helm,
thruster, and engine telegraph orders when maneuvering in restricted conditions.

In the ship motion prediction mode, 13 own ship contours are drawn on
the electronic chart. The first of them (uncolored) shows the own ship’s current
position, the other 12 (filled with dark grey) show the ship’s future positions with
a 30 seconds step. As “Trend” button is disabled, these 12 colour filled contours
disappear from the chart.
The controls of the anchors, tow/mooring lines, balloon fenders or automatic tugs
are implemented from the left-hand part of the panel.
To switch between the anchors, lines, balloon fenders and target tugs control
panels, use “Bow/Stern Anchor”, “Lines”, “Fenders” and “Tugs” buttons respectively.
The button of the panels displayed on the screen is lighted.
Anchor Control Panel

To drop or weigh the anchor on the ship, on the “Moor” panel press the “Bow Anchor”
button (to control the bow anchors) and/or the “Stern Anchor” button (to control
the central stern anchor).
Note: The “Stern Anchor” button does not appear unless there is a model
of the ship fitted out with a stern anchor.
The anchor control panel contains:
• “Set length” – a list box for setting the anchor chain length in shackles
(each shackles is 27.43 m);
• Digital indicators of anchor parameters:
– “Chain length” – the length of the anchor chain, in shackles;
– “Strain” – chain tension, in tons;
– “Angle” – direction of chain relative to the bow, in deg;
– “Speed” – chain speed, in m/s.
• The buttons for anchor winches control.

Dropping the Anchor

Before dropping the anchor, it is first necessary to determine which anchor is going
to be: a bow port/starboard anchor or a stern anchor.
Set the required length of the anchor chain in compliance with good seamanship
requirements. To do this, use arrow buttons and watch the “Set length” scale.
To drop the anchor, use the following buttons:
• “Drop” – the anchor chain will be dropped by the anchor weight;

• “Pay Out” – to pay out the anchor chain at a rate equal to 50% of the anchor
“Drop” speed;
• “Walk Out” – to walk out the chain at a winch speed set by the Instructor.
The chart will display a sign with a picture of an anchor (if the length of the anchor
chain is smaller than the depth of the bottom, the sign will not appear):
After the anchor lies on the ground, the chain continues to be paid out at a slower
rate due to friction.
A mark (touch point) will appear on the picture of the anchor line, indicating that
the anchor chain has reached the ground. The line from the anchor to the touch
point shows the part of the anchor chain lying on the ground; from the touch point
to the ship – the sagging part of the anchor chain:
The chain will continue to be paid out until its length reaches the set value, whereupon
the automatic anchor chain stop is actuated, and the “Hold” indicator button lights up.
Anchorage
When anchorage, the anchor chain with a considerable slackening up has a damping
effect on the dynamic load on the anchor, as the momentum of the vessel’s bow
is used up for lifting the centre of the chain’s mass when it is tightened up.
With the choppy wind changing its direction and irregular sea, the vessel starts
complex undamped oscillations accompanied by jerks.
You can reduce the force of these jerks by paying out the anchor cable with “Drop”,
“Pay Out”, “Walk Out” buttons.
In case of dangerous increase of the vessel’s turning diameter at the anchor,
you can use “Up” button to heave short.

Weighing the Anchor

To heave the anchor chain, press the “Up” button. At the moment when the anchor
breaks away from the ground, the anchor mark will disappear from the chart.
The anchor chain will be heaved until its length becomes equal to 0 (the anchor
is in the hawse).
Stopping Anchor Winch

You can stop the motion of the anchor chain at any time. To do this, press
the “Hold” button.
To stop the motion of the anchor cable when the anchor reaches the water surface,
press the “Water Edge” button. As the anchor reaches the water surface, the anchor
winch will stop and the “Hold” button will light up on the panel. To continue
the anchor cable motion, press the “Up” button to heave the chain or one
of the following buttons to render: “Drop”, “Pay Out”, “Walk Out”.
Tow/Mooring Line Control Panel

To operate the tow/mooring lines, press “Lines” button on “Moor” page.
The panel contains:
• the towing chart displaying the own ship and surrounding objects contour,
and buttons for the chart adjustment;
• the table which displays the following information:
– “Point” – number of the point on the own ship where the line is sent from;
– “Object” – name of the object where the line is sent to or from;
– “State” – current status of the line;
– “Length” – length of the sent line (in units designated by the Instructor);
– “Force” – line pull force.
• the buttons for tow/mooring winch control;
• the drop-down list for line material selection.

Selection of Line Material

For each line fastening point, you can select one of the six types of line material:
• Steel;
• Aramid;
• Dyneema;
• Nylon;
• Polyester;
• Polypropylene.
Note: The line material can be selected only if the line is not send.
Operation Result
Position the cursor in the line fastening
point on the own ship or target ship
contour
Press the left mouse button The line fastening point will be marked as “FIRST”
In the drop-down list, left-click to select
the cable material
Repeat previous steps to set the line

material for other fastening points
Sending and Fastening Lines

Operation Result
point on the own ship or target ship
contour
Press the left mouse button The line fastening point will be marked as “FIRST”

Operation Result
point on another ship’s contour
Press the left mouse button This line fastening point will be marked as “SECOND”
Press the “Runout” button The line will be sent from the “FIRST” point to the “SECOND”
point:
The table will display a row containing information on this line
If no line fastening point was selected on another ship before the “Runout” button
is pressed, the line will be hanging down (not accepted) waiting for the fastening
command. To accept the line, use the following procedure:
Operation Result
Position the cursor on the unfastened
line
Press the left mouse button The line will be highlighted in orange

Operation Result
Position the cursor in the line fastening The line fastening point will be marked as “SECOND”:
point on another ship and press the left
mouse button
The “Accept” button will be enabled on the panel

Press the “Accept” button The line will be fastened:
Letting Go the Line

To let go the line, first select it on the chart or choose the appropriate
row in the table, then press the “Let go” button. The picture of the line will
disappear from the chart.
Operating the Tow/Mooring Winches

To control the towing or mooring winches, it is first necessary to select the line
on the chart or choose the appropriate row in the table, and then press the relevant
button in the left-hand part of the panel:
• To veer the line (without using the winch), press the “Veer” button;
• To pay out the line, press the “Pay Out” button;
• To heave the line, press the “Winch” button;
• To stop the winch, press the “Stop” button. As this is done,

the line length will stop to change.
To switch the winch speeds, use “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” buttons. Speed values are set by
the Instructor.

Balloon Fender Control Panel

To work with balloon fenders, press the “Fenders” button on “Moor” page.
The top left part of the control panel contains the following information in the tabular form:
• “Point” – number of the point where the fender is sent from;
• “Object” – name and number of the balloon fender;
• “State” – fender’s current state (Onboard, Outboard).
Fenders can be controlled on the portside and on the starboard. To do this, press
the “Port” or “Starboard” button respectively. As this is done, the table will display
information on all the mooring points on the ship’s portside or starboard.
To drop a fender overboard you should first select it in the table, or on the chart
select the necessary mooring point on the ship contour (except for stern and bow
mooring points).
Then press the “Outboard” button. On the mooring chart, the fender
was dropped from, will be encircled:
To heave the fender on board, first select it from the table

or on the chart and then press the “Onboard” button.
To drop all the fenders on the portside or starboard, press
the “Outboard all” button.
To heave all the fenders on the portside or starboard, press
the “Onboard all” button.

Tugs Control Panel

Any object of “Tug target” type can be switched over the automatic mode to work
with own ship. In automatic mode, the tugboat is controlled by the “virtual pilot”,
who executes commands, given either by the trainee from Conning Display or by
the instructor from ASD.
To operate the target tugs, press “Tugs” button on “Moor” page.
The “Tugs” panel is divided into two parts; the left-hand part displays a table with list
of target tugboats assigned in the exercise and tugboat control buttons, whilst
the right-hand part shows the exercise chart itself, with objects plotted on it.
The table specifies the following data for each available tugboat:
• “Name” – name of the tugboat in the exercise;

• “Type” – tugboat type;
• “State” – current tugboat operation mode;
• “Angle” – thrust direction angle relative to the ship’s lateral plane;
• “Power” – thrust force value.
Commands to tugboat can be selected by buttons, whereas the command
parameters are set by the graphic cursor.
In the automatic mode, the tugboat can perform several typical maneuvers without
manual handling of its controls:
• Follow;
• Escort;
• Attach;
• Push;
• Pull.

Depending on performed operation, the tug contour on the chart changes its color
according to the following table.
Status/Operation Color
Going to carry out operation Green
Carrying out an operation Violet
Free Black
Selected as an object Orange
Tug Reservation
The tugboat can be switched over the automatic mode by “Request” command.
The following procedure must be used to switch a tug target to automatic mode
and to reserve it for operation with own ship:
Operation Result
Select the required free tug in tugboat list The button “Request” became active
Press “Request” button The tug will be reserved for work with own ship.
The selected tug is marked by “SELECT” label on the
chart.
The engaged tugs are marked by “auto” label on the
chart:
The tugboats engaged by one ship cannot be reserved by another ship unless
it is released by “Letgo” command.
Follow to Point
In this mode, the tug follows to absolute geographic point specified by the Trainee,
avoiding mobile and static obstacles at maximum available speed (12.5 knots),
and lies in the drift at point of destination.
The following procedure must be used to initiate the “follow to point” mode:
Operation Result
Select the reserved tug in tugboat list
Position the cursor on destination point The destination point will be marked on chart by label
on the chart outside the ship contour “POSITION”, the button “Follow” became active:
and click the left mouse button
Press “Follow” button Having received the command, the tugboat will start
proceeding to the set point at the maximum speed
Note: The tugboat will be not able to get to the work point unless the ship
is proceeding at a speed greater than the tugboat’s maximum speed.

Escort
In this mode, the tugboat follows the ship at some escort position specified by Trainee.
Tug moves to escort position avoiding mobile and static obstacles at maximum available
speed. At destination point, the tug will have the same speed and the same heading as
escorted vessel.
The following procedure must be used to initiate the Escort mode:
Operation Result
Position the cursor on destination point on The destination point will be marked on chart by label
the chart outside the ship contour and click “POSITION”, the button “Escort” became active
the left mouse button
Press “Escort” button Having received the command, the tugboat will start
proceeding to the set point at the maximum speed
Note: The tugboat will be not able to get to the work point unless the ship
is proceeding at a speed greater than the tugboat’s maximum speed.
Line Fastening
The line can be fastened by two alternative ways: by giving “Attach” command
or by setting line manually (on the “Lines” panel).
To fasten line by giving “Attach” command, use the following procedure:
Operation Result
Position the cursor on the ship contour The mouse cursor will assume the shape of “round square”:
on one of the fastening points
Click the left mouse button The fastening point will be marked by label “ATTACH”:
The button “Attach” became active

Press “Attach” button Having received the command, the tugboat will start
proceeding to the fastening point at the maximum speed

Note: At the “Attach” command, the tug moves close to fastening point and
sets the short line either from bow (reverse tractor and conventional tugs) or
stern winch (tractor tug).
While the tug is fastened on short line (by sending “Attach” command), the direction
and level of thrust can be altered by “Thrust” lever. The “Push” and “Pull” commands
can be applied to fastened tug to initiate “pushing” or “pulling” operation.
Note: The line is released automatically if the push or pull tug position is given
on the ship’s hull side, opposite to fastening point.
To unfasten the tug, either any different command must be given, or the line
released by drag-and-drop procedure.
The second alternative is to set the line manually (from one point to another by
common drag-and-drop procedure). In this case, the tug may be anyhow far from
fastening point. To set line manually, use the following procedure:
Operation Result
Switch the tugboat into the escort mode The tug will go to the operation point
(“Escort” command) and select the
escorting position close to fastening point
Press “Lines” button on the “Moor” page The “Lines” panel will appear on the screen
Position the cursor on the tugboat towing The mouse cursor will assume the shape of “round square”
point (bow or stern)
Click the left mouse button The fastening point will be marked by label “FIRST”
Position the cursor on the fastening point The mouse cursor will assume the shape of “round square”
on ship contour
Click the left mouse button The fastening point will be marked by label “SECOND”:
Press “Runout” button The line will be fixed:
Note: After the tugboat made fast, the commands “Push” or “Pull” (on the “Tugs”
panel) can be used to initiate pushing or pulling operations.

Push
In this mode, the tugboat pushes the ship to given point with given thrust.
The force direction is limited by the tugboat’s position relative to the pushed ship hull
and can’t exceed ±85 degrees from the perpendicular to the ship hull in pushing.
When “Push” command is given, the following parameters are set: push position, thrust
level, and direction. Thrust level is specified in percents to maximum bollard pull.
The tug proceeds to position at maximum speed avoiding mobile and static obstacles.
At destination point, the tug lies on specified thrust heading and begin pushing.
Note: All tractor tugs (Voith Schneider type) has pushing point at the stern. All reverse
tractor tugs (Z-drive tug) and conventional tugs have pushing point at bow.
The following procedure must be used to initiate the Push mode:
Operation Result
Position the cursor on pushing point The mouse cursor will assume the shape of “square”:
on the ship contour
Click the left mouse button The pushing position will be marked by label “PUSH”:
The button “Push” became active

Press “Push” button Having received the command, the tugboat will start
proceeding to the set point at the maximum speed.
Tug’s status becomes “Going to Push”.
At the pushing point, tug’s status becomes “Push”
Set thrust level and direction by
“Thrust” lever

Pull
In this mode, the tugboat made fast by tug’s stern towline at one of ship fastening point.
The tug can pull vessel on a towline of given length at any direction within +/-85 degrees
from the perpendicular to the ship hull in fastening point. The towing mode is initialized
by “Pull” command whereby the following parameters are set: fastening point to the ship,
towing position, thrust level and direction.
The following procedure must be used to switch the tugboat to the Pull mode:
Operation Result
Position the cursor on the ship contour The mouse cursor will assume the shape of “round square”:
on one of the fastening points
Click the left mouse button The fastening point will be marked by label “ATTACH”
Position the cursor on pulling point The pulling position will be marked by label “POSITION”
on the chart outside the ship contour the button “Pull” became active
and click the left mouse button
Press “Pull” button Having received the command, the tugboat will start
proceeding to the pulling point at the maximum speed
Set thrust level and direction by “Thrust”
lever
Releasing the Tug

To revert the target tug to normal (non automatic) mode, use the following procedure.
Operation Result
On the “Tugs” panel, select the The button “Letgo” became active
required tug in tugboat list
Press “Letgo” button The tugboat will revert to the normal mode

Panel for Control of Distress Signals in SAR Operations (SAR)
PANEL FOR CONTROL OF DISTRESS SIGNALS

IN SAR OPERATIONS (SAR)
The panel for control of distress signals in the search and rescue operations
(“SAR” button) includes the Distress Signals panel (“Distress Signals” button)
and the Direction Finder control panel (“SAR DF”).
Distress Signals Panel
The “Distress Signals” panel allows the trainee to choose and give the required
signal in the per direction and with a certain frequency.
The left-hand part of the panel contains signal type selection buttons:
• Signal flares. If a flare is selected, it is necessary to choose the colour

(red, green or white) and number of flares to be shot up simultaneously:
from 1 to 3;
• Parachute red/white flares;
• Buoyant smoke.
In the right-hand part there is a compass card for setting the shoot-up direction,
with a schematic picture of the ship hull in the centre. To choose a shoot angle,
click the mouse in the required point on the azimuth circle.
For more accurate setting of the relative bearing, use “3”, “4” arrow indicators
and a digital indicator under the compass card.

You can use the controllers with arrow buttons below the compass card,
to set the following signal parameters:
• distance at which the signal is given (“DISTANCE”);

• flare flight height (“HEIGHT”);
• time of repeating the signal (“INTERVAL”). If the signal repeat interval is set at 0,
the signal is given only once.
The distress signal is given by pressing “Launch” button (in the right bottom corner
of the panel). When pressed, the button is highlighted.
To stop a series of distress signals, the trainee has to release button

“Launch” as duration of this series is not limited in any other way.
When a single distress signal is given, “Launch” button is released automatically.
SAR Direction Finder Control Panel

The SAR Direction Finder control panel (“SAR DF”) presents an image of an actual
Direction Finder RT-500-M panel. Its control is, therefore, similar to that of an actual
device.
Use and Characteristics

The bearing system RT-500-M combines a communication direction finder and
a SAR (Search and Rescue) direction finder, thus allowing to bear all coastal and
maritime radio stations. If equipped with an EPIRB (Emergency Position Indicating
Radio Beacon), with it’s help persons or vessels may be found quickly and safely.
The bearing system RT-500-M allows the bearing of radio signals on 4 different
frequency bands as well as their traditional emergency frequencies in the VHF
and UHF range, the common calling up channel 16 in the maritime radio band
and the widely used Cospas/Sarsat emergency signal:
Frequency Range Emergency frequency

VHF-Airband 118.000 MHz 121.500 MHz 123.975 MHz
VHF-Sea Band 156.000 MHz 156.800 MHz 162.025 MHz
Channel 00 Ship Channel 16 Channel 88 Coast
UHF-Airband 240.000 MHz 243.000 MHz 245.975 MHz
Cospas-Sarsat 400.000 MHz 406.025 MHz 409.975 MHz
Full automatic bearing of emergency signals in the monitoring and standby mode
guarantees additionally a permanent MOB (Man Over Board) surveillance and
the auto alert function.

Front View
1 – Switching on/off the system.

2 – [Dimming] – opens dialogue window for adjustment of brightness
of the TFT-display, of the LED’s and illumination of keys.
3 – [Volume] – opens dialogue window for adjustment of external speaker

and mute-function.
4 – [Squelch] – opens dialogue window for adjustment of the squelch level.
5 – [Memory/Band] – opens dialogue window for recalling and storing of own
frequencies and channels.
6 – [Channel/Freq.] – opens dialogue window for setting main bearing

frequency/channel.
7 – TFT-Display – shows present bearing values while bearing, data content
of Cospas/Sarsat or corresponding dialogues of setting.
8 – [F1... F5] – software controlled function keys.
9 – [Esc] – leaving dialogue or adjusting field without storing changed parameters.
10 – Arrow keys enable selection of selection fields; increasing or decreasing
of a value for one step.
11 – [Ok] – confirms and stores input or selection; closes dialogue window.
12 – [Help] – not available.
13 – [Menu] – opens dialogue window for setup.
14 – Numeric keys for direct numeric input of frequency, channels.
15 – Sensor of brightness – measures environmental brightness for best automatic

adjustment of brightness of the TFT-display and key illumination.
16, 17 – [ID-only (Filter)], [Monitor/Stdby] – activates dialogue for adjustment of
monitoring/scanning-mode with selective filtering of emergency transmitters
and standby operation.
18 – [External Heading Ok] – indicates input of external compass data, if activated
in setup menu.

Bearing Display
Pos. Designation Meaning

1 Frequency or channel display Display of present main bearing frequency or display of present
main bearing channel
2 Display of frequency band Display of frequency band related to present main bearing
frequency/channel
3 Monitoring/scanning field Display of selected frequencies/channels in monitoring/scanning
operation
4 Instruction fields (Flags) Display, additional to present adjustments (PTT, mute, alarm
display), warnings and error messages
5 Clr (Clear) Clearing of bearing value store
6 Cp/Ssat Calling up of Cospas/Sarsat emergency frequency
resp (406.025 MHz) or, if already activated, display of Cospas/Sarsat
Decode data content (decoded)
7 CH 16 Call up of common maritme emergency channel
8 Rep (Repeat) Calling up last bearing value
9 Esc Monitoring/scanning operation will be continued on next
frequency/channel, if momentarily no data are received
on present frequency
10 Ok Taking over active scanning frequency as main bearing
frequency (at signal reception only)
11 Up and Down keys The squelch level of the main bearing frequency/channel may
be adjusted directly by Up/Down keys (only possible if main
frequency active)
12 Squelch level of present • No signal received (squelch level > signal level):
frequency/channel
• Signal is received and beared (squelch level < signal level):
13 Display of signal level Display of signal level of present frequency/channel:

• color: cyan – no reception;
• color: red – signal reception
14 Digital level display Digital indication of signal level of active bearing
frequency/channel
15 Relative bearing display Graphic display of relative bearing value relative to longitudinal
axis of antenna

Pos. Designation Meaning

16 Spread of bearing Maximum deviation of unaveraged single bearing values
17 Compass card If compass information available: graphic display of relative
or 360°-display bearing value within compass card with display of the four
cardinal points.
Without compass data: display of relative bearing value
in 360°-display. (If antenna mounted correctly, the 0°-value
corresponds to moving direction/ longitudinal axis of vessel)
18 Heading Pointer Direction indicator is always in 12 o’clock position and
displays present course if compass information available
19 Digital bearing display Display of bearing value as a three-digit number
20 Direction of reference Indication of selected reference direction:
Relative Brg → bearing relative to longitudinal axis of antenna.
Magnetic Brg → Magnetic North (bearing relative to magnetic
North).
True Bearing → Geographic North (bearing relative
to geographic North)
Bearing Operation
The display unit of the bearing system RT-500-M during the bearing operation
is the concentrically arranged TFT-display. All present bearing data, settings,
and status reports are displayed here.
Top left in the display the present main bearing frequency or, if operating in
the sea band, the present main bearing channel will be displayed. If a duplex
channel is selected, the reference position “Ship” for a maritime radio station
is indicated additionally, or “Coast” for a coastal radio station. The frequency band
related to the present main bearing frequency/channel is indicated too.
A signal, received on the selected operating frequency/channel, and its level
is indicated digitally in the range of 0…99% in the bearing display and as a bar graph.
The display is not calibrated and serves as a measure of signal strength in quality.
The bearing electronics will process data only, if their signal level is above the selected
squelch level (= noise suppression). Even without a received signal the bearing
system may display a certain signal level (= noise). In order not to bear these
environmental noise signals, the squelch level is to be set above the noise level.
The bearing system is determining about 280 bearing values per second. These bearing
values may vary significantly, depending on signal quality (that is it’s signal strength
and modulation). This range of spread is the narrower, the better the signal’s quality,
respectively wider if the signal’s quality is decreasing.
The processing electronics will average the bearing values over a certain time,
thus achieving a rather soothed display of the bearing value, additionally,
this averaging procedure still produces good bearing results if there’s a wide spread
of, e.g. ±45%. The relative as well as the digital bearing values will be put out by
the bearing system as averaged values.

The relative bearing value is depicted as an arrow and refers to the longitudinal axis
of the antenna. This corresponds, if mounted correctly, to the vessels longitudinal
axis respectively to the present heading. If compass information via NMEA interface
is available, the display will show the relative bearing value within a compass card
indicating the cardinal points. If no compass data are available, the relative bearing
value is shown in a 360°-display:
• Digital display of bearing value: 149°;

• Direction of reference: relative.
The digital bearing display is a three-digit number, it’s resolution is 1 degree. Depending
on compass data, the bearing data may be put out digitally with following directions
of reference:
Display Direction of reference Meaning

Relative Brg. Relative Bearing relative to longitudinal axis of antenna
Magnetic Brg. Magnetic North Bearing relative to magnetic North
True Bearing True North Bearing relative to geographic North
After end of reception, the last bearing value will be displayed

flashing for ca. 5 sec. Then the bearing display will vanish, and the
field of the digital bearing display will show the passed time
and the frequency of the last received bearing signal “last bearing”.
When pressing key “Repeat”, the last bearing value will be displayed once again.
Instruction Fields (Flags, Errors and Warnings)

When bearing an emergency signal and additional functions are activated or
operating parameters are out of their specified limits, the system will inform
you by the means of instruction fields (flags):
Meaning Display
All audio exits are switched mute
Self bearing suppression (SBS) active
An emergency signal has been detected. Source, signal frequency and time
since detection will be displayed.
The key “Clr” will deactivate the warning signal and the alarm relay exit.
After that, if receiving no more emergency signal for more than a minute,
the alarm flag will be cancelled automatically
The system will indicate a warning, if the operating parameters are close to the
tolerable limits, or if external signals are not available anymore. The system’s
basic functions are not affected yet, but preventive measures are recommended

Meaning Display
An error message will be displayed, if one or more operating parameters
are out of admitted limits, or if the electronics have recognized a malfunction.
In this case, the system is not working.
Key “Clr” deactivates the acoustic warning signal
Alarm Function
When receiving a signal (signal level above squelch level), it will be examined in
the background if it’s a modulated emergency signal. These emergency signals
(ELT = Emergency Locator Transmitter, PLB, MOB) are modulated with a typical,
repeating and distinct sweeping tone.
Once recognized as an emergency signal, alert will be released. A flashing alarm
flag indicates the signal’s frequency, its type and duration since first reception.
At the same time, a special internal warning tone informs you about the reception
of the emergency signal. The alert will last (even after end of signal) until
confirmation/deactivation by the flashing function key “Clr” (warning signal mute).
After that, if no emergency signal is beared for more than a minute on the
recognized scanning frequency, the alarm flag will be cancelled automatically.
Note: The alarm relay exit will be activated equally when recognizing
an emergency signal. Like the internal warning tone, the relay exit
can be deactivated by pressing key “Clr”. The alarm relay exit may be
used for an external siren, a MOB GPS function or similar.
Function “Repeat”
The function “Repeat” will show once again the last valid bearing value. Pressing
the function key “F5” (“Rep”) will show, flashing for 5 seconds, the last bearing value
with its corresponding digital signal level.
With an external compass activated (true/magnetic bearing), a vessel’s change
of heading will be considered automatically for the relative bearing.
CAUTION!
If no external compass activated (relative bearing), the indicated bearing value
corresponds to the vessel’s heading at the time of the bearing. A change of heading
in the meantime has to be considered.

Function “Clear”
The function “Clr” cancels the internal bearing value averaging store. The averaging
store enhances bearing accuracy and delivers a useful bearing display even with
bad received signals (e.g. distant transmitter, receiving gaps). The averaging
procedure causes a drag error, which might influence the bearing value, if changing
heading too quickly. In this case, the indicated bearing value will be lagging
a bit to the actual bearing value.
Pressing function key “F1” (“Clr”) after a distinct change of heading, the corrected
bearing value will be displayed immediately.
In connection with an alarm flag or an error message, the key “Clr” deactivates
the acoustic warning signal.
Function “Channel 16”

Pressing function key “F4” (“Ch 16”) enables direct switching to maritime emergency
channel 16.
Note: Please, verify correct squelch adjustment of channel 16.
Pressing key “F4” (“Back”) will call up the previous bearing frequency.
Function “Cospas/Sarsat”
Pressing function key “F2” (“Cp/Ssat”) will switch directly to Cospas/Sarsat
emergency frequency 406.025 MHz (= 406.028 MHz).
The Cospas/Sarsat signal will be broadcasted by the transmitter only every
50 sec, and has a very short pulse duration of ca. 400 msec. Bearing of this pulse
is achieved by an extended waiting period on the main frequency (during
monitoring/scanning operation).
Note: Please, verify correct adjustment of Cospas/Sarsat signal squelch level.
Monitoring/Scanning Operation
The bearing system RT-500-M is equipped with only one receiver, that means,
only one frequency can be received at a time. Signals on other specified
frequencies/channels cannot be beared at the same time. For simultaneous
surveillance of the traditional emergency frequencies (especially MOB = man over
board alert) and any other frequencies/channels there is the function monitoring
(scanning). Thus, the surveillance of up to four different frequencies (scanning
frequencies) within the specified frequency bands is possible.
The monitoring/scanning function activated, the bearing system switches alternating
from the main bearing frequency to the selected surveilling scanning frequencies.
The just active frequency is displayed enhanced in white color.
If a signal is received during scanning, the reading of the corresponding frequency
is red color and the bearing value is indicated. Even after the end of the signal,
this frequency/channel will be held for 10 sec (Hold-Time).
In order to interrupt the just active reception, press key “Esc” (the system is continuing
with next scanning frequency).
Active reception will be interrupted for a short moment after 30 seconds in order
to examine the other scanning frequencies (safety function). If this feature is not
desired, pressing key “Ok”, the active signal receiving frequency can be overtook
as the main frequency. Thus, interruptions are shortened considerably, for the main
frequency is scanned now with highest priority.

Timing of Normal Monitoring Operation

The main frequency (here channel 16) is scanned with highest priority. The duration
of the scanning cycles may be extended, if receiving signals on the scanning
frequencies (also by misadjustment of the squelch level).
Timing Monitoring with Selected Cospas/Sarsat Main Frequency

The main frequency adjusted to 406.025 MHz (Cospas/Sarsat), the timing cycle
will be changed automatically in order to catch the short pulse (duration of pulse
ca. 400 msec, every 50 sec).
Monitoring/Scanning Operation with Filtering of Emergency Transmitters:

ID-Only
Signals transmitted by emergency transmitters (PLB/ELT/MOB) are modulated with
a typical sweeping tone. When surveilling, in order to exclude false alarms caused
by disturbing signals or by nonauthorized radio communication, the function
“emergency transmitter filtering ID-Only” may be called up. Once activated, all radio
signals without the prescribed sweeping tone for emergency transmitters will be
suppressed. Alert will be triggered, if a modulated emergency signal is recognized.
CAUTION!
For very weak signals, recognition of modulation may take a certain time. Releasing
an alarm can be delayed in this case.
Standby Operation
During standby operation, the bearing system is surveilling the traditional emergency
frequencies 121.5 MHz, 243 MHz and 406.025 MHz, and the display is dimmed.
These frequencies are preset in the system.
Cospas/Sarsat Decoding Data Content

In order to receive a Cospas/Sarsat data pulse and to decode its content,
the main frequency 406.025 MHz (= 406.028 MHz) has to be adjusted first.
This can be achieved manually or, faster, by pressing function key “F2” (“Cp/Ssat”).
Pressing once again function key “F2” (“Decode”) decoding of the Cospas/Sarsat
signal will be started.
In this mode, the bearing operation and also the monitoring function will be
interrupted. In order not to suppress other emergency signals (MOB), the selected
decoding mode is limited to 75 sec (visible on progress bar). After that, the system
is returning to the previous operating mode.

A Cospas/Sarsat pulse will be broadcasted every 50 sec (±5 sec). While the waiting
period a pulse will be received if the transmitter is not out of range.
Once received a valid pulse, the function key “F1” (“Confirm”) starts flashing and
an acoustic warning tone is put out. By pressing key “F1” this message will be accepted.
The last received pulse can be displayed once again by pressing function key <F4>
(“Recall”).
The data content of a received pulse can be stored with the function key “Save”,
and displayed again with function key “Restore”.
Using keys the squelch level can be adapted and readjusted to the signal
level at any time.
Example: Cospas/Sarsat data:
Data content:
1. Frame:
– Sync. Ok (normal Cospas/Sarsat signal);
– SelfTest (Cospas/Sarsat signal in self test mode).
The 24 synchronizing bits have been received correctly.
2. Protocol:
– User (Test);
– Standard (Test);
– National (Test).
3. Complete Hex Message – complete data signal, coded in hexadecimal notation
(Bit 25...112) and, if available (Bit 113...144).
4. Country – country identification (numeric code).
5. Beacon Identification 15 Hex – Transmitter identification of a registered
transmitter (Fifteen Hexadecimal Character Beacon Identification).
6. GPS Position – GPS-position (latitude and longitude) if is contained in data
signal of transmitter.
Operating and Adjusting

Common operating functions of the RT-500-M are done with help of the keys placed
around the display.
In normal bearing mode, the functions will be called up directly by the keys, opening
the corresponding dialogue window.

Rarely used adjustments or adjustments which are only done once during
installation, will be done in the menu-setup.
Parameter setting is done generally by using the arrow keys, the number keys
or the software controlled function keys “F1” to “F5”.
New, changed parameters will be accepted with key “Ok” and be stored permanently
in the system for further operation (even after switching off and on of the device).
Key “Esc” will close the dialogue window without storing the changed parameters.
If no adjustments are made in an opened dialogue window for more than 10 minutes,
the system will close the window automatically and return into the bearing display mode.
While adjusting the bearing operation is still running in the background. If receiving
an alarm signal, a warning tone will sound and the last bearing value can be called
up with function “Repeat”.
Switching On/Off
Press key in order to switch on the device.
After a period of 10 seconds, the bearing display will appear. The system is working
with the previously selected adjustments.
Press key to switch off the system. All elements of the system and the green
operating light become extinct. The system is storing the last settings.
Setting Main Bearing Frequency/Channel
Selection of the main bearing frequency in the VHF and UHF airband and
the Cospas/Sarsat band is usually done by direct input of the desired frequency.
In the maritime radio band, the input of the channel number (with related frequency)
is usual. Both types of input are to your disposal. The system will accept only inputs
within the permitted frequency ranges.
Adjusting Main Bearing Frequency
Frequency can be put in with a step width of 25 kHz. The last two digits will be
rounded off by the system:
• Open dialogue window, using key “Channel/Freq”;
• Select with “F1” or “F2” (“Frequency”).
The frequency input field is activated. Additionally the display shows
a list of the permissible frequency ranges.

• Put in desired frequency by the means of the keyboard or directly using

the arrow keys:
– increases frequency by 25 kHz;
– decreases frequency by 25 kHz;
– moves cursor to the left for one digit in order to overwrite

previous input.
• Store adjustment using key “Ok”.

Device returns into bearing mode, working with adjusted frequency.
Setting a Main Operating Channel
56 channels are available in the VHF-Sea band (channel 0…28 and channel 60…88):
• Open dialogue window using key “Channel/Freq”;

• Select with “F3” or “F4” (“Channel”).
The channel input field is activated. Additionally the display shows a list of all
permissible channels.
• Put in desired channel directly by the means of the keyboard or by using

the arrow keys:
– increases channel for one step;
– decreases channel for one step;
– moves cursor to the left for one digit in order to overwrite previous input.
• If a duplex channel is to be adjusted, the point of reference “Ship” for the

maritime radio station (lower band) or “Coast” for the coastal radio station
(upper band) can be selected by pressing key “F5”;
• Store the input using key “Ok”.
The device returns into bearing mode and is operating on the selected channel.

Adjusting the Squelch

Our surrounding atmosphere contains always certain electric field strength,
designated as “noise”. The received noise voltage is varying with frequency and
location of the receiver. Signals can only be interpreted reasonably, if their level
is above the surrounding noise level.
The squelch electronics make it possible to adjust a threshold, below which
incoming signals will not be processed. The bearing system will work only, if there
is an incoming signal with a level above the squelch level. If the signal level is below
the squelch level, reception will be switched off.
Hints for Squelch Level Adjustment
• The squelch level of the corresponding frequency/channel is to be adjusted only

when receiving no bearing signal;
• The squelch level is to be adjusted as close as possible above the noise level.
If the squelch level is adjusted too low, it is within the noise level and the bearing
system is affected in it’s whole performance. If the squelch level is adjusted too
high, very weak bearing signals will be suppressed by the squelch function:
• Industrial areas (e.g. near harbours) may be featuring higher noise levels
than offshore areas. Therefore it is important, to verify regularly the adjustment
of the squelch level of all active frequencies (main frequency, emergency
frequencies and monitoring frequencies) and, if necessary, to readjust in order
to achieve full sensitivity of the bearing system;
• When bearing emergency transmitters with very weak signals, it may be useful
to deactivate the squelch function on the corresponding frequency (see “Off”)
in order to take full advantage of the bearing system’s sensitivity. In this case check
permanently if bearing the transmitter and not bearing disturbing signals.
When verifying, a change of heading should cause a change of the bearing value.

Manual Adjusting of Squelch Levels

The squelch levels of the adjusted surveilling frequencies (main frequency,
emergency frequencies, monitoring frequencies) are to be adjusted individually.
The system is scanning the displayed frequencies in the background and is showing on
the display their noise levels as well as their squelch levels. Scanning and displaying of
the corresponding frequencies takes a certain time. As soon as signal level and frequency
are appearing on the screen, the squelch level for this frequency can be adjusted.
• Open dialogue window using key “Squelch”.
When opening the dialogue window, the system is scanning the signal levels
of the surveilling frequencies/channels and is showing the presently received signal
levels and the previously selected squelch levels on the screen of the display.
As soon as the noise level of a frequency is getting visible on the display,
the squelch level of this frequency may be adjusted.
• Select frequency/channel to be adjusted using arrow keys .

The selected frequency/channel is displayed now brighter and framed red.
• Change squelch level of selected frequency:

– increases squelch level;
– decreases squelch level;
– adapts automatically squelch level to noise level “F1”/“F2” (“AutoAdjust”);
– switches off squelch level of selected frequency “F3” (“Off”).
• Store adjustment using key “Ok” and return to bearing display.
Automatic Adjustment of Squelch Levels
• Open dialogue window using key “Squelch”.

When opening dialogue window, the system is scanning the signal levels of the
selected surveilling frequencies/channels and is showing the presently received
signal levels and the previously selected squelch levels on the display screen.
• Function keys “F4” or “F5” (“All AutoAdjust”) are now activating the automatic
squelch level adjustment of all active frequencies;
• Store adjustment using key “Ok” and return to bearing display.
Adjusting Monitoring/Scanning Operation and ID-only Filtering
For monitoring operation, the emergency frequencies 121.500 MHz and
243.000 MHz are stored permanently in the system. For additional surveillance,
two more frequencies/channels can be stored in the specified frequency ranges.
Each monitoring frequency can be combined with the selective emergency
transmitter filtering function ID-only:

• Open dialogue window, using key “Monitor/Stdby”;

• Select frequency field or field for emergency transmitter filtering by using
arrow-keys;
• Change monitoring parameter with following functions:
– “F1” (“On”) – switches on monitoring operation.
Monitoring operation is indicated by illumination of the monitoring LED.
At the same time, the selected monitoring frequencies are displayed on
the left side of the bearing display.
– “F2” (“Off”) – switches off monitoring operation.
Top left the monitoring display is displaying “Monitoring Off”. If the monitoring
operation shall stay active permanently, switching off by mistake can
be avoided.
– “F3” (“Edit”) – opening dialogue window for setting new monitoring
frequency/channel;
– “F4” (“On/Off”) – Switching on/off selected monitoring frequency and
emergency transmitter filtering ELT/PLB.
• Confirm selection using key “Ok” and return to bearing mode.
Setting Brightness (Dimming)
The brightness of the display elements and key illumination may be adapted
to surrounding lighting conditions (TFT-displays, LED’s).

Automatic Adjustment of Brightness of Display and LED’s
• Open dialogue window using key “Dimming”;
• Press left key “Mode” and select option “Automatic”;
• If necessary, readjust automatically set brightness using keys

and function keys “F2”, “F3” and “F4”;
• Store setting using key “Ok”.
Manual Adjustment of Display and LED Brightness
• Press left key “Mode” and select option “Manual”;
• Set brightness using arrow keys ;

Adjustment of Key Illumination (“Legends”)
Note: In order to enhance lifetime of the luminous foils and the TFT display,
we recommend to operate the key illumination in mode “Automatic”.
• Select mode of key illumination by multiple pressing of the key “Mode”:
– “On” (permanent key illumination);
– “Off” (key illumination off);
– “Automatic” (key illumination corresponding to surrounding lighting).

Setting the Volume

An external speaker connected to the bearing system, volume control is done by
the bearing system. The muting function (Mute) will switch off the connected speaker
for a certain time. An additional testing routine can test the speaker’s function.
Muting the Speaker

An emergency signal received – the connected speaker will give a permanent alarm
signal. This signal or the received radiotelephony can be muted, if disturbing.
Note: The period of the muting function is limited to a certain time. After that span,
the acoustic signal is switched on again automatically.
• Open dialogue window using key “Volume”;
• Press “F1” (“Mute”) and activate muting function of the speaker;
• Store setting using key “Ok” and return to bearing display.
The speaker switched mute, the bearing display will show the flag “Mute”
as a reminder. The basic setting of the bearing system is the option
Normal.
Setting Speaker Volume

The volume of the connected external speaker can be set infinitely variable. In order
to avoid switching off the speaker by mistake, the minimum volume is limited
to a value of 10%:
Note: In order to observe acoustically the setting of the speaker’s volume when
receiving no signal, we recommend to activate the functional test of the
speaker at first (see description below) and to use the received noise signal
as a setting reference.
• Open dialogue window using key “Volume”;

• Set volume using arrow keys .

Quick change of volume can be achieved by function keys “F2” (Min),
“F3” (-I-) and “F4” (Max). The volume is set to 10% (low), 50% (medium)
and 100% (maximum volume).

Functional Test of External Speaker
In order to test volume setting and function of the external speaker, the test function
can be activated. When activating the test function, the squelch is deactivated and
the received noise signal becomes audible:
• Open dialogue window by using key “Volume”;

• Activate test function using key “Test” (“On”);
• The noise signal can now be heard if the speaker is working;
• In order to switch off the test function, use key “Test” and select
option “Off”;
• Close dialogue window using key “Ok” and return to the bearing display.
Activating Memory/Band Function

In order to call up quickly frequently used frequencies/channels, training frequencies
etc., the bearing system can store and document these frequencies.
For each of the four frequency bands, an individual list may be provided. Stored
frequencies/channels may be provided with own designations and comments, their
sequence and position may be changed within the list, and they can be cancelled,
if necessary.
International valid emergency frequencies are already stored in the corresponding
frequency band. They are on first position within the frequency band lists and cannot
be moved or cancelled.
Recall Frequency/Channel from Store List

• Open dialogue window using key “Memory/Band”;
• Select option “Recall”;
• This option is already preselected when opening the dialogue window;
• Select corresponding frequency band using function keys “F1” to “F4”;

• The display will show your list;

• Select desired frequency/channel using arrow keys;
• The selected frequency/channel is marked with a green bar;
• Press key “Ok” to confirm your selection.
The device returns to bearing mode and work on the set frequencies/channels.
Editing text (of Frequency/Channel) in Store List
• Select option “Edit” using arrow keys;
• Select desired frequency band using function keys “F1” to “F4”.
The selected list is shown on the display.
• Select desired frequency/channel using arrow keys .

The selected frequency/channel is marked with a green bar.
• Press key “Ok” to confirm the selection.

The text input window is opening. The frequency/channel can now be provided
with a name or comment. The text is limited to 35 digits.
• Put in desired text by the means of the text input window:

– select desired letter using the four arrow keys. The selected letter/digit
is marked with a yellow frame;
– pressing key “Ok” overtakes the marked letter/digit;
– numbers can be put in directly using the numeric keys;
– in order to insert a space mark, select field “Space”;
– in order to cancel a letter/digit, select field ;

– in order to close the text input, select field “End of Input” and confirm using
key “Ok”.
The text input window will be closed, and the text is stored in the list.

Moving a Frequency/Channel within a List

By the means of the function “Move”, frequencies/channels can be sorted within a list.
Note: International valid emergency frequencies on position 1 cannot be moved.
Open dialogue window using key “Memory/Band”:
• Use arrow keys for option “Move”;

• Use function keys “F1” to “F4” to select corresponding frequency band;
• Your list will be shown on the display;
• Use arrow keys to mark frequency/channel to be moved and confirm
selection using key “Ok”.
The selected frequency/channel is marked with a green flashing bar.
• Shove marked frequency/channel using arrow keys to the desired

position and confirm using key “Ok”.
Deleting a Frequency/Channel in the Storage List
Note: International valid emergency frequencies, stored on first position in each
frequency band, cannot be deleted.
• Select option “Delete” using arrow keys ;

The list will be shown in the display.
• Mark frequency/channel to be deleted using arrow keys and confirm

with key “Ok”.
The selected frequency/channel is marked with a green flashing bar.
• The bearing system now requires a confirmation of the deleting process.

Confirm using key “Ok”.
Storing a New Frequency/Channel in a List
• Select option “New” using arrow keys ;

The up to now provided list will be shown on the display.
• Open dialogue window using key “Ok” in order to put in the frequency/channel;
• The new frequency/channel will be took over in the corresponding list and will
be displayed. Option “Edit” will allow to add a text to the frequency/channel.
Select option “Recall” if the frequency/channel is to be used as present
operating frequency/channel.

Activating Standby Operation

To activate Standby operation:
• Open dialogue window using key “Monitor/Standby”;

• Press key “F5” (“Stdby”) to activate standby operation.
The display is darkened and the emergency frequencies 121.500 MHz,
243.000 MHz and 406.025 MHz will be surveilled. The standby operation
is indicated by the monitoring (scanning) LED. Additionally, the ON/OFF LED
is lightened.
To deactivate Standby operation:
• Press any key, thus activating the display;

• If an alarm is recognized during standby operation, the system will activate
the display automatically. The alarm flag will indicate frequency and duration
since release of alarm;
• If an operating error is recognized during standby operation, the display will be
activated. An error message will be put out.
Menu (Setup)
All system settings, exceeding common operation of the bearing system (interface
settings, offset setting…) will be made in the “Menu Setup”. Antenna and power
supply connected to the DCU (Display Control Unit) and after switching on, the system
is ready to work with the default settings.
CAUTION!
Incorrect settings in the Menu setup may lead to considerable malfunctions of the
bearing system RT-500-M. Therefore, sensitive parameters concerning the bearing
operation are password protected against non authorized alterations. Alterations
of settings require password release are to be made only by instructed persons.
• Open dialogue window Menu Setup using key “Menu”;

• Select corresponding Setup Menu using function keys “F1” to “F5”.
The function keys will open a list of further submenu items.
• Select submenu to be adjusted by using arrow keys .

The selected field is highlighted in bright blue.

• Select option from list of possible settings using the arrow keys
, confirm the selection using key “Ok”.
Note: Option is active when “x” mark appears in the check box.
• Or put in desired value by using the numeric keys and confirm “Ok”.
Menu General
Menu General contains editable freely, uncritical settings.

Audio
As a standard, there is a short beep when pressing a key. If the beep is to be

suppressed, deactivate setting “Beeper Key Pressing”.
Menu Interface
Settings, concerning data interfaces and functions, can be made in menu “Interface”
(password protected).
NMEA Mode
In NMEA mode, the NMEA data output of the bearing system is selected:
• “Only On Request” – data output on request only;

• “Autotalk... sec (ms)” – continuous data output of standard DF data in fixed
intervals.
NMEA Baud Rate
NMEA baud rate will set velocity of data transmission of serial NMEA interface
(input and output).
Compass Source
An external compass may be connected to the system's NMEA interface. Set here
data format of connected compass.
No external compass connected, select menu item “No ext. Compass (Off)”.

If data of an external compass are to be used without specific data format,

select setting “NMEA: Auto”.
CAUTION!
In this case, only one compass may be connected to the bearing system.
Select here corresponding data format of external compass.
Menu System
Internal system settings (password protected).
CAUTION!
Faulty settings may lead to malfunctions of the system.
Address-ID
In menu item “Adress ID”, the internal device addressing can be set. Addresses from
0 to 99 are possible.
Antenna Unit
The system’s dipole antenna can only be mounted in vertical alignment.
The mounting flange is pointing to the ground for standard mounting. For hanging
mounting (flange on the top), select menu item “Mounted Upside Down” for correct
signal processing.
Audio Line Output
Adjust level of Audio Line output signal. The level is adjustable from 10 to 99%.
The Audio Line exit has a determined output level and is independent of the volume
adjustment.
Antenna Offset
The bearing antenna has to be mounted “North orientated”, the “North” resp. 0°
marker has to point parallel to the vessel’s longitudinal axis to the vessel’s bow.
If the antenna cannot be mounted (for different reasons) pointing exactly to the bow,
the deviation correction can be put in here. The offset is adjustable from 0 to 359°
(e.g. -15° = 345°).
PS Ram
An external compass connected, the bearing value determination is done by a special,
improved compensating procedure. For a compass of minor quality (e.g. heavy and
quick variations), it may be necessary to switch off the compass compensation.
Select “Compass Compens. Off”.

Monitoring
In the default setting “Off Blocked” it is not possible to deactivate the monitoring
operation. Thus, surveillance of the emergency frequencies cannot be switched off
by mistake. If the monitoring operation is to be switched off manually, the setting
“Off Blocked” has to be deactivated.
The bearing system’s monitoring/scanning function can now be switched on/off in
the corresponding dialogue window.
Menu Service
Internal settings and service dialogues (password protected).
Monitor
The Setup Menu item SERVICE\MONITOR is to be opened only for service
and maintenance operation.
Password
If the system has been unlocked by the default password during first installation,
create and change your personal password now. Only one password can be stored:
• Press function key “F4” and select option “Password Change”. A data input field
will open;
• Put in now your password by the means of the numeric keys or the editing fields.
The input is limited to 8 digits. The password may consist of any numbers and
signs, as well as special marks and space marks. A space mark at the beginning
of the password is not possible;
• Confirm your input using key “Ok”. The password is stored for further operation.
Unlocking Setup Settings
CAUTION!
Wrong or faulty settings in setup menus as “Interface”, “System” and “Service” may
lead to malfunctions. These settings are password protected.
Before starting to change these settings, password protection has to be released.

If the setting procedure is interrupted by pressing key “Esc”, password protection
is automatically enabled again.
The blocked menu setting is indicated by a closed grey padlock.
The menu setting deblocked and opened, green padlock is visible.

In this case all parameters may be changed.

CAS Panel
In order to unlock the setup menu, press function key “F5” (“Enter Password”).
An input field for entering the password is opened:
• Enter password by the means of the numeric keys or the editing fields;
• Prior to first putting into operation, the bearing system is protected by a preset
password;
• The preset password is 123;
• Confirm input by using key “Ok”. Menu items as “Interface”, “System”, “Service”
can be edited now and changed if desired;
• After unlocking the system as described in Menu Service, you may create
and change your personal password.
CAS PANEL
The following information is displayed on CAS panel in the tabular form:
• time when a violation was recorded (“Time”);

• rule violation messages supplied by Competence Assessment System (“Violation”);
• Instructor prompts (“Advice”);
• penalty points (“Penalty”).
The right bottom corner of the panel displays the current assessment of the exercise
correctness in points (“Score%”) which is calculated by subtracting the sum of
penalty points from 100%.

Panel of Ice Monitoring System (Ice Load)
If the final score value is below the passing score threshold (Passing Score),
the screen displays the word “Fail” in the red colour instead of “OK”.
Note: A detailed description of the trainee Competence Assessment System
provided in the document NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20).
INSTRUCTOR MANUAL, Chapter 8.
PANEL OF ICE MONITORING SYSTEM (ICE LOAD)

The Ice Monitoring System is designed for Crude Oil Tanker type ship model.
Outward appearance of “Ice Load” panel corresponds to the appearance

of an actual shipboard instrument – Ice Load Monitoring System sensor.
The top left part of the panel shows two indicators: “Instantaneous stress”,
“Maximum stress over past”. Each indicator is a scale with per cent pressure marks
(different colours are used for designating different degrees of hazard: green – not
dangerous, red – dangerous), the space to the right of the scale shows the pressure
value in green, and also its value in percent.
“Instantaneous stress” indicator shows the ice instantaneous (current) pressure.

“Maximum stress over past” indicator shows the maximum ice pressure within
the set time interval (from 1 to 120 min). Time range is set by using the buttons
with arrows to the right of the scale.

Panel of Ice Monitoring System (Ice Load)
In the bottom part of the panel, there is a graph which shows prehistory
of the current ice pressure change within a certain time interval: 1 min, 30 min,
1 h, 2 h, 8 h, and 24 h.
To select the time interval, press the appropriate button to the right of the graph.
The limit value of the ice pressure sensor alarm is shown as a red line on
the indicators and on the prehistory graph. To change the alarm limit setting,
use the list box in the top right part of the panel.

CHAPTER 2
Transas Radar/ARPA
Imitators
The chapter contains operating instructions for handling control
panels of five radar imitators (BridgeMaster II, BridgeMaster E,
BridgeMaster E Tactical, Furuno, Nucleus).

Radar Selection and Adjustment of Its Initial Parameters................................. 119
BridgeMaster II-340 Radar Imitator ......................................................................... 120
Introduction....................................................................................................... 120
Preparation for Use .......................................................................................... 123
Radar Controls and Menus .............................................................................. 123
Data Controls ......................................................................................... 123
Pushbutton Keys .................................................................................... 123
Main Menu ............................................................................................. 127
Keys and Menus Reference – Autotrack/ARPA .................................... 129
Operator Notes – Autotrack/ARPA................................................................... 129
Target Acquisition and Tracking ............................................................ 129
Guard Zones .......................................................................................... 129
Tracking Sequence ................................................................................ 130
Autodrop................................................................................................. 130
Target Information .................................................................................. 130
Use of a Standard (101/102) Keyboard .............................................................. 132
Hot Keys Available in Both (Standby & Operating) Modes .................... 132
Hot Keys Available in Operating Mode Only.......................................... 133
BridgeMaster E Radar Imitator ............................................................................. 136
Getting Started ................................................................................................. 136
Standby Mode ........................................................................................ 136
Transmit Mode ....................................................................................... 137
Using the Radar Controls....................................................................... 137
Selecting a Mode of Operation .............................................................. 140
Basic Operation ................................................................................................ 141
Introduction ............................................................................................ 141
User Specified Data ............................................................................... 141
Range Scales & Range Rings ............................................................... 142
Heading Line (HL) .................................................................................. 143
Off-centring the Picture .......................................................................... 143
Centring the Video Display .................................................................... 144
Transceiver Tuning ................................................................................ 145
Video Processing Controls..................................................................... 145
Radar Transmission Pulse Length ......................................................... 147
Brilliance Control .................................................................................... 147
Returning to Standby Mode ................................................................... 149
Ship’s Heading and Speed............................................................................... 150
Introduction ............................................................................................ 150
Heading Display ..................................................................................... 150
Speed Display ........................................................................................ 150
Presentation, Motion, Vector & Trail Modes .................................................... 153
Introduction ............................................................................................ 153
Presentation Modes ............................................................................... 153
Motion Modes......................................................................................... 154
Vector Modes ......................................................................................... 155
Trails Mode ............................................................................................ 156
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 157
EBL’s, ERBL’s and VRM’s ............................................................................... 157
Introduction ............................................................................................ 157
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) ................................................................ 158
Chapter 2. Transas Radar/ARPA Imitators 113

Variable Range Marker (VRM) .............................................................. 159
Options .................................................................................................. 160
Defaults ................................................................................................. 161
Target Functions .............................................................................................. 161
Introduction ............................................................................................ 161
Manual Acquisition of Targets ............................................................... 161
Automatic Targeting ARPA Radars ....................................................... 162
Guard Zones.......................................................................................... 163
Annular Zone Editing ............................................................................. 164
Target Data............................................................................................ 165
Trial Manoeuvres ................................................................................... 166
Display of UAIS Information ............................................................................ 168
Display of UAIS Targets ........................................................................ 168
Obtaining UAIS Data ............................................................................. 169
ARPA Functions .............................................................................................. 170
Introduction ............................................................................................ 170
Accessing ARPA Functions................................................................... 171
Turning the Display of ARPA Data On or Off ........................................ 171
Targets Currently Being Tracked .......................................................... 171
Past Position Dots ................................................................................. 171
Target ID’s ............................................................................................. 172
AIS Information Display ......................................................................... 172
Automatic Dropping of Targets.............................................................. 173
Vector Timeout ...................................................................................... 174
NMEA Targets ....................................................................................... 174
Limits of Targets Maximum Approach Point and Bow Crossing
Parameters ............................................................................................ 174
Parallel Index Lines ......................................................................................... 175
Introduction ............................................................................................ 175
Accessing the Edit Index Lines Menu ................................................... 175
Index Line Editing .................................................................................. 176
Additional Functions in Five Index Lines Editing Menu ......................... 178
Exiting from Edit Mode .......................................................................... 179
Warning Prompt..................................................................................... 179
System Menu ................................................................................................... 179
Introduction ............................................................................................ 179
Access to the System Menu .................................................................. 179
Tools ................................................................................................................ 179
Introduction ............................................................................................ 179
Accessing the TOOLS ........................................................................... 180
Rotating Cursor ..................................................................................... 180
Marks ..................................................................................................... 180
Navigation ........................................................................................................ 183
Introduction ............................................................................................ 183
Accessing the NAVIGATION Menu ....................................................... 183
Cursor Display ....................................................................................... 183
Turning the Route Display ON and OFF ............................................... 183
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 184
Alarms .............................................................................................................. 184
Introduction ............................................................................................ 184
Alarm Display ........................................................................................ 184

Alarm Facilities ....................................................................................... 185
List of Alarms ......................................................................................... 185
Search and Rescue Detection (SART) ............................................................ 186
Introduction ............................................................................................ 186
Radar Range Scale ................................................................................ 186
SART Range Errors ............................................................................... 186
Radar Bandwidth ................................................................................... 187
Radar Side Lobes .................................................................................. 187
Detuning the Radar ................................................................................ 187
Video Gain ............................................................................................. 187
Anti-clutter Sea Control .......................................................................... 187
Anti-clutter Rain Control ......................................................................... 187
BridgeMaster E Tactical Radar Imitator............................................................... 188
Overview .......................................................................................................... 188
Maps ................................................................................................................. 189
Maps Menu Description ......................................................................... 190
Selecting Maps and Folios from a “Memory Card” ................................ 190
Turning the Selected Map On and OFF................................................. 191
Offsetting Map Position .......................................................................... 191
Selecting Map Layers ............................................................................ 192
Activating and De-activating Guard Lines.............................................. 192
Deselecting Maps .................................................................................. 192
Deleting a Map from a “Memory Card” .................................................. 193
Creating a New Map .............................................................................. 193
Displaying a Map for Editing in Standby Mode ...................................... 194
Editing a Selected Map .......................................................................... 195
Saving a Map ......................................................................................... 198
Creating and Editing Folios .................................................................... 199
Creating and Deleting Guard Lines ....................................................... 201
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 203
Routes .............................................................................................................. 205
Turning the Route Display On and Off................................................... 205
Route Type............................................................................................. 205
Accessing the Internal Route Menu ....................................................... 206
Selecting an Internal Route from a “Memory Card” ............................... 207
Creating an Internal Route ..................................................................... 207
Editing a Selected Internal Route .......................................................... 208
Accessing the Single Leg Route Menu .................................................. 211
Setting the Single Leg Waypoint ............................................................ 212
Position Database .................................................................................. 213
Route and Waypoint Transfer ................................................................ 215
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 216
Freeze Function ............................................................................................... 216
Freeze Frame ........................................................................................ 216
Local-Operator Control .......................................................................... 216
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 216
Red First Strike................................................................................................. 217
Selecting Red First Strike Presentation ................................................. 217
Returning to Standard Video Presentation ............................................ 217
Constant Radius Turn ...................................................................................... 217
Radius Turn Menu ................................................................................. 218

Setting the New Course ........................................................................ 218
Setting the Turn Radius......................................................................... 219
Setting the Start Line ............................................................................. 219
Aligning to Own Ship’s Course .............................................................. 219
Rates of Turn ......................................................................................... 220
Polygonal Auto-Acquisition Zone..................................................................... 220
Auto-Acquisition Zones General Description ........................................ 220
Accessing the Auto-Acquisition Zones Menu ........................................ 220
Turning Auto-Acquisition Zones On/Off ................................................ 221
Defining an Acquisition Zone................................................................. 221
Editing Warning Points .......................................................................... 221
Helicopter Approach Sector ............................................................................. 222
Accessing the Helo Sector Menu .......................................................... 222
Turning Helo Sector Display On or Off .................................................. 222
Selecting True or Relative Display Mode .............................................. 223
Selecting the Helo Sector Bearing ........................................................ 223
Selecting the Helo Sector Origin ........................................................... 223
Sector Defaults and Suppression .......................................................... 224
Warning Prompts ................................................................................... 224
Target Association ........................................................................................... 224
Changing the Target Association Values .............................................. 224
Parallel Index Lines ......................................................................................... 225
Introduction ............................................................................................ 225
Accessing the Index Lines Menu........................................................... 226
Turning the Index Lines Display On and Off ......................................... 226
Listing the Currently Loaded Groups .................................................... 226
Index Line Editing .................................................................................. 227
Creating a New Group of Index Lines ................................................... 229
Loading and Unloading Groups............................................................. 229
Exiting from Edit Mode .......................................................................... 230
Saving a Group...................................................................................... 231
Target Intercept ............................................................................................... 231
Accessing the Target Intercept Menu ................................................... 231
Selecting the Intercept Mode................................................................. 232
Selecting the Interceptor ....................................................................... 232
Selecting the Interceptee....................................................................... 232
Intercept Graphics ................................................................................. 233
Planning the Intercept ........................................................................... 233
Defaults and Other Operating Conditions ............................................. 234
Furuno Type Radar Imitator ................................................................................. 234
Running the Program....................................................................................... 234
Controls ........................................................................................................... 234
Controls Located in the Bottom Part of the Panel ................................. 234
Instrumentation Unit of Display Controls ............................................... 235
Section of ARPA Functions and Control Menus ................................... 236
Display Markers and Indications...................................................................... 237
Motion Displays and Display Orientations ....................................................... 238
Head-Up Orientation ............................................................................. 238
Cursor Gyro Head-Up ........................................................................... 238
Course-Up ............................................................................................. 238
North-Up ................................................................................................ 238

True Motion ............................................................................................ 238
Menu Keys and Menu Description ................................................................... 239
Menu Keys ............................................................................................. 239
How to Set Menu Options ...................................................................... 239
RADAR Menu Description ..................................................................... 239
VRM’s ............................................................................................................... 240
How to Display and Erase the VRM’s .................................................... 240
Selecting Unit of Range Measurement .................................................. 241
EBL’s ................................................................................................................ 241
How to Display and Erase the EBL’s ..................................................... 241
Selecting Bearing Reference ................................................................. 241
Offset EBL ........................................................................................................ 241
Predicting Other Target’s Course .......................................................... 241
Measuring Range and Bearing between Two Targets .......................... 241
Setting the Guard Alarm ................................................................................... 242
Overview ................................................................................................ 242
Alarm Types ........................................................................................... 242
Setting the Guard Zone.......................................................................... 242
Cancelling the Guard Alarm ................................................................... 243
Off Centering the Display ................................................................................. 243
How to Off Center the Display ............................................................... 243
Cancelling the Off-center Display .......................................................... 243
Zoom ................................................................................................................ 243
Turning On ............................................................................................. 243
Cancelling .............................................................................................. 243
Index Lines ....................................................................................................... 243
Introduction ............................................................................................ 243
Displaying the Index Lines ..................................................................... 243
Setting Distance between Index Lines ................................................... 244
Trailing Echoes................................................................................................. 244
Introduction ............................................................................................ 244
Trailing Gradation .................................................................................. 244
Starting Echo Trailing............................................................................. 244
Selecting Trailing Time .......................................................................... 244
Erasing Trails ......................................................................................... 244
Canceling Trailing .................................................................................. 244
Electronic Plotting............................................................................................. 245
Introduction ............................................................................................ 245
Sequence in Plotting .............................................................................. 245
Vector Display ........................................................................................ 245
Erasing Acquired Targets ...................................................................... 245
Acquired Target Data ............................................................................. 246
Origin Mark Key................................................................................................ 246
Origin Mark............................................................................................. 246
Marking a Waypoint ............................................................................... 246
Measuring Range and Bearing between Two Targets .......................... 246
Nucleus Radar Imitator.......................................................................................... 247
Introduction....................................................................................................... 247
Tracker ball, Cursor and Pushbuttons ................................................... 247
Functions................................................................................................ 248
ZONE 1 – Radar System ................................................................................. 249

Standby/Run .......................................................................................... 249
Short Pulse/Medium Pulse/Long Pulse (Master Only) .......................... 250
Video Correlation & Interference Rejection ........................................... 251
Tuning.................................................................................................... 251
Boost ..................................................................................................... 252
ZONE 2 – Screen Mode of Operation ............................................................. 252
Range & Rings ...................................................................................... 252
PPI Modes & Presentation .................................................................... 253
Offcentre ................................................................................................ 255
ZONE 3 – Ownship and Plotting Parameters .................................................. 255
Gyro ....................................................................................................... 255
Speed .................................................................................................... 255
Stabilization ........................................................................................... 256
Trail, Vector, CPA Limit, TCPA Limit ..................................................... 257
Cursor Readout about Mode ................................................................. 258
ZONE 4 – VRM, EBL, and Signal Controls ..................................................... 259
Variable Range Marker ......................................................................... 259
Electronic Bearing Line ......................................................................... 260
Gain, Sea, Rain ..................................................................................... 261
Heading Line ......................................................................................... 263
Target Plotting Controls......................................................................... 264
Vector Time ........................................................................................... 264
ZONE 5 – Data and Menus ............................................................................. 265
Target Data............................................................................................ 265
CRT Menu ............................................................................................. 265
Plot Menu .............................................................................................. 266
Trial Menu.............................................................................................. 270
NAV Menu ............................................................................................. 271
Maps Menu ............................................................................................ 272

Radar Selection and Adjustment of Its Initial Parameters
RADAR SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

OF ITS INITIAL PARAMETERS
The radar required for operation is started from the selection menu:
The radar selection menu is displayed on the screen if the simulator has
“Selectable” option in the Configuration Editor. This option allows will set what types
of radar to be displayed in the menu (see NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20).
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION MANUAL).
Before starting the radar, you can set its initial parameters. In the selection menu click
the right mouse button on the name of the selected radar – the screen will display
a dialogue window:
By using “X Band” and “S Band” tabs in the top part of the dialogue window,
you can select the transmitter type. If you check “Use as default Band” checkbox
with the left mouse button, the selected range will always be used by default.
Set the following parameters for the selected transmitter type:
• Rotation speed (RPM) – revolution rate of the radar antenna;

• Beam width (Horizontal/Vertical) – radar antenna azimuth and elevation pattern;
• Antenna tilt angle (from -45° to 45°).
Parameter values are entered either from the keyboard, or by using arrows
in the relevant window. All the entered parameters should be confirmed by pressing
“Ok” button. “Cancel” button closes the dialogue window without changes
in the radar parameters.
After the setting of the radar’s initial parameters, the radar itself is selected by
clicking the left mouse button on its name in the radar selection menu.
You can re-assign the radar during the exercise. Each radar screen has the following
controls for turning the radar off and returning to the radar selection menu:
• BridgeMaster II – MAIN\MORE\MENU 2\EXIT menu item;
• BridgeMaster E – SYSTEM\EXIT menu item;
• BridgeMaster E Tactical – SYSTEM\EXIT menu item;
• Furuno – “POWER/OFF” button;
• Nucleus – “PWR OFF” button.

BridgeMaster II-340 Radar Imitator
BRIDGEMASTER II-340 RADAR IMITATOR
Introduction
This section details the functions of the keys and controls on the BridgeMaster II-340
Radar Control Panel and explains their use. The radar menus tree is shown on fig. below:
Fig. 1
The operating instructions for BridgeMaster Radars depend on the options available
to the radar operator. The instructions begin with those operational features which
are applicable to all BridgeMaster Radars, and are followed by the additional
features applicable to Autotrack and ARPA options.
The most basic radar presentation available is the unstabilized Relative Motion
Display, referred to as Head-Up. Interfacing the radar with compass information
provides the operator with a North-Up or Course-Up stabilized presentation.
By the addition of Speed information, either estimated or via an external input,
a True Motion presentation is available to the operator.

Autotrack, as its name implies, enables selected target echoes to be automatically

tracked, providing the operator with information relating to the targets such as true
speed, true course, closest point of approach, etc.
ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) extends the Autotrack facility by allowing Trial
Manoeuvres to be executed.
Apart from the ON/OFF switch, BridgeMaster Radars are operated from the Radar
Control Panel (see figure below).
For the Radar Control Panel, the controls comprise:
• dedicated rotary controls for commonly used analogue functions such as Gain
and Sea Clutter, etc.;
• dedicated pushbutton keys for commonly used functions such as selecting
RANGE scale, VRM on/off, etc. If the pushbutton is black and white, the function
inscribed on the black background is performed by using a short press, that
on the white background – with a long press.
Note: In what follows, two-functional keys where available will be named after
the function which is being described.
• rotary DATA controls, mainly for controlling the VRM’s and EBL’s;
• a joystick for moving the cursor and menu pointer.
The method of presentation for the descriptions of the various keys is as follows:
• the related key is shown in the right-hand margin;

• the related area(s) on the radar display is shown under the key (refer to fig.
below for identification of the display area).

1 TRANSMITTER TYPE IN USE
2 GUARD ZONE
3 ERBL 2
4 VRM INDICATOR
5 HEADING MARKER
6 ERBL 1
7 VRM 1
8 SLAVE/MASTER INDICATOR (OR INSTRUCTOR
FOR RADAR ON INSTRUCTOR WORKPLACE)
9 SHIP’S HEADING
10 SHIP’S SPEED
11 SPEED INPUT TYPE
12 EBL 1/VRM 1/ERBL 1 READOUT
13 EBL 2/VRM 2/ERBL 2 READOUT
14 EBL/VRM 2/ERBL POINTER
15 CURSOR POSITION
16 ALARMS BOX
17 VECTORS BOX
18 MENU BOX
19 PROMPT BOX
21 BEARING SCALE
22 INDEX LINE
23 RANGE RINGS
24 TUNE INDICATOR
25 TRAILS AND LENGTH
26 ENHANCED VIDEO
27 AC MANUAL/AUTO
28 GUARD ZONE 2 IN USE
29 GUARD ZONE 1 IN USE
30 CURSOR
31 PULSE LENGTH
32 STABILISATION
33 MOTION
34 RING SEPARATION
Fig. 2
35 RANGE SCALE
36 AFC/MANUAL TUNING
Preparation for Use

Press “PULSE” key after starting the exercise from the Instructor workstation.
A radar picture on the display will be adjusted in according with the position of all
rotary controls and pushbuttons. Therefore use “DISPLAY BRILL” control to set
the good brilliance of the display.
Radar Controls and Menus

Data Controls
There are two rotary DATA controls, either of which increases a value by rotating
clockwise and decreases a value by rotating counter-clockwise. The controls
are used:
• “VRM/DATA” – to change the VRM positions, or for general data input

when prompted;
• “EBL/DATA” – to change the EBL positions, or for general input when

prompted;
• “GAIN” – to vary the level of the radar signals displayed

on the screen;
• “SEA” (with A/C MANUAL selected) – to reduce the clutter appearing on

the display due to the radar signals from the sea surface;
• “RAIN” (with A/C MANUAL selected) – to reduce the clutter appearing

on the display due to radar signals from rain;
• “TUNE” – to tune the receiver when AFC is turned off;
• “PANEL BRILL” – to set the brilliance of the control panel

illumination;
• “DISPLAY BRILL” – to set the brilliance of the display.
Use this control in conjunction with NIGHT/DAY key (see later).
Pushbutton Keys
“EBL/OFF” (see Fig. 2, areas 6, 12, 13). There are two EBL’s (Electronic
Bearing Lines). A numeric display of the positions of the EBL’s is given
together with a rectangular highlight indicating which EBL can be adjusted
via the “EBL/DATA” control.
A short press of the EBL key displays EBL 1 and its associated readout. A second
short press adds EBL 2 and its readout to the screen. Further short presses toggle
the highlight between EBL 1 and EBL 2. A long press of the “EBL” key removes
the displayed EBL’s.
EBL 1 and EBL 2 can be off-centred and used in the SHIFT mode relative to own
ship, set by the EBL 1 (2) OFFSET MENU. Use the joystick with the CENTRE/SHIFT
key held down to position the origin of EBL and then release the key. The EBL origin
will maintain its position relative to ownship. A press of the “CENTRE/SHIFT”
key with the menu displayed will re-centre EBL (see figure above).

“VRM/OFF” (see Fig. 2, areas 7, 12, 13). There are two VRM’s (Variable
Range Markers). A numeric display of the positions of the VRM’s is given
together with a rectangular highlight indicating which VRM can be
adjusted via the “VRM/DATA” control.
A short press of the “VRM” key displays VRM 1 and its associated readout.
A second short press adds VRM 2 and its readout to the screen. Further short
presses toggle the highlight between VRM 1 and VRM 2. A long press of the “VRM”
key removes the displayed VRM’s.
“PULSE/ST BY” (see Fig. 2, area 31). When in STANDBY, a short press
of the key will switch the radar to TRANSMIT. A long press while in
TRANSMIT, will switch the radar to STANDBY.
When the radar is in TRANSMIT mode, short presses on this key change the pulse
length. At ranges of more than 3 miles, medium and long pulses are available
(MP and LP). At ranges from 0.5 to 3 miles, there are short and medium pulses
(SP и MP). At ranges from 0.125 to 0.5 miles, only short pulses are available (SP).
“RANGE” (see Fig. 2, area 35). A press on the upper key will increment the
“RANGE”. The range display will increment to show the selected range.
A press on the lower key will decrement the “RANGE”. The range display
will decrement to show the selected range.
“RINGS” (see Fig. 2, areas 23, 34). Operating the key selects between
RANGE RINGS ON and OFF.
“STAB/UNSTAB” (see Fig. 2, area 32). When unstabilized, the display is

Head-up (H UP). Pressing the key while unstabilized, will change
the display to North-up (N UP). Pressing the key while in the N UP,
will change the display to Course-up (C Up). Subsequent presses
of the key will switch the display between C UP and N UP. A double press
of the key in CRS UP gives a CRS UP reset.
A long press of the key while C UP or N UP, will change the display
to unstabilized (H UP).
“TM/RM” (see Fig. 2, area 33). When in Relative motion (RM),

a short press of the key changes the display to True motion (TM).
If TM is selected, only North-up or Course-up may be selected.
A long press selects Relative motion (RM). If RM is selected, either stabilized or
unstabilized may be selected.
“TRAILS/PERM” (see Fig. 2, area 25). Short presses of the key will set
the trails to OFF, 30 SEC, or 1.5 MIN. A long press of the key will change
the trails to permanent (PERM).
The trails mode is determined by the display operating mode selected, i.e.
Relative Motion displays Relative Trails, True Motion displays True Trails.
“AUTO/ENH’CE” (see Fig. 2, areas 26, 27). Short presses of the key
select either manual Anti-Clutter or automatic Anti-Clutter. Long presses
of the key select Enhance ON or OFF.
“CENTRE/SHIFT”. This key is used in three separate ways:
A short press of the key centres the radar picture. With the key pressed and
held, the joystick can be used to set the cursor to the required off-centre position.

The picture may be off-centred by up to two thirds of the radius. When the key
is released, the picture will move to the new off-centre position.
When the EBL 1 (2) OFFSET MENU is displayed, the “CENTRE” key is used
to position the origin of EBL 1 (2).
“HM OFF” (see Fig. 2, area 5). The Heading Marker (HM) OFF key is
used to remove the heading marker. When the key is pressed and held,
the displayed marker is removed. When the key is released, the marker
is shown again.
“MARK/CLEAR”. A short press of the key places a Mark at the cursor

position, as set by the joystick. Marks can be cleared by a short press
of the key with the cursor positioned on the required mark. All marks
can be cleared by a long press of the key. There are 20 marks available.
“PLOT/SELECT” (see Fig. 2, area 18). A short press of the key produces
a PLOT at the position of the cursor, as set by the joystick. After 1 minute
target course, speed, CPA and TCPA is displayed. The target number and
related data display can be selected by a press and hold of the key and use
of the joystick.
Refer to the “CANCEL” key detail, for the procedure to cancel Plots.
“CANCEL” (see Fig. 2, areas 15, 18). To cancel a plot, use the joystick
to position the cursor over the target and press the key. A long press
of the key will cancel all plots, regardless of the cursor position.
If the display is in any of the menu modes or a data entry mode, pressing
the key will return the display to the next highest menu level.
“VECTOR/TIME” (see Fig. 2, area 17). A short press of the key changes
between true and relative vectors. The vector time can be changed by
a press and hold of the key and the use of either of the Data controls.
The status of the vectors is shown in the Vector Box.
If you select the alternative vector type to that of the display mode, i.e. Relative
Vectors with True Motion or vice versa, the vector type will revert automatically after
a 30 second time-out period. During the period when the vectors are different from
the motion mode, text in the Vector Box will be red in place of the usual green.
“SPEED” (see Fig. 2, areas 10, 18). A short press of the “SPEED” key will
display a menu of the available speed modes:
• MANUAL (estimated speed) mode is normally used when no other speed

information is available. This mode provides Sea Stabilisation;
• ECHO REF mode. To select echo referencing involves placing the cursor over
the selected (previously established) target and holding the Speed key down
for a long press. This mode provides Ground Stabilisation with CMG and SMG
(Course and Speed Made Good) indication.
A white arrow will appear on the display next to the selected ECHO REF.
• NAV G. The mode ensures ground stabilisation from the GPS receiver data;
• LOG W (F/A and P/S). The mode ensures sea stabilization;
• LOG G (F/A and P/S). The mode ensures ground stabilisation from the Doppler
log data. The log shows Fore/Aft (F/A) and transverse speed (P/S).

“INDEX/CLEAR” (see Fig. 2, areas 18, 22). Four INDEX lines (in each
from 16 SETS) can be defined on all range. Initially all lines are undefined
but once set, they are saved for later recall and modification if required.
Index lines are available on RM and TM presentation modes.
A long press of the “INDEX/CLEAR” key removes all lines from the display.
A short press of the key displays INDEX menu which can be used for assigning,
editing, or deleting an index line.
LINE No – you are requested to enter line No 1. If you wish to change the line
number from 1 up to 4, press “#” key successively.
Go on to “EDIT LINE”, press “#” key. The bottom menu line will display the value
of the line’s transverse displacement in miles and the true line direction.
True direction is in C UP, N UP mode. Relative direction is in H UP mode.
By using “EBL/VRM DATA” rotating knobs and joystick, enter a new value and press
“#” button.
A small circle standing for a waypoint is drawn on the index line. When rotated,
the index line will be turning around this point.
Where it is necessary to enter more than 4 index lines, use SELECT SET menu item
where you should set the number of the desired setting (Set). As this is done,
the first 4 lines will disappear from the screen, and you can enter 4 new lines.
If it is necessary to return to the initially set index lines, use DISP SETS menu item.
This menu item displays the required number of index line settings, but only if
the same number is selected in SELECT SET menu item.
“DELETE LINE” deletes the line whose number is specified in the top menu line.
“G ZONE/CLEAR” (see Fig. 2, areas 2, 28, 29). There are two guard
zones which are adjustable in range and angular coverage.
A short press of the key selects which of the guard zones is adjustable. One or both
of the zones may be displayed. Follow the prompts to set up the start range and
the start/stop bearings of the zone. These are initially displayed with their default
settings which can then be adjusted over certain limits. The depth of the zones are
pre-determined and depend on the selected range scale at the time of definition.
Default settings are the following:
• G ZONE 1 (red color): Start bearings=Course±90°, Start range=4 n mile,

Depth=3.2 n mile;
• G ZONE 2 (green color): Start bearings=Course±90°, Start range=12 n mile,
Depth=10.4 n mile.
If no change of zones is required, press “CANCEL” pushbutton if you want to save
these pre-determined settings.
If you press “#” pushbutton, the left start bearing and range of this
G ZONE may now be rotated and moved using the joystick. Press “#”
to freeze new setting, and then the right bearing of the G ZONE may be
rotated using the joystick. When the right angle of the G ZONE is in
the required position, press “#”.
With an ARPA display up to forty targets, initiating alarms, are automatically

acquired and tracked in both guard zone. The zone violations are indicated by red
triangles close to the targets plus the GZ1 or GZ2 alarm.
A long press of the key selects guard zones OFF.

Active guard zone (GZ1 or GZ2) is displayed at the bottom left of the display.
“#” (see Fig. 2, area 19). The “#” key is used to select a menu option or
confirm a data entry.
“ALARM ACK”. A short press of the key acknowledges the highest priority
alarm. Only one alarm can be acknowledged at a time. The related alarm
message and status for the acknowledged alarm is updated.
“NIGHT/DAY”. Short presses of the key set the intensity of the display
to one of four levels (NIGHT levels). A long press of the key sets the
intensity of the display to the normal use DAY level. The lowest intensity
NIGHT level shows radar information in red colour.
“MENU” (see Fig. 2, areas 18, 19). The “MENU” key is used to display
the first of a series of menus referred to as the “MAIN” menu. A second
key press removes the “MAIN” menu from display.
The joystick is used to move the pointer on the menus. The “#” key is used to select
the option pointed to by the pointer, or to select options ON and OFF. The display
area under the menu gives information on using the option pointed to by the pointer.
Main Menu
• “SPEED” – see description above;
• “HEADING/COMPASS” – to set the compass course. Use the rotating
“EBL/VRM DATA” knobs and joystick to enter a new value, and press “#” button.
To exit from the menu, press “CANCEL” button;
• “EBL 1 OFFSET/CENTRED” – see description above;
• “EBL 2 OFFSET/CENTRED” – see description above;
• “ARPA” – to call the “ARPA” submenu:
– “DISPLAY ON/OFF” allows the operator to select whether all the symbols
and annotations for ARPA are displayed or removed from the display
(although ARPA still functions and generates alarms and target information);
– “NAME TARGET” – to enter/delete the name of the target (01, etc.).
The target name should contain up to 8 characters. After the input, the target
name is shown on the radar display;
– The “CPA LIM” (Closest Point of Approach Limit) and “TCPA LIM” (Time
to CPA Limit) can be set, which, if both are violated, will produce an alarm.
The default values of 2.0 n mile and 10.0 minute cannot be reduced.
CPA LIM can be set within 0.1 to 6 n mile, TCPA LIM – from 1 to 59 minutes;
– “SERIAL O/P” – to output Serial Output data on the named targets
to the external devices:
“SERIAL O/P ON/OFF” – to turn on/off the data output;
“TARGETS ALL/SEL” – to output data on all the named targets
or on the selected target;
“SEL TARGET 01” – to set a target for the selection (up to 5 targets).
The setting appears in the bottom menu line;
“DESELECT 01” – to cancel the selection of target (it disappears from
the bottom menu line).
– The “PAST POSN” option displays past position markers on the display.
These positions (4 markers) are True for True Motion presentation
and Relative for Relative Motion.
• “MORE >>>” – to call the second menu “MENU 2”.

MENU 2
• “INITIALIZATION” – to call the “INITIALIZATION” submenu:
– “SYSTEM SETUP”:
“BUZZER ON/OFF” – to turn on/off acoustic signals;
“AFC ON/OFF” – to turn on/off automatic receiver tuning (replaces
the function of TUNE knob on the control panel);
“MARKS CARRIED/FIX” – to set the marks moving together with
the ship or fixed, which should be referenced to the coordinates
(FIX is not implemented in the simulator).
• “TRIAL” – to call the “TRIAL MAN” menu:
– “RUNNING” – to set trial manoeuvre to ON or OFF;
– “CO” – trial course;
– “SPEED” – trial speed;
– “DELAY” – trial time delay;
– “TARGET” – number of the target which should be tracked;
– “CPA”, “TCPA” – tracked target CPA, TCPA.
A Trial Manoeuvre may be carried out in any stabilisation mode, or motion
mode, on the 0.75 to 24 n mile range scales inclusive.
To carry out a trial manoeuvre, set the trial course (“CO”), trial speed (“SPEED”),
time delay (“DELAY”), number of the target which should be tracked
(“TARGET”), and “CPA”, “TCPA” to this target in accordance with the conditions
of the trial manoeuvre, after which the manoeuvre is to be executed. The radar
screen displays the word “TRIAL”, the delay time counter (“DELAY”) starts
the countdown to 0 whereafter the trial manoeuvre is stopped automatically.
Note: Do not forget to adjust the vector length which should be longer
than the delay time.
Set trial manoeuvre to ON or OFF via the “RUNNING” option. During the trial
manoeuvre, parameters (“CO” and “SPEED”) may be changed to see the effect
on CPA and TCPA.
• “INTERSWITCH” – menu for switching the radar to another mode:

– “REQUEST”:
“TX A (S)” – to select the transmitter type;
“MASTER/SLAVE” – to select the radar operating mode (Master/Slave).
– “SEND REQUEST” – to set the selected radar operating mode, select menu item;
– “IN USE” – will specify which of the radars is currently used.
• “NAV DATA” – to call the navigational data menu (in N UP mode only). It is
implemented which the trainee him-herself plots a route on the training bridge:
– “WAY POINTS ON/OFF” – to turn on/off the display of the ship route
waypoints;
– “CURSOR RNG/BRG” (LAT/LON) – to choose data which will be displayed
when selected by the cursor.
• “EXIT” – to turn the radar off and exit to the radar selection menu.

Keys and Menus Reference – Autotrack/ARPA

The functions of certain keys change when the Autotrack option is available
to the operator. At the same time, extra menus allow access to additional
operational features.
With the ARPA option, three extra keys and additional menus further extend
the range of operational features.
for Autotrack and ARPA for ARPA only
“ARPA/CLEAR” – displays “ARPA” menu whose description is provided above.

“TRIAL MAN” – to promptly display “TRIAL MAN” menu whose description
is provided above.
“DATA/SELECT” is intended for the tabular display of data on 5 acquired targets.
A short press on the key displays the target table (see 5-Target Tote (ARPA Only)
paragraph below). A long press on the key returns the operator to the selective
display of data for one target only (see Full Target Information paragraph below).
The table disappears from the screen.
Operator Notes – Autotrack/ARPA

Target Acquisition and Tracking
Up to 40 targets can be track simultaneously. These targets can be manually
acquired using the PLOT key (renamed MANUAL ACQ for ARPA), or with one
or both of the guard zones set – targets will be automatically acquired as they enter
the zones. Once the total number of targets being tracked reaches 39, the “TRACKS
FULL” alarm is raised to indicate that only one more target can be acquired.
Guard Zones
Each guard zone can have up to ten acquired targets in itself at any time. Violation
symbols (red inverted triangle) are displayed, and the GZ1 or GZ2 ALARM is raised
whenever a new target enters the guard zone. When a target leaves a guard zone,
it becomes a manually acquired target, and thus allows another target to be
automatically acquired in the guard zone.
When the total number of targets being tracked in a zone exceeds ten, new guard
zone violations are shown as lines in the guard zone, and will not be tracked.

Tracking Sequence
The tracking sequence is the same for all targets:
1. On the first scan of the target, a broken white square is displayed over the target;
this symbol is called the initial tracking symbol. For a manual target, a solid
green square is also displayed; this symbol is called the tote target symbol
and means that information for this target is now shown in the menu box.
Initially only range and bearing information is displayed.
2. After 16 successful scans of the target, the initial tracking symbol is removed
and the vector (green line) for the target is displayed. The vector has a green
dot at the target end of the line. At this stage, the target is said to be
established, and the vector shows the approximate (trend) course and speed
of the target. The information shown in the menu box will now be completed
for that target (that is the target with the tote target symbol). After approximately
three minutes, full operational accuracies will be achieved on target vector and
information.
3. If an alarm condition arises for a tracked target, the target symbol is replaced
by a red alarm symbol which flashes until the “ALARM ACK” key is pressed.
The alarms and related symbols are shown below:
ALARM Symbol
CPA/TCPA ∆
GZ1 or GZ2 ALARM ∇
LOST TARGET ◊
Autodrop
As the name implies, tracked targets will be automatically deleted from the tracked
target list when certain conditions obtain.
Autodrop Rules:
1. No video information (lost target) is found for 15 scans (except for an echo
reference target).
2. The radar has been set to STANDBY.
Target Information
Full Target Information
When a target is being tracked, full target information is displayed in the menu box,
as shown below:
TARGET (14)
CPA 0.4 NM
TCPA 3.2 MIN
RANGE 0.9 NM
BRG 197.4 DEG
T CO 309.2 DEG
SPEED 11.6 KTS

The full target information is as follows:
• “Target Name”1 and Identification Number;

• “CPA” – Closest Point of Approach;
• “TCPA” – Time to Closest Point of Approach;
• “RANGE” – target Range from own ship;
• “BRG” – target Bearing from own ship;
• “T CO” – target Course (see below);
• “SPEED” – target speed.
Some of the target information depends on the speed mode selected via the Speed
menu. Using Manual Speed or Serial Logs means that the picture is Sea Stabilised,
whereas Echo Ref, Nav G, and some Serial Logs provide Ground Stabilisation.
With Sea Stabilisation, target information is also sea stabilized, i.e. the course
is the water track, and the speed is the speed through the water. When operating
with Ground Stabilisation, the target course and speed are Course Made Good
(CMG) and Speed Made Good (SMG) respectively.
ATTENTION!
The use of some navigation sensors for speed information may result in erratic
target information, owing to the random errors associated with the positional
information. This is particularly noticeable at low speeds.
5-Target Tote (ARPA Only)

An alternative display, which shows limited target information for up to five selected
targets, can be displayed by a short press of the “DATA SELECT” key with the cursor
positioned over a clear area of the display. This type of presentation is shown below:
ID TCPA CPA
MIN NM
05 2.5 0.4
12 3.1 0.3
02 15.0 1.1
- -- --.- --.-
- -- --.- --.-
The limited 5-Target information is as follows:
• ID – target Identification Number;

• TCPA – Time to Closest Point of Approach;
• CPA – Closest Point of Approach.
1
– if previously allocated via Autotrack/ARPA menu.

Initially, the tote display is blank. To select targets for display, move the cursor over
selected targets and press the “DATA/SELECT” key. The selected target
identification numbers will be displayed against the target, and its information will be
shown in the tote. To delete a target from the tote, position the cursor over it and
press “DATA/SELECT”. This action does not cancel the target from the tracked
target list.
A long key press of the “DATA/SELECT” removes the target table from the screen,
and the operator can obtain data on any one selected target.
To show table of the targets again, place the cursor in a clear area and short press
“DATA/SELECT”.
Past Positions
The Past Positions of all targets can be displayed by selection via the ARPA Menu.
Past Positions are displayed as a series of dots on the 0.75 to 24 n mile range
scales inclusive: four dots at 3-minute time intervals.
The term Past Positions is used in accordance with IMO definitions. In some earlier
ARPA radars, the term History Dots was used for this function.
Use of a Standard (101/102) Keyboard

LS – Left Shift. LC – Left Control.
RS – Right Shift. RC – Right Control.
Hot Keys Available in Both (Standby & Operating) Modes

Keys

Short press: • to switch to operating mode if the radar

is in Standby mode;
• to switch between the available pulse length
values if the radar is not in Standby mode.
Long press • to switch the radar to Standby mode.
 To emulate “NIGHT/DAY”.
Short press • to switch between the available Night palettes.
Long press • to turn the Day palette on.
RS+ • to increase brilliance.
LS+ • to decrease brilliance.

Hot Keys Available in Operating Mode Only

Arrow keys
<Up> To move up in the RADAR menu if the RADAR

menu is displayed.
LC • to increase VRM radius if RADAR menu

is not displayed.
<Down> To move down in the RADAR menu if
the RADAR menu is displayed;
LC • to decrease VRM radius if RADAR menu

is not displayed.
RC • Joystick.
<Left>
LC • to rotate EBL counter-clockwise.
<Right>
LC • to rotate EBL clockwise.
RC • Joystick.
Other keys
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<M> To display Main Menu.
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<S> To display Speed Menu.
<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<A> To display ARPA Menu.
<Ctrl+<Alt>+<T> To display TRIAL MAN Menu.
<G>
LC+<G> To increase Gain if manual A/C is selected

(see key).
RC+<G> To decrease Gain if manual A/C is selected

(see key).
<R>
LC+<R> To increase rain clutter if manual A/C

is selected (see key).
RC+<R> To decrease rain clutter if manual A/C

<S>
LC+<S> To increase sea clutter if manual A/C
RC+<S> To decrease sea clutter if manual A/C


<T>
LC+<T> To increase tune clutter if manual A/C
RC+<T> To decrease tune clutter if manual A/C

<BackSpace> To emulate “Cancel”: to cancel the currently

or <ESC> selected operation (see the messages
in the right bottom part of the screen).
<VK Return> To emulate “Enter”.
 To emulate “AUTO/ENHANCE”.
Short press • to switch the radar between manual and

auto anticlutter control.
Long press • to switch the radar between Enhanced
and Normal echoes.
<M> To emulate “TM/RM”.
Short press • to switch the radar to True motion.
Long press • to switch the radar to Relative motion.
<S> To emulate “STAB/UNSTAB”.
Short press • to switch the radar presentation between

North Up and Course Up when in RM mode;
• to switch radar presentation between
North Up and Course Up when in TM mode.
Long press • to select Head Up mode when in EM mode.

Head Up presentation in TM mode not
available.
<T> To emulate “TRAILS/PERM”.
<A> To emulate “Alarm ACK”.
<G> To emulate “Guard Zone”. The selection of this

operation is followed by the messages in the
right bottom part of the screen.
<R> To emulate “RINGS” and “Range Up/Down”.

Each press turns on/off calibration rings.
LC+<R> • to increase the range.
RC+<R> • to decrease the range.
<H> To emulate “HM OFF”. Press and hold down the

key to remove all additional graphics elements,
such as HL, Target marks, Vectors, etc.
<C> To emulate “CENTRE/SHIFT”. To shift the centre,

press and hold down the key, then move
the cursor to the required position and release
the key. To set the original position,
simply press the key.

<Q> To emulate “MANUAL ACQ”. Position the cursor

on the target echo and press the key.
Long press • to select the next target, the cursor is not

positioned on any target echo.
<D> To emulate “DATA/SELECT”. Position the cursor
on the target echo and press the key. The required
target becomes the “Current” one. If the tote
display is turned on, it is added/removed to/from
the displayed targets list. If the cursor is not
positioned on any target echo, to switch between
Target’s Output Display and the tote display.
<E> To emulate “EBL\OFF”.
Short press • to display EBL’s. If both EBL’s are available,

to switch between the two.
Long press • to remove EBL’s.
<V> To emulate “VRM\OFF”.
Short press • to display VRM’s. If both VRM’s are

available, to switch between the two.
Long press • to remove VRM’s.
<Enter> To emulate “Enter”.
 To emulate “Index”. The selection of this

operation is followed by the messages in the right
bottom part of the screen.
<O> To emulate “VECTOR\TIME”: to switch vector

type between True and Relative.
LS+<O> • to increase vector length.

RS+<O> • to decrease vector length.
<K> To emulate “Mark/Clear”.
Short press • to plot a mark or remove it if the cursor is

positioned on the existing mark.
Long press • to remove all existing marks.
<F> To emulate “Perf/Mon”.

BridgeMaster E Radar Imitator
BRIDGEMASTER E RADAR IMITATOR

To start radar imitator, press the “Bridge Master E” button from the radar selection menu.
Note: Radar selection and radar parameters adjusting see the first section of this
chapter.
Getting Started
Standby Mode
The radar always appears in Standby mode.
Selection of “TX A (S)” or “TX A (X)” type of transiver:
In Standby mode, a number of functions are available which allow the display
to be set up for operation.
The following functions can be accessed from Standby mode:
• Brilliance (DEFAULT BRILL, BRILLIANCE +, BRILLIANCE -, to select

the display palette: DAY and 3 NIGHT);
• Cursor data;
• Range selection;
• User data;
• Heading;
• Speed;

• Presentation & Motion modes;

• ARPA Limits and Settings;
• Alarms;
• System (exit from BridgeMaster E radar).
Transmit Mode
After adjusting of the required functions in Standby mode, press “TRANSMIT” soft key.
Using the Radar Controls

Control Panels
There are two types of control panel in current use for controlling the radar:
a Simple Control Panel and an optional Dedicated Control Panel.
Simple Control Panel
The simple control panel is made up of a number of modules which are usually
mounted immediately under the display monitor. A simple pointing device (joystick
or tracker ball), with two associated keys (left and right), is used to control the radar
and its display. The joystick/tracker ball controls the position of the on-screen cursor
which is displayed as a small white arrow when positioned outside the radar circle
(see The On-screen Cursor later in this section).
Selections are made by positioning the on-screen cursor over an object or caption
and clicking (press and release) with the “left” key. The left key is duplicated on
the left-hand side of the control panel to enable two handed operation. The “right”
key is used on some items to provide additional functionality when available.
Note: Throughout this manual, instructions to “left click” or “right click” relate
to a press-and-release of either of the left key or the right key. Similarly,
references to the “cursor control” relate to the joystick or tracker ball
depending on which is fitted.
Optional Dedicated Control Panel
The Dedicated Control Panel, which contains a number of additional push buttons
and rotary controls, can be fitted as an optional extra. The Simple Control Panel
is always fitted.
The Dedicated Control Panel provides individual tactile controls for specific functions.
These functions would normally be accessed and adjusted using the cursor control
and associated left/right keys of the Simple Control Panel. The controls available
are as follows:
Push Buttons: – “RANGE UP”, “RANGE DOWN”;
– “TM/RM”, “TRUE/REL VECTORS”;
– “CENTRE”, “ACK ALARM”.
Rotary Controls: – “GAIN”, “RAIN” (Clutter), “SEA” (Clutter);
– “EBL 1”, “VRM 1”, “PANEL” (Brightness).

The On-screen Cursor

When the on-screen cursor is outside the video circle, it is displayed as a small
white arrow referred to as the screen cursor. As the cursor passes into the video
circle, it’s changed and displayed as a small white cross, referred to as the video
cursor.
Screen Cursor
As the screen cursor moves over a caption or item which can be accessed, its box is
highlighted (drawn in white), and two small boxes (representing the left and right keys)
appear next to the arrowhead cursor. One or both of these boxes is filled in white to
indicate which key(s) are active and available for selection (see example left on fig.).
Note: For reasons of clarity and to avoid conflicting information, the screen cursor
is shown without its associated left/right key boxes in the diagrams
throughout the rest of the manual.
If a caption box is not highlighted as the cursor passes over it, it indicates that
the caption or item inside the box cannot be accessed in the current mode.
Drop-down menu options are highlighted in yellow as the cursor passes over them.
If a particular option is not available, it will not be highlighted. Options, which can
never be selected because of the current radar configuration, are NOT shown.
If an adjustable parameter is selected, the cursor will disappear, and the parameter
is displayed in yellow (as a number or control bar). If an adjustment is not made
within 10 seconds, the parameter will be automatically deselected, and the cursor
will reappear.
Video Cursor
Whenever the video cursor is displayed, a dialog box giving a readout of the cursor’s
position within the video circle, replaces the usual function soft keys shown in
the bottom right-hand corner of the display. By default, this box gives cursor range
and bearing (from own ship), and cursor lat/long.
Note: Soft keys are small, boxed areas of the screen, usually containing a single
caption, which respond in much the same way as the dedicated function
keys of a computer keyboard.

In Transmit mode, the range and bearing of the cursor are relative to own ship’s
position. In Standby mode, the range and bearing are relative to the centre of
the video circle.
Note: If, when in Transmit mode, the own ship’s position is lost, or there
is a compass error, the lat/long readings are replaced by dashes.
Soft Keys and Fixed Menus
A series of functional soft keys are displayed in the bottom right-hand corner
of the display.
A left click on any one of these keys will reveal a fixed menu and a new set of soft
keys associated with that menu. The menu appears in the area immediately above
the soft keys.
A right click on some of the function soft keys will provide additional functionality.
Items from the menu are usually selected by a left click.
Restricted Access when in Edit Mode

Some of the soft key functions permit editing as part of their functionality. For example,
Guard Zone Editing, Index Line Editing. When an edit mode is selected,
a permanent prompt appears in the help area and access to some of the normal
operating facilities is restricted.
As editing is usually performed within the video circle, the following picture related
facilities are unavailable during editing:
• Off-centering own ship by dragging;

• Changing ERBL/VRM by dragging;
• Acquiring or Cancelling Targets;
• Selecting from the Target tote;
• Selecting a new Speed Mode;
• Aligning the Compass.

Drop-Down Menus
Where there are a number of fixed selections for a particular parameter, for example,
“RANGE” in the top left-hand corner of the display, a left click will reveal a drop-down
menu of the alternatives available.
A drop-down menu is usually displayed in the vicinity of the screen cursor when
the selection is made. Once a menu is displayed, the cursor is restricted to the area
within the menu and selections are made with a left click. A right click will close
the menu without taking further action (i.e. “Cancel”).
Selecting a Mode of Operation

From the Standby display, there are two mode selections available.
Transmit
The normal operational mode. The antenna is rotating, and the transceiver
transmits, and receives radar pulses enabling a radar picture to be displayed.
Initialisation
The system initialisation mode. This is used to set up the system parameters during
installation.
The soft keys for selecting these modes of operation are located in the bottom
left-hand corner of the display.
To Select a Mode
1. Use the cursor control to position the screen cursor over the soft key for the mode
required (usually “TRANSMIT”).
2. Left click to select.

Basic Operation
Introduction
When “TRANSMIT” is selected from Standby, the system is switched to transmit.
Slave radars can only be set to transmit if the associated Master is already transmitting.
Most of the captions and soft keys associated with the TRANSMIT display are available
for selection, and are highlighted individually as the screen cursor moves over them.
Most of the basic radar functions are covered in this section.
User Specified Data

The user data area of the display is located at the bottom right-hand side, above
the help area and function soft keys. The area is used to show information relating
to own ship and is available in both Standby and Transmit modes.
The following types of data can be displayed:
• Own Ship’s Position.

The source can be any one of the following: DGPS, GPS. If there is a position
alarm, the lat/lon is displayed in red.
• Wind (relative wind speed, wind bearing) and Depth.
When specific data is unavailable, the associated readout is replaced with dashes.

Selecting the Data Type

1. Position the screen cursor over the top line of text in the User Data box.
2. Left click to select the type of data required. Each click will cycle the display to
the next type. Alternatively, a right click will reveal a drop-down menu containing
a list of data types, left click on the type required, or right click to close the menu
without further action.
Range Scales & Range Rings

The radar range scale can be selected from a list of preset values. A set of fixed range
rings, displayed as a number of equally spaced concentric circles (normally six),
can also be switched ON or OFF.
Range scale selection can be made in both Standby and Transmit modes.
Range rings cannot be selected or displayed in Standby mode.
The current range scale and range ring selections are given in the top left-hand
corner of the display. The ranges are displayed in nautical miles.
To ensure the best detection of small targets amongst sea clutter, always select
the shortest range scale consistent with operational requirements.
Selecting a Range Scale

Ranges can be selected by using either the “+” and “-” soft keys, or by using a drop-
down menu:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “+” (or “-”) symbol.
2. Left click to select the next (or previous) range scale. Ranges from 0.125
to 96 n mile (0.25 to 192 km) are available. An appropriate prompt is displayed
when the upper or lower limit is reached.
Alternatively, a left click on the “RANGE” field will reveal a drop-down menu listing
the ranges available, with the current selection highlighted. Left click on the range
required, or right click to close the menu without further action.

Turning Range Rings ON and OFF

The separation between the range rings (RR) is indicated under the Range field.
To turn the range rings ON or OFF:

1. Position the screen cursor over the Range Ring field.
2. Left click to toggle rings ON or OFF.
Heading Line (HL)
The ship’s heading line is shown as a single line centred on own ship and drawn
to the edge of the video circle. In the Head-Up presentation mode, the line is always
drawn at 000.0°.
When own ship is off-centred, an additional indication of own ship’s heading
is shown by an asterisk and a short line drawn just inside the video circle.
Temporarily Hiding the Heading Line
The heading line can be removed temporarily, to view more clearly something which
is on, or close to, the line:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “HL” soft key.
2. Press and hold down the left key. The line, together with all of the synthetics
within the video circle, remains hidden as long as the key is held down.
3. Release the key to return the line and synthetics to the video circle.
Off-centring the Picture

The default picture is with own ship placed at the centre of the video circle.
However, the picture can be off-centred by “dragging” own ship to a new position
within the video circle as follows.
The video display can be off-centred by up to two thirds of the range scale radius:
1. Position the video cursor over own ship’s position.
2. Press and hold down the left key.

3. Drag own ship to the required off-centred position.

4. Release the key.
Centring the Video Display

The “CENTRE” soft key, located near the bottom right-hand corner, can be used
to redraw the display with own ship at the centre of the video circle, or to reposition
own ship for maximum view along own ship’s course.
To Centre the Display

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CENTRE” soft key.
2. Left click to place own ship at the centre of the video circle.
For Maximum View

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CENTRE” soft key.
2. Right click to reveal a pop-up menu containing the “MAX VIEW” option.
3. Left click to select “MAX VIEW”, or right click to close the menu without further action.
When “Max View” is selected, the video display is off-centred by two thirds
of the range scale radius.

Transceiver Tuning
The transceiver tuning indicator is located in the bottom left-hand corner of the
display. The current level of tuning is indicated by the shaded bar behind the “TUNE”
caption. This bar indicates the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left, 100%
on the right. The tuning indicator is only displayed when the radar is in Transmit mode.
Selecting Manual or Automatic Tuning

The system defaults to the mode of tuning last selected (MAN or AFC):
1. Position the screen cursor over the “AFC/MAN” selection field.
2. Left click to toggle the tuning control to MAN (Manual) or AFC
(Automatic Frequency Control).
Manual Change of Tuning Control

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TUNE” caption.
2. Left click to make the bar active. The bar will appear yellow.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to tune the receiver for best results.
4. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. The bar will return to its
dimmed shaded state.
Note: The yellow bar in this case is a tuning level indicator and is a “tell back”
(an indication only) from the receiver. The cursor control is used to tune the
receiver, not unlike tuning a radio for a particular station. However, there is no
direct correlation between the tuning control and the tuning indicator; increasing
the level of control does NOT necessarily result in a higher level of tuning.
Video Processing Controls

The video processing controls are located in the bottom left-hand corner of the display.
Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls

The video “GAIN” control and the anti-clutter (“RAIN” & “SEA”) controls when set
to Manual (“MAN”), can be adjusted independently. Each control is adjusted using
the shaded bar behind its associated caption which indicates the level in percentage
terms with 0% on the left, 100% on the right.
Using the Video “GAIN” Control
Always adjust the “GAIN” setting while on the longer range scales of 12 or 24 n mile.
(24 to 48 km). A light background speckle must be present to achieve the best target
detection and long range performance. A temporary reduction in gain can be beneficial
when searching for targets in rain or snow conditions. Video gain is independently
adjustable for AUTO and MAN anti-clutter modes.

Using the Manual Anti-Clutter SEA Control

Use the Anti-Clutter SEA control to reduce sea clutter to an operational level where
some residual clutter speckle is present. The setting must permit small targets,
often of similar signal strength to the sea clutter returns, to be detected.
Always use the control with great care. Avoid setting the control to completely
remove all sea clutter, as this will reduce the detection of small targets.
The setting should be periodically checked as prevailing sea conditions change.
Using the Manual Anti-Clutter RAIN Control
Use the Anti-Clutter RAIN control to optimise suppression of rain clutter, i.e. balance
the detection of targets within the clutter region (under the rain) with detection of
those outside the clutter region. Always use the control with great care. Excessive
suppression can cause loss of small targets. It is often advantageous to use this
control to search for targets in the clutter region, returning the control to zero after
the search.
Using the Automatic Anti-Clutter Control
In open sea conditions, use AUTO to suppress rain and sea clutter. This normally
provides optimum detection by adapting the amount of clutter suppression applied
to the varying characteristics of clutter returns.
Pulses received from radar transponders are subject to slight degradation. However,
they are still easily recognisable by their signal strength.
Selecting Manual or Automatic Anti-Clutter Control
1. Position the screen cursor over the “MAN/AUTO” selection field.
2. Left click to toggle control to “MAN” (manual) or “AUTO” (automatic).
Manual Change of GAIN, RAIN & SEA Settings

1. Position the screen cursor over the control you wish to change.
2. Left click to make control bar active. The bar will appear yellow.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to move the bar to the level required.
4. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. The bar will return to its
dimmed shaded state.
Note: Rain and Sea settings cannot be changed in AUTO mode.

Enhanced Video Mode
A substantial improvement in the presentation of small and/or short range targets,
especially when operating at range scales of 3 n mile (6 km) and above, can
normally be achieved by selecting the enhanced video mode. This facility is
available on range scales 0.75 n mile and above. Targets are not enhanced close
to own ship.

Using the Enhanced Video Mode

In estuary and open sea conditions, always use the enhanced video mode for best
target detection. This will enhance small targets, significantly improving their
perceptibility on the display at all ranges, especially on range scales of 3 n mile
(6 km) and above.
WARNING!
Use the enhance control with caution. If used on short range scales, it will degrade
target discrimination.
Turning Enhanced Video Control ON and OFF
1. Position the screen cursor over the Enhance (“ENH”) soft key.
2. Left click to toggle the Enhance control ON or OFF.
Radar Transmission Pulse Length

The current selection of pulse length is indicated in the “pulse length” soft key at
the left-hand side of the display. The caption in the soft key box is an abbreviation
of the current pulse length selection: “SP” (Short Pulse), “MP” (Medium Pulse), or
“LP” (Long Pulse). The soft key is not displayed in Standby mode, and the pulse
length can only be manually changed if the system is configured as a Master.
Selecting the Required Pulse Length

1. Position the screen cursor over the pulse length soft key.
2. Left click to cycle to the pulse length required.
The caption will cycle in a “SP”, “MP”, “LP”, “SP” sequence if all three are available.
Only pulse lengths that are valid for the selected range can be selected.
Alternatively, a right click on the soft key will reveal a drop-down menu listing
the pulse lengths available, with the current selection highlighted. Left click on
the length required, or right click to close the menu without further action.
Brilliance Control
The “BRILL” soft key located in the bottom right-hand corner
of the display, is used to select day or night brilliance and to set
the level of display intensity for different components of the display.
Note: The display monitor has its own associated brilliance control which you may
need to adjust.

A right click on the “BRILL” soft key will reveal a drop-down menu listing the
“DAY/NIGHT” brilliance options available (1 day-time level and 3 night-time levels).
Left click on the setting required. To set the display intensity for different
components of the display, proceed as follows:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “BRILL” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “BRILLIANCE” menu.
The menu lists the various components of the display for which the brilliance can be
set independently.
The first line of the menu, under the heading, indicates the “DAY/NIGHT” brilliance
option to which the menu settings apply.
The settings are independently stored for each “DAY/NIGHT” brilliance option,
and are retained on switch-off.
Day/Night Selection
One of four different preset levels of display intensity can be selected (one day-time
level and three night-time levels):
1. Position the screen cursor over the first line in the menu (Night 1 in the example).
2. Left click to cycle through the settings available.
The display intensity will change with each click in a sequence of “NIGHT 1”,
“NIGHT 2”, “NIGHT 3”, “NIGHT 1”. See note below.
Alternatively, a right click will reveal a drop-down menu listing the settings available.
Left click on the setting required.
Note: This method of selection is normally used to switch between night-time settings;
the day-time setting can only be selected from the drop-down menu.

Changing the Relative Brilliance Settings

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the item you wish to change.
2. Left click to make the control bar active. The bar will appear yellow:
3. Move the cursor control left or right to move the bar to the level required.
4. Left click to de-activate the bar. The bar will return to its dimmed shaded state.
Returning to the Default Brilliance Settings
1. Position the screen cursor on the “DEFAULT BRILL” soft key.
2. Left click to return to the default (i.e. factory set) relative brilliance levels.
Note: If the brilliance controls are not providing adequate control of the display,
the monitor may need adjusting.
Panel Brilliance
The lighting brilliance of the Radar Control Panel is controlled by the BRILLIANCE
(“+” and “-”) soft keys:
1. Left click on the “BRILLIANCE +” soft key to increase the brilliance.

2. Left click on the “BRILLIANCE -” soft key to decrease the brilliance.
Exiting the Brilliance Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “EXIT BRILLIANCE” soft key located directly
under the menu.
2. Left click to exit.
Returning to Standby Mode

The Standby (“STBY”) soft key, located at the top left-hand side of the display,
is used to return the display to Standby mode:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “STBY” soft key.
2. Left click to go the Standby mode.

Ship’s Heading and Speed

Introduction
Ship’s heading and speed are displayed in the top right corner of the display
and are available in both Standby and Transmit modes.
Heading Display
The heading display is divided into three fields.
Heading Caption
The heading caption is always “HDG”.
Heading Readout
A readout of true heading is always displayed, unless compass alignment is being
prompted, or a compass error has occurred.
Compass Errors
A compass error will cause the heading readout to change from green to red and
a compass alarm will be raised. If a stabilized picture presentation is in use, and
the error is still present, then after 1 minute, the picture will revert to Head-UP.
Compass Alignment
For certain types of compass input, it will be necessary to align the heading readout
by manually entering the current heading after the radar display is switched-on.
The need for alignment is indicated by the heading readout flashing green.
To Align the Compass
1. Position the screen cursor over the heading readout.
2. Left click to access. Heading is displayed in yellow.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the heading. The heading should
be the ship’s head derived from another source.
4. Left click to accept the new heading.
Course Over Ground

If “SOG” (Speed Over the Ground) is selected in the speed display, this shows COG
(Course Over the Ground). If the speed is less than 1 knot, the course is shown
as dashes.
If “STW” (Speed Through the Water) is selected in the speed display, the field is empty.
Speed Display
This line shows own ship’s speed and is divided into three fields.

Speed Caption
The speed caption is:
• “STW” (Speed Through Water) when the selected speed is “water locked”, or
• “SOG” (Speed Over the Ground) if the speed is “ground locked”.
Note: The caption is also “SOG” if a water speed has been selected “BUT”
drift is being applied (see Applying Drift below).
Speed Readout
This data can only be changed by the user when the Manual speed mode
is selected (see Manual Speed Mode below).
Speed Mode
An abbreviation of the selected Speed Mode is displayed in this field. The Speed
Caption field is only active when the “ECHO REF” speed mode is selected
(see Echo Reference Speed Mode below).
Speed Mode Options
A left click on the speed mode will reveal a drop-down menu containing a list of
speed modes. The external speed sources available to the user are determined
during initialisation. Refer to table on next page.
Note: If no data exists, dashes are displayed. A menu option is displayed in red
if an alarm exists for that particular speed source.
Selecting a Speed Mode
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the required mode.
“SET” and “DRIFT” can be applied in all speed modes except “ECHO REF”,
“NAV” or “LOG-G” (see Applying Drift below).
The table below gives a brief description of the various speed modes.
Speed Mode Speed Brief Description
Caption
Manual STW Allows you to enter a speed, normally in circumstances where no
speed data can be received from other external devices. The acceptable
input range is from 0 to 75 knots (see Manual Speed Mode)
ECHO Ref SOG Any tracked target can be selected as an echo reference. Once selected,
its velocity is assumed to be zero and own ship’s speed is calculated
on this assumption. The selected target is marked with an “R” symbol
in the video circle (see Echo Reference Speed Mode)
Navigation SOG Speed is derived from a Navigation Sensor. A Nav Speed alarm
Sensor (NAV) is raised if the input fails
Serial Log SOG Speed is derived from a Serial Log. Where the log is dual axis,
Ground Locked the fore/aft and port/starboard components of both ground and water
(LOG-G) data are displayed in the speed menu. The resultant velocity
Serial Log STW is displayed in the main speed readout for ground locked LOG,
Water Locked and the fore/aft component is only displayed for water locked LOG.
(LOG-W) Shown as a dashes (-) if off. A Log Error alarm is raised if the input fails

Manual Speed Mode

When MANUAL speed mode is selected, the speed can be set as follows:
1. Position the screen cursor over the speed readout.
2. Left click to access. Speed is displayed in yellow.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the speed.
4. Left click to accept the new speed.
Echo Reference Speed Mode
Select the ECHO REF mode from the Speed Caption menu.
Selecting a Target as the Echo Reference
1. Position the cursor over an established target.
2. Left click to select that target as the echo reference.
“R” is displayed adjacent to the reference target, and the target has its true vector
removed.
A prompt is displayed if no target is found.
Selecting a New Target as the Echo Reference
1. Left click on “SPEED CAPTION” to select ECHO REF mode.

2. Select a new target using the procedure above.
Applying Drift
A Set angle and Drift rate can be applied manually in all but the Echo Ref, Dual-axis
Serial Log (ground locked), and Nav Speed modes.
From within the drop-down menu:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “SET” or “DRIFT” caption.
2. A left click on either caption will reveal a drop-down numeric keypad. This keypad
includes a “CANCEL” option to replace the “SET” and “DRIFT” values with
dashes when not required, if you haven’t used the keypad before.
Drift Applied to Water Speeds
If a water speed has been selected, and a Set and Drift rate have been entered,
drift is applied to generate a ground speed and the speed caption changes to SOG.
The word “DRIFT” is also displayed in orange under the mode abbreviation in
the Speed Mode field.
Any previous values of Set or Drift are automatically cleared on selecting a ground
locked log speed, but it is possible to enter new values prior to selecting a water mode.
Note: If the selected speed input is a dual-axis log, the SOG is calculated using the
SET & DRIFT and both fore/aft and port/starboard components of the log input.

Presentation, Motion, Vector & Trail Modes

Introduction
The Motion Mode and Presentation Mode selection fields are located in
the top right corner of the display, immediately to the left of the Heading
and Speed displays, and are available in both Standby and Transmit
modes.
The Vector Mode and Trail Mode selection fields, located beneath the Heading
and Speed displays, are only available in Transmit mode.
Presentation Modes
Data from the compass can be processed to produce a correct “stabilized” display.
There are two types of stabilized display available, North-Up and Course-Up. Without
a compass input, the display is “unstabilized” and is shown with the ship’s heading
marker vertically upwards indicating straight ahead movement (Head-Up mode).
Head-Up Unstabilized display – the ship’s heading marker

is always shown vertically upwards indicating
straight ahead movement.
North-Up Stabilized display – the bearing scale shows

000° at the top of the video circle (assumed
to be true north). The ship’s heading marker
is shown at the appropriate bearing.
Course-Up Stabilized display – on selection of Course-Up

mode, the ship’s bearing is shown at the top of
the video circle with 000° elsewhere on the circle,
still representing true north.
The currently selected Presentation Mode is displayed.
The modes available for selection are:
• H UP Head-UP;
• N UP North-UP;
• C UP Course-UP.

Selecting a Presentation Mode

Either:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Presentation Mode field.
2. Left click consecutively to toggle through the available options.
Note: If H UP is the currently selected mode, the first left click will select the N UP
mode. Subsequent left clicks will then toggle between the C UP and N UP
options only. This prevents the accidental selection of an unstabilized mode
while in a stabilized mode. To select the H UP mode, use the method
described below.
Or:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Presentation Mode field.

2. Right click to reveal a drop-down menu.
3. Position the screen cursor over the required mode.
Course-UP Reset
When the C UP mode is in operation, if the ship alters course, a Course-Up reset
should be performed by reselecting the mode. This realigns the bearing scale
to bring the new course to the top of the video circle, i.e. it doesn’t happen
automatically as the ship changes course.
Motion Modes
The motion mode determines whether own ship moves across the radar picture or
remains at a selected point, and how the trails of moving targets are displayed.
The currently selected Motion Mode is displayed.

The modes available for selection are:
• RM (R) Relative Motion – Relative Trails;
• RM (T) Relative Motion – True Trails;
• TM True Motion.
In Relative Motion – Relative Trails, own ship is displayed at a fixed point in the video
circle (normally the centre) and all target trails are shown relative to own ship’s
movement. This means that stationary targets will have trails if own ship is moving.
In Relative Motion – True Trails, own ship is displayed at a fixed point in the video
circle (normally the centre). Stationary targets don’t produce any trails.
In True Motion, own ship moves across the video circle. Stationary targets, therefore,
don’t produce any trails.

Selecting a Motion Mode

Note: If the radar is in unstabilized (Head-Up) mode, only relative motion will be
available.
Either:
1. Position the screen cursor over the Motion Mode field.
2. Left click consecutively to toggle through the available options.
or
1. Position the screen cursor over the Motion Mode field.
3. Within the menu the current selection is highlighted, position the screen cursor
over the required mode.
Vector Modes
Vectors are shown on the radar display to indicate the velocity (speed and direction)
of own ship and moving targets. The length of the vector indicates speed and its
bearing indicates direction.
This function is only available in Transmit mode and is not displayed in Standby.
The Vector selection box is divided into two fields as illustrated below. The currently
selected mode is displayed.
The vector mode determines whether the vectors represent the true velocity
of targets or their velocity relative to the own ship.
True Vectors All moving targets and the own ship have a vector representing
their movement (speed and direction) over the water/ground.
Relative Vectors If the own ship is moving, all targets, moving and stationary, have
a vector representing their movement (speed and direction)
relative to own ship. Own ship will not have a vector in this mode.
Selecting a Vector Mode

A TRUE or REL (Relative) vector mode can be selected as follows:
1. Position the screen cursor over the vector mode selection field.
2. Consecutive left clicks will toggle the mode between TRUE (T) and RELATIVE (R)
vectors.
Note: If the Vector Timeout has been selected (ARPA/LIMITS & SETTINGS menu),
then the vector mode will revert to the same as the motion mode after
30 seconds.

Selecting a Vector Time

The “vector time” selected will determine the length of the vectors shown on the radar
display. The length of a vector represents the distance the ship/target will travel
in the “vector time”, for example:
• Vector Time =5 min;
• Speed (of ship/target) =12 kt;
• Length of Vector =1 n mile.
The optimum vector time will depend on the range scale in use.
The Vector Time can be adjusted as follows:

1. Position the screen cursor over the vector time field.
2. Left click to access.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the time.
4. Left click to accept.
Alternatively, a right click will reveal a drop-down numeric keypad from which
the vector time can be entered.
Extending the vector time lets you check on CPA’s of targets by projecting their
movements further into the future.
Trails Mode
Decaying video trails, showing the history of a target’s movements, can be displayed
in addition to the target vectors. The manner in which the trails are displayed
depends on the motion mode in use. In Relative Motion – Relative Trails (RM (R)),
the trails indicate the movement of the targets relative to own ship. In True Motion
and Relative Motion – True Trails (TM and RM (T)), the trails have own ship’s speed
applied and show movement over the ground if selected speed is ground locked,
or through the water if the speed is water locked.
The Trail function is only available in Transmit Mode and will not be displayed
in Standby.
When True Motion or Relative Motion – True Trails (TM or RM (T)) is selected,
the letter “T” (True Trails) is displayed at the LH side of the text in the Trails display
field, otherwise “R” (Relative Trails) is displayed, see below.
Trail Time
This parameter shows the length of the trails.
Selecting a Trails Mode
A left click reveals a drop-down menu containing the trail modes available. The currently
selected mode is highlighted. The options available for selection are as follows:
• “SHORT” – high rate of decay giving a short trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use (see table below);
• “LONG” – low rate of decay giving a long trail. Actual trail length will depend
on the range in use (see table below);

• “PERM” – permanent trail which does not decay. When the trail length becomes
greater than 99 minutes, it is indicated as “PERM”;
• “OFF” – trails removed from display;
• “RESET” – keeps the currently selected mode and clears the video.
Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the required mode; left click
to select.
By pressing the right mouse button you can remove the target trails from the screen
at any time and then restore the trails with another right mouse button click.
The selection of LONG or SHORT alters the speed of decay of the trails and is
dependant on the range scale in use. In the table below, the times given indicate the
length of the trail as displayed on the screen. Trails default to SHORT after power up.
Range Scale (n mile) Short Time Long Time
0.125 10 sec 30 sec
0.25 10 sec 30 sec
0.5 15 sec 45 sec
0.75 15 sec 45 sec
1.5 30 sec 90 sec
3.0 30 sec 90 sec
6.0 and above 1 min 3 min
Warning Prompts
Presentation Mode Warnings
If an attempt is made to enter a stabilized presentation mode when the compass
is on alarm, the following prompt is displayed.
EBL’s, ERBL’s and VRM’s

Introduction

Two EBL’s (Electronic Bearing Lines) and two VRM’s (Variable Range Markers) are
available and can be displayed simultaneously in the video circle. They are available
in both Standby and Transmit modes.
“VRM 1” is always associated with “EBL 1” and “VRM 2” with “EBL 2”. Both VRM’s
and EBL’s default to “OFF”.
In Standby mode, ranges and bearings are measured relative to the centre of the
video circle rather than own ship. When switching between Standby and Transmit
modes, all EBL’s and VRM’s are turned OFF.
The range and bearing values (displayed to the right of the VRM and EBL caption
boxes) are only displayed when the associated VRM or EBL is ON.
If an EBL is turned ON while its associated VRM is turned OFF, then the EBL
is displayed as an ERBL (Electronic Range and Bearing Line).
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

EBL’s can be turned ON or OFF independently. Any settings are remembered when
they are switched OFF.
Turning EBL’s ON and OFF

1. Position the screen cursor over the EBL caption box.
2. Left click to toggle ON or OFF.
An EBL is displayed as a green line in the video circle.

If an EBL is turned ON while its associated VRM is turned OFF, then the EBL
is displayed as an ERBL with a small circle positioned on the bearing line to indicate
the range (providing it is within the range of the video circle).
Changing the Bearing of an EBL or ERBL

1. Position the screen cursor over the bearing.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the bearing.
the bearing can be entered.
The range of an ERBL can be changed in the same way.
Depending on the presentation mode selected, the letter “T” is displayed to indicate
a true bearing or the letter “R” for relative.

Direct ERBL Control

To control the range and bearing of an ERBL from within the video circle:
1. Position the screen cursor (+) over the small VRM circle on the EBL.
3. Move the cursor control in any direction to change the ERBL settings.
4. Release the key to accept.
Note: If the small VRM circle is over a target, a single key click is associated
with that target. It is therefore essential to keep the left key pressed when
changing the ERBL settings.
Variable Range Marker (VRM)

The two VRM’s can be turned ON or OFF independently. Any settings are remembered
when they are switched OFF.
Turning VRM’s ON and OFF
1. Position the screen cursor over the VRM caption box.
2. Left click to toggle ON or OFF.
A VRM 1 is displayed as a green ring, and a VRM 2 is displayed as a red ring

in the video circle.
Changing the Range of a VRM

1. Position the screen cursor over the range.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the range.
the range can be entered.

Combined VRM and EBL Control

To control a VRM and it’s associated EBL from within the video circle:
1. Position the screen cursor (“+”) over the intersection of the VRM and EBL.
3. Move cursor control in any direction to change the range and bearing.
4. Release the key to accept.
Note: If the intersection of an EBL and its associated VRM is over a target,
a single key click is associated with that target. It is therefore essential
to keep the left key pressed when changing the VRM and EBL.
Options
EBL 2/VRM 2 can be either centered or off-centered (EBL 1/VRM 1 can only be
centered). When centered, EBL 2/VRM 2 are displayed with their origin at the
turning unit position. When off-centered there are two further options, dropped or
carried. When carried in a stabilized mode, the off-centered position is at a constant
true bearing and range from the turning unit. When carried in unstabilized mode,
the off-center position will be at a constant relative bearing and range. When
dropped they remain at a fixed position on the ground or on the water depending on
whether the speed in use is “speed over ground” or “speed through water”.
The default settings are Centered and Carried.
Note: The dropped option is not available in H-Up presentation mode.
A letter (D) is displayed in the EBL caption box if dropped is selected.

A letter (C) is displayed in the EBL caption box if carried is selected.
To select the required option (for EBL 2/VRM 2 ONLY) Either EBL 2 or VRM 2
must be ON:
1. Position the screen cursor over the EBL 2 or VRM 2 caption box.
2. Right click to reveal the drop-down menu.

3. Move the screen cursor to the required option. If OFFCENTRE is selected,

the screen cursor is repositioned at the centre of the video circle leaving
the drop-down menu in place:
– Move the cursor (+) to the required off-centre location;
– Left click to select; the screen cursor returns to the EBL 2/VRM’s caption box
and the EBL/VRM is redrawn at the new position.
– Move the cursor to the required (Carry or Drop) option and left click to select.
Defaults
If the video circle is in a stabilized display mode, the bearing of EBL’s is true
(i.e., with respect to true north); if unstabilized, the bearing is relative to own ship’s
heading line. Switching between stabilized and unstabilized modes causes both
EBL’s to revert to their default values. They are also turned OFF if previously
set to ON.
The default bearing for EBL 1 is 5.0° and for EBL 2 is 355°. The default range
for VRM 1 is 2.5 n mile and for VRM 2 is 4.5 n mile.
Target Functions
Introduction
In Transmit mode, any target that appears on the radar display within 40 n mile can
be tracked. The method used is target acquisition and auto-tracking. Once a target
has been acquired, information relating to the target’s proximity to own ship and its
speed, and bearing is maintained until the target is “cancelled”.
Information on one or more tracked targets can be displayed in a target box
(see Target Data later in this section).
Manual Acquisition of Targets

Manual acquisition is only available on range scales of 0.25 n mile and above.
When a target is acquired, it is automatically assigned an identification number.
Target numbering always starts at 1 and goes up to a maximum of 40. A target is
assigned the next number in the sequence. Gaps which occur due to targets being
cancelled or dropped, are not filled until the maximum number has been reached.

Acquiring a Target
1. Position the cursor over the target in the video circle.
2. Left click to acquire the target.
An initial tracking symbol [2] is displayed centred on the target’s estimated position.
After 16 good plots, this initial tracking symbol is replaced by the target vector
indicating the acquired target’s speed and direction [1] (see Vector Modes
in the paragraph Presentation, Motion, Vector & Trail Modes).
Cancelling Target Acquisition

1. Position the cursor over an acquired target in the video circle.
2. Right click to cancel the target acquisition.
The target vector and associated target information are removed from the target.
Automatic Targeting ARPA Radars

Target Acquisition
Targets can be acquired manually by the operator or automatically using operator
definable auto-acquisition zones. When a target enters an auto-acquisition zone,
an alarm is raised and the target is automatically “acquired”. Autoacquisition zones
are available in all presentation and motion modes. Targets cannot be acquired
within 0.25 n mile of own ship.
Target Tracking Limitations

• When the maximum number of targets are being tracked, the “TRACKS FULL”
alarm is raised and another target cannot be acquired until one or more targets
are cancelled;
• If the radar is switched to Standby, all targets will be cancelled automatically;
• Already acquired targets are dead reckoned (DR) when within 0.25 n mile
of own ship.
The integrity of ARPA tracking is a function of many variables which include clutter
conditions, signal-to-noise ratio and sensor errors (log, compass, nav. input, etc.).
The design of the tracker minimises the effects of these errors but the operator must
be aware that such errors will produce discrepancies in derived tracked target
information such as true speed, course, bearing, CPA, and TCPA.
The possibility of target swop is minimised by the use of damped plot predictions
in the tracker. The ARPA tracker employs advanced rain and sea clutter rejection
techniques independent of the display settings. A fully established tracked target will
not be affected by large levels of sea or rain clutter, however attempting to acquire
a target at close range in severe clutter conditions may cause the occasional
appearance of the lost target symbol and its associated alarm.
When changing from one speed mode to another, and particularly between a water
speed and a ground speed mode, the vectors take some time to resettle. Three minutes
should be allowed to obtain full accuracy when switching between speed modes.

Compass Errors
If targets are being tracked, a compass error will cause affected target tote data
to change from green to red. The affected data being TBRG, CPA, TCPA, COG
(or CSE), SOG (or STW), BCR, and BCT. After 1 minute, all tracked targets will be
cancelled; autoacquisition zones, mapping facilities, the constant radius turn, and
plots will be switched off; and it will not be possible to use these facilities or select
a stabilized mode, until a valid compass heading is available. The system will reset
to the H-Up presentation mode.
Target Alarm Symbols
If an alarm is raised against a target currently in the video circle, an alarm symbol
is displayed. This symbol flashes until the alarm is acknowledged. The alarm symbol
then remains displayed as long as the alarm condition exists.
Even if the target is not currently displayed in the video circle, an alarm will still be
raised. An unacknowledged alarm always has a higher priority than an acknowledged
alarm. The following alarm symbols, listed in order of priority, are used:
• if the radar hasn’t been able to obtain successfully the position of ◊

a target, which is being used as an echo reference during the last three
radar scans, “LOST REF” alarm is raised;
• if an acquired target infringes the bow crossing limits, “BOW CROSSING” ╬
alarm is raised;
• if an acquired target infringes the CPA and TCPA limits, “CPA/TCPA” △
alarm is raised;
• when a target enters an auto-acquisition zone, “AZ ENTRY” alarm is raised; ▽
• if the radar hasn’t been able to obtain successfully a target’s position ◊

during the last six radar scans, “LOST TARGET” alarm is raised.
Guard Zones
Two annular guard zones are available which are always displayed relative to own
ship’s head. Guard zones are active on all ranges in all motion and presentation
modes. When a target enters a guard zone, an alarm is raised.
If 100 infringements have been detected, “ZONES FULL” alarm is raised.

Accessing the Guard Zones Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “AZ” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “GUARD ZONES” menu.
A left click on the “EXIT GUARD ZONES” soft key will close the “GUARD ZONES”
menu.
Turning Guard Zones On/Off

Note: Guard zones retain their definitions when turned off.
1. Position the screen cursor over “ZONE” line in the menu.
2. Left click to toggle the selected zone “ON” and “OFF”.
Defining a Guard Zone
Note: A guard zone is not active while it is being defined.
1. Position the cursor over “EDIT” soft key.
2. Left click to select edit mode for the associated guard zone.
3. Move the cursor to the centre of the video circle from where the zone can be edited.
The other zone will temporarily be displayed at its last setting for reference purposes
(provided the range in use is suitable), but will not detect any infringements unless
it is currently “ON”. The selected zone is displayed in a different colour,
and the associated “ZONE ON/OFF” line in the menu shows “EDIT”.
4. Edit the zone as described in Annular Zone Editing below.
5. Select another soft key (“EDIT” or “EXIT GUARD ZONES”) to store the new
zone and automatically switch it on.
Annular Zone Editing

Changing the Start/Stop Bearing
1. Position the cursor over the start or stop bearing as required.
3. Drag the start or stop bearing to its new position.
4. Release the key.
Changing the Range of a Zone
1. Place the cursor over the inner arc of the annulus.
3. Drag the entire zone to its new position.
4. Release the key.

Altering the Depth of the Zone

1. Place the cursor over the outer arc of the annulus.
3. Drag the outer arc to its new position.
4. Release the key.
Target Data
The target box defaults to showing data for a single target.
Acquired Target Data

The following data is shown:
• “TARGET” – target identification number/name;

• “RANGE” – range of target from own ship;
• “T BRG” – bearing of target from own ship;
• “CPA” – closest point of approach to own ship;
• “TCPA” – time to closest point of approach;
• “CSE/COG” – target’s course through the water (CSE) or course over
the ground (COG);
• “STW/SOG” – target’s speed through the water (STW) or speed over
the ground (SOG);
• “BCR” – bow crossing range;
• “BCT” – bow crossing time.
The target, for which data is shown, can be selected by left clicking on an acquired
target in the video circle. The selected target [2] is identified in the video circle by
a small “[ ]” symbol centred on the plot origin.

Trial Manoeuvres
A trial manoeuvre can be carried out to see the effect of a proposed manoeuvre
of own ship:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “TRIAL” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “TRIAL MANOEUVRE” menu.
Note: Own ship’s course and speed are used as the default settings in the “TRIAL
MANOEUVRE” menu.
Running a Trial Manoeuvre

Final Course of Own Ship
Enter the proposed course of own ship to be followed after the manoeuvre:
1. Left click on the course line (CSE in the example) to activate.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to set the course required.
Speed of Manoeuvre
If you intend to change speed, enter the proposed speed of own ship
to be maintained during and after the manoeuvre:
1. Left click on the speed line (STW in the example) to activate.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to set the required speed.
Manoeuvre Delay
Enter the proposed time delay between switching the trial manoeuvre “ON”
and actually starting the manoeuvre:
1. Left click on the “DELAY” line to activate.
2. Move the cursor control left or right to set the required delay.
Vector Type
Select “TRUE” or “REL” (Relative) vector type as follows:
1. Position the screen cursor over the vector type selection field in the “TRIAL
MANOEUVRE” menu.
2. Consecutive left clicks will toggle the type between true “T VECTORS”
and relative “R VECTORS”.

Vector Time
Enter the proposed vector time:
1. Position the screen cursor over the vector time field in the “TRIAL MANOEUVRE”
menu.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the time.

Note: Entering a longer vector time will allow you to see further into the trial
manoeuvre. The above procedures (for Vector Type and Vector Time) will
overwrite any selections made earlier (see Vector Modes in the paragraph
Presentation, Motion, Vector & Trail Modes), and will remain in force
until changed. If required, reset the vector time after the trial manoeuvre
is completed.
Manoeuvre Switch-ON
Left click on the “RUNNING OFF” line to switch the manoeuvre “ON”.
The “manoeuvre delay” entered earlier will start to count down.
The manoeuvre vectors are displayed until the time for the manoeuvre expires,
or the manoeuvre is switched-OFF. (When the manoeuvre is running, a left click
on the “RUNNING ON” line will switch-OFF the manoeuvre.)
The trial manoeuvre vectors are displayed when the trial manoeuvre is running.
If true (“T”) vectors are selected, the trial vector is shown for own ship only, as shown
in the example below. This shows own ship’s true course during the manoeuvre.
If relative (“R”) vectors are selected, the trial vectors are applied to every acquired
target, with own ship’s vector suppressed, and show the course of the targets
relative to own ship.
Note: “Vector type” (T or R VECTORS) and “vector time” may be changed at any
time before or during the manoeuvre.
While the trial manoeuvre is running and the Trial Manoeuvre menu is displayed,
the word “TRIAL” will appear at the bottom of the video circle. Once the delay has
elapsed, the word “TRIAL” is removed from the display, and the manoeuvre
is turned “OFF”.
Exit from TRIAL MANOEUVRE Menu
To exit from the “TRIAL MANOEUVRE” menu, click the right mouse button on
“TRIAL” soft key.

Display of UAIS Information

Display of UAIS Targets
With the arrival of data from the UAIS transponder, information on targets appears
on the radar display.
With the first appearance of information, a UAIS target is shown as an acute-angled

triangle (sleeping UAIS).
To acquire a UAIS target for tracking, position the cursor on the target mark
and click the left trackball/mouse button. The tracked UAIS target will be shown
as an acute-angled triangle with the relative bearing line.
If a UAIS target is on the turning circle, the tip of the heading line will show the turn
direction.

COG/SOG vector is shown as a dashed line originating from the centre of the triangle.
UAIS targets can be acquired automatically if they are within the guard zone or
if they are dangerous targets (by CPA\TCPA criterion). In this case, UAIS targets
are shown as red coloured marks flickering with a frequency of 1 Hz.
In the case of lost tracking (data stops arriving), after some time, the UAIS
will be displayed in the form of a blue coloured crossed triangle.
Obtaining UAIS Data

To obtain data on a UAIS target, position the cursor on the target mark and click
the left trackball/mouse button. The Targets panel will display information on
the acquired target.
The triangle next to the target number will indicate availability of data from the UAIS
transponder. The target’s course and speed will be shown from the UAIS data.
To display additional UAIS information, position the cursor on the panel and click
the left trackball/mouse button. The screen will display additional UAIS information.

Additional UAIS information panel will contain the following lines:
MMSI Target’s MMSI.

HEADING Heading.
Navigational status.
TYPE Ship type (as per the standard classification).
IMO NUM IMO number.
CALL SIGN Target callsign.
Ship name.
Port of destination.
ARPA Functions
Introduction
As the radar is configured as an ARPA, a large range of additional target related
functions can be provided. Access to these functions is via the programmable
“ARPA” key.

Accessing ARPA Functions

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ARPA” soft key.
2. Right click to toggle ARPA data display “ON” or “OFF”.
Note: When the ARPA function is turned-ON, only the options currently ON
in the “ARPA” menu will be visible. When turned-OFF, all ARPA related
synthetics are removed from the radar picture.
A left click will reveal the “ARPA” menu.
A left click on the “EXIT ARPA” soft key will close the menu.
Turning the Display of ARPA Data On or Off

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “ARPA DATA” line.
2. Left click to toggle the display of ARPA Data “ON” or “OFF”.
Targets Currently Being Tracked

The “TRK TARGETS” line in the menu indicates the number of targets currently
being tracked.
Past Position Dots

If past position dots are switched on, dots will be displayed indicating the past positions
for all tracked targets. The interval between the dots is selected by the user.
As soon as a target is acquired, the past position data starts to build up. The number
of dots displayed, up to a maximum of 4, is determined by the length of time
the target has been tracked and the time interval selected.
Past position dots are available in all presentation and motion modes providing
the system has a working compass.
To turn the past position dots ON or OFF:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “PAST POSN” line.
2. Left click to toggle the display of past position dots “ON” or “OFF”. When the past
position dots are switched “ON”, the time interval between dots will be displayed
in the menu.

To select the past position time interval:

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “PAST POSN” line.
2. Right click to reveal a drop-down menu listing the time intervals available.
3. Left click on the time interval required.
Target ID’s
This facility enables the operator to select whether target ID’s are displayed in
the video circle against the associated tracked targets.
To turn on the display of target identifiers:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “TARGET ID” line.
2. Left click to toggle through the options available, i.e. “OFF” – “NUMBER”.
or:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “TARGET ID” line.
3. Left click on the option to be displayed, or on “OFF” to turn the display off.
AIS Information Display

This function allows turning on/off the display of AIS information (by default, the display
of AIS information is always ON).
To turn the AIS information display ON or OFF:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “AIS DATA” line.
2. Left click to toggle the display of AIS information “ON” or “OFF”.

Automatic Dropping of Targets

If Autodrop mode is switched on, targets which are not a danger to own ship
are automatically dropped without any alarm being raised.
Any target, whether it was acquired manually or automatically, will be dropped

if it meets all of the following criteria:
• the target is not in an auto-acquisition zone;

• it is not the echo reference target;
• it doesn’t have “CPA/TCPA” or “Bow Crossing” alarm raised against it;
• the TCPA is more than 3 minutes ago;
• the target is astern of own ship;
• its range is more than 10 n mile from own ship.
Regardless of whether Autodrop mode is ON or OFF, all targets will be dropped
when the radar is switched to Standby. Also, any target which meets any of the following
criteria will be automatically dropped without an alarm being raised:
• its range is more than 40 n mile from own ship;

• valid plot data has not been obtained for the last 60 radar scans, i.e., the target
has been lost.
Autodrop
1. Click the left mouse button on “LIMITS & SETTING” line in “ARPA” menu:
the screen will display a menu with the same name.
2. The Autodrop facility is selected (“ON” or “OFF”) by a left click on the “AUTODROP”
line in the menu.

Vector Timeout
If the selected vector mode does not match the current motion mode, the vector
data is displayed in orange. If “VECTOR TIMEOUT” has been selected (ON) using
the procedure below, then the vector mode will revert to the same as the motion
mode after 30 seconds.
To turn vector timeout ON or OFF:
1. Within the “LIMITS & SETTING” menu, position the screen cursor over
the “VECTOR TIMEOUT” line.
2. Left click to toggle for “ON” or “OFF”.
NMEA Targets
The facility is provided to output data on tracked targets. The output data conforms
to the NMEA 0183 standard. Data is output on all tracked targets provided that
Track Table O/P has been selected under initialization:
1. Position the screen cursor on “NMEA TARGETS” line in “LIMITS & SETTING” menu.
2. Left mouse clicks switch between the display of data on all targets
(“ALL” or “MULTI TARGETS”).
or:
1. Position the screen cursor on “NMEA TARGETS” line in “LIMITS & SETTING” menu.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu on the screen.
3. Click the left mouse button either on “ALL” if you wish to obtain data on all
the tracked targets, or on “MULTI TARGET”.
Limits of Targets Maximum Approach Point and Bow Crossing

Parameters
Limits of CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT can be change in the following way:
1. Position the screen cursor on “CPA LIMIT”, “TCPA LIMIT”, “BCR LIMIT”
or “BCT LIMIT” line in “LIMITS & SETTING” menu.
2. Click the left mouse button to activate it.
3. Move the cursor to the left or to the right until the required CPA/TCPA
and BCR/BCT limit value is obtained.
4. Click the left mouse button to record the selected value.

Parallel Index Lines
Introduction
The Parallel Index Line (PI) facility allows either up to four or up to five index lines
to be displayed simultaneously. The lines span the entire video circle, irrespective
of the range scale in use, and are retained in the non-volatile memory. They are
available in all presentation and motion modes.
Note: The radar display has up to four index lines simultaneously if
@PIE 0x0000000(0) parameter is set for “Radar” task in the Configuration
Editor. If @PIE 0x0000000(1) parameter is set, up to five index lines
can be shown on the radar display (see NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20).
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION AND INSTALLATION MANUAL).
Index lines are available both in Transmit and Standby modes and are available
on range scales of 0.25 n mile (0.5 km) and above.
Each index line is defined by the range of its closest point to own ship, its bearing
and its line type. Bearings are true when in a stabilized presentation mode, but
relative to own ship’s head when in an unstabilized mode.
Accessing the Edit Index Lines Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “PI” soft key which is located in the bottom
right corner of the display.
2. Left click to reveal the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu.
When the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu is displayed, it overwrites the target data and
user data areas, and presents a new set of soft keys.
Note: A left click on the “EXIT EDIT LINES” soft key will close the menu.

Index Line Editing

Within the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu, all lines are used for editing, but
are not active until edit mode is selected.
A defined line will be shown at its last position. If not yet defined, it will default
to the bearing of any other defined line. If it is the first line to be defined, it will be
shown as a horizontal line through the centre of the video circle.
Selecting the EDIT Mode
1. Position the screen cursor over one of programmable “LINE 1…LINE 4” keys
located under the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu, thus selecting the line which
should be edited.
2. Left click to access. The menu will show the name of the line which is being
edited (e.g. “EDIT LINE 3”).

Changing the Bearing of Selected Line

The range and bearing of a selected line can be changed by dragging the line within
the video circle, or from within the menu using the cursor control or a series
of drop-down keypads:
1. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over any point on the line other
than the pivot point.
3. Rotate the line about the pivot point by dragging to the required bearing.
The bearing is automatically updated in the menu.
4. Release the left key.
Alternatively, a left click on the “BRG” line in the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu will
allow adjustment using movement of the cursor control. A right click will reveal
a drop-down numeric keypad from where a new bearing can be entered.
Changing the Range of Selected Line

1. Within the video circle, place the video cursor over the pivot point of the selected line.
3. Drag the line to the required range from own ship. The range is automatically
updated in the menu.
Note: Range is the shortest distance from Own Ship to index line.
Alternatively, a left click on the “RANGE” line in the “EDIT INDEX LINES” menu will
allow adjustment using movement of the cursor control. A right click will reveal
a drop-down numeric keypad from where a new range can be entered.
Removing a Line
1. Position the screen cursor over the “DELETE” caption in the “EDIT INDEX
LINES” menu.
2. Left click deletes the line specified in the menu.
Additional Functions in Five Index Lines Editing Menu

The editing menu for five index lines has the following additional functions:
• “LOAD” – to load a previously created and saved group of index lines;

• “SAVE” – to save a previously created group of index lines for the future loading;
• “REMOVE” – to delete a saved group of index lines.
The group of index lines for any of the aforementioned functions is selected from
“SELECT GROUP” digital key panel. The panel is opened by clicking the left mouse
button on the selected function key.
The line group number is entered by using digital keys or “increase/decrease”

keys. The current number is displayed under the keys. After the input of the group
number, press “ENTER” key to perform the selected function. The selected group
number is displayed in “INDEX LINES GROUP” editing menu line. To cancel
the selected function, press “CANCEL” key on the digital panel.

Exiting from Edit Mode

Edit mode can be exited either by a second left click on the “EDIT” soft key, or
by a left click on the “EXIT EDIT LINES” soft key.
When an editing session is ended, all edited data is saved in the radar’s non-volatile
memory.
Warning Prompt
If an attempt is made to edit or turn index lines “ON” when an invalid range is
selected, the following prompt is displayed.
System Menu
Introduction
Then programmable “SYSTEM” key opens the system menu where from BridgeMaster E
radar can be turned off, and another radar selection menu exited to (see the beginning
of section Radar Selection and Adjustment of its Initial Parameters).
Access to the System Menu

1. Position the screen cursor on the programmable “SYSTEM” key.
2. Click the left mouse button to call the system menu.
In the current version, the system menu contains a single “EXIT” function. This function
closes BridgeMaster E radar screen and returns you to the selection menu of another
radar available in the simulator.
To exit from the system menu without turning the radar off, click the left mouse
button on “EXIT SYSTEM” line.
Tools
Introduction
The “TOOLS” soft key provides access to a number of on-screen tools which allow
the user to:
• Display a half or full circle “ROTATING CURSOR”;
• “Mark” up to 20 points of interest on screen.

Accessing the TOOLS

A left click will reveal the “TOOLS” menu and an “EXIT TOOLS” soft key.
Note: A left click on the “EXIT TOOLS” soft key will close the menu.
Rotating Cursor
A HALF circle or FULL circle rotating cursor can be displayed to provide a means
of parallel indexing. The rotating cursor consists of a single white line diameter
plus a number of equally spaced lines, which are perpendicular to the single line.
The spacing of the perpendicular lines corresponds to the range ring spacing
on all ranges. The rotating cursor is always centered on own ship.
The displayed cursor can be rotated by dragging (left click, hold and drag) the end
points of the lines which pass through the video circle centre. The end points are
marked with semi-circle.
To turn the rotating cursor ON or OFF:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “DISPLAY” line under
the “ROTATING CURSOR” heading.
2. Left click to toggle the cursor “ON” or “OFF”.

To select HALF or FULL circle cursor:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “TYPE” line.
2. Left click to toggle the cursor to “HALF” or “FULL”.
Marks
Up to 20 position “marks” can be defined within the video circle. The marks are
available in all motion modes, presentation modes (except H-Up mode) and range
scales, and may be “dropped” or “carried”. When carried, the marks remain at
a fixed range and bearing from own ship. When dropped, they remain at a fixed
position on the ground or in the water (depending on the speed mode in use).

In the menu “MARKS: nn” line indicates the number of marks currently defined,
and the “MODE” line indicates whether “CARRY” or “DROP” is selected.
To turn marks ON or OFF:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “DISPLAY” line under
the “MARKS: nn” heading.
2. Left click to toggle marks ON or OFF.
Marks are displayed as small white crosses (x) with rings within the video circle.
To add marks:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “ADD” line.
3. Position the cursor over the position to be marked.
4. Left click to mark.

If an attempt is made to add a mark when 20 marks are already defined, the following
prompt is displayed:
To delete individual marks:
1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “DELETE” line.
3. Position the cursor over the mark to be deleted.
4. Left click to delete.
To delete all marks:

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “DELETE ALL” line.
2. Left click to “DELETE ALL” marks.
WARNING!
This operation cannot be undone.
Note: All “marks” are cleared automatically if the “Drop” or “Carry” mode is altered,
or the presentation mode is changed between stabilized and unstabilized.

Navigation
Introduction
The display of waypoints, routes, and steering data is switched ON and OFF using
the navigation (NAV) soft key. This key also provides access to the “NAVIGATION”
menu and the editing facilities for:
• defining own ship’s position;
• switching route display “ON” and “OFF”.
Accessing the NAVIGATION Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “NAV” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “NAVIGATION” menu.
The Route Display can be switched-ON and OFF from within the menu.
A left click on the “EXIT NAVIGATION” soft key will close the menu.
Cursor Display
Within the “NAVIGATION” menu, the “CURSOR DISP” line relates to the cursor
data displayed when the cursor is within the video circle. The information can be
displayed in Lat/Lon or Range/Bearing format, or in both.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “CURSOR DISP” line in the “NAVIGATION”
menu.
2. Left click to toggle for “BOTH”, “LAT/LON” or “RANGE/BRG”.
Alternatively, a right click on the “CURSOR DISP” line will reveal a drop-down menu
listing the options available. Left click on the option required, or right click to close
the menu without further action.
Turning the Route Display ON and OFF

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ROUTE DISPLAY” line in the “NAVIGATION”
menu.
2. Left click to toggle the route display “ON” or “OFF”.
Note: If H-Up mode is selected when route display is “ON”, the route display
is inhibited until a stabilized mode is selected.

Warning Prompts
If an attempt is made to turn the route display “ON” when the system is unstabilized,
outside of the allowed range scale or outside allowed latitudes, an appropriate
prompt is displayed.
Alarms
Introduction
Alarms are displayed at the right side of the video circle in the Alarms display box
which is present in both Standby and Transmit modes.
A list of alarms, together with a brief description and suggested remedial actions
for each alarm, is given at the end of the chapter.
Types of Alarm
There are three types of alarm:
• Those which will clear automatically when the condition that caused the alarm is
no longer present. For example, Bow Crossing CPA/TCPA and Position alarms;
• Those which will clear as soon as they are acknowledged even if the condition
that caused the alarm is still present. For example, AZ Entry alarms;
• Those which will clear only when the alarm has been acknowledged and
the condition that caused the alarm is no longer present. For example, Compass
and Position alarms.
Alarm Display
The Alarm display box provides an indication of the current alarm state and a means
of acknowledging alarms, should any occur. There are three alarm states:
• No Alarms;
• Unacknowledged Alarms;
• Acknowledged Alarms.
No Alarms
If there are no alarms, the caption “NO ALARMS” is displayed in green.
Unacknowledged Alarms
When an alarm condition is detected, that alarm flashes in red in the Alarm display
box. If more than one alarm condition exists, the alarm with the highest priority is
displayed. The alarm remains displayed until it is either acknowledged, automatically
cleared, or is replaced with an alarm of higher priority.
To Acknowledge an Alarm
1. Position the screen cursor over the Alarm display box.

2. Left click to acknowledge.
If there is more than one alarm, the acknowledged alarm is replaced by the next
HIGHEST priority unacknowledged alarm.
3. Repeat the process until all alarms have been acknowledged. When there are
no further unacknowledged alarms, the caption “ALARMS” is displayed in red
and is steady (i.e., is not flashing).

Acknowledged Alarms
If there are acknowledged alarms but no unacknowledged (new) alarms, the caption
“ALARMS” is displayed in red and is steady.
Alarm Facilities
A right click on the Alarm display box reveals a drop-down list of up to six
acknowledged alarms, arranged in order of priority, and a drop-down alarm menu.
Note: When required, user a right click to exit and remove the list.
The menu offers independent option:
BUZZER – when this is switched-ON, a beep is sounded for each new alarm.
The Alarm BUZZER

To turn the alarm “BUZZER ON” or “BUZZER OFF”:
1. Within the drop-down menu, position the screen cursor over the “BUZZER” line.
2. Left click to toggle the buzzer “ON” or “OFF”.
3. Right click to close the menu.
List of Alarms
The alarms, which are raised by the system and appear in the ALARM box at
the right-hand side of the display, are given in alphabetical order in the table below.
If more than one alarm exists, the alarm with the highest priority (the most important)
is displayed.
Alarm Message Brief Description/Remedial Actions

BOW CROSS Bow Cross limit reached. Check limit – left click BC line in TOTE
COMPASS Compass Alarm. Check wiring and SYSTEM menu – TEST DATA
CPA/TCPA Limit reached. Check limits – left click on CPA or TCPA line in TOTE
GZ ALARM EPA only. Target detected in guard zone
LOG ERROR NO pulses or NO serial input. Check TYPE selected and wiring
LOST REF ECHO REF target lost. Select new target or different speed source
LOST TARGET Tracked target no longer being seen
STBY/TX ERR Transceiver failed to transmit
TRACKS FULL Tracking maximum number of targets – cancel some

Search and Rescue Detection (SART)
WARNING!
A SART will only respond to an X-Band (3 cm) radar. It will NOT be seen
on an S-BAND (10 cm) radar.
Introduction
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 n mile. Each radar pulse received causes
it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar
frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 ms) through the
band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 ms) through the band back to
the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles.
At some point in the sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating
radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the
frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the
radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 n mile will be
shown.
Radar Range Scale

When looking for a SART, it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 n mile range
scale, Range Scales and Range Rings.
SART Range Errors

When responses from only 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART
is at a range greater than about 1 n mile), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 n mile beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of
these dots will be no more than 150 metres beyond the true position.

Radar Bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with
the range scale and the associated pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3–5 MHz
are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10–25 MHz
with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it
is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART,
Radar Transmission Pulse Length.
Radar Side Lobes

As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the SART
responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the
use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful to observe
the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions, and also they will
confirm that the SART is near to own ship.
Detuning the Radar

To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions, the radar may be detuned
to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response. The BridgeMaster E radar
is equipped with automatic/manual frequency control and can be detune manually,
Transceiver Tuning. Care should be taken in operating the radar in the detuned
condition as other wanted navigational and anti-collision information may be removed.
The tuning should be returned to normal operation as soon as possible.
Video Gain
For maximum range SART detection, the normal gain setting for long range
detection should be used, i.e., with a light background noise speckle visible,
Video Processing Controls.
Anti-clutter Sea Control

For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum.
Care should be exercised as wanted targets in sea clutter may be obscured.
Note also that in clutter conditions, the first few dots of the SART response may not
be detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case,
the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 n mile from the further
dot back towards own ship.
The BridgeMaster E Radar has automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities,
Video Processing Controls. Because of the way in which the automatic sea control
functions, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has
been detected. The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can then
be compared with manual control.
Anti-clutter Rain Control

This should be used normally (i.e., to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect
a SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of
the anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that Racon responses, which are often in the form
of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
The BridgeMaster E radar has automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities,
Video Processing Controls. Because of the way in which the automatic control
functions, the operator is advised to use manual control initially until the SART has
been detected. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can then
be compared with manual control.

BridgeMaster E Tactical Radar Imitator
BRIDGEMASTER E TACTICAL RADAR IMITATOR

To start radar imitator, press the “Bridge Master E Tactical” button from the radar
selection menu.
Note: Radar selection and radar parameters adjusting see the first section
of this chapter.
Overview
Simulator Bridge Master E Tactical radar is the modified Bridge Master E radar with
the added general and naval features:
• Mapping;
• Routes;
• Target association;
• Constant radius turn;
• Polygonal auto-acquisition zone capability;
• Freeze function;
• Red first strike;
• Helicopter approach sector;
• Advanced parallel index lines;
• Target intercept.
Note: This section describes additional features of the Bridge Master E radar.
Full description of the Bridge Master E radar is given in the previous section
of this chapter.

Maps
The Maps facility allows user defined maps and guard lines to be displayed within
the video circle.
Maps and guard lines can be displayed in either Standby or Transmit mode.
They can only be displayed in stabilized presentation modes (North-Up or Course-Up)
and only on range scales of 0.5 n mile and above.
They cannot be displayed at latitudes further north than 78°N or further south
than 78°S.
Maps are stored as files on a “memory card” and can be selected for display either
individually or as a folio. A folio is a collection of up to 10 maps. Up to 500 elements
of a map can be displayed at any one time. When a folio is selected for display,
the closest 500 elements to own ship are automatically selected from all the maps
in the folio. This enables maps for particular routes to be grouped together and
automatically displayed when own ship’s lat/long is appropriate.
Offsets
In order to compensate for errors in the alignment of maps it is possible to add

an offset to a map position. The offset is applied to all points of a map and
to all associated layers. The same offset is applied to all maps in a folio.
Layers
Individual maps are layered with each layer containing a different type of data such
as coastlines, buoys, etc. Individual layers can then be selected for display.
Each layer conveys information as a series of predefined lines or symbols.
Type of data Display on the chart

Dangers Various symbols, in magenta
Buoys and beacons Various symbols, each with its own predefined colour
(either red or green)
Coastline Continuous white line
Ship safety contour Continuous grey line
Traffic zones Continuous magenta line
Prohibited areas Dashed magenta line
Channel boundaries Dashed grey line
Guard Lines
Up to twenty guard lines, each defined by a start and end position, can be displayed.
When the guard lines are active, an alarm is raised when any of the lines are
crossed by own ship. Guard lines are displayed as thick red lines when active.
When a crossing alarm is raised, the guard line being crossed will flash until
the alarm is acknowledged.

Datums
Maps are always displayed and stored referenced to the W84 (WGS84) datum.
Maps Menu Description

1. Position the screen cursor over the “MAPS” soft key which is located
in the bottom right corner of the display.
2. Left click to reveal the “MAPS” menu and soft keys:
The soft keys, associated with the “MAPS” menu, enable maps, layers, folios
and guard lines to be created, edited, cleared and deleted.
A left click on the “EXIT MAPS” key will close the menu.
Selecting Maps and Folios from a “Memory Card”

1. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the filename
of the map or folio currently selected, or the line of dashes if none have been
previously selected.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu. This menu contains a list of filenames
for the maps and folios stored on the “memory card”:

3. Position the screen cursor over the filename of the map or folio you wish to
recall. The file selected will be highlighted. Use the scroll facility if required.
Note: A right click will close the menu with no further action.
All layers of the map or folio selected will be switched ON.
A selected map or folio will not be switched ON if certain parameter limits are
exceeded. A warning prompt will also be given if maps are missing from a selected
folio. The missing maps can be identified by left clicking on the “FOLIOS” soft key:
the missing maps are shown in red.
Turning the Selected Map On and OFF

To turn the selected map ON and OFF:
1. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the “MAP DISPLAY”
caption.
2. Left click to toggle between map “ON” and “OFF”.
The “MAPS” soft key provides an easy way of suppressing the display of maps
and guard lines.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “MAPS” soft key in the bottom right corner
of the display.
2. Right click to toggle between maps “ON” and maps “OFF”.
Note: When “ON” is selected, only the map features which were previously turned
ON from within the “MAPS” menu are displayed.
Offsetting Map Position

A map can be re-aligned by up to a maximum of 9.99’ in both axis to compensate
for errors in position information. This allows a map to be aligned with known targets
and map symbols. Offsetting can be achieved by either the direct input of a numeric
offset, or by a process of dragging within the video circle.
Offsetting a Map by Direct Input

1. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the “OFFSET” line.
2. Right click to reveal the “MAP OFFSET” drop-down numerical keypad from
where the relevant offsets can be entered:
3. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the offset.
4. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define the offset.

Offsetting a Map in the Video Circle

1. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the “OFFSET” line.
2. Left click to activate the dragging facility.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle and position it over a map segment.
4. Press and hold down the left key, and then drag the map to the required offset
position.
Selecting Map Layers

Where a map contains more than one layer, the selection and deselection of layers
is made via the” LAYERS SHOWN” caption in the “MAPS” menu:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “LAYERS SHOWN” caption.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu, containing a list of the layers available:
3. Position the cursor over the layer which is to be switched ON or OFF.

4. Left click to toggle the layer ON and OFF.
5. Right click to close the drop-down menu.
Note: If any layer is switched OFF, the “LAYERS” caption in the “MAPS” menu will
change from “ALL” to “USER”.
At least one layer must be selected ON at all times. If only one layer is switched ON,
the user is prevented from switching that layer OFF until at least one other layer
is switched ON first.
Activating and De-activating Guard Lines

1. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the “GUARD LINES”
caption.
2. Left click to toggle the guard line function between ON and OFF.
When Guard Lines are OFF (inactive), no Guard Line alarms will be raised,
and no Guard Lines will be drawn on the screen.
This function is also available within the “GUARD LINES” menu.
Deselecting Maps
A map or folio can be deselected using the “CLEAR” soft key.
To deselect a map or folio:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “CLEAR” soft key.
2. Left click to clear the map or folio currently selected in the “MAPS” menu.
The filename is dashed out and the “MAP DISPLAY” is forced OFF. Any map
offset that has been added is also cleared.

Deleting a Map from a “Memory Card”

1. Position the screen cursor over the “DELETE” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu. This menu contains a list of filenames
for the map stored on the “memory card”. The filename of the current selected
map is displayed in red:
3. Position the screen cursor over the filename of the map you wish to delete.
Use the scroll facility if required. The file selected will be highlighted in yellow.
4. Left click to delete. This will reveal a YES/NO dialog box. Left click on “YES” to delete
the map. The selected map is now completely deleted from the “memory card”.
Creating a New Map

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CREATE” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down alpha-numeric keypad:
3. Enter filename under which the new map will be saved.

4. When filename is as required, position the screen cursor over the “ENTER” key.
5. Left click to save. This will create the file on the “memory card” under the
chosen filename. The “MAP EDIT” menu is automatically displayed (see Editing
a Selected Map below).
Note: If the chosen filename already exists, the name is not accepted
and the message “This map is already in use” is displayed on
the temporary prompt line.

Displaying a Map for Editing in Standby Mode

A map can be edited in Transmit mode provided its lat/long is close to the current lat/long
position. If this is not the case, the map must be edited in Standby mode. In order to do
this, the cursor lat/long and range must be set so that the map can be displayed.
Note: The map display is switched OFF when changing from Transmit mode to
Standby mode. Hence, the map display must be switched ON again when
in Standby.
To display a map for editing in Standby mode:
1. If necessary, select the Maps facility by left clicking on the “MAPS” soft key.
2. Select the required map from the “MAPS” menu.
3. Within the “MAPS” menu, position the screen cursor over the “MAP DISPLAY”
caption.
4. Left click to toggle for map ON.
5. Position the screen cursor over the “OFF-LINE” soft key under the “MAPS” menu.
6. Left click to reveal the “OFF-LINE CENTRE” menu:
Note: The Lat/Long information displayed in the menu defaults to the most recent
values set in this mode.
7. Within the menu, left click on the “LAT” or “LON” line to reveal a drop-down
numeric keypad. Use the keypad to enter the Lat/Long of the selected map:
8. Position the screen cursor over the “ENTER” key. Left click to enter.
Additionally, a left click on the “SELECT BY CURSOR” line causes a + cursor to

appear at the centre of the video circle. To change the centre position, left click with
the cursor control at the appropriate position. The map will then be redrawn, with this
position as the centre of the video circle.
A left click on the “EXIT OFF-LINE CENTRE” key will close the menu.
The map can now be edited in the normal way using the editing procedures given
in the next paragraph.

Editing a Selected Map

Accessing the Edit Maps Menu
1. Position the screen cursor over the “EDIT” soft key under the “MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “EDIT MAPS” menu and soft keys:
A left click on the “EXIT EDIT MAPS” soft key will close the “EDIT MAPS” menu
and re-display the “MAPS” menu.
Selecting an Edit Mode
1. Position the cursor over the “MODE” caption in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu, containing a list of the edit modes
available:
3. Left click on the edit mode required. The mode selected will appear in
the “MODE” line of the “EDIT MAPS” menu:
– “ADD” – adding lines and symbols to a map;
– “DELETE” – deleting lines and symbols from a map;
– “MOVE” – moving lines and symbols on a map;
– “MODIFY” – modifying map symbols.
A detailed description of the edit modes provided in this section below.
Selecting a Map Layer
1. Position the cursor over the layer name caption in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu, containing a list of the layers types
available:
3. Left click on the type of layer required. The layer selected will appear in the layer
name line of the “EDIT MAPS” menu.

Note: When in edit mode, all layers of a map will be displayed, when the edit
is finished, the “LAYERS SHOWN” line (in the “MAPS” menu) will stay
as “ALL” and not revert to “USER”.
Adding Lines and Symbols to a Map (Add Mode)
The Add mode of editing allows the user to add lines or symbols to the selected layer,
either from within the video circle or by lat/long entries in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
Adding lines applies to layers which use lines. Adding symbols applies to layers
which use symbols.
Note: The maximum recommended number of elements stored in a map
(an element is a single line or symbol) is 1000. The map will take longer
to display if this number is exceeded.
Adding Lines in the Video Circle
1. Within the video circle, position the screen cursor at the start point of the line
required.
2. Left click to define the point.
3. Move the cursor to the next point.
4. Left click to define the second point.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as often as required to build the required contour.
6. Right click on the last point or on the “NEW LINE” soft key from the “EDIT
MAPS” menu to end the contour.
Note: The above process can be repeated as often as required to add more lines.
Adding Lines by Entering a Lat/Lon
1. Position the screen cursor over the “LAT”/“LON” line in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down numeric keypad:

3. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the start position.
4. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define the start
position.
5. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude for the next position.
6. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define that position.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as often as required to build the required contour, or
select “NEW LINE” to end the current line and start a new one.
8. Left click on the “EXIT” caption to end the process and close the drop-down
keypad.
Note: The above process can be repeated as often as required to add more lines.
Adding Symbols via the Video Circle
1. Position the screen cursor over the “SYMBOL” line in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to toggle through the symbol options available.
3. Alternatively, a right click will reveal a drop-down menu containing a range
of symbols in their respective colours.
4. Left click on the symbol required. The selected symbol will appear
in the “SYMBOL” line of the menu.
5. Within the video circle, position the cursor at the point where you want
the symbol placed.
6. Left click to place. The selected symbol will appear in the video circle.
Adding Symbols by Entering a Lat/Lon
1. Select a symbol as described in the previous procedure (steps 1–4).
2. Position the screen cursor over the “LAT”/“LON” line in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
3. Left click to reveal the drop-down numeric keypad:

4. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the position where you
want the symbol placed.
5. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define the position.
6. Left click on the “EXIT” caption to end the process and close the drop-down
keypad.
Deleting Lines and Symbols from a Map (Delete Mode)

The Delete mode of editing allows the user to delete single segment lines, points
within a contour and symbols from within the video circle, on the selected layer.
To delete lines and symbols in the video circle:
1. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the symbol, or over a point on
the contour, or at any point along the single segment line, you wish to delete.
Note: A left click on a point will result in two segments being deleted
and the remaining end points being joined.
Moving Lines and Symbols on a Map (Move Mode)
The Move mode of editing allows the user to move lines and symbols from within
the video circle, on the selected layer.
To move lines and symbols in the video circle:
1. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the symbol, or the point
on a line, you wish to move.
3. Drag the selected point to its new position.
Modify Map Symbols (Modify Mode)

The Modify mode of editing allows the user to change a map symbol from within
the video circle, on the selected layer.
To modify symbols in the video circle:

1. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the symbol you wish to change.
2. Left click to replace the symbol with the one selected in the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
Saving a Map
To save a map that is being created or edited, to the “memory card”:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “SAVE” soft key under the “EDIT MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to save.

Note: If an attempt is made to exit from the “EDIT MAPS” menu when there are
unsaved edits, the user will be prompted, in the form of a dialog box, to save
the current edits before exiting. Also if over 100 edits have been made without
saving, a brief prompt will be displayed as a reminder to save the map.

Creating and Editing Folios

The Folios facility allows the user to create a new folio of up to ten maps, and to edit
or delete existing folios.
Viewing the Current Folio

1. Position the screen cursor over the “FOLIOS” soft key under the “MAPS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “EDIT FOLIOS” menu and soft keys:
The menu will be for the folio currently selected in the “MAPS” menu
(see Selecting Maps and Folios from a “Memory Card”). If a folio hasn’t been
selected, it will be untitled.
A left click on the “EXIT FOLIOS” soft key will close the “EDIT FOLIOS” menu
unless edits have been made which have not been saved. In which case, the user
is prompted to save their changes before exiting.
Creating a New Folio

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CREATE” soft key under the “EDIT
FOLIOS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “CREATE NAME” drop-down keypad.
3. Enter filename under which the new folio will be saved.
4. Position the screen cursor over the “ENTER” key.
5. Left click. The new filename has been created. The filename extension is fixed
as .FOL.
Once the new filename has been entered and accepted, the functions
of “ADD MAP”, “REMOVE MAP” and “SAVE” can be used.
Adding a Map to a Folio
1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD MAP” soft key under
the “EDIT FOLIOS” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a “CARD A” menu containing a list of the maps available.
Note: At this point, a right click will close the “CARD A” menu and redisplay
3. Within the “CARD A” menu, left click on the map to be included in the folio. After this
selection, the menu is closed leaving the cursor over the “ADD MAP” soft key.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all required maps have been added. A prompt will be
displayed when the folio is full (contains ten maps).
Removing a Map from a Folio

1. Position the screen cursor over the “REMOVE MAP” soft key under
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu containing a list of the maps in the folio:
Note: A right click at this point will close the drop-down menu and re-display
3. Within the drop-down menu, left click on the map to be removed from the folio.
After this selection, the menu is closed leaving the cursor over the “REMOVE
MAP” soft key.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all required maps have been removed.
Saving a Folio
A left click on the “SAVE” soft key allows the user to save a newly created folio
or an edited folio, to the “memory card”.
Note: If an attempt is made to exit from the “EDIT FOLIOS” menu when there are
unsaved edits, the user will be prompted, in the form of a dialog box, to save
the current edits before exiting.
Editing a Folio
1. Position the screen cursor over the “EDIT” soft key located under
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down “CARD A” menu containing a list of folio filenames
(a further right click will remove the menu without taking further action):
3. Left click on the filename of the folio you wish to edit. The menu for the selected
folio will appear and the functions of “ADD MAP”, “REMOVE MAP” and “SAVE”
can now be used as described earlier.
Note: A folio that is currently in use cannot be edited.

Deleting a Folio from a “Memory Card”

2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu containing a list of folios
(right click to close the list).
3. Left click on the filename of the folio you wish to delete. This will reveal
a YES/NO dialog box. Left click on “YES” to delete the folio.
Creating and Deleting Guard Lines

Guard lines can be created by entering their start and end positions either in
the video circle or in a drop-down lat/long keypad accessed from the “GUARD
LINES” menu. Guard lines are drawn in mauve and are inactive (off) during editing.
They are activated and drawn in red on exiting from the “GUARD LINES” menu.
Viewing the Current Guard Line Selection
1. Position the screen cursor over the “GUARD LINES” soft key under the “MAPS”
menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “GUARD LINES” menu and soft key:
The “NUMBER OF LINES” line in the menu indicates the number of guard lines
currently defined. A maximum of up to 20 guard lines can be defined.
A left click on the “EXIT GUARD LINES” soft key will close the menu and re-display
the “MAPS” menu. Guard lines are stored in non-volatile memory.
Activating and Deactivating Guard Lines

1. Within the “GUARD LINES” menu, position the screen cursor over the “GUARD
LINES” caption.
2. Left click to toggle the guard line function between ON and OFF.
This function is also available on the main “MAPS” menu.
Adding Guard Lines in the Video Circle

Guard lines are defined by a “start-of-line” position and an “end-of-line” position.
They can only be added in Transmit mode.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD” line in the “GUARD LINES” menu.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle and position it at the start point of the line
required.
4. Left click to define the point.
5. Move the cursor to the end point.
6. Left click to define the end point.

7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 as often as required to create up to twenty guard lines.

8. A right click will undo the last position.
You will be prompted when the maximum number of lines is defined.
Deleting Guard Lines via the Video Circle

1. Position the screen cursor over the “DELETE” line in the “GUARD LINES”
menu. Individual lines can only be deleted in Transmit mode.
3. Move the cursor into the video circle and position it anywhere on the guard line
you wish to delete.

Deleting ALL Guard Lines
1. Position the screen cursor over the “DELETE ALL” line in the “GUARD LINES”
menu.
2. Left click to select. This will reveal an YES/NO dialog box. Left click on “YES”
to delete. This will delete all guard lines from the system.
List Lines
Viewing Guard Lines Using the List
1. Position the screen cursor over the “LIST LINES” caption in the “GUARD
LINES” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down list and “ADD” and “DELETE” soft keys.
3. Use the scroll bar as required to view the list.
4. A right click at any time the list is displayed, will close the list and return
the “GUARD LINES” menu.
Follow the instructions below to add lines or to delete lines from this list.

Adding Guard Lines Using the List

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down numeric keypad.
3. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the “start-of-line”:
4. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click.
5. Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the “end-of-line”:
6. Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click.
Note: While the list is displayed, lat/long information on up to a maximum
of 20 guard lines can be added.
7. Right click to close the list.
Deleting Guard Lines Using the List
1. Scroll the list if required, and left click on the details of the guard line to be
deleted. (A left click on any line in the list will highlight all lines associated with
the guard line.)

Note: While the list is display, as many guard lines as required can be deleted.
4. Right click to close the list.
Warning Prompts
Warning prompts are displayed when conflicting conditions prevail.

Maps and Folios

If an attempt is made to turn-ON a folio or map when the system is unstabilised,
outside the allowed range scale, outside the allowed latitude or a NAV alarm is
present, an appropriate prompt is displayed and the folio or map is NOT turned ON.
See prompts below.
If a selected Folio has some maps missing, the following prompt is displayed.
A left click on the “FOLIOS” soft key will reveal a list of the maps in the folio with
the missing maps displayed in red.
Guard Lines
If an attempt is made to turn the Guard Lines ON while a “NAV POSITION” alarm
exists, the following prompt is displayed and the guard line is NOT switched on.
Editing: Lat/Lon Inputs

The following warning prompt is displayed if an attempt is made to enter an invalid
lat/long.
Editing: Adding Maps to Folios

The following prompt is displayed when the folio is full (contains the maximum
of ten maps).
Editing: Adding Guard Lines

The following prompt is displayed when the maximum number of guard lines (twenty)
have been defined.

Routes
The Route display is controlled from the “NAVIGATION” menu. Route data is
calculated internally from the internal route data or the route data received from
an external source.
Routes can be displayed on all ranges in stabilized modes and when own ships
latitude is between 78°N and 78°S.
Up to nine legs of a route, consisting of up to ten waypoints, are displayed on

the screen at any one time.
In this version of the simulator, routes can be displayed with rhumb line (RHL) legs.
Rhumb lines are drawn as straight lines between waypoints.
Turning the Route Display On and Off

1. Position the screen cursor over the “NAV” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “NAVIGATION” menu.

3. Position the screen cursor over the “DISPLAY” line in the “NAVIGATION” menu:
4. Left click to toggle the route display ON or OFF.
Note: If H-Up mode is selected when route display is ON, the route display
is inhibited until a stabilized mode is selected.
Route Type
There is possibility to select three types of routes: internal, single leg and external.
Internal Route
This feature allows the user to define waypoints and routes directly on the radar
display, either by entering lat/long information or positioning the screen cursor.
These routes are stored as files on a “memory card”. Each route can have
128 entries. An entry consists of a waypoint name and the type of the next leg.
Routes are stored as files with the .RTE extension.
The waypoint LAT/LONG positions are stored separately in a file POSITION.POS

on the “memory card”.
Single Leg
This feature allows the user to define a single waypoint and single leg route on the
radar display, either by entering LAT/LONG information, positioning the screen
cursor or using an existing waypoint in the Position Database on a “memory card”.

External Route
Route, exported to the radar from the trainee bridge. A detailed description
of the loading route is given in Chapter 3 in Loading the Own Ship Route section.
Selecting the Route Type

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TYPE” line in the “NAVIGATION” menu.
2. Left click to select the type required. Each click will cycle through the available
types. The selected type will appear in the “TYPE” line of the menu.
or
3. Position the screen cursor over the “TYPE” line.
4. Right click to reveal a drop-down menu:
5. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the required mode.
Depending on the route type selection, the “ROUTE” soft key will produce two
different menus: “INTERNAL ROUTE” or “SINGLE LEG ROUTE”.
Accessing the Internal Route Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ROUTE” soft key under the “NAVIGATION”
menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “INTERNAL ROUTE” menu:
A left click on the “EXIT ROUTE” soft key will close the “INTERNAL ROUTE” menu
and redisplay the “NAVIGATION” menu.

Selecting an Internal Route from a “Memory Card”

1. Left click on the “SELECT ROUTE” soft key under the “INTERNAL ROUTE”
menu to reveal a drop-down menu. This menu contains a list of filenames for
the routes stored on the “memory card”:
2. Position the screen cursor over the filename of the route you wish to recall.
The file selected will be highlighted.
3. Left key to select.
The “INTERNAL ROUTE” menu will now be shown with details of its filename
and the name and lat/long of the first waypoint in the route.
The route will also be displayed on the screen as a series of red circles joined by
dashed red lines.
Creating an Internal Route

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CREATE” soft key under the “INTERNAL
ROUTE” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down alpha-numeric keypad:
3. Enter the filename under which the new route will be saved.
4. When the filename is as required, position the screen cursor over the “ENTER” key.
5. Left click to save. This will create the file on the “memory card” under the
chosen filename. The “EDIT ROUTES” menu is automatically displayed.
Note: If the chosen filename already exists, the name is not accepted, the message
“This route name is already in use” is displayed on the temporary prompt line.

Editing a Selected Internal Route

A route consists of a string of waypoints in a specific order. The only editing that can
be carried out is to add new waypoints into a route or delete them from a route.
When editing a route, the information for two waypoints will be displayed. The waypoint
at the top of the menu will also be displayed in mauve on the screen with a mauve
dotted line joining it to the waypoint at the bottom of the menu.
Note: Before a route can be edited it must first be selected (see Selecting
an Internal Route from a “Memory Card”).
Accessing the Edit Route Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “EDIT” soft key under the “INTERNAL ROUTE”
menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “EDIT ROUTE” menu:
Setting the Off-Line Centre for Editing in Standby Mode

A route can be edited in Transmit mode provided its lat/long is close to the current
lat/long position. If this is not the case, the route must be edited in Standby mode.
In order to do this, the cursor lat/long and range, must be set so that the route can
be displayed:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “OFF LINE” soft key under the “EDIT ROUTE”
menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “OFF-LINE CENTRE” menu:
Note: The Lat/Long information displayed in the menu defaults to the most recent
values set in this mode.

3. Within the menu, left click on the “LAT” or “LON” line to reveal a drop-down
numeric keypad. Use the keypad to enter the Lat/Long of the selected route.
Additionally, a left click on the “SELECT BY CURSOR” line causes a + cursor to
appear at the centre of the video circle. To change the centre position, left click with
the cursor control at the appropriate position. The route will then be re-drawn.
Also a left click on the “SET TO ROUTE START” line will set the off-line centre
to be that of the first waypoint in the route and draw the route accordingly.
4. A left click on the “EXIT OFF-LINE CENTRE” key will return the system
to the “EDIT ROUTE” menu.
The route can now be edited using the procedure given below.
Adding a Waypoint into a Route

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD” soft key under the “EDIT ROUTE” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu containing three options.
3. Either:
– Position the cursor over the “Select from database” line;
– Left click to reveal a list of waypoint names;
– Move the cursor to the waypoint you wish to add;

– Left click to select.
Or
– Position the cursor over the “Enter using cursor” line;

– Left click to reveal a drop-down alpha-numeric keypad;
– Enter the new waypoint name at the bottom;
– Left click over the “ENTER” key;
– Position the screen cursor at the waypoint location required and left click.
Or
– Position the cursor over the “Enter using keypad” line;
– Left click over the “ENTER” key to reveal an waypoint position numeric keypad:

– Use the keypad to enter the required waypoint Lat/Lon position;

– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define the waypoint.
When a waypoint is added, it will be added in between the two waypoints in the menu.
At the start and end of the route, only one waypoint is displayed, and the waypoint can
be added before the first waypoint or after the last waypoint.
Displaying the Waypoint Information as a Route

The four arrow keys allow you to display different waypoint information and hence
edit different parts of the route.
The double arrows will take you back ten waypoints or forward ten in the route:
The single arrow keys enable you to step back or step on the information displayed
one waypoint at a time:
At the start of the route, only the “TO WAYPOINT” data is shown.
At the end of the route, only the “FROM WAYPOINT” data is shown.
Editing the Waypoint Data from the Edit Route Menu

To edit the LAT/LONG waypoint position, use the following procedure:
1. Ensure the waypoint to be changed is the top waypoint on the “EDIT ROUTE”
menu.
2. Position the cursor over the LAT/LON lines.

3. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu:
4. Either:
– Position the cursor over the “Enter using cursor” line and left click;
– Use the cursor to select the new position and left click. The waypoint will
move to the new position and the screen data updated.
Or

– Left click to reveal a drop-down numeric keypad;
– Use the keypad to enter the Latitude and Longitude of the waypoint;
– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click. The waypoint will be
redrawn at the new position and the screen data updated.
Note: This will update the data for that waypoint in the position database
for all uses of that waypoint.

Deleting a Waypoint from a Route

1. Ensure that the waypoint you wish to delete is the FROM waypoint at the top
of the “EDIT ROUTE” menu.
2. Position the cursor over the “DELETE” soft key and left click.
3. A confirm delete dialogue box will be displayed:
4. Left click on “Yes” to confirm delete.

Note: This will not delete the waypoint data from the position database.
Saving a Route
The “SAVE” soft key allows the user to save a route that is being created or edited
to the “memory card”:
1. Position the cursor over the “SAVE” soft key.
2. Left click to save the route to the “memory card”.

Exiting the Edit Route
A left click on the “EXIT EDIT ROUTE” soft key will close the menu and re-display
the “INTERNAL ROUTE” menu.
Accessing the Single Leg Route Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ROUTE” soft key under the “NAVIGATION”
menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “SINGLE LEG ROUTE” menu:
A left click on the “EXIT ROUTE” soft key will close the “SINGLE LEG ROUTE” menu
and redisplay the “NAVIGATION” menu.

Setting the Single Leg Waypoint

1. Position the screen cursor over the “SET WAYPOINT” soft key under
the SINGLE LEG ROUTE” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu containing three options:
3. Either:
– Position the cursor over the “Select from database” line;
– Left click to reveal a list of waypoint names from the Position Database
on the “memory card”:
– Move the cursor to the waypoint you wish to use;

– Left click to select.
Or
– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click;
Or

– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to reveal an enter
position numeric keypad:
– Use the keypad to enter the required waypoint LAT/LONG position;

– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to define the waypoint.
Position Database
The Position Database is used to store all internal and single leg route waypoint data.
The position database will be created when the first waypoint is stored on that card.
There is a separate store on each “memory card”.
Accessing the Position Database Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “POSITION DATABASE” line
in the “NAVIGATION” menu.
2. Left click to reveal the “POSITION DATABASE” menu.
The data that is initially shown is for the first waypoint on Card A. The “POSITION”
line shows how many waypoint definitions are stored in the database on the card.
Adding a Waypoint to the Database

1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD” soft key under the “POSITION
DATABASE” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a drop-down menu containing two options.
3. Either:
– Enter the waypoint name at the bottom;
– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click;

Or
– Enter the waypoint name at the bottom;
– Position the cursor over the “ENTER” key and left click to reveal an enter
position numeric keypad:
– Use the keypad to enter the required waypoint LAT/LONG position;

– Position the cursor over “ENTER” key and left click.
The data for that waypoint has now been entered and will be displayed in the menu.
The number of way points in that cards database will also increase by one.
Displaying the Waypoint Information in the Database

The six arrow keys allow you to display all the different waypoints in the database.
The single arrow keys enable you to step on or step back one waypoint at a time:
The double arrow keys enable you to step on or step back ten waypoints at a time
in the database:
The double arrow and line keys enable you to go to the start or end of the database:
Deleting a Waypoint from the Database

This will permanently remove the waypoint and its data from the database. It will not
be possible to use a route that uses the deleted waypoint:
1. Display the waypoint data to be deleted in the “POSITION DATABASE” menu.

2. Position the cursor over the “DELETE” key and left click. A confirm dialog box
will be displayed:
3. Left click on “YES” to confirm delete.

Route and Waypoint Transfer

This function enables route files (.RTE) to be transferred to a “memory card”,
and waypoint positions to be added to the Position Database.
To transfer routes and waypoints:
1. Position the cursor over the “ROUTE TRANSFER” line in the “NAVIGATION” menu.
2. Left click to reveal the ROUTE TRANSFER menu:
3. A left click on the “TRANSFER” line will toggle the input On and Off.
4. A left click on the “OVERWRITE” line will toggle this option On and Off.
5. A left click on the “EXIT TRANSFER” soft key will close the menu and end
the transfer.
The overwrite lines can only be changed when the transfer is Off.
Data will only be transferred while the menu is displayed and Transfer is set to On.
While data is being transferred, the following statistics will be available:
• The “TRANSFERRED” lines will indicate the number of routes or waypoints

successfully transferred;
• The “FAILED” lines will indicate the number of routes or waypoints not
successfully transferred;
• The “ROUTES: FILE” line will indicate the filename of the route being
transferred;
• The status lines on the menu will show the status of the transfer. This will
normally be “LOADING” during transfer and “TRANSFER OK” at the end.

Warning Prompts
If an attempt is made to turn the route display ON when the system is unsterilized
in Standby mode, or outside allowed latitudes, an appropriate prompt is displayed.
Freeze Function
Freeze Frame
The Freeze Frame facility allows the video picture to be frozen, for example,
when ship is on radio silence. The freeze frame can be controlled only locally
by the operator via the “FREEZE” soft key (bottom left-hand corner of screen).
If local control is set to the frozen state, the video and trails are frozen on the screen
and are not updated again until local control is set to the unfrozen state.
The true motion origin is not updated during Freeze Frame. When leaving Freeze
Frame, there will be a picture clear if the picture was in Freeze Frame for more than
10 seconds.
Local-Operator Control
1. Position the screen cursor over the “FREEZE” soft key.
2. Left click to freeze frame. The caption inside the soft key will change
to “FROZEN (L)”.
3. The display can be unfrozen by a further left click on the soft key.
Warning Prompts
Whenever the display is Frozen, an attempt to select any of the functions listed
below, will result in the ‘In Freeze Frame’ prompt being displayed:
• Range scale;
• Presentation mode;
• Motion mode;
• Centre;
• Trails;
• Off-centre own ship.

Red First Strike

The Red First Strike facility allows fast moving targets such as helicopters and other
aircraft to be easily identified by red video returns in the video circle. This does not
affect the normal tracking of targets.
The soft key for selecting red first strike is located at the bottom left side of the display.
The caption inside the key is “NAV” to indicate that standard video presentation
is selected, or “AIR” to indicate that red first strike presentation is selected.
Selecting Red First Strike Presentation

1. Position the screen cursor over the “NAV” soft key:
2. Left click to select red first strike video presentation. The caption in the soft key
will change to “AIR”.
Returning to Standard Video Presentation

1. Position the screen cursor over the “AIR” soft key:
2. Left click to select standard video presentation (i.e., to remove red first strike).
The caption in the soft key will change to “NAV”.
Constant Radius Turn

This tool allows the user to plan a change of course using a constant radius turn.
It is available in Transmit mode for all motion modes, stabilized presentation modes
and range scales. The planned turn is displayed as three adjustable lines as shown
in the figure below.

Radius Turn Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TOOLS” soft key which is located
2. Left click to reveal the “TOOLS” menu and soft keys.
3. A left click on the “RADIUS TURN” line will reveal the “RADIUS TURN” menu:
Note: The planned turn is displayed initially with default values applied.
Any adjustments made by the user are automatically limited to the maximum
rate of turn.
4. Within the menu, left clicks on the “DISPLAY” line will toggle the “radius turn”
display ON and OFF.
A left click on the “EXIT RADIUS TURN” soft key will close the menu.
Setting the New Course

Either:
1. Within the “RADIUS TURN” menu, position the screen cursor over the “NEW
CSE” line.
2. Left click to allow adjustment using the cursor control.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the “NEW CSE” reading in the menu.
4. Left click to accept the new reading.
Alternatively, a right click on the “NEW CSE” line within the menu will reveal
a drop-down numeric keypad from which the new course can be entered.
Or
1. Within the video circle, position the screen cursor over the new course line.
3. Drag the new course line to the required course.

Setting the Turn Radius

Either:
1. Within the “RADIUS TURN” menu, position the screen cursor over
the “RADIUS” line.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the “RADIUS” reading in the menu.
Alternatively, a right click on the “RADIUS” line within the menu will reveal a drop-
down numeric keypad from which the radius can be entered.
Or
From within the video circle:

1. Position the video cursor over the centre of turn marker.
3. Drag the marker to adjust the turn radius.
Setting the Start Line

Either:
1. Within the “RADIUS TURN” menu, position the screen cursor over the START line.

3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the “START” reading in the menu.
Alternatively, a right click on the “START” line within the menu will reveal a drop-
down numeric keypad from which the start can be entered.
Or
1. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the start of turn marker.

3. Drag the start of turn marker along the initial course line to the point required.
Aligning to Own Ship’s Course

After all parameters have been adjusted, the planned turn must be aligned with own
ship’s course:
1. Within the “RADIUS TURN” menu, position the screen cursor over
the “RESET START” line.
2. Left click to place the start of turn marker on own ship’s course line.

Rates of Turn
Within the “RADIUS TURN” menu, the rate of turn (ROT) is calculated from the other
parameters unless the standard rate of turn is selected. When the maximum rate of
turn is reached, the following prompt is displayed.
To select standard rate of turn:

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “STD ROT” line.
2. Left click to toggle the standard rate of turn ON (“YES”) or OFF (“NO”).
Polygonal Auto-Acquisition Zone

Auto-Acquisition Zones General Description
Two annular and two polygonal auto-acquisition zones are available; they are
displayed relative to own ship’s head. Auto-acquisition zones can only be displayed
on range scales from 0.75 to 96 n mile (annular zones), or from 0.5 to 96 n mile
(polygonal zones).
When a target enters an auto-acquisition zone, an “AZ ENTRY” alarm is raised and
the auto-acquisition zone violation symbol is displayed. This flashes until the alarm
is acknowledged, when the violation symbol is replaced by the normal acquisition
symbol for a non AIS target.
If a sleeping AIS target enters an auto-acquisition zone it will automatically be
activated.
When a target is acquired it is automatically assigned an identification number.

Target numbering always starts at 1 and goes up to a maximum of 60
(80 for AIS system). A target is assigned the next unused number.
Accessing the Auto-Acquisition Zones Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “AZ” soft key.
2. Left click to reveal the “AUTO ACQ ZONES” menu:
“ZONE 1”, “ZONE 2” menu lines are used for turning annular zones On/Off.
“ZONE 3”, “ZONE 4” menu lines are used for turning polygonal zones On/Off.
“EDIT 1”, “EDIT 2” soft keys are used for editing annular zones (ZONE 1, 2).
“EDIT 3”, “EDIT 4” soft keys are used for editing polygonal zones (ZONE 3, 4).
A left click on the “EXIT ACQ ZONES” soft key will close the “AUTO ACQ ZONES”
menu.

Turning Auto-Acquisition Zones On/Off

1. Position the screen cursor over a “ZONE” line in the “AUTO ACQ ZONES”
menu.
2. Left click to toggle the selected zone ON and OFF.
Note: Auto-acquisition zones retain their definitions when turned off.
Defining an Acquisition Zone

The following procedure only applies to polygonal auto-acquisition zones.
Note: An acquisition zone is not active while it is being defined.
1. Position the cursor over an “EDIT 3” or “EDIT 4” soft key.
2. Left click to select edit mode for the associated zone. The associated “ZONE
ON/OFF” line in the menu shows “EDIT”.
3. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the start point of zone.
4. Left click at the required position to define the start point.
5. Move the video cursor. Left click again to define the next point. A mauve line will
appear joining this point to the previous point.
6. Continue defining points by left clicking. A right click will delete the last line drawn.
7. Complete the polygon either by left clicking again on the start point, or by
defining ten points (when it will be closed automatically). The zone will be
switched-on automatically on completion.
Each time a zone is selected for editing it must be created from scratch and
the existing zone definition will be overwritten.
Editing Warning Points

The self explanatory warning prompts listed below are associated with Polygonal
Zone editing:

Helicopter Approach Sector

The Helicopter Approach Sector facility is used to aid the operator in guiding
a helicopter to land.
This facility is available in Transmit, in all stabilised modes, and on all ranges.
The sector is displayed as three radials spaced at 15° apart, with small calibration
circles drawn on the centre line (the sector bearing line). The circles are spaced at
intervals determined by the current range ring selection. The radials extend from
the origin to the edge of the video circle, and are displayed as green dashed-lines.
The sector origin can be either the own ship or any tracked target.
If the origin is the own ship, the orientation can either be set to a true value (fixed with
respect to north) or to a relative value (with respect to ship’s head). If the sector
origin is a tracked target, it is always set to a true bearing.
Accessing the Helo Sector Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TOOLS” soft key which is located
2. Left click to reveal the “TOOLS” menu and soft keys.
3. Position the screen cursor over the “HELO SECTOR” soft key located under
the “TOOLS” menu.
4. Left click to reveal the “HELO SECTOR” menu:
A left click on the “EXIT HELO SECTOR” soft key will close the menu.
Turning Helo Sector Display On or Off

1. Within the menu, position the screen cursor over the “DISPLAY” line.
2. Left click to toggle the display ON or OFF.

Selecting True or Relative Display Mode

1. Within the “HELO SECTOR” menu, position the screen cursor over the “MODE” line.
2. Left click to toggle the display to “TRUE” or “REL”. A prompt will be displayed
if the sector origin is not own ship.
Selecting the Helo Sector Bearing

1. Within the “HELO SECTOR” menu, position the screen cursor over the “T BRG”
(or “R BRG”) line.
2. Left click to access. Bearing line in menu is displayed in yellow.
3. Move the cursor control left or right to change the bearing.
4. Left click to accept new bearing.

Alternatively, a right click on the “T BRG” (or “R BRG”) line will reveal a drop-down
keypad from where a new bearing can be entered.
Selecting the Helo Sector Origin

1. Within the “HELO SECTOR” menu, position the screen cursor over
the “ORIGIN” line.
2. Left click to toggle the origin to “OWN SHIP” or “TARGET”.
If tracked target is selected, the line will be “TARGET NO nn”. Where nn is
the ID number of a selected target, or dashed line if no target has yet been selected.
To selecting a specific tracked target as sector origin:

1. Within the “HELO SECTOR” menu, position the screen cursor over
the “TARGET NO” line.
3. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the required tracked target.
4. Left click to select the target as the sector origin. The ID of the selected target
will appear in the “HELO SECTOR” menu.
Note: While the screen cursor is within the video circle, a right click will exit and
return the cursor to the “HELO SECTOR” menu without making a selection.
Alternatively, a right click on the “TARGET NO” line will reveal a drop-down keypad
from where the ID number of the required target can be entered.

Sector Defaults and Suppression

By default, the display of the sector is set to OFF, with its origin on own ship and north
stabilised. Its bearing is set to 195° relative to ship’s head.
The sector is switched OFF if the radar is switched to standby. The sector display is
temporarily suppressed if the presentation mode is switched to unstabilised, or the
compass is not aligned or there is a compass alarm. The sector ON/OFF state is
unaffected while the display is suppressed. An appropriate prompt is raised if an
attempt is made to switch the sector ON in any of the above conditions.
Warning Prompts
A suitable prompt is displayed if either method of selecting a target fails to find
a tracked target.
Target Association
When a new AIS target is to be displayed, the system will check to associate it with
an existing autotrack target. First it checks the distance association and then the
speed. If it does associate then the characteristics and history of that target will be
transferred to the AIS target, and the autotrack target will be cancelled. The
association characteristics (distance and speed) are displayed in the “AIS” menu.
Changing the Target Association Values

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TARGET” soft key which is located in
the bottom right corner of the display.
2. Left click to reveal the “ARPA” menu and soft keys:
3. Position the screen cursor over the “AIS” line.

4. Left click to reveal the “AIS” menu and soft key:
5. Position the screen cursor over the distance or speed parameter to be changed.
7. Move the cursor control left or right to change the parameter.

the parameter value can be entered.
Values can be set and stored between 0.01 and 1.0 n mile for distance, and between
0.1 and 10.0 kt for speed. The target has to meet both criteria to be associated.
A left click on the “EXIT AIS” soft key will close the “AIS” menu. A left click on
the “EXIT ARPA” soft key will close the “ARPA” menu.
AIS Target Totals
The “DISPLAYED” line will show the number of AIS targets that can be shown on
the screen. The total AIS targets line will show the number of different vessels from
which AIS messages are being received and filtered for display.
Parallel Index Lines

Introduction
A summary of the Index Line features are as follows:
• simultaneous display of up to fifteen index lines at a time;

• grouping of index lines into groups of five lines each;
• the definition of “clipping” points so that lines can have finite length;
• the storage of index line groups on a “memory card”.
Index lines are available in all presentation modes and motion modes, in Transmit
and Standby, but only on range scales of 0.25 to 96 n mile.
Each index line is defined by the range of its closest point to the own ship, its
bearing and its line type. Bearings are true when in a stabilized presentation mode,
but relative to own ship’s head when in an unsterilized mode.
Switching between stabilized and unstabilized presentation modes, or between
standby and transmit, causes the display of index lines to be switched off.

Accessing the Index Lines Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “PI” soft key which is located in the bottom
2. Left click to reveal the “INDEX LINES” menu:
A left click on the “EXIT INDEX LINES” soft key will close the menu.
Turning the Index Lines Display On and Off

To turn the index lines display ON and OFF:
1. Within the “INDEX LINES” menu, position the screen cursor over the “DISPLAY” line.
2. Left click to toggle index lines between ON and OFF.

The “PI” soft key provides an easy way of suppressing the display of index lines:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “PI” soft key in the bottom right corner
of the display.
2. Right click to toggle the lines ON or OFF.

Note: Consecutive right clicks on the “PI” soft key toggles the display of index lines
ON and OFF. When switched-ON, only Groups of defined index lines which
were previously selected are displayed.
Listing the Currently Loaded Groups

The number displayed at the end of the “GROUPS LOADED” line in the “INDEX
LINES” menu indicates the number of index lines groups which are currently loaded.
A group which is being edited is counted as having been loaded (see Loading and
Unloading Groups below).
1. Within the “INDEX LINES” menu, position the screen cursor over the “GROUPS
LOADED” line.
2. Left click to reveal a list of the currently loaded groups:
3. Right click to close the menu.

Index Line Editing

Within the “INDEX LINES” menu, all lines from “ADD LINE” to “T-BRG” (or “R-BRG”)
are used for editing, but are not active until edit mode is selected.
Selecting the Edit Mode

1. Position the screen cursor over the “EDIT” soft key located under the “INDEX
LINES” menu.
2. Left click to reveal a list of the currently loaded groups.
3. Left click on the group required. The letter “E” will appear against that group.
Pivot points appear on all lines of the selected group. All lines in the group can now
be edited. Only one group can be edited at a time, and groups which are loaded but
not being edited are displayed less brightly in the video circle, and without pivot
points.
Note: A right click in the dialog box will remove the box without further action.
Adding a Line to the Selected Group
1. Position the screen cursor over the “ADD LINE” caption in the “INDEX LINES”
menu.
2. Left click to add. The new line (at full video circle width) will be drawn in
magenta through own ship with its pivot point on own ship.
If the group already has its full quota of lines (five), the following prompt is displayed
and no new line is added.
Once a line has been added, it can be edited in any of the ways already explained
(a change of range and bearing, a change of line type and line clipping).
Removing a Line from the Selected Group

1. Position the screen cursor over the “REMOVE LINE” caption in the “INDEX
LINES” menu.
2. Left click to access. The caption in the menu will be displayed in yellow.
3. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the line to be removed.
4. Left click to remove. If required, steps 3 and 4 can be repeated on all lines
in the group.
A further left click on the “REMOVE LINE” caption in the “INDEX LINES” menu will
return the caption to its original colour and return editing to the “edit by dragging mode”.
Removing All Lines from the Selected Group

1. Position the screen cursor over the “REMOVE ALL LINES” caption in
the “INDEX LINES” menu.
2. Left click to remove all lines. A dialog box requesting confirmation will appear:
3. Within the dialog box, click on “ACCEPT” to remove all lines.

Selecting a Line for Editing

1. Within the video circle, position the screen cursor on the line to be edited.
2. Left click to select. The selected line will be drawn in magenta and its pivot point
is marked by a small filled circle. The pivot point is only used during editing.
Changing the Bearing of Selected Line
1. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over any point on the line other
than that pivot point.
3. Rotate the line about the pivot point by dragging to the required bearing.
The bearing is automatically updated in the menu.

Alternatively, a left click on the “T BRG” line in the “INDEX LINES” menu will allow
adjustment using movement of the cursor control.
Changing the Range of Selected Line
1. Within the video circle, place the video cursor over the pivot point of the selected line.
3. Drag the line to the required range from own ship. The range is automatically
updated in the menu.
Note: Range is the shortest distance from Own Ship to index line.
Alternatively, a left click on the “RANGE” line in the “INDEX LINES” menu will allow
adjustment using movement of the cursor control.
Changing the Line Type of Selected Line

1. Position the screen cursor over the “TYPE” line in the “INDEX LINES” menu.
2. Left click to cycle through the line types available (“SOLID”, or mark/space ration
“1:1” or “3:5”). The line type displayed is the line type selected.
A right click will reveal a drop-down menu, containing a list of the line types available.
Left click on the line type required.
Clipping the Selected Line

Index lines normally span the full video circle. The clipping facility allows a line to be
clipped (shortened) to give it a finite length:
1. Position the screen cursor over the “CLIP LINE” caption in the “INDEX LINES” menu.
2. Left click to access. The line in the menu will be displayed in yellow.
3. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the line to be clipped
at the point where clipping is required (the first clipping point).
4. Left click to clip the line. The shortened line will be drawn in magenta, clipped
at the appropriate point.

5. If a second clipping point is required, position the video cursor at the point where
clipping is required.
6. Left click to clip the line. The line will now be drawn between the two clipping points.
7. If required, steps 3 to 6 can be repeated on all lines in the group.
8. A further left click on the “CLIP LINE” caption in the “INDEX LINES” menu will return
the caption to its original colour and return editing to the “edit by dragging” mode.
When in “edit by dragging” mode, index lines which have already been clipped can be
fine tuned by further editing as follows:
1. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the clipped end
of the index line which is to be adjusted.
3. Drag the end of the line (the clipped point) to the required position. The cursor
is constrained to the line’s bearing (the line can only be shortened or
lengthened), leaving the line’s range and bearing unchanged.
Removing Clipping from a Selected Line
1. Position the screen cursor over the “REMOVE CLIPPING” caption in
2. Left click to access. The caption in the menu will be displayed in yellow.
3. Within the video circle, position the video cursor over the line to be unclipped.
4. Left click on any point along the line to remove clipping. The unclipped line will
retain its range and bearing, and will be drawn in magenta spanning the full
video circle.
5. If required, steps 3 and 4 can be repeated on all lines in the group.
6. A further left click on the “REMOVE CLIPPING” line in the “INDEX LINES”
menu will return the caption to its original colour and return editing to
the “edit by dragging mode”.
Creating a New Group of Index Lines

1. Position the screen cursor over the “CREATE” soft key located under
If conditions allow, and there are less than three groups already loaded, the edit
mode is entered and a new group of lines can be created using the edit procedures
already described (initially by using “ADD LINE”). A suitable prompt will be displayed
if three groups are already loaded. To create a new group, one of the groups already
loaded must first be unloaded.
Loading and Unloading Groups

The “LOAD” key allows a new group of index lines to be loaded, even while editing.
The “UNLOAD” key allows any one of the groups already loaded (except for
the group being edited) to be unloaded.

Loading a New Group

1. Position the screen cursor over the “LOAD” soft key located under
2. Left click to reveal a list of the groups available for loading:
3. Left click on the group required.
Unloading a Group
1. Position the screen cursor over the “UNLOAD” soft key located under
2. Left click to reveal a list of the groups already loading. The list will include
the card and file name of the groups where appropriate. It will also list any
unsaved groups (groups which have been edited or created but not yet saved).
3. Left click on the group to be unloaded.

Note: Unsaved groups are always labelled as “UNSAVEDx” where “x” is a number
from 1 to 3. Unsaved groups will be lost if unloaded.
Exiting from Edit Mode

Edit mode can be exited either by a second left click on the “EDIT” or “CREATE” soft
keys (as appropriate) or by a left click on the “SAVE” soft key. If an exit is attempted
via the “EDIT” or “CREAT” soft keys, the dialog box shown on the left is displayed:
From within the dialog box left click on:
• “NO” to exit without saving;

• “YES” to reveal a drop-down alpha-numeric keypad from where a file name can
be entered;
• “CANCEL” to close the dialog box without further action.

Saving a Group
The group currently selected as the group for editing, can be saved at any time
using the “SAVE” soft key:
1. Ensure the group to be saved is selected for editing. (Left click on the “EDIT”
soft key and select group from dialog box.)
2. Position the screen cursor over the “SAVE” soft key located under the “INDEX
LINES” menu.
3. Left click to reveal. The drop-down alpha-numeric keypad will be revealed from
where a file name can be entered:
4. If required, repeat steps 1 to 3 to save other groups.
Target Intercept
The Target Intercept facility allows the operator to plan and execute intercept
manoeuvres between one vessel and another. Interceptions can be from own ship
to any tracked target, from a tracked target to own ship, or from one tracked target
to another. The course to achieve the intercept is calculated and displayed on
the screen. Intercept vectors are displayed in the video circle to indicate where
the intercept will take place.
Target Intercept is available in all modes where tracking facilities are available.
Accessing the Target Intercept Menu

1. Position the screen cursor over the “INTCEPT” soft key located in the bottom
2. Left click to reveal the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu:

Note: A right click on the “INTCEPT” key will temporarily suppress the display
of intercept vectors. The vectors are re-displayed by a second right click
on the “INTCEPT” key, or on entering the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu.
A left click on the “EXIT TGT INTERCEPT” key will close the menu.
Selecting the Intercept Mode

1. Position the screen cursor over the “MODE” line in the “TARGET INTERCEPT”
menu.
2. Left click to cycle through the options available (“PLANNING”, “RUNNING”).
The option displayed is the option selected.
Alternatively, a right click will reveal a list of the options available. Left click
on the option required:
Note: OFF can only be selected from the drop-down list.

The usual course of action is to select “PLANNING” first, set up the parameters
of the intercept required and then, when satisfied with the plan, select “RUNNING”.
Selecting the Interceptor

The “FROM:” line in the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu relates to the Interceptor
and will show “OWN SHIP”, “TARGET” or a series of dashes.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “FROM” line in the “TARGET INTERCEPT”
menu.
3. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the required tracked target origin
or video circle origin (for own ship).
4. Left click to select. The menu will reflect the selection made.
Selecting the Interceptee

The “TO:” line in the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu relates to the Interceptee
and will show “TARGET”, “OWN SHIP” or a series of dashes.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “TO:” line in the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu.
3. Within the video circle, position the cursor over the required tracked target origin
or video circle origin (for own ship).
4. Left click to select. The menu will reflect the selection made.

Intercept Graphics
When the interceptor and interceptee have been selected, the intercept vectors
are calculated and displayed in the video circle, see example below.
Within the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu the following parameters are calculated
automatically and are not selectable. The information is updated dynamically to follow
changes in the velocity of the interceptee.
For the Interceptor:
• COG FOR INT – Course Over Ground for intercept. This will be CSE when the
speed mode is water locked;
• TTG – The Time To Go to intercept;
• DTG – Distance To Go to intercept.
For the Interceptee:
• SOG – Speed Over Ground. This will be STW when the speed mode is water locked;
• T BRG – True Bearing from the Interceptor.
If the time to intercept (TTG) is greater than 199 minutes, or the range to intercept
(DTG) is greater than 80 n mile, it is assumed that the intercept is not possible and
the course and range data is dashed out in the menu. The intercept vectors are also
suppressed until conditions fall within the above limits.
Planning the Intercept

Once the interceptor and interceptee have been successfully selected, the operator
can plan the intercept by varying the speed of the interceptor (the only adjustable
parameter available to the operator). This allows the operator to plan the intercept
point and/or the time of the intercept. This could be of assistance in meeting the tide
when returning to a port of harbour.
1. Position the screen cursor over the “SOG (or STW) FOR INT” line in
the “TARGET INTERCEPT” menu.
3. Move the screen cursor left or right to change the speed (between 1 and 150 kt),
and observe the intercept graphics.
4. Left click to accept the new speed.
Alternatively, a right click on the “SOG (or STW) FOR INT” line will reveal
a drop-down alpha-numeric keypad from where the speed can be entered.
When the intercept plan is as required, reselect the “MODE” line in the “TARGET
INTERCEPT” menu and set for “RUNNING”. In this mode, the speed used is either
ownship’s or target’s true speed.

Furuno Type Radar Imitator
Defaults and Other Operating Conditions

By default, intercepts are from own ship to a target. It is not possible to select
a target which is not established.
The initial default for interceptor speed is 25 kt, but subsequently the last entered
planning speed is used.
FURUNO TYPE RADAR IMITATOR
Running the Program

For radar selection and radar parameters adjusting, see the first section of this chapter.
On the screen of the monitor, after the selection of imitator Furuno you will see the radar
front control panel with Standby message on the plan-position indicator (PPI).
Controls
The outward appearance and arrangement of the radar imitator controls are shown
in fig. below.
They are grouped in three sections:
• Principal controls located in the bottom part of the panel;
• Instrumentation unit located on the right of the panel top part;
• Section of ARPA functions and control menus located in the right bottom part
of the panel.
Controls Located in the Bottom Part of the Panel

“POWER/OFF” – to exit from the imitator program to radar selection
menu.
“ST-BY/TX” – to switch between Standby and Transmit. When

transmitting, radar waves are emitted by the antenna, and returning
echoes appear on the display.

“BRILL” – to adjust display brilliance.
“ACQ” – press to acquire target.
“AUDIO OFF” – to silence watch alarm.
“VRM” – rotary encoder. Measure range to a target. Press “ON” to

display a VRM, then operate rotary encoder to set VRM on the inside
edge of the target. The range appears at the bottom of the display.
“RANGE” – to select radar range.

Ranges (n mile): 0.125; 0.25; 0.5; 0.75; 1.5; 3; 6; 12; 16; 24; 32; 48; 72.
“A/C GAIN” – to adjust so noise just disappears from display.
“A/C SEA” – to reduce sea clutter near own ship.
“A/C RAIN” – to reduce reflections from rain, snow and hail.
“ACK ALARM” – to acknowledge the alarm.
“A/C AUTO” – to automatically reduce sea and rain clutter purpose

(the imitation of this function in the simulator is not completed).
“EBL” – rotary encoder. To measure bearing to a target, press “ON”

to display an EBL, then operate the rotary encoder to bisect the target
with EBL. Bearing appears at the bottom of the display.
Instrumentation Unit of Display Controls

“HM OFF” – press and hold down to erase heading mark.
“ECHO TRAILS” – to show trails of targets in afterglow (30 s, 1, 3, 6, 15,

30 min, CONTINUE – see the right bottom corner of the PPI).
“MODE” – to select the display mode (North-Up, True Motion, Head-Up,

Cursor Gyro Head-Up, Course-Up).
“GUARD ALARM” – to set, disable, cancel the guard alarm.
“EBL OFFSET” – to enable/disable offset EBL.
“OFF CENTER” – to off centre the display.

“x2 ZOOM” – to double the size of area between your ship and a location.
“BKGD COLOR” – to set background colour.
“INDEX LINES” – to show/hide the index lines.
“CU, TM RESET” – in course-up bow bearing is 0; in true motion own

ship position is returned 50% of stern direction.
“INT REJECT” – to reduce interference from other shipborne radars. Set

at “2” for normal use purpose (the imitation of this function in the simulator
is not completed) (see the IR reading in the top left corner of the PPI).
“RINGS” – show/hide range rings and adjust their brightness (range ring
interval: 0.025; 0.05; 0.1; 0.25; 0.5; 1; 2; 4; 8; 12; 20 n mile).
Section of ARPA Functions and Control Menus

“RADAR MENU” – to display radar menus.
“E, AUTO PLOT MENU” – to display the electronic plot menu (manual
plotting) or auto plot menu (option).
“NAV MENU” – to display navigation menus (this function is available with

connection of Furuno Video Plotter, is not implemented in the simulator).
Digit buttons – plot marks, to enter numeric data.
“CANCEL/-” – to erase plot marks in electronic or automatic plotting.
“ENTER” – to register option set on menu.
“ORIGIN MARK” – to hide/show origin mark (the imitation of this

function in the simulator is not completed).
“VECTOR TRUE/REL” – to set vector bearing reference.
“VECTOR TIME” – to set vector length (from 1 min to 10 min).
“TARGET DATA” – to display data on acquired target.
“TARGET BASED SPEED” – to display ship’s speed (the imitation

of this function in the simulator is not completed).
“AUTO PLOT” – to turn auto plotting on/off (the imitation of this function
in the simulator is not completed).
“TRIAL” – to execute trial manoeuvre (to display the trial manoeuvre menu).

“LOST TARGET” – to erase lost target.
“HISTORY” – to show past positions of targets being tracked.
Display Markers and Indications

The general view of the display is shown in fig. below.
The display is arranged around the PPI in the following order:
• top left corner – information on the PPI adjustment and radar cursor position;
• middle of the top part – information on the vessel’s course and speed;
• top right corner – ARPA information;
• middle of the right-hand part – menus (displayed at the operator’s request);
• bottom right corner – information on the guard zone (GUARD ALARM),
afterglow trails (ECHO TRAILS), and variable range rings (VRM);
• middle of the bottom part – parameters adjusted from the menu (displayed at
the operator’s request);
• bottom left corner – information on PPI off centering (OFF CENTER) and EBL’s.

Motion Displays and Display Orientations

This radar has the following motion displays and orientation displays:
• Relative motion – Relative and True bearing – Head-Up;

• Relative motion – Relative and True bearing – Cursor gyro Head-Up;
• Relative motion – Relative and True bearing – Course-Up;
• True motion – Relative and True bearing – North-Up.
To switch over use “MODE” button.
Head-Up Orientation
Head-Up displays own ship’s heading at the top of the display at all times. It is useful
for navigating in congested areas or narrow channels, since the display provides
a more immediate indication as to whether the largest lies to port or starboard.
A negative aspect of this orientation is the display is not stabilized against yaw
of the vessel; there may be some smearing of echoes.
Cursor Gyro Head-Up

This orientation functions the same as the Head-Up with the addition that
the bearing scale is engaged to the gyrocompass. This lets you know own ship’s
bearing at a glance.
Course-Up
Course-Up shows ship’s course at the top of the display. To start Course-Up, steer
vessel in direction desired and then select course-up. The heading mark is first fixed
at zero degrees and then moves with ship’s movement. Because the direction
desired is always at zero degrees, however, you can know if the vessel is off course.
The display is stabilized against yawing of the vessel, so there is no smearing
of echoes.
To change heading, steer vessel in direction desired and then press the
“CU, TM RESET” key.
North-Up
North-Up displays North at the top of the display, and the heading marker moves
with ship’s movement. Targets are painted at their measured distances in true
directions from own ship, appearing as if you are viewing a nautical chart. Since
targets do not move, the picture is stabilized against yawing of vessel. This
orientation is useful for long-range navigation, finding ship’s position, monitoring
ship’s movement, etc.
True Motion
True motion displays own ship and moving objects in their true motion.
Since the own ship mark also moves, it freezes when its position is 75%
of the range in use. If you want own ship to move continuously on the
display, you can automatically return the own ship mark to 50%
of the stern direction.
You may return it manually by pressing the “CU, TM RESET” key.

Menu Keys and Menu Description

Menu Keys
This radar has three menu keys: “RADAR MENU”, “E, AUTO PLOT MENU”,
and “NAY MENU”. Table below describes the functions of the menu keys.
Menu Key Function

RADAR MENU To display radar function-related menus
E, AUTO PLOT MENU • To set mark size in the electronic target plotting (manual acquisition of target);
• To set plotting conditions in the automatic plotting (optional Auto Plotter
required)
NAV MENU • To select/cancel the navigation data to display: data from the navigational
aids, own ship position, cursor data, WP data, WP numbers, WP route;
• With Auto Plotter connection (option), it also displays the Video Plotter menu
How to Set Menu Options

The procedure which follows shows how to set menu options:
1. Press appropriate menu key.
2. Press numeral key to select item. Item number selected appears in reverse video.
3. Press the same numeral key pressed in step 2 to select option. Current selection
appears in reverse video.
4. Press the <Enter> key to register option selected.
5. To change option of another item, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6. To finish, press menu key pressed at step 1.
RADAR Menu Description

Table below describes the Radar menu.
Item Description
PULSEWIDTH Pulsewidth may be selected for the ranges between 0.5 and 24 n mile.
Two sets of pulsewidths (pulsewidth 1 and 2) are set during installation,
and you may select one here
Note: This setting is independent of the pulsewidth set for the function keys.
Item Description
ECHO STRETCH This setting is independent of the echo stretch set for the function keys
(OFF, 1, 2)
ECHO AVERAGE This setting is independent of the echo averaging set for the function keys
(OFF, 1, 2, 3)
ECHO COLOR YEL: Echoes appear in 16 gradations of yellow according to strength.
GRN: As above except in green.
COLOR: Echoes appear in red, yellow, or green in descending order
of strength
SHIP’S SPEED Set method of ship’s speed entry; speed log (LOG) or manual (MAN).
When manual is selected, “MAN=**.**KTS” appears on display
INDEX LINES See below for further details (NO.2 VRM or MAN)
RADAR To call RADAR menu
RADAR menu
[FUNCTIONS] To return to the previous menu
NO.1 EBL To set bearing reference for each EBL: true or relative
NO.2 EBL
NO.1 VRM To select unit of range measurement for each VRM: kilometres, nautical
miles, or statute miles
NO.2 VRM
TRAIL GRAD To display echo trail in single colour gradation (SGL), or display trails
in multiple gradations (MULT) to show by lighter gradation when trailing
time elapses
PULSEWIDTH 1 To set pulsewidth set No.1, set on “PULSEWIDTH 1” in the previous
menu, for the ranges between 0.75 and 24 n mile
PULSEWIDTH 2 To set pulsewidth set No.2, set on “PULSEWIDTH 2” in the FUNCTIONS
menu, for the ranges between 0.5 and 24 n mile
NEXT PAGE To display the next menu page
PREVIOUS PAGE To return to the previous menu page
CURSOR REF To display cursor bearing in relative or true bearing
GUARD ALARM To set alarm type. “IN” generates alarm when echoes enter the guard
zone, and “OUT” when echoes exit the guard zone
BEARING SCALE To show (ON)/hide (OFF) the bearing scale
VRM’s
How to Display and Erase the VRM’s
To display and erase the VRM’s:
1. Press the “VRM ON” key. The VRM and delineated range reading
will appear in the bottom right-hand corner.
2. Press the “VRM ON” key again. The second range reading delineated
with a frame, will appear in the right bottom corner of the display.
3. Each press of the “VRM ON” key now selects the VRM to measure range,
by operating the VRM rotary encoder. The rectangle cursor circumscribes
the active marker.
4. To erase a VRM, press the “VRM OFF” key. The inactive marker and its readout
are erased. Press the key again to erase remaining VRM.

Selecting Unit of Range Measurement

The unit of range measurement for each VRM can be selected to nautical miles (NM),
kilometres (KM), or statute miles (SM) on the RADAR menu (NO.1/2 VRM).
EBL’s
How to Display and Erase the EBL’s
To display the EBL’s:
1. Press the “EBL ON” key. The EBL and delineated bearing reading
will appear in the bottom left-hand corner.
2. Press the “EBL ON” key again. The second bearing reading delineated
with a frame will appear in the left bottom corner of the display.
3. Each press of the “EBL ON” key now selects the EBL to measure bearing, by
operating the EBL rotary encoder. The rectangle cursor circumscribes the active
marker.
4. To erase an EBL, press the “EBL OFF” key. The inactive marker and its readout
are erased. Press the key again to erase remaining EBL.
Selecting Bearing Reference

The bearing reference for each EBL can be selected to true (TRUE) or relative
(REL) on the RADAR menu (NO.1/2 EBL).
Offset EBL
Predicting Other Target’s Course
Follow the procedure below to predict other target’s course:
1. Display the No 1 or No 2 EBL.

2. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor on the target you want
to predict its course.
3. Press the “EBL OFFSET” key. The EBL whose readout is circumscribed shifts
to the cursor intersection.
4. Press the “EBL OFFSET” key again to anchor the EBL.
5. Wait several minutes. Operate the EBL rotary encoder to bisect the target
with the EBL.
6. If the EBL passes through own ship’s position, the target may be on a collision
course with own ship.
7. To cancel the offset EBL, press the “EBL OFFSET” key.
Measuring Range and Bearing between Two Targets

Follow the procedure below to measure the range and bearing – between two targets:
1. Display No 1 or No 2 EBL.
2. Press the “EBL OFFSET” key. The EBL origin shifts to the cursor
intersection.
3. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor on the target from which you want
to measure range and bearing.
4. Press the “EBL OFFSET” key to anchor the EBL.

5. Operate the rotary knob control so it bisects the other target.

6. Operate the VRM rotary encoder to adjust the No 1 (or No 2) VRM to measure
the range to the other target.
7. The bearing and range between the two targets appear at the bottom of the display.
Setting the Guard Alarm

Overview
The guard alarm sounds when a target violates the user-set guard zone. You may
preset the alarm to sound on targets either entering or exiting the zone. The size
of the guard zone may be set between 0 and maximum range for distance, and
between 0 and 360 degrees in bearing.
Notes: The alarm is a useful anti-collision aid, but does not relieve the operator
of the responsibility to also keep a visual look-out for possible collision
situations. The alarm should not be relied upon as the sole means for detecting
possible collision situations. The 1972 Convention on the International
Regulations For Preventing Collisions at Sea (1972 COLREGS) provides
statutory requirements for the operation of any vessel, including the posting
of lookouts. The operator of the vessel is responsible for compliance with those
requirements whether or not a radar is in use.
The alarm sounds to the targets having a certain level of echo strength.
This level does not always imply a landmass, reef, ships or other surface
target, but can mean returns from sea surface or precipitation. As the level
is changeable with the environment, the operator should (proper) adjust
the gain and A/C control. Note that excessively high position of A/C controls
can fail in alerting small targets.
Alarm Types
In Alarm
This alarm sounds when radar targets enter the guard zone. The target which
entered the zone blinks.
Out Alarm
This alarm sounds when radar targets exit the guard zone.
Selecting Alarm Type
You can select the alarm type to IN or OUT on “GUARD ALARM” in the “RADAR” menu.
Setting the Guard Zone

To set the guard zone:
1. Operate the trackball to set the cursor where you want the top
left-hand edge (or bottom left-hand) of the guard zone. Press
the “GUARD ALARM” key. “SET GUARD” appears at the bottom
right-hand corner of the display.
2. Rotate the trackball in the clockwise direction to set the cursor where you want
the bottom right-hand edge (or top right-hand) of the guard zone. Press the “GUARD
ALARM” key. “GUARD ALM” replaces “SET GUARD”. The guard zone is now set.
Note: You may also set a ring-shaped 360 degree alarm zone. After pressing
the “GUARD ALARM” key, to set the left-hand edge of the zone, move
the cursor in the counterclockwise direction (rather than clockwise).

Cancelling the Guard Alarm

Press the “GUARD ALARM” to erase the guard zone and the indication
“GUARD ALARM”.
Off Centering the Display

How to Off Center the Display
To off center the display in the forward direction:
1. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor aftward of normal screen centre.
2. Press the “OFF CENTER” key. The own ship position shifts to the cursor
location, and the view ahead of own ship is lengthened.
Cancelling the Off-center Display

Press the “OFF CENTER” key. Own ship’s position shifts to display centre.
Zoom
Turning On
To double the size of the area adjacent to a small island to the starboard side
of own ship:
1. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor on the location you want to double
in size.
2. Press the “x2 ZOOM” key. The area between the cursor and own ship is
doubled. “ZOOM” appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display.
Cancelling
Press the “x2 ZOOM” key.
Note: The zoom function is inoperative when the off-center function is turned on.
Index Lines
Introduction
You can display index lines parallel with the No 2 EBL. (The No 2 EBL must be
displayed beforehand.) They are useful for maintaining a constant distance between
own ship and a coastline or partner ship. You control the index lines with the EBL
rotary encoder. The distance between index lines can be adjusted by the No 2 VRM,
or by manual input.
Displaying the Index Lines

To display the index lines:
1. Press the “INDEX LINES” key. The index lines appear on the display.
2. Operate the EBL rotary encoder to rotate the No 2 EBL
and the index lines.

Setting Distance between Index Lines

To set the interval between index lines.
1. Press the “RADAR MENU” key.

2. Press the “6” key to select “INDEX LINES”.
3. Press the “6” key again to select method to enter distance:

– No 2 VRM: Adjust distance between index lines by the No 2 VRM.
(No 2 VRM must be displayed);
– MAN: Manually input distance between index lines by numeral keys.
4. Press the <Enter> key.
Trailing Echoes
Introduction
You can display the trails of all echoes in afterglow to assess target movement.
The trails can be shown in single or multiple gradation.
Trailing Gradation
Target trails may be shown in single or multiple gradations. The multiple gradation
trail shows when trailing time has elapsed, by lighter gradation.
Procedure:
1. Press “RADAR MENU”, “7” and “7” to display the “FUNCTIONS” menu.
2. Press “6” to set “TRAIL GRAD” to “SGL” or “MULT”.
Starting Echo Trailing

Press the “ECHO TRAILS” key to start trailing echoes. Then:
• trailing time appears at the bottom right-hand corner of the display;

• the trail of targets starts extending;
• when the trailing time elapses, the timer freezes and the oldest trails are erased.
Selecting Trailing Time

The trailing time appears on the display for your confirmation.
When the trailing time elapses, the oldest trails are erased. You can
select trailing time by pressing the “ECHO TRAILS” key. Each press of
the key within five seconds of previous press changes trailing time in the
sequence of 30 s, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min and continuous.
Erasing Trails
Press and hold down the “ECHO TRAILS” key (more than three seconds) until
all trails are erased. Trailing starts again.
Canceling Trailing
Press the “ECHO TRAILS” key.

Electronic Plotting
Introduction
You may manually acquire ten targets and show their data. For each target you
acquire, this radar plots its latest five positions, displays navigation data, and shows
speed and course by vector.
Navigation data are (from own ship):
• Range;
• Bearing;
• Course;
• Speed;
• CPA;
• TCPA.
The latest past four positions of acquired targets are shown on the display by dots.
The dots are erased one by one to make room for latest past position.
Sequence in Plotting
To acquire a target:
1. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
2. Press a plot mark key.
3. Press the “ACQ” key. The plot mark, associated with the plot mark key pressed
in step 2, appears at the cursor intersection.
4. More than 30 s after acquiring a target, its associated plot mark moves
to new location, and the previous position is marked by a dot.
Note: More than 30 s must elapse before a next position can be plotted.
5. To acquire another target, repeat steps 1 to 3.
Vector Display
After a target’s position is plotted more than twice, this radar automatically calculates
the target’s speed and course, displaying them by a vector at the latest position.
VECTOR TIME – the vector tip shows estimated position after the vector
time elapses. You can select vector time (from 1 to 10 min) by pressing
the “VECTOR TIME” key.
VECTOR BEARING REFERENCE – the bearing of vectors may be shown

in true or relative bearing by pressing the “VECTOR TRUE/REL” key.
Erasing Acquired Targets

Individually by Tracker ball:
1. Operate the tracker ball to set the cursor on the plot mark you want
to erase.
2. Press the “CANCEL/-” key.
All
Press and hold down the “CANCEL/-” key (more than five seconds) until all acquired
targets disappear.

Acquired Target Data

Navigation data for acquired targets appear at the top right-hand corner
of the display. To display data, press plot mark key associated with target:
• RNG – Range from own ship to latest plot mark position;

• BRG – Bearing from own ship to latest plot mark position, in relative (R)
or true (T) bearing;
• CSE – Ship’s course, relative (R) or true (T);
• SPD – Ship’s true speed;
• CPA – Closest range the target will be from own ship;
• TCPA – Time to TCPA.
Origin Mark Key

Origin Mark
The origin mark (⊕) appears at the cursor position when the “ORIGIN
MARK” key is pressed. It is fixed against land; namely, its position is
absolute position.
Marking a Waypoint
If there is a danger point (such as a reef) along ship’s course, for example, you can
use the origin mark to mark where you should change course to avoid the reef:
1. Using a nautical chart, measure the range, and bearing from the location
where to change course to a landmass (for example, cape).
2. Display an EBL and a VRM and then press the “EBL OFFSET” key.
3. Operate the rotary encoders to match VRM mark range and EBL bearing with
the range and bearing measured in step 1.
4. Operate the tracker ball to set the VRM mark on the cape.
5. Press the “ORIGIN MARK” key to inscribe the origin mark.
Measuring Range and Bearing between Two Targets

The range and bearing between two targets can be measured by using the origin
mark as well as the offset EBL:
1. Press the “ORIGIN MARK” key.

2. Operate the trackball to set the cursor on other target.

Nucleus Radar Imitator
NUCLEUS RADAR IMITATOR

To start radar imitator, press the “Nucleus” button from the radar selection menu.
Note: Radar selection and radar parameters adjusting see the first section of this
chapter.
Introduction
The Nucleus Display facilities are all selected by three pushbuttons and a tracker
ball, which controls the movement of a screen cursor.
Tracker ball, Cursor and Pushbuttons

The tracker ball is used to position the cursor near to, or on, the function
to be activated and to change parameters once a function is activated.
The cursor is shown as a marker (+) inside the radar display area and an arrow (↑)
outside the radar display area. When a function is activated, by pushbutton
selection, the cursor is repositioned on the selected function.
Pushbuttons are used to activate/select a particular function. On-screen guidance,
as to which button to press, is given in the Pushbutton Selection box located in the
lower centre portion of the display.
When a function is activated (e.g., Range/Rings), the Pushbutton Selection box
displays similar data to that in the pop-down (information) boxes which appear below
the selected function box. Alternatively, a red box appears on the display containing
the legend.
A facility, which has been previously activated, such as EBL, is reselected by
positioning the cursor in close proximity to the required facility and pressing
the centre pushbutton.

Power OFF and Screen Illumination

To exit from the imitator program to the radar selection menu, press “PWR OFF”
pushbutton.
The adjustment of Day/Night brilliance, contrast, levels and Audio alarm levels are
available upon selection of the “CRT” box displayed in the bottom right-hand of the
screen. At any time, pressing all 3 pushbuttons simultaneously increases the CRT
brilliance and contrast.
Day/Night Operation
The Background colour of the Display Screen and Radar Circle change to Black
when Night operation is selected. All other colours are darkened.
Functions
Zone 1 – Radar System

• Standby, Run;
• Selection of the Radar System;
• Short, Medium, Long Pulse;
• Tuning of the selected Radar & Performance Monitor;
• Correlation & Interference Rejection;
• Enhancement of Radar Signals & Sector Scan.
Zone 2 – Screen Mode of Operation
• Range and Rings;
• Relative Motion;
• True Motion (Optional);
• Centre Mode Display (Optional);
• North-Up;

• Course-Up;
• Head-Up;
• Heading Line.
Note: An Offcentre Facility is also selectable.

Zone 3 – Ownship and Plotting Parameters
• Ownship Parameters;
• Plotting Parameters;
• Trail Parameters.
Zone 4 – VRM, EBL and Signal Controls
• Variable Range Marker;
• Electronic Bearing Line;
• Gain Setting;
• Sea Setting;
• Rain Setting.
Zone 5 – Data and Menus
• Target Data Information;
• Menus for CRT Facilities, MAPS, TRAIL and PLOT.
Zone 6 – Cursor Control and Mode
• Pushbutton Selection;
• Cursor Readout Mode.
ZONE 1 – Radar System

Standby/Run
Function
Run
TX A X
Run TX X TX S
The screen contains a set of instruction boxes as follows:
Go to Run Select Select

TX X TX S
The selected radar information is displayed on the screen, and all functions are
available for selection.
Standby
To change the operational state of the system from Run to Standby, highlight
the TX box and press the left pushbutton.
The screen contains a set of instruction boxes as follows:
TX A X
StndBy TX X TX S

The display reverts to the Standby condition, no radar is displayed.
Go to Select Select
StndBy TX X TX S
Cursor Positioning and Initial Pushbutton Facilities after Selecting RUN

The cursor defaults to a particular position, and the initial Pushbutton Selection
is different depending upon whether “GO TO RUN” is selected after switching the
system ON or selecting “RUN”, for the second time, via the Standby screen.
If the cursor is outside the radar circle, after 30 seconds of tracker ball/pushbutton
inactivity, the cursor defaults to the park position (set on installation), and
the pushbutton selection boxes show:
Vector Reset H/H

Mode Alarms OFF
After selecting “GO TO RUN” from the standby screen, the cursor is positioned
in the centre of the radar circle and the pushbutton selection boxes show:
Enter
Select
Plot
Short Pulse/Medium Pulse/Long Pulse (Master Only)

Function
The following pulse lengths are automatically activated, for the master radar only,
when the following range scales are selected:
• Short Pulse (SP) – 0.25 to 1.5 n mile ranges;

• Medium Pulse (MP) – 3 to 24 n mile ranges;
• Long Pulse (LP) – 48 and 96 n mile ranges.
Note: An underride & override facility exists to manually change the pulse length
from the standard setting set in the DefauIt menu (refer to the front
of the section).
Selection
To select a pulse length setting:
1. Highlight the SP/MP/LP box; a pop-down box displays the options that may
be selected for that specific range (i.e. for the 3 n mile range, the box displays
SP/MP/LP, and the pushbutton selection box duplicates the pop-down box):
2. The pushbutton selection box for the 3 n mile range allows the standard
selection of medium pulse to be changed to either short or long pulse,
and displays:
3. Press the appropriate pushbutton.

Note: If SLAVE Radars are selected, the SP/MP/LP box reads SLAVE (no change
of Pulse Length is possible).
If the Pulse Length is not normal for the range selected, the SP/LP/MP
box is outlined in red, indicating that underride or override is in use.
If the Pulse Length is changed downwards, i.e. long to medium, the Trails
are automatically cleared.
Video Correlation & Interference Rejection

Function
Signal correlation is used to reduce radar interference (CORR 1) and to reduce
clutter (CORR 2). Three levels of correlation are available:
• CORR 0 – correlation is switched off, returns are displayed as raw radar;
• CORR 1 – the Interference Rejection facility only is switched ON. Consecutive
transmissions are compared, and only signals present on both transmissions are
painted. Interference from other radars is suppressed, and Receiver noise reduced;
• CORR 2 – signal correlation reduces random clutter returns and preserves radar
signals that correlate (are present) for two successive scans of the antenna.
Targets that do not paint consistently, are displayed at the medium echo colour
if one scan is missed, at the weak echo colour if two paints are missed, and not
at all if more than two scans are missed. The Interference Rejection is also
switched ON. Receiver noise is further reduced.
Note: If CORR 2 is selected on short pulse and/or a low range scale, the CORR 2
box outline flashes. This is to warn the user that small targets with a fast
relative speed may not correlate and therefore may be suppressed to
a lower level paint.
Selection
To select Video Correlation and/or Interference Rejection, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the CORR box; 0, 1, 2 pop-down boxes are displayed beneath.
2. Press the appropriate pushbutton for the correlation and/or the interference
rejection required.
a. CORR 0=Scan to Scan Correlation and Interference Rejection OFF.
b. CORR 1=Interference Rejection ON only.
c. CORR 2=Scan to Scan Correlation and Interference Rejection ON.
Note: Fast ships generate high relative target speeds that reduces target correlation.
A faster scanner should be fitted to improve the target update rate.
A target that stays in the same position, or overlaps on two, consecutive scans
correlates (Target A). A target with high relative speed on a low range scale that
does not overlap on two consecutive scans, paints at a lower intensity level
(Target B). A longer pulse length improves correlation, but close targets moving
at a high tangential speed may still not correlate.
Tuning
Function
Allows manual tuning of the Radar Receiver (MASTER Radars Only). The Tune
function is not available and is not shown on Slave displays and has only limited
effect on systems with Automatic Frequency Control.

Selection
To manually tune the RADAR, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the tune box.
2. To tune the RADAR, hold down any pushbutton, a red control bar
appears beneath the green tune bar showing the position of the control:
3. Move the tracker ball in the East/West axis to optimise the tuning, the red
control bar moves from side to side as the tuning is changed. The green tune
bar shows maximum when the radar is on tune. Release the pushbutton.
Note: To ensure that the AFC function in the Receiver operates correctly, the red
tune control bar indication is to be set to mid position. If the AFC has failed
to operate on manual tuning, selection is achieved by adjusting the tracker
ball east/west movement for optimum tune bar indication.
Boost
Function
Boost enhances radar signals by stretching the size of strong video signal returns
(in range). The facility may only be selected on the 6 n mile or greater range scales.
To reduce clutter enhancement, targets within 1.5 n mile of ownship are not
boosted.
Selection
To select the Boost function, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “VIDEO NORM (BOOST)” box; the pop-down box reads “BOOST”.
2. Select by pressing any pushbutton.
Note: In excessive sea clutter or precipitation, Boost may reduce target visibility.
A combination of longer pulse length, adjusting SEA/RAIN and CORR 2
produces better target visibility.
ZONE 2 – Screen Mode of Operation

Range & Rings
Function
• Range.
The displayed range may be changed from 0.25 to 96 n mile in fixed range
steps: 0.25 n mile, 0.5 n mile, 0.75 n mile, and then doubling up to
96 n mile.
• Rings.
Range rings may be displayed for each range selected, scaled according
to the range in use. Three rings are displayed on the 0.75 n mile range, five on
the 0.25 n mile and 0.5 n mile ranges, and six on the 1.5 to 96 n mile ranges.
Range Selection
To change the displayed range, listed below, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “RANGE/RINGS” box; pop-down boxes are displayed beneath
the “RANGE/RINGS” box.
2. Press the pushbuttons, left for down and right for up, until the required range
is displayed in the “RANG/RINGS” box.

Note: The range is incremented in steps: 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 3.0, 6.0
(normal default value), 12.0, 24, 48, and 96 n mile.
Range Scale Range Ring No of Rings
Separation
0.25 0.05 5
0.5 0.1 5
0.75 0.25 3
1.5 0.25 6
3.0 0.5 6
6.0 1.0 6
12.0 2.0 6
24.0 4.0 6
48.0 8.0 6
96.0 16.0 6
Rings Selection
To turn Rings ON/OFF (number displayed is dependent on range selected), carry
out the following:
Select “RANGE/RINGS” as above and then press the centre pushbutton
(the pushbutton acts as a switch, i.e. ON or OFF).
PPI Modes & Presentation

Function
The following PPI Mode selections are available for display types:
Modes
• Relative Motion;
• True Motion.
Presentation
• Head-Up;
• North-Up;
• Course-Up.
Note: In all modes and presentations, the Heading Line (HL) indicates the heading
of ownship.
Relative Motion
The display is in a Relative Motion mode with the PPI positioned in the centre of
the radar screen area, or to any offset position. All targets move relative to ownships
course and speed. Targets have relative past trails, but ownship has no trail.
If ownship changes course or yaws, target direction changes by the same angle.
Any target on a collision course is on a constant bearing with a decreasing range.
Targets appearing stationary are on a parallel course in the same direction
and travelling at the same speed as ownship.

True Motion
The display is in a True Motion mode with ownship positioned offcentre and moves
in a direction of the Heading Line (HL) at a true speed, nominally through the centre
of the display. All targets move on screen with true courses, speed and target trails.
Ownship course changes do not affect target directions, but the HL reflects the change
in course. Any targets on a collision course are on a constant bearing with
a decreasing range. As in Relative Motion, ownship may be moved by tracker ball
when Offset by using the tracker ball, selecting ownship, moving the cursor and
pressing button “OFFSET”.
Head-Up
This display always presents a Relative Motion PPI picture aligned so that the Ship’s
Head, as indicated by the HL, is 0 degrees on the bearing scale. When ownship
changes course, the PPI rotates by an equal, and opposite amount, to that of
the Ship’s Head.
While on a steady course, stationary targets move towards the lower part of the screen
at an equivalent rate to ownships speed. Targets that have the same course and
speed as HL ownship appear stationary. All other targets move with a speed
and direction determined by a resultant of own and ownships movement.
Note: Head-Up is not available in True Motion.
North-Up
North-Up is a compass stabilized presentation that may be selected in Relative
Motion, True Motion modes. The PPI picture is aligned so that north is always at the
top of the screen (000 degrees bearing scale). The HL indicates ownships’ heading.
In Relative Motion, a ownship is at a fixed position on the screen, centred or offcentred,
and target movements are relative to ownship’s course and speed. Targets on a parallel
course and at the same speed appear as stationary, while fixed targets produce trails,
which represent the reciprocal of own ships ground track.
Course-Up
Course-Up is a compass stabilized presentation, available in all modes, with the ship’s
heading aligned to 000 degrees on the bearing scale at the time that the mode is
selected. Subsequent alterations in course result in the HL deviating from 000 degrees,
but the picture does not rotate. The ship’s HL is course stabilized such that if
ownship yaws, targets maintain direction. The ship’s HL may be updated at any time
by further selecting Course-Up, whereby the picture realigns on the new heading.
Relative Motion/True Motion/Centred Display Mode Selection

To select Relative Motion, True Motion carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “RM”/“TM” box; “RM”/“TM” pop-down boxes are displayed beneath.
North-Up/Course-Up/Head-Up Selection
To select North-Up, Course-Up or Head-Up, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “NUP”/“CUP”/“HUP” box; N UP/C UP/H UP pop-down boxes are
displayed beneath.

Offcentre
Function
The Offcentre facility enables the operator to offset the Radar picture in any direction
up to 70% (except on the 96 n mile range). The offcentre may be used in any
PPI mode: Relative or True Motion, or Centred Display.
Selection
To select the offcentre facility, first ensure that no other function is selected, then
carry out the following:
1. Position the cursor at the Radar origin.
2. Press the centre pushbutton, a highlighted box appears just above the pushbutton
selection box, indicating:
CENTRE
SELECTED
3. The pushbutton selection box displays the following:
RESET CANCEL OFFSET
4. To CANCEL the function, press the centre pushbutton.

5. To Offset the Radar origin position the cursor, using the tracker ball, at the required
location and press the right-hand pushbutton.
6. Pressing the left-hand pushbutton “RESET” moves the Radar origin to the centre
of the screen in Relative Motion or Centred Display modes, and to the maximum
“Look Ahead” position in True Motion mode.
ZONE 3 – Ownship and Plotting Parameters

Gyro
Function
The Gyro heading is normally manually set to the reading taken from the ship’s
Gyro Repeater.
Selection
To change the Gyro Compass reading:
1. Highlight the “GYRO” box.
2. Press and hold down simultaneously the left and right pushbuttons, adjust the
reading by moving the tracker ball in the North/South axis. At the correct setting,
release the two pushbuttons.
Speed
Function
The normal displayed speed is ship’s speed taken from one of two sources; ownship’s
LOG or manually (MAN) input speeds. A single axis log or manual speed input will give
speed relative to sea. A doppler log (X-Y axis) will give speed over the sea bed.

Selection
To change the Speed (Manual):
1. Highlight the “SPD” box; the pop-down box reads “LOG”, “MAN”, “DOP”
(if Doppler connected), Blank (if Doppler not connected).
Note: If speed is ownship LOG, press centre pushbutton to select Manual.

2. Press and hold down the centre pushbutton, adjust the speed by moving
the tracker ball in the North/South axis.
To change the Speed input (Doppler):
1. Press the right-hand pushbutton to select Doppler.

2. If speed input is always Doppler Log, save this setting in the “DEFAULT
SETTINGS”.
Note: “SPD” box has annotation W or G to indicate Water or Ground speed.
Stabilization
Function
Sea Stabilization
Sea stabilization gives the correct heading and speed through the water. No set
and drift information is used (no drift or set/rate). It provides an excellent display
for Coastal Navigation, Pilotage and Anti Collision. The true trails of targets give
an indication of their apparent true motion.
A single axis log (or manual speed input) and gyro provide sensor data for
the stabilisation.
Ground Stabilization
The correct heading and log speed of ownship are fed in, together with an input from
tide, rate, and direction.
A known stationary target (i.e. land fixed target) appears to move in an opposite
direction to that of the set current. The tide set (drift direction) can be adjusted
to ground stabilize the targets.
Note: A known stationary target should not show any movement providing there
is no error in the ground stabilization.
The tide or drift set and rate provide an additional vector which, when added to
ship’s movement in water, generates a vector representing Course Made Good
(CMG) and Speed Made Good (SMG).
The display can be ground stabilized by interfacing to a position fixing equipment or
by a dual axis Doppler Log, or by manual drift input, or on ARPA displays, using a
fixed target.
The ground stabilized True Motion display can be very useful for pilotage, when it is
important to know ownship’s and other ships’ courses made good over ground in
relation to land buoys and beacons.
Note: “COURSE MADE GOOD” and “SPEED MADE GOOD” boxes are for
information only.
If the external position fixing system no longer sends information,
then display automatically reverts to SEA Stabilization.

Selection
The Stabilization Input may be selected as follows:
1. Position the cursor, using the tracker ball, inside the “STAB” box: the box is now
highlighted and the pop-down box reads “SEA”, “MAN”, “EXTRN”2.
2. Select the required input by pressing the appropriate pushbutton.
Note: If Sea is selected, then “CMG” and “SMG” boxes have (in the information
boxes), as NO drift is set.
If Doppler Log and Sea Stabilization are selected, CMG, SMG, Set and Drift
numbers are shown in the information boxes.
Trail, Vector, CPA Limit, TCPA Limit

Function
Trails
The previous track of targets (either True or Relative) are displayed as trails.
The length of the trails may be changed (i.e., three minutes is the normal
default value), or may be switched OFF.
Vector
The vector indicates the predicted direction and speed of the tracked targets
(either True or Relative). The vector is shown as a solid line, proportional to the speed
of the target (i.e., with a 15 minute vector selected, a target speed of 12 kt produces
a vector line length of three miles). The vector may be also be shown in reverse
mode, i.e., True vector in Relative Motion or Relative vector in True Motion.
Closest Point of Approach Limit
This function warns the operator that a target is approaching within the designated area
and that evasive action is to be taken. The CPA limit is selected and then adjusted
to suit the maneuverability of the Ship and the prevailing conditions.
Note: The alarm only activates if both the CPA and TCPA limits are equaled or
broken.
Time to Closest Point of Approach Limit
This function provides a warning to the operator that a target may, within a certain
time, cause possible danger if avoiding action is not taken. The TCPA may be
selected and then adjusted as for the CPA.
Note: The alarm only activates if both the CPA and TCPA limits are equaled
or broken.
Selection
The following parameters are adjusted in a similar manner by selecting
the appropriate box and then holding down the left-hand pushbutton and moving
the tracker ball North/South until the new parameter is reached.
Vectors (VECT min (R or T)) 1 min to 30 min, in steps of 1 minute

Trails (TRAILS min (R or T)) 0.75, 1.5, 3 to 99 min in 3 min steps
Closest Point of Approach (CPA LIM nautical mile) 0.1 n mile to 6 n mile, in 0.1 n mile steps
Time for Closest Point of Approach (TCPA LIM min) 1 min to 60 min, in 1 min steps
2
– reads Extrn, GPS, LORAN dependent on NAV System source.

With VECTOR selected, pressing the centre pushbutton changes the mode, i.e.
R to T or T to R. The right pushbutton returns the vector time to its previous setting.
If the centre pushbutton is held down for more than 2 seconds, the R or T mode is
permanently selected, and the “VECTOR” box is outlined in red. The warning box
immediately appears on release of the pushbutton to inform the operator that the vector
mode is reversed, i.e. True vector is displayed in Relative Motion, and vice versa.
To revert to normal vectors, press the centre pushbutton (note that the red outline
is removed).
Note: If the Motion mode is changed, the Vector mode automatically revert
to normal operation.
With TRAILS selected, pressing the centre pushbutton switches the trails ON/OFF.
The right pushbutton clears all trails.
With either CPA or TCPA selected, the centre pushbutton sets the minimum limit
and the right pushbutton the maximum limit.
Notes:
1. If no change is made within 30 seconds, the system is deactivated and
the cursor is placed in the default position.
2. “LAT” and “LONG” boxes are for information only.
Cursor Readout about Mode

Function
To select the information mode when the cursor is inside the Radar circle.
Selection
To change the type of cursor information:
1. Highlight the “CURSOR READOUT MODE” box; the pop-down boxes read R/B,
TCPA.
2. The Pushbutton Selection box displays:
Range/ Time
Bearing To CPA
3. Select the required information.
Note: TCPA is the time taken for the ship to reach the closest point of approach,
assuming that the ship’s speed is maintained and that it maintains its
present course.
8.70 n mile 212.9° (TM)
The “CURSOR READOUT MODE” box displays the following if no Navigation
System is present:
8.70 n mile 212.9° (TM)

054°37.65 N
010°14.67 W

Measure
To measure the distance and bearing between two points inside the radar circle
(the first point must NOT be a selected function):
1. Position the cursor at the first point.
2. Press and hold down the centre pushbutton and move the cursor to the second
point. The “CURSOR READOUT” box displays the distance and bearing relative
to the first point.
3. The “CURSOR READOUT” box returns to normal when the centre pushbutton is
released.
ZONE 4 – VRM, EBL, and Signal Controls

Variable Range Marker
Function
The Variable Range Markers (VRM 1 and VRM 2) are used to measure the ranges
of targets from ownship. When selected, the VRM’s are displayed as circles – green
for VRM 1 and red for VRM 2, the diameters of which are altered by use of the tracker
ball. The range of the last selected VRM is displayed in a box, outlined in green for
VRM 1 or red for VRM 2, located in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Selection
To initially select a Variable Range Marker (VRM) facility, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “VRM” box.
2. Press any pushbutton.

3. The VRM function (VRM 1 or VRM 2) is now selected, and the tracker ball
is repositioned as a box on the VRM at centre range of the selected range.
4. To set the VRM, initially set the 50% of the range in use, to the desired range
use the tracker ball in the required axis. The range read-out is displayed within
the “VRM” box and is in nautical miles for all ranges.
5. To deselect the VRM facility, once the required setting is achieved,
press the centre pushbutton.
6. If both VRM 1 and VRM 2 are switched ON, pressing the centre pushbutton
displays the range of the other VRM, i.e. if outline of “VRM” box is green
(VRM 1), the range for VRM 2 is displayed:
VRM 1 Display VRM 2

ON/OFF VRM ON/OFF
7. To switch OFF the VRM facility, position the cursor inside the “VRM” box
(the “VRM” box is highlighted) and press any pushbutton.
Note: To reselect the VRM facility, once activated, position the cursor near to
the VRM and press the centre pushbutton.

Electronic Bearing Line

Function
The Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL 1 or EBL 2) are used to measure the bearings
of targets from ownship, either in True or Relative mode. When selected, the EBL’s
are displayed as lines, green for EBL 1 and red for EBL 2, originating from the ownship
to the outer edge of the Radar display. The lines are rotated by use of the tracker ball,
and the bearing is displayed in “EBL” box, outlined in green for EBL 1 and red
for EBL 2 (refer to NAV Menu below in the paragraph ZONE 5 – Data and Menus
for details regarding the Curved EBL).
Mobile EBL (offset EBL)
The EBL’s may be offset and used to measure the bearings of targets from a point
on the screen other than ownship.
Dual Movement of the VRM/EBL
The VRM and EBL may be selected to move simultaneously to enable the combined
measurement of range and bearing of an echo from ownship. If the EBL is offset,
the facility is used to measure the distance and bearing of one target with respect
to another.
EBL Selection
The Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) facility, only requires to be selected once. To select
an EBL carry out the following:
Highlight the “EBL” box, press any pushbutton.

The pushbutton selection box displays the following:
Enter Mobile
Deselect
Plot EBL
1. The EBL function is now selected.
2. To align an EBL on the required bearing, initially set on the heading line,
use the tracker ball. The bearing of the last selected EBL is displayed within
the “EBL” box.
Note: A plot may still be entered (with EBL centred) by pressing the left-hand
pushbutton, positioning the cursor over the plot and pressing the left-hand
pushbutton again.
3. If both EBL 1 and EBL 2 are switched ON, pressing the centre pushbutton
displays the bearing of the other EBL, i.e. if outline of “EBL” box is green
(EBL 1), the bearing for EBL 2 is displayed.
4. To deselect the EBL facility, once the required bearing is achieved, press
the centre pushbutton.
5. To switch OFF the EBL facility, position the cursor inside the “EBL” box
(the “EBL” box is highlighted) and then press any pushbutton.
Note: For reselect the EBL facility, once activated, position the cursor near
to the EBL and press the centre pushbutton.

Mobile EBL Selection

To use the Mobile EBL, place the tracker ball near to the EBL, press the centre
pushbutton and then press the right-hand pushbutton selecting Mobile EBL;
the following may then be carried out:
1. The origin of the EBL is automatically positioned on the cursor symbol within
the display, and the tracker ball may then be used to offset the EBL.
2. Pressing the right-hand pushbutton fixes the EBL in the tracker ball position
(the EBL legend changes to EBLO) and allows free movement of the cursor,
with the EBL still selected.
3. Pressing the right-hand pushbutton again reselects Mobile EBL.
4. To return to normal EBL, press the left-hand pushbutton which puts the EBL
origin at the centre of the display and deselects the EBL.
5. To deselect the Mobile EBL, press the centre pushbutton.
Dual Movement of the VRM/EBL (Centred on Ownship)

The dual movement of the VRM and EBL is possible as follows:
1. Position the cursor over the intersection of the VRM/EBL (strobe marker, only
displayed when both VRM/EBL activated) and press the centre pushbutton.
2. The VRM/EBL may now be moved by using the tracker ball.
3. To deselect the dual movement, once the required range and bearing
is achieved, press the centre pushbutton.
Dual Movement of the VRM/EBL (OFFSET)
This facility is used to measure the distance between two targets/points.
If the EBL is offset, a strobe marks the relative position of the VRM, the following
facility is then available:
• position the cursor over the strobe marker;

• use the tracker ball to move the EBL; note that the VRM moves in relation
to the strobe marker;
• to deselect the facility, press the centre pushbutton.
Gain, Sea, Rain

Function
When Gain, Sea or Rain adjustments are made, care is to be taken as
maladjustment of the settings may result in the loss of weak or close range targets.
Gain
The Gain adjustment sets the signal threshold of Radar signals displayed on
the screen. The GAIN is to be advanced until an even “speckled” background is just
visible on the screen, with the “Correlator” switched OFF (CORR 0).
If the setting is too high, a poor quality picture masked by excessive noise results; if
set too low, it results in a loss of weak targets and a reduction in the detection range.
In conditions of high precipitation (rain, hail or snow) a reduction of the GAIN level
reduces clutter and produces a clearer picture.
The GAIN level may be set from 0 (low) to 9 (high), with a typical operational level
of between 6 and 8.

ATTENTION!
Do not set too high a level as excess noise on the screen degrades the picture
quality.
Sea (STC)
The SEA (STC) is a manual adjustment that reduces sea clutter returns. Maximum
attenuation takes place at zero range, decreasing until no reduction of signals or
clutter occurs at a maximum range of about 6 miles.
Advancing the SEA setting progressively reduces the near range clutter. The SEA
level may be set from 0 (min) to 9 (max) with a typical operational level of 3 to
5 (medium pulse). Less SEA is to be applied on short pulse, more on long pulse.
Always set the SEA (STC) level with correlation OFF or on CORR 1 (CORR 2
causes a delay before the adjustment becomes visible).
The correct setting for SEA under any given weather condition is only obtained by
experience. If a setting is too high, it may result in the loss of close range targets.
NEVER set the SEA control to clear ALL clutter, but leave a light speckle of sea
returns to indicate optimum sensitivity within the clutter field. Reduction of the remaining
clutter may be reduced by using the correlator in the CORR 2 mode (scan to scan
correlation).
ATTENTION!
When not in use, the SEA clutter control is always to be set to 0.
Note: Pulse length affects the setting, i.e., a shorter pulse length requires a lower
setting.
Set to provide a compromise between reducing sea clutter and retaining targets.
Sea (Auto)
The AUTO facility provides the automatic suppression of clutter. Radar signals are
smoothed to generate a dynamic threshold to ride over the clutter returns, yet preserve
valid target signals. The AUTO level may be finely adjusted with the GAIN level.
The AUTO mode operates efficiently in open sea and in estuaries, though some
land detail may be suppressed (leading edges are preserved). RACON responses
may be reduced, but at least part of the response is normally visible.
The AUTO facility may be used with CORR 2 to further reduce clutter.
Rain (FTC)
The RAIN adjustment reduces clutter from rain, snow, and hail. The function uses
the received radar signals to produce a threshold reference level. The RAIN control
moves the threshold reference level so as to apply more or less attenuation to
the radar signal.
The RAIN facility also provides attenuation of sea clutter, though RACON responses
are likely to be suppressed. The RAIN level may be set from 0 (min to 9 max)
with typical operating level of 3 to 5.

ATTENTION!
When not in use, the RAIN control is always to be set to 0.
The RAIN setting is to be adjusted to preserve small targets. It is often beneficial

to reduce the GAIN setting slightly to optimise target detection in high precipitation.
The use of S-Band radar is advantageous in very high precipitation conditions.
Note: The RAIN facility also improves short range resolution.
Selection
To set or change the Gain, Rain or Sea settings, carry out the following:
1. Highlight either of the G/R/S boxes:
2. Press and hold down the appropriate pushbutton, left for GAIN, centre for RAIN
or right for SEA.
3. Move the tracker ball, in the North/South axis, until the required setting is
achieved, and then release the pushbutton. Rapid movement of the tracker ball,
when reducing the Gain or increasing the Sea/Rain settings, clears the Trails.
Note: The selected box (G/R/S) changes from dark blue to light blue for
identification.
4. To deselect the G/R/S facility, move the cursor away from the G/R/S box.
Auto Sea Clutter

To set the SEA function to Auto (A):
1. Select the SEA facility as above and then rapidly rotate the tracker ball in the
South axis until “A” appears in the box. Note that target trails are cleared as
AUTO is selected; this is to remove clutter build up in the trails.
2. To deselect Auto, rapidly rotate the tracker ball in the North axis.
Heading Line
Function
This function allows temporary removal of the Heading Line (HL) and all graphics
from the Radar display. The operator is then presented with a clear picture to enable
targets to be more visible, particularly those on the HL or other screen graphics.
Selection
To suppress the Heading Line, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “HL” box.
2. Press and hold down any pushbutton to remove all graphics from the display,
i.e. Heading Line, maps, rings, etc.
Note: All radar signals remain displayed.

3. Release the pushbutton to return the display to normal.

Target Plotting Controls

To plot a single target and obtain target data, proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor over the target, press the “ENTER PLOT” pushbutton
(left-hand), a plot symbol [•] appears over the target position.
Target data, other than Range and Bearing, are not available until the initial plot
has been updated.
Note: Vectors are relative if in the Relative Motion mode and true
if in the True Motion mode.
2. To display target data, position the cursor on or near to the vector origin and
press the “SELECT” pushbutton. Target data is displayed in the “TARGET” box
on the right-hand side of the screen.
3. The vector presentation mode may be reversed by pressing the “VECTOR
MODE” pushbutton, to display true vectors, when the equipment is
in the Relative Motion or Centred Display mode, and relative vectors when
the equipment is in the True Motion mode.
Note: Any change between Relative or True Motion and Head-Up or North-Up
does not result in any loss of plots. Vectors and History correspond to
the motion selected.
Plotting Additional Targets
Up to 20 targets may be plotted on the display at the same time. When selected
and plotted, targets are numerically labelled (on demand only) for ease of recognition.
To plot additional targets first ensure that no other target, map line, or symbol are
selected, then proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor over the initial target and press the “ENTER PLOT”
pushbutton, a plot symbol [•] appears over the target position.
2. Position the cursor over the 2nd target, press the “ENTER PLOT”; a plot
symbol [•] appears over the 2nd target position. Move the cursor to the next
target.
Deleting Plots
The vector and past positions of any one target may be deleted by positioning
the cursor on the vector origin, pressing the “DELETE” pushbutton.
Vector Time
The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes (divided into three minute
intervals). The length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the target,
e.g. target speed of 12 knots=vector length of three nautical miles.
The vector time may be changed between 1 and 30 minutes by selecting
the VECTOR function and then operating the tracker ball in the vertical plane
to increase or decrease the time shown next to VECTOR in the pop-down box.
Press the centre pushbutton to confirm the change.

ZONE 5 – Data and Menus

Target Data
Function
Data concerning a selected target may be displayed in the “TARGET” box. The data
for plotted targets using E-PLOT 3 is as follows:
• Target Number (automatically allocated);

• Bearing (True or Relative);
• Range;
• Course & Speed (True);
• Closest Point of Approach (CPA) & Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA)
or Bow Crossing Range (BCR) & Bow Crossing Time (BCT).
E-PLOT 3 tracking is available out to the maximum range of 96 n mile.
Selection
To display data in the “TARGET” box, position the cursor over the selected target
to be tracked and press the centre pushbutton (Select).
The elapsed time is calculated between successive target returns and a vector
generated on the display to represent the projected course and speed of the target.
Target information appears in the “TARGET” box as follows:
TARGET 1 Target Number

BEARING 200.6 (T) Bearing ((T) or (R))
RANGE 0.7 n mile Range in nautical miles
COURSE 258.5 (T) Course in degrees
SPEED 0.1 kts Speed in knots
CPA or BCR 0.3 n mile Closest Point of Approach (nautical miles) or Bow Crossing Range
TCPA or BCT -5.1 min Time of Closest Point of Approach (minutes) or Bow Crossing Time
To cancel a target, position the cursor close to the selected target and press
the centre pushbutton, then press the right-hand pushbutton.
CRT Menu
To select the CRT Facility menu, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the “CRT” box. Press any pushbutton.
2. The menu boxes are replaced with function selection boxes. CRT Facilities
menu shown below.
BRILL
DAY/NGT LEVEL AUDIO
Contrast and Brilliance Adjustment

To adjust either the contrast or brilliance:
1. Position the cursor in the appropriate box; the box is now highlighted.
2. Press and hold down any pushbutton while moving the tracker ball
in the East/West axis.

Levels
To alter the levels:
1. Highlight the “LEVEL” box.
2. Press any pushbutton; the CRT Facilities menu is replaced with function
selection boxes as shown:
D G P R T
A R L A R
T A O D A
A P T A I
H S R L
END
3. Highlight the appropriate box.

4. Press and hold down any pushbutton and then move the tracker ball in
the North/South axis to set the level as required.
5. To exit the Levels menu and return to the CRT Facilities menu, highlight
the “END” box and press any pushbutton.
6. To exit the “CRT” menu, move the cursor inside the radar circle.
Day/Night Selection
To select day or night illumination:
1. Highlight the “DAY/NGT” box.
2. Press any pushbutton to select either DAY/NIGHT.
Audio
To select the Audio facility (for Alarms):
1. Highlight the “AUDIO” box.
2. Press any pushbutton to change the Audio ON/OFF.
Menu Deselection
To deselect the “CRT” menu, position the cursor in the radar circle.
Plot Menu
Provides a selection of functions:
• History “ON/OFF”, i.e. when “ON” shows previous four plot positions;
• Guard ring functions, i.e. switching “ON/OFF” and setting Variable ring range
and bearing;
• Zones intended for acquiring automatically marks of previously unacquired targets
or cancelling automatic acquisition of marks of previously unacquired targets;
• Deleting all plots;
• Selecting Bow Crossing Range (BCR) or Closest Point of Approach (CPA);
• Labels allowing up to twenty targets to be labelled numerically;
• Box “END” to exit the “PLOT” menu.

To select the “PLOT” menu, highlight the “PLOT” box and press any pushbutton.
The Plot menu boxes appear in the lower right-hand corner of the screen as shown
below:
Hist ON/OFF Menu

To change the “ON/OFF” state of the History facility, highlight the “Hist OFF/
Hist 2 min (R)” box and press any pushbutton.
REF TGT Menu
To operate the Reference Target function, select a target on the Radar screen,
highlight the “REF TGT” box, the Pushbutton Selection box displays: “FIX”, “UNFIX”.
Press the appropriate pushbutton to fix (unfix) the selected target. An “F” appears on
the selected target, and the Drift Input changes to “Fixed Target”.
AIS Menu
To turn on/off the display of AIS information, select the “AIS” window and press
the necessary button: “AIS ON” or “AIS OFF”. To exit from the menu,
press the “END” button.
Note: By default, the display of AIS information is always ON.
DEL ALL Menu
To delete all plots, highlight the “DEL ALL” box. Press any pushbutton to delete all
plots. Warning box is displayed: “PRESS ANY KEY TO CONFIRM”.
BCR/CPA Menu
To change Target Data information as follows:
1. Highlight the “BCR/CPA” box.
2. Press any pushbutton to change the state of selection.
CPA/TCPA is replaced with BCR/BCT readings in the ranges of -99.9 to +99.9 n mile
and -99.9 to +99.9 min.
LABELS Menu
The “LABELs” menu is not implemented.
Plot Menu Exit
To leave the “PLOT” menu, highlight the “END” box and press any pushbutton.
Guard Menu
Two Guard Zone are available, one a Fixed and the other a Variable. The guard
zones operate by directly “Searching” the screen for targets inside the zones.
When in use, the following points are to be remembered:
• radar Controls GAIN/SEA/RAIN, Correlation, Pulse Lengths and Video Enhance

affect the amount of video on the screen and may be used to enhance
the “Searching” of the zones;
• if the range in use is less than the guard zones range, then the zones do not
operate until the range is increased.

Fixed Guard Zone

The Fixed guard zone is preset between 4.0 n mile and 4.5 n mile.
To activate the Fixed and Variable guard zones, select the function in the “PLOT” menu.
Note: Subsequent operation of the pushbutton turns the Fixed guard zone off,
and the guard zone disappears from the screen.
Targets are acquired and tracked with a symbol when the Guard Zone is
activated, further tracking is to be carried out manually by means of
“SELECT” and “ENTER PLOT” for each acquired symbol.
Variable Guard Zone
Activation of the Variable guard zone is automatic when the Fixed guard zone
is turned on. The Variable guard zone appears on the screen at the default
initialisation range of 6 n mile to 6.5 n mile, scaled to the range in use.
The Variable guard zone may be positioned to any range from 5 n mile out to 96 n mile.
To change the Variable guard range, move the tracker ball to anywhere on the ring
(not at the ends) and press the “SELECT” pushbutton. Movement of the tracker ball
then changes the range. Pressing “SELECT” again fixes the new range.
Ring Limits
The port and starboard bearing limits of both the Fixed and Variable guard zones
default to 45 deg. relative to ownships heading line.
To change the bearing limits, carry out the following:
1. Select the “PLOT” menu and “GUARD” function.
2. Move the tracker ball to the either end of the Variable guard zone
(i.e., port or starboard) and press the “SELECT” pushbutton.
3. Move the tracker ball to increase or decrease the angle. Minimum port limit
5 deg from ship’s head. Maximum starboard limit 180 deg from ship’s head.
4. Press “SELECT” pushbutton to enter the new value.
5. To de-activate the Variable guard zone, press “SELECT”, position the tracker
ball anywhere on the ring and then press the right-hand pushbutton.
Zones Menu
The entered zones are sectors intended for:
• acquiring automatically marks of previously unacquired targets included in
the sector if it has “INCLUSIVE” status;
• cancelling automatic acquisition of marks of previously unacquired targets
included in the sector if it has “EXCLUSIVE” status and overlaps the zone
fragment with “INCLUSIVE” status.
Note: Previously acquired targets do no respond to the entry in these sectors.
Sectors do not have range limitations. The maximum number of sectors is 14.

To select the necessary sector, use the cursor; in this case, the selected sector
is highlighted. For easier selection of the necessary sector from the list containing
more than 4 sectors, use arrow buttons to the right of the list.
To load the necessary sector, select it from the list of sectors with the mouse cursor
and press “LOAD Zone” pushbutton.
To delete a sector from memory, select it from the list of sectors with the mouse
cursor and press “DEL Zone” pushbutton.
Note: LOAD Zone and DEL Zone operations are performed without additional
confirmation.
To create a zone, perform the following procedure:
1. Select the zone type (“SHIP/NORTH” menu):
– “SHIP” – the zone has boundaries saved as relative bearings;
– “NORTH” – the zone has boundaries saved as true bearings.
2. Select the zone status (“INCLUSIVE/EXCLUSIVE” menu):
– “INCLUSIVE” – automatic acquisition and tracking of a target
(sector boundaries are shown in the cyan colour);
– “EXCLUSIVE” – cancelling automatic target acquisition and tracking
(sector boundaries are shown in the red colour).
3. Use “CREATE” command.
To edit a zone, perform the following procedure:

1. Position the cursor on the left or right boundary of the sector to be edited, and
press “SELECT” pushbutton. As this is done, the sector to be edited will be
highlighted on the screen with dashed line.
2. Use the cursor to set the desired sector direction on the screen and press
“Deselect” pushbutton.
3. Use a similar procedure to set the desired sector direction from the other side.
To turn on the zone, press “ZONE ON” pushbutton.

To turn off the zone, press “ZONE OFF” pushbutton: the zone disappears from
the screen, and does not perform its functions any more.
Where necessary to turn off all the zones simultaneously, use “CLR” command.
“END” command is used for exiting from this menu to “PLOT” menu.

Trial Menu
The “TRIAL” menu provides a graphic display of the consequences of an intended

change of course or speed of ownship to be assessed in advance, or avoiding action
be planned, when a potential collision exists.
ATTENTION!
Before selecting the trial manoeuvre function, target vectors should be set to relative so
that the results of an intended course/speed change may be assessed more accurately.
To select the Trial Manoeuvre menu, carry out the following:
1. Highlight the “TRIAL” box and press any pushbutton.
2. The “CPA/TCPA” boxes are replaced as shown below.

TRIAL MANOEUVRE
COURSE deg For

SPEED kts Information
DELAY min Only
• the cursor is automatically placed in the “TRIAL MAN” box, and the pop-up
boxes and the Pushbutton Selection box [3] contain the following:
Adjust Adjust Adjust ARPA

Course Speed Delay Only
• after selecting “GO TO RUN” from the standby screen, the cursor is positioned;
• if the course/speed/delay requires adjustment, the implications of the changes
can be viewed quickly on the display as other target vectors show their new
directions relative to the ownship.
Note: The delay (ARPA) provides a means of delaying the result
of the Trial/Manoeuvre for the stipulated period.

• to adjust the course, speed, or delay, press the appropriate pushbutton

and move the tracker ball until the required figure is obtained;
• to exit the Trial Manoeuvre facility, highlight the “TRIAL” box and press any
pushbutton. For True Motion, the Trial Manoeuvre facility may be exited by
moving the cursor, using the tracker ball, to the radar circle.
Note: The Trial Manoeuvre facility times out as set by the delay.
NAV Menu
The “NAV” (Navigation) menu provides access to the following facilities:
• Curved EBL on/off (not available in this simulator version);

• Wheel over Points – WOP (not available in this simulator version);
• Parallel Index – PI;
• Plot;
• CRT – to adjust daytime/nocturnal brilliance, contrast, light, and acoustic
alarm levels.
To select the navigation menu, position the cursor over the “NAV” box and operate
any of the pushbuttons. The following option boxes are displayed:
CURVED EBL OFF
WOP PI END
PLOT
Curved EBL
Function
An Electronic Bearing Line that graphically displays the rate of turn/radius of turn
that the vessel will take to effect a new course. The turn shown will include the ship’s
forwarding distance.
Selection
To enable the Curved EBL, position the cursor over the “CURVED EBL” box and
press any of the three control buttons.
To set the Radius of Turn or Rate of Turn, position the cursor over the required box,
press any of the buttons and, while maintaining pressure on the button, rotate
the tracker ball.
Wheel Over Point

Function
To mark the point at which the wheel is turned, in order to monitor the vessel’s
progress around a controlled turn.
Selection
As soon as the autopilot has been commanded to turn onto the new course, position
the cursor over the WOP box and press any of the control buttons. As the button
is pressed, the EBL becomes sea stabilized, and progress of the vessel around
the turn can be monitored by comparing the preset position with the curved EBL
lines. The WOP function is automatically cancelled when the gyro heading is within
3 degrees of the curved EBL bearing. It can also be cancelled any time by pressing
the WOP function again. The WOP box is highlighted in red when active.

Parallel Index
Function
To enable the operator to use Parallel Lines (Pl) as an aid to entering hazardous
areas (e.g., estuary), the system provides four independent lines.
Selection
To select a Pl:
1. Highlight the “Pl” box.
2. Press the left-hand pushbutton; a single dotted line appears on the display with
the cursor in mid position on the line. The Cursor Readout box reads the range
of the line to the ownship and the relative direction of the line.
3. Movement of the tracker ball adjusts the range only, pressing the centre
pushbutton deselects the cursor from the line.
4. Pressing and holding down the left-hand pushbutton allows adjustment
of the bearing only. Releasing the pushbutton deselects the cursor from the line.
5. To select a second line, highlight the “Pl” box; the following appears
in the Pushbutton Selection box.
6. Press the left-hand pushbutton; a second single dotted line, parallel to the first
line, appears on the display with the cursor in mid position on the second line.
Movement of the second line is independent of the first line, but is controlled
in the same manner as the first line.
7. Four lines are selectable; each line selected appears on the display parallel
to the last produced line. Each line is independent.
8. Selecting a line and pressing the right-hand pushbutton deletes that line.
Plot
The Plot facility is exactly the same as that described earlier in this section,
it is duplicated in the “NAV” menu for operator convenience.
CRT Menu
The “CRT” Menu is exactly the same as that described earlier in this section,
it is duplicated in the “NAV” menu for operator convenience.
Maps Menu
Map and Waypoint Positioning – the facility is provided to display both maps and
waypoints in one of two projections: True or Relative. The operator is to ensure that
the projection mode for both maps and waypoints is set as required prior to using
this facility.
Maps are either created by drawing, using the Scratch Pad Facility, or optionally
(if fitted) loaded via the Map Directory from the Nav Card. Relative maps are used
as Navigation lines. True maps are effectively used for highlighting features taken
from the navigation charts, i.e. navigation buoys, lighthouses, and depth contours.
Note: When creating a new map, ensure that the correct type of map, True or
Relative, is selected for the application required. Map types cannot be
changed once saved.

Three possible feature types are available for each map:
• Lines lines and circles may be drawn

in one of four colors and
• Circles one of four styles;
• Symbols – a selection of 16 symbols may be placed in one of four colours.
To select the Maps function, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the “MAPS” box; press any pushbutton.
Note: If a Navigation Card is not installed, the Maps Directory box shows:
NO NAV CARD
2. The Menu boxes are replaced with a Map Directory box, refer to fig. below.
3. To draw a new map, follow the instructions under Creating a New Map below.
4. To display a previously saved map, follow the instructions under Loading a Map
below.
Note: Function MOVE is availed only for True Maps. If the map is moved, the box
is outlined in red.
5. The Pushbutton Selection box displays:
Creating a New Map

To create a map, carry out the following:
1. Position the cursor, using the tracker ball, in the “NEW” box. The Pushbutton
Selection box allows selection of a True or Relative map, irrespective of
the motion mode selected.
2. The map edit mode shown below, now appears; this is the only mode
that allows selection and alteration to map features:

Line Drawing
1. If the Current Feature selected is not the Type, Style, or Colour required,
position the cursor in the Lines box. The Pushbutton Selection box allows
selection of Line Style (centre pushbutton) and colour (right pushbutton).
The left-hand pushbutton is used to select the type of Line.
2. Selection of the Line style produces the following menu; position the cursor
on the required selection and press any pushbutton.
3. Select the Colour by pressing the right-hand pushbutton; the following menu
appears; position the cursor on the required colour and press any pushbutton.
Note: If a feature is to be placed at a designated Lat/Long coordinate, select
the “CURSOR” function box and change to LAT/LONG. Place the feature at
the required Radar display position using the Lat/Long readout.
4. Move the cursor into the Radar display drawing area and press the left-hand
pushbutton to start the line.
5. Using the tracker ball, draw the line in the direction required until the required
distance is reached, press the right-hand pushbutton to complete the line.
Note: If a series of connected lines is to be drawn, press the left-hand pushbutton
to end the previous line and to start the new line.
6. To change the line types and colours repeat steps 1 to 5.
Symbol Placement
To place a Symbol:
position the cursor in the Symbol box. The Pushbutton Selection box allows
selection of Symbol Style (centre pushbutton) and colour (right pushbutton).
The left pushbutton is used to restore the previously selected Symbol Type.
2. Selection of the Symbol style produces the following menu; position the cursor
3. Symbol colours are selected in the same way as for Lines.

the “CURSOR” function box and change to LAT/LONG. Place the feature
at the required Radar display position using the Lat/Long readout.
4. Using the tracker ball, position the Symbol in the required position and press
the left-hand pushbutton.
5. If the symbol is incorrectly positioned, reselect the symbol by positioning
the cursor over the symbol and pressing the centre pushbutton. To delete
the selected symbol, press the right-hand pushbutton.

Drawing a Circle
To draw a circle:
position the cursor in the Circle box. The Pushbutton Selection box allows
selection of Circle Style (centre pushbutton) and colour (right pushbutton).
The left pushbutton is used to restore the previously selected Circle Type.
2. Selection of the Circle style produces the following menu; position the cursor
3. Circle colours are selected in the same way as for Lines.

the “CURSOR” function box and change to LAT/LONG. Place the feature
at the required Radar display position using the Lat/Long readout.
4. Move the cursor into the Radar display drawing area and press the left-hand
pushbutton to start the Circle.
5. Using the tracker ball, draw the circle to the required size, press the left-hand
pushbutton to complete the circle.
6. To delete the circle, select by positioning the cursor on the outside of the circle
and press the centre pushbutton and then the right-hand pushbutton.
Loading a Map
To load a map, proceed as follows:
1. Scroll the map selection by positioning the cursor on the Up or Down arrow
(located on the right-hand side of the Map Directory box) and then press and
hold down any pushbutton and rotate in North/South axis until the required map
appears.
2. Position the cursor inside the Map Directory box on the map required, the map
is now highlighted, and then press the left-hand pushbutton.
3. The map is automatically loaded and displayed on screen and may be edited.
The highlighted map colour now changes to indicate the selected map.
4. To return to normal operation, position the cursor using the tracker ball,
in the “END” box or simply move the cursor into the radar circle.
Editing a Map
To edit a map, proceed as follows:
1. Position the cursor in the “EDIT” box and press any pushbutton.
2. The Directory box changes to the following:

3. Position the cursor in the function required; the function is highlighted

and displayed in the Selected Function box.
4. The Pushbutton Selection box now displays:
Note: The left-hand pushbutton selection box reflects the function selected, i.e.
Line, Symbol (e.g. Waypoint), Circle.
5. Select the required feature by pressing the appropriate pushbutton:
– SELECT LINE – to draw lines on the map;
– SELECT SYMBOL – to place a symbol, e.g. waypoint on the Map;
– SELECT CIRCLE – to draw circles on the Map;
– CHANGE STYLE – allows different symbols (16) to be drawn on

the Map, or changes type of line or circle,
i.e. solid, dashed, or dotted;
– SELECT COLOUR – when selected, the Directory shows the different

colours available for each function selected.
The colour selected is also shown in the Selected
Function box.
6. The following facilities are also available:

– move – allows the map to be moved around the screen, e.g. to correct for
GPS positioning errors. Position the cursor in the “MOVE” box; the box
is highlighted. Press and hold down any pushbutton and move the map
to the new location by using the tracker ball;
– clear – clears the screen of the selected map (reload if required again).
Position the cursor in the “CLEAR” box, the box is highlighted; press any
pushbutton.
7. When all editing is completed, position the cursor in the “END” box and press
any pushbutton. The Directory reappears.
Saving a Map
Position the cursor, using the tracker ball, on the Map number under which the map
is to be saved. Press the centre pushbutton to save the map; the following warning
box is displayed: “SAVING MAP”.
Note: If the Map is already in the Directory, the warning box displays the message
“CLICK AGAIN NOW TO CONFIRM ACTION”.
Deleting a Map
Position the cursor, using the tracker ball, on the Map number to be deleted.
Press the right-hand pushbutton; the map is now deleted.

CHAPTER 3
Navigational Aids
The chapter contains description of the imitators
of the Furuno GPS Navigator GP-90, UAIS MKD,
Loran C receiver, Furuno direction finder.

Furuno GPS Navigator GP-90 ............................................................................... 283
Operational Overview ....................................................................................... 283
Functions of Keys .................................................................................. 283
Turning On and Off the Power ............................................................... 284
Adjusting Display Contrast and Brilliance .............................................. 285
Selecting the Display Mode ................................................................... 285
Chart Icons ............................................................................................. 286
Track ................................................................................................................ 287
Enlarging/Shrinking the Display ............................................................. 287
Selecting Display Orientation ................................................................. 287
Shifting the Cursor ................................................................................. 287
Shifting the Display ................................................................................ 288
Centering Cursor Position ...................................................................... 288
Centering Own Ship’s Position .............................................................. 288
Stopping/Starting Plotting and Recording of Track ................................ 288
Erasing Track ......................................................................................... 289
Selecting Track Plotting Interval ............................................................ 289
Apportioning the Memory ....................................................................... 290
Selecting Bearing Reference ................................................................. 291
Marks ................................................................................................................ 291
Entering/Erasing Marks.......................................................................... 291
Selecting Mark Shape ............................................................................ 292
Connecting Marks (Selecting Mark Connection Line) ........................... 292
Entering Event Marks............................................................................. 292
Selecting Event Mark Shape.................................................................. 293
Entering the MOB Mark ......................................................................... 293
Navigation Planning ......................................................................................... 293
Registering Waypoints ........................................................................... 293
Editing Waypoints .................................................................................. 297
Deleting Waypoints ................................................................................ 297
Registering Routes ................................................................................ 297
Deleting Route Waypoints ..................................................................... 299
Replacing Route Waypoints................................................................... 299
Deleting Routes ..................................................................................... 299
Starting for Destination ..................................................................................... 300
Setting Destination ................................................................................. 300
Canceling Destination ............................................................................ 304
Erasing Route Waypoints ...................................................................... 304
Finding Range and Bearing Between Two Points ................................. 304
Setting Up Various Displays ............................................................................. 306
Selecting Data to Display on the Data Display ...................................... 306
Selecting Position Format ...................................................................... 307
Demo Display ......................................................................................... 307
Menu Settings .................................................................................................. 308
GPS Menu.............................................................................................. 308
Selecting Units of Measurement ............................................................ 311
Mark, Character Size and Brilliance ...................................................... 312
Receiving Data from Personal Computer .............................................. 313
DGPS Settings ....................................................................................... 315
Displaying GPS Monitor Displays .......................................................... 316
Chapter 3. Navigational Aids 279

Alarms .............................................................................................................. 317
Arrival Alarm .......................................................................................... 317
Anchor Watch Alarm ............................................................................. 318
Cross Track Error (XTE) Alarm ............................................................. 318
Ship’s Speed Alarm ............................................................................... 319
Trip Alarm .............................................................................................. 319
DGPS Alarm .......................................................................................... 320
Maintenance .................................................................................................... 320
Clearing the Memory ............................................................................. 320
GPS Error Message .............................................................................. 321
Diagnostic Tests .................................................................................... 321
UAIS MKD Imitator ................................................................................................ 323
General ............................................................................................................ 323
Power On ......................................................................................................... 323
Main Menu ....................................................................................................... 324
Viewing Sensors Data ..................................................................................... 324
Viewing and Editing Static and Voyage Data .................................................. 325
Other Stations .................................................................................................. 326
Sending Text Messages .................................................................................. 328
Viewing Received Messages ........................................................................... 329
Report ETA Lock/Bridge/Term ........................................................................ 329
Enter Setup ...................................................................................................... 330
General Setup ....................................................................................... 331
Extra Setup ............................................................................................ 332
Loran-C Receiver (LC-90 MARK-II) ...................................................................... 333
Operational Overview ...................................................................................... 333
Power On/Off and Dimmer .................................................................... 333
Numeric Keys ........................................................................................ 333
Operating Mode/Function Selector Keys .............................................. 334
Other Keys............................................................................................. 334
Summary of Modes and Functions ....................................................... 335
Basic Level Operations .................................................................................... 336
Turning the Unit On and Off .................................................................. 336
Initializing the Navigator for Your Own Geographical Area ................... 336
Reading Speed and Course (S/C Mode) .............................................. 338
Setting the Averaging Time (Function #3) ............................................. 339
Automatic ASF (Function #4) ................................................................ 340
Navigation Operations ..................................................................................... 341
Entry of a Position into a Waypoint (WPT Mode) .................................. 341
Selecting Waypoint(s) for Use with Other Modes and Functions.......... 345
Range and Bearing Calculations (R/B and CLC Modes) ...................... 346
Cross-Track Error Functions (XTE Mode) ............................................. 347
Velocity to Destination and Time to Go (VTD, TTG Modes) ................. 348
Alarm Function (ALM Mode) ................................................................. 349
Route Functions (RTE Mode)................................................................ 351
Event Memory ([SAV] Key) ................................................................... 354
Converting Coordinates (WPT Mode) ................................................... 355
Customized Operations ................................................................................... 356
Warning Indicators ................................................................................ 356
Manual Control of Loran Reception....................................................... 358
Selecting Output Data Format (Function #3) ........................................ 363

Direction Finder (Furuno FD-177) ........................................................................ 365
Operation.......................................................................................................... 365
Function of Front Panel Controls ........................................................... 365
Manual Mode ......................................................................................... 367
Channel Mode ........................................................................................ 367
Scan Mode ............................................................................................. 367
Erasing Channel Memory ...................................................................... 368
Direction Finding .................................................................................... 368
Range Measurement ............................................................................. 368
Navigation by Direction Finder ......................................................................... 369
Homing ................................................................................................... 369
Position Fixing by Using One Land Station ........................................... 369
Position Fixing by Using Two Land Stations.......................................... 370
Position Fixing by Three Land Stations ................................................. 370
Setting-Up ........................................................................................................ 370
Errors in Direction Finding ..................................................................... 370
Coastal Error .......................................................................................... 371
Night Error (Night Effect)........................................................................ 371
Quadrantal Error .................................................................................... 371
Loading the Own Ship Route ................................................................................ 372

Furuno GPS Navigator GP-90
FURUNO GPS NAVIGATOR GP-90
Operational Overview
To call the simulator GPS control panel, press “GPS” button on “Nav. Aids” panel
of the ship Conning Display.
Functions of Keys
Cursor pads – shift display and cursor;
MENU ESC – opens/closes menu; quits current operation;
NU/CU ENT – selects display orientation; registers selections

on menus;
DISPLAY SEL [1] – selects display mode;
EVENT MOB [6] – inscribes event mark at ship’s position; marks man
overboard position;
WPT RTE [2] – registers waypoints and routes;
GOTO [7] – sets destination;
MARK [3] – inscribes mark on the display;
PLOT ON/OFF [8] – turns recording and plotting of ship’s track on/off;
ZOOM IN [4] – enlarges display;
ZOOM OUT [9] – shrinks display;
CENTER [5] – centers ship’s position/cursor;
CURSOR – turns cursor on/off;

ON/OFF [0]
TONE – adjusts display contrast; changes

latitude/longitude coordinate;

CLEAR – deletes waypoints and marks; clears wrong data;

silences audible alarm;
POWER – turns power on/off.
Turning On and Off the Power

Turning on the power
Press the “POWER” key.
The unit tests the PROGRAM MEMORY, SRAM and battery for proper operation
and shows the results on the display. If equipped with the internal beacon receiver,
“BEACON RCVR INSTALLED” appears at the bottom of the display.
When turning on the power, the following occurs: 12 seconds after turning on the power,
accurate position (in latitude and longitude) appears on the display. If position could
not be found, “NO FIX” appears at the GPS receiving condition window.
When the satellite signal is being received normally, one of the indications shown
in Table below appears depending on equipment setting and GPS receiver state.
Equipment setting GPS receiver state indication

2D 2D (normal)
3D 3D (normal)
Differential 2D D2D (normal)
Differential 3D D3D (normal)
Turning the power off

Press the “POWER” key.
The next time, you turn on the power, the unit starts up with the last used display mode.

Adjusting Display Contrast and Brilliance

1. Press the “TONE” key. The display, shown in fig. below, appears:
2. To adjust contrast, press “◄”or “►”. Current setting and setting range (0~31)
are shown to the right of “►”. To adjust brilliance, press “▲”or “▼”. Current
setting and setting range (0~4) are shown to the right of “▲”.
Note: Operate cursor keys within 10 seconds after pressing the “TONE” key.
Otherwise, the screen for adjustment of contrast and brilliance will be cleared.
Selecting the Display Mode

1. Press the “DISPLAY SEL” key. The display appears:
2. Press the “DISPLAY SEL” key or “▲”, “▼” to select display mode.
3. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key.
Sample displays of each display mode are shown below:
Plotter 1 display
Plotter 2 display

Highway display
Navigation display
Data display
Chart Icons
Various icons appear on the display to alert you to equipment status.
L/L position offset applied.
Track recording turned off.
Alarm is violated.
North mark.
Demonstration display.

Track
Enlarging/Shrinking the Display
You may enlarge and shrink the display on the Plotter 1 and Plotter 2 displays, with
the “ZOOM IN” and “ZOOM OUT” keys. The horizontal range is available among 0.25,
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 192 n miles for plotter 1, and 0.36, 0.71, 1.42, 2.84,
5.69, 11.4, 22.8, 45.5, 91, 182, 273 n miles for plotter 2 display.
The “ZOOM IN” key enlarges the display, and the “ZOOM OUT” key shrinks it. Each
time a zoom key is pressed, the display range appears at the center of the display
for about three seconds.
Selecting Display Orientation

Display orientation can be selected on the Plotter 1, Plotter 2, and Highway displays with
the “NU/CU ENT” key. Two display orientations are available: north-up and course-up.
North-up Display
In the north-up display, true north (0°) is at the top of the display. Own ship moves
on the display in accordance with true speed and true motion. Land is stationary.
Course-up Display
Destination set
The destination is at the top of the display, and the north mark ( ) appears at the left
side of the display.
Destination not set

Ship’s heading or course is at the top of the display. The north mark appears at the left
side of the display.
Shifting the Cursor

The cursor can be shifted with the cursor pads:
1. Press the “CURSOR ON/OFF” key to turn on the cursor.
2. Press the cursor pads.
The cursor moves in the direction of the cursor pads pressed. When the cursor
reaches the edge of the display, the display shifts in the direction opposite.
Data and Cursor State
Cursor state determines what data are shown on the display.
Cursor turned on, cursor data
Cursor position is displayed in latitude and longitude at the top of the display. The range
and bearing from own ship to the cursor appear at the right-hand side of the display,
when in the Plotter 1 display.

Cursor turned off

Ship's position, speed, and course appear on the display:
Shifting the Display

The display can be shifted on the Plotter 1 and Plotter 2 displays, with the
“CURSOR ON/OFF” key. When own ship tracks off, the display it is automatically
returned to the screen center:
1. Press the “CURSOR ON/OFF” key to turn off the cursor.
2. Press the cursor pads. The display shifts in the direction of the cursor pads pressed.
Centering Cursor Position

2. Press the cursor pad to position the cursor.
3. Press the “CENTER” key.
Centering Own Ship’s Position

2. Press the “CENTER” key.
Stopping/Starting Plotting and Recording of Track

The GP-90 stores 2,000 points of track and marks. When the memory becomes full,
the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Procedure
Press the “PLOT ON/OFF” key to start/stop recording and plotting of track:
• When plotting is resumed, “Resuming track plot” appears at the center of the display
for about three seconds;
• When plotting is stopped, “Stopping track plot” appears at the center of
the display for about three seconds and appears at the left side of the display.
( does not appear on the Navigation and Data displays.)

Erasing Track
The track, stored in the memory and displayed on the screen, can be erased.
ATTENTION!
Track cannot be restored once erased. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
track.
1. Press the “MENU ESC” key. The MAIN MENU appears:
2. Press [3] to select “ERASE TRACK/MARK”.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Erase Track”.

4. Press “►” to select “Yes”. The message “Are you sure to erase?” appears.
Selecting Track Plotting Interval

The plotting interval determines both how the track will be reconstructed
on the display and track storage time. A shorter interval provides more accurate
reconstruction of track line, however total storage time is reduced. The plotting
interval can be selected by time or distance. Plotting by distance offers
the advantage that the track is not stored when the vessel is anchored.
Plotting Interval by Time

The setting range for plotting by time is 00 to 60 minutes:
1. Press the “MENU ESC” key.
2. Press [2] to display the “TRACK/MARK SETUP” menu.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Track Rec”.

4. Press “◄” to select “Time”.

5. Enter plotting interval in four digits. To enter 30 seconds, for example, press [0]
[0] [3] [0].
Plotting Interval by Distance
The setting range for plotting by distance is 0.01 to 99.99 n miles. To plot all track,
enter 00.00:
2. Press [2] to display the “TRACK/MARK SETUP” menu.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Track Rec”.
4. Press “►” to select “Distance”.
5. Enter plotting interval. To enter 0.1 n mile, for example, press [0] [0] [1].
Apportioning the Memory

The memory holds 2000 points of track and marks and may be apportioned as you
like. The default memory setting stores 1000 points each of track and marks.
ATTENTION!
All data are erased whenever the memory apportion setting is changed, even when
the previous value is re-entered.
To store 1500 points of track and 500 marks, for example, do the following:

2. Press [9] to display the “SYSTEM SETTINGS” menu.
3. Press [1] to display the “PLOTTER SETUP” menu.
4. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Memory Apportion”.

5. Enter amount of track to store, in four digits. To store 1500 track points,
for example, press [1] [5] [0] [0].
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key, “▲” or “▼”. You are asked if it is all right to erase
all data.

Selecting Bearing Reference

Ship’s course and bearing to waypoint may be displayed in true bearing only.
Displaying true or magnetic bearing
The default setting displays magnetic bearings:
2. Press [9] to display the “SYSTEM SETTINGS” menu.
3. Press [1] to display the “PLOTTER SETUP” menu.
4. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Bearing Ref.”.
5. Press “◄” or “►” to select “True“ or “Mag”.
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key, “▲” or “▼”.
Marks
Entering/Erasing Marks
Marks can be inscribed on the Plotter 1 and Plotter 2 displays. You may inscribe
a mark anywhere, in one of 13 shapes. Further, can be connected with lines,
to denote net location, etc.
Note: When the mark memory becomes full, no marks can be entered. When this
occurs, the buzzer sounds and the message “Can’t save mark. Memory full”
appears on the display for three seconds to alert you. To enter a mark when
the mark memory is full, erase unnecessary marks.
Entering Marks
At own ship position:
2. Press the “MARK” key.
At cursor intersection:
2. Operate the cursor keys to place the cursor on the location for the mark.
Select a mark shape you want (see Selecting Mark Shape paragraph).
3. Press the “MARK” key.
Erasing Marks
ATTENTION!
All marks, including event marks and the MOB mark, are erased on the “ERASE
MARK” menu. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all marks; erased marks cannot
be restored.
Erasing individual marks:
1. Place cursor on the mark to erase.

2. Press the “CLEAR” key.

Erasing all marks:

1. Press “MENU ESC” and [3] to display the “ERASE TRACK/MARK” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Erase Mark”.
3. Press “►” to select “YES”.
Selecting Mark Shape

13 mark shapes are available. Select mark shape as follows:
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [2] to display the “TRACK/MARK SETUP” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Mark Shape”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select mark shape desired.

The next mark entered will be inscribed in the shape selected here.
Connecting Marks (Selecting Mark Connection Line)

Marks can be connected with lines to denote net location, fishing spot, etc. Three
types of connection lines are available and the “•” setting disables connection of lines:
1. Press “MENU ESC” key and [2].
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Mark Line”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select mark line desired other than “•”.

Entering Event Marks

Event marks can denote any important present position, for example, a good fishing
spot. Event marks can be saved as ordinary marks, and the unit automatically
numbers them from 01 to 99.
Note: When the mark memory becomes full, no event marks can be entered.
When this occurs, the buzzer sounds and the message appears on the display
for three seconds to alert you. To enter an event mark when the mark
memory is full, erase unnecessary event marks.
Press the “EVENT MOB” key less than three seconds. The position, at the exact
moment the key is pressed, is saved as an event position.
To erase event marks, see above paragraph Entering/Erasing Marks.

Selecting Event Mark Shape

Event marks are available in 10 shapes.
Select event mark shape as follows:
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [2] to display the “TRACK/MARK SETUP” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Event Mark”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select event mark shape desired.

The next event mark entered will be inscribed in the shape selected here.
Entering the MOB Mark

The MOB mark denotes man overboard position. To mark man overboard position,
press the “EVENT MOB” key. When the key is pressed, the position at the exact
moment the key is pressed automatically becomes the destination. If the display in use
is Highway, Navigation, or Data, they are automatically replaced by the Plotter 1 display.
Only one MOB mark may be entered, and each time the MOB mark is entered,
the previous MOB mark and its position data are written over:
1. Press the “EVENT MOB” key for at least three seconds. The MOB mark (“M”)
is entered at the MOB position, and the message appears:
Note: You may cancel MOB position as destination by pressing the “MENU ESC”
key instead of the “NU/CU ENT” key. Note that the MOB mark remains on
the display.
To erase MOB mark, see Entering/Erasing Marks (MOB mark cannot be erased
with the cursor).
Navigation Planning
Registering Waypoints
The GP-90 can store 999 waypoints, numbered from 001–999. Waypoints can be
registered four ways:
• by cursor;
• by MOB position or event position;
• at own ship’s position;
• through the waypoint list.

Registering Waypoints by the Cursor

1. Press the “WPT RTE” key. The “Waypoint/Route” menu appears:
2. Press [1] to select “Cursor”. The following display appears:
Note: The display changes to Plotter 1 when the Highway, Navigation or Data
mode is in use.
3. Press the cursor keys to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint.
4. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. A window, similar to the one shown in fig. below,
appears:
The waypoint’s position, and date, and time registered appear on the first and
second lines.
Waypoints are automatically given the youngest empty waypoint number, and
this number appears on the third line. You may, however, assign a different number.
If the waypoint shares the same position with a mark, the mark’s position, and
date, and time entered are registered as waypoint data.
If the waypoint memory is full, the waypoint number line in the window is blank.
In this case, waypoints cannot be entered unless a waypoint is written over
or deleted.
To assign waypoint number, go to step 5. If you do not want to change the waypoint
number, go to step 6 to select mark shape and enter comment.
5. Enter waypoint number, in three digits (001–999).
6. Press “▼” to select waypoint mark shape. The following display appears:

7. Press “◄” or “►” to select mark shape.

8. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The display, shown in fig. below, appears:
9. You may enter a comment, as shown in the procedure which follows, or skip to step
10 to finish. The comment may consist of up to 12 alphanumeric characters:
– Press the cursor keys to select alphanumeric character;
– Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. Selected character appears on the “COMMENT” line:
To create a space, select “_”;
Numeric data can be input directly by pressing numeric keys;
To clear wrong data, press the “CLEAR” key.
– Repeat steps referred above to complete the comment;
– Select ENTER and press the “NU/CU ENT” key.
10. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. Control is returned to the last used display mode.
Note: When the waypoint number entered at step 5 already exists, “Are you sure
to change?” message appears if the waypoint is part of the current destination
or route, or is part of a route. If it is alright to write over the waypoint and its
data, press the [Y] key. To change waypoint number, press the [N] key.
If you fail to enter waypoint number, “Enter waypoint number” appears on
the display for three seconds.
Registering Waypoints by MOB Position/Event Position
The MOB position or an event position can be registered as a waypoint.
Event marks are numbered from 01 to 99; 01 is the latest event mark.
Note: You cannot register a MOB position or event position when there are no MOB
positions or event positions saved. The buzzer sounds, and the message
“No MOB/event data in memory” appears for three seconds to alert you.
1. Press the “WPT/RTE” key.
2. Press [2] to select “MOB/Event Position”. The display, shown in fig. below, appears:
3. Press “◄” or “►” to display the MOB position or event position to register
as a waypoint.
5. Follow steps 5–10 in Registering Waypoints by the Cursor paragraph.

Registering Waypoints by Own Ship’s Position

Note: When there is no position data, you cannot register a waypoint at own ship’s
position. The buzzer sounds, and the message “No position data” appears.
2. Press [3] to select “Own Ship Position”.
3. Follow steps 5–10 in Registering Waypoints by the Cursor paragraph.
Registering Waypoints through the Waypoint List

2. Press [4] to display the waypoint list:
3. Latitude and longitude format only is used in the simulator. If you press ,
LOP format will not be selected.
4. Press “▲” or “▼” to select waypoint number.
5. Press “◄” or “►” to enter position. The display should now look something like
fig. below:
6. Enter latitude and longitude. To enter 34º12.345’ N 135º 23.456’ E, for example,
press:
[3] [4] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] [3] [5] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Note: To change N to S or E to W, press .

7. Press “▼”.
8. Press “◄” or “►” to select mark.
10. Enter comment.
11. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key twice. The waypoint list reappears. Waypoint
position, and date, and time the waypoint was entered, appear on the list.
12. To enter another waypoint through the waypoint list, return to step 4.
13. Press the “MENU ESC” key to finish.

Editing Waypoints
1. Press “WPT RTE” and [4].
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select waypoint to edit.
3. Press “►”.
4. Edit the contents of the waypoint.
5. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The message “Are you sure to change?” appears
if the waypoint is currently selected as destination, is part of a route, or is in
the route currently selected as destination.
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The waypoint data will be changed.
Deleting Waypoints
Deleting waypoints by the cursor
1. Place the cursor on the waypoint to delete.

Deleting waypoints through the waypoint list
1. Press “WPT RTE” and [4].

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select waypoint to delete.
3. Press the “CLEAR” key. The message “Are you sure to erase?” appears if the
waypoint is currently selected as destination, is part of a route, or is in the route
currently selected as destination.
Note: All waypoint marks (as well as all other marks) and their data can be cleared
collectively by clearing the Plotter memory. For further details, see Clearing
the Memory paragraph.
Note: To cancel erasure, press the “MENU ESC” key instead of the “NU/CU ENT”
key. The waypoint list appears.
Registering Routes
The GP-90 can store 30 routes, and each route may contain up to 30 waypoints.
Routes can be registered while in the Plotter 1 or Plotter 2 display mode.
2. Press [5] to select Route Planning. The “ROUTE LIST” appears:
Remarks: Use – in use; Fwd – traverse waypoints in forward order; Rvs – traverse
waypoints in reverse order.

3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select route number.

4. Press “►”.
5. If required, press “▲” to enter the speed by which to calculate time-to-go (TTG).
6. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Auto” or “Man”:
– Auto: current average speed is used to calculate the time-to-go;
– Manual: entered speed is used to calculate the time-to-go. Enter speed
and press. “▼”.
7. Route waypoints may be registered two ways:
– entering waypoint number directly (in the top part of the window);
– through the waypoint list (in the bottom part of the window).
Follow procedure 1 or procedure 2 below.
Procedure 1. Entering waypoint number directly
1. Enter waypoint number in three digits. The cursor shifts to the “skip” window.
The procedure for skipping a waypoint is shown in Skipping Route Waypoints
paragraph. For now, go to the next step.
2. Press “▼” to continue. If the waypoint, entered in step 1, does not exist,
you are informed that the waypoint does not exist, and entry is cancelled.
3. Enter other route waypoints by repeating steps 1 and 2.

4. Press “MENU ESC” to finish.
Procedure 2. Using previously registered waypoints
Enter waypoints in the order they will be traversed; not by waypoint number order:
1. Press to go to the waypoint list in the bottom part of the window.

2. Press “▼” or “▲” to select waypoint number.
3. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. Selected waypoint number appears in the top part
of the window.
4. To enter other route waypoints, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Press the “MENU ESC” key to finish.
Note: To return to the top part of the window, press .

Deleting Route Waypoints

1. Press “WPT RTE” and [5] to display the route list.
2. Press “▼” or “▲” to select route.
3. Press “►” to display route editing screen.
4. Select the waypoint to delete.
7. Repeat previous steps to continue deleting waypoints.
8. Press the “MENU ESC” key. The route is rearranged to reflect the change.
Replacing Route Waypoints

2. Press “▼” or “▲” to select route.
3. Press “►” to display route editing screen.
4. On the route editing screen, place the cursor on waypoint number to replace.
5. Enter new waypoint number.
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The message, shown in fig. below, appears:
Deleting Routes
2. Press “▼” or “▲” to select route to delete.

3. Press the “CLEAR” key. The message, shown in fig. below, appears
if the route is in use:


Starting for Destination

Setting Destination
There are four ways by which you can set destination:
• by cursor;
• by MOB position or event position;
• by waypoint;
• by route.
Note: Destination cannot be set when there is no GPS position data. When there is no
position data, the buzzer sounds and the message “No position data” appears.
Previous destination is cancelled whenever a destination is set.
Setting Destination by Cursor

Using the cursor, you may set a destination consisting of 30 points. When all 30 points
are entered, the GP-90 automatically disables further entry.
Setting single destination
1. Press the “GOTO” key. The menu, shown in fig. below, appears:
2. Press [1] to select “Cursor”. The display, shown in fig. below, appears:
Note: If the display in use is other than Plotter 1, the Plotter 2 display
is automatically selected.
3. Place the cursor on the location desired for destination.
Note: To clear selection, press the “CLEAR” key.
5. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key to finish. Control is returned to the display mode
in use before you set destination. A dashed line connects own ship
and the destination, which is marked with a flag, as shown in fig. below.

Setting multiple destinations

1. Press “GOTO” and [1].
2. Place the cursor on the location desired for waypoint.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter other points. Waypoints are connected with a line.
5. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key to finish. The route number entry display appears.
If no route number appears or you want to change the route number shown,
go to step 6 to enter route number. To register the route under the number
shown, go to step 8.
6. Key in route number.
7. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. Waypoints are marked with flags and
are connected with a dashed line.
If the route number entered already exists, the message “Overwriting” appears.
The waypoints do not have waypoint numbers, however you can attach waypoint
numbers by doing the following:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select route number entered.
3. Press “►”.
4. Enter waypoint number in three digits.
5. Press “▼”. If the waypoint number already exists, the corresponding message
appears.
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The waypoint entered here replaces previously
entered waypoint (to cancel replacement of waypoint, press the “MENU ESC” key).
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter other waypoint numbers.
8. Press the “MENU ESC” key twice to finish.
Note: When destination is cancelled, dashed lines are erased but flags remain
on the screen.
Setting Destination by MOB Position or Event Position
This operation cannot be performed when there is no MOB position or event
position. The buzzer sounds and the message “No MOB/event data in memory”
appears to alert you when there is no MOB position or event position:
1. Press the “GOTO” key.
2. Press [2] to select “MOB/Event Position”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select MOB position or event position. The MOB position
appears first. To select event position, press “►”. If selected position is within
the current display range, the cursor marks the position. (The cursor does not
appear on the Highway, Navigation and Data displays).
4. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. A flag appears at position selected if it is within
the current display range. A dashed line connects between own ship and MOB
position or event position.
Note: When destination is cancelled, dashed lines are erased but flags remain
on the screen.

Setting Destination through Waypoint List

Note: A waypoint must exist to set it as destination. When a waypoint does
not exist, the buzzer sounds and the message “No waypoint data” appears.
Destination waypoint can be set through the waypoint list two ways: by entering
waypoint number and by selecting waypoint by cursor:
2. Press [3] to display the Waypoint List:
3. Set destination by following procedure 1 or procedure 2 below.

Procedure 1. Setting destination by waypoint number
1. Enter waypoint number in three digits. You can clear entry by pressing
the “CLEAR” key.
Own ship position becomes starting point, and a dashed line runs between
it and the waypoint selected.
Procedure 2. Setting destination by selecting waypoint
1. Press . Each press of the key alternately enables manual entry of waypoint
number and selection of waypoint number by cursor (through the waypoint window).
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select waypoint.
Own ship position becomes starting point, and a dashed line runs between it and
the waypoint selected.
Setting Route as Destination
Note: Route entered must exist to set it as destination. The buzzer sounds and the
message “No route data” appears if you enter a route which does not exist.
A route to set as destination may be selected through the route list two ways:
by entering route number and by selecting route:
2. Press [4] to display the Route List. Then, follow procedure 1 or procedure 2
in the adjacent column.

Procedure 1: By entering route number

1. Press “◄” or “►” to select direction which to traverse the route waypoints;
forward or reverse.
2. Enter route number.
Current position becomes starting point. A solid line connects between the starting
point and first route waypoint, and a dashed line connects all other route waypoints.
Procedure 2: By selecting a route
1. Press . Each press of the key alternately enables manual entry of route
number and selection of route number (through the route window).
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select route.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select direction in which to traverse the route waypoints;
forward or reverse.
Current position becomes starting point. A solid line connects between the starting
point and first route waypoint, and a dashed line connects all other route waypoints.
Skipping Route Waypoints

You may skip route waypoints by displaying “DI” (Disable) next to the route waypoint
in the route list. Using figure below as an example, your ship is currently heading
towards waypoint 04, but is to switch course and head to waypoint 03. In this case,
you would want to skip waypoint 04:
1. Press “WPT RTE” and [5] to display the route list. Press the cursor keys
to select route.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select route waypoint to skip.

3. Press “◄” or “►” to shift the cursor to the right of the waypoint number.
4. Press to change “EN” (Enable) to “DI” (Disable).

To reselect the waypoint, select it on the route list and press to change “DI” to “EN”.

Canceling Destination
2. Press [5] to select “Cancel”. The message “Release GOTO?” appears.
Erasing Route Waypoints

1. Place the cursor on the flag to erase.
2. Press the “CLEAR” key. The message “Release GOTO?” appears if the waypoint
is currently selected as destination, is part of a registered route, or is part of
the route currently being navigated.
Note: Flags can be erased collectively by clearing the Plotter memory or both the
Plotter memory and GPS memory. See paragraph Clearing the Memory
for further details.
When flags are erased
When the origin waypoint is erased, the waypoint before it becomes the origin
waypoint. If there is no waypoint before the origin waypoint, current position
becomes the origin waypoint.
When a destination is erased, the waypoint which follows, it becomes the destination.
If there is no waypoint after the destination waypoint erased, route navigation
is cancelled.
Finding Range and Bearing Between Two Points

Selecting Course Sailing Method
The range and bearing to a destination are calculated by two ways: Great Circle or
Rhumb Line. However, cross track error is calculated by rhumb line only.
Great Circle: The great circle courseline is the shortest course between two points
on the surface of the earth. (Imagine stretching a piece of yarn between two points
on the earth.) However, this course requires frequent change of heading to follow
course faithfully.

Rhumb Line: The rhumb line courseline is the straight line drawn between two points
on a nautical chart. This course does not require frequent changes of heading,
however, it is not the shortest since it follows the earth’s curvature:
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [1] to display the “PLOTTER SETUP” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Calculation”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “R.L” (Rhumb Line) or “G.C” (Great Circle).

Calculation Procedure
You can find the range and bearing between two points by two waypoints or two
latitude and longitude positions:
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [5]. The “MANUAL CALCULATION” menu appears:
2. Choose two points by one of the methods below.

Latitude and Longitude Positions
1. Press “▼”.
2. If necessary, press to switch from North to South latitude, and vice versa.
3. Key in latitude.
4. If necessary, press to switch from West to East longitude, and vice versa.
5. Key in longitude.
6. Press “▼”.
7. Repeat items 2–5 to enter other point.
Waypoints
1. Key in first waypoint number from 001 to 999 (000 is reserved for own
ship position).
2. Press “▼” twice.
3. Key in other waypoint number (001–999).

4. Press “▼” to shift the cursor to the Trial Speed line.

5. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Auto” or “Man”. Auto uses ship’s average speed to
calculate time-to-go.
6. If you have selected “Man”, enter speed.
The range, bearing, and time-to-go between two points appear on the display.
If data entered is wrong or insufficient, the buzzer sounds and the message
"INCOMPLETE DATA" appears. If the data contains error, and all nines appear
as the calculation results.
Setting Up Various Displays

Selecting Data to Display on the Data Display
The user may select what data to display in four locations on the data display.
The data the user may select to display are:
• Average course (AVR COG);

• Average speed (AVR SOG);
• Course (COG);
• Course error (dCOG);
• Cross track error (XTE);
• ETA to waypoint (ETA);
• Range to waypoint (RNG);
• Route time-to-go (RT.TTG);
• Speed (SOG);
• Time-to-go to waypoint (TTG);
• ETA to route (RT. ETA);
• Total route distance (RT.DIST);
• Trip distance (TRIP);
• Trip elapsed time (TRIP TM);
• Velocity to destination (VTD).

To select data to display, use following procedure:

1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [1] to display the “PLOTTER SETUP” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select one of four of “User defined” (#1, #2, #3, #4).
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select data to display.

4. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. To select the data to display at other user defined
displays, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Selecting Position Format

The position can be displayed in latitude and longitude format only.
Note: The position in Loran C and Decca LOP’s is not simulated.
Demo Display
The demo display provides simulated operation of this unit: own ship tracks,
at the speed selected, a figure eight course, starting from position entered.
All controls are operative; you may change course, enter marks, etc.:
1. Press the “Split” button in the lower right corner of the “Nav. Aids” panel.
2. Press “NU/CU ENT” key and turn on the power. The “Simulation Mode” menu
appears:
3. Key in latitude of initial position. If necessary, press to switch from north

latitude to south latitude, or vice versa.
4. Key in longitude. If necessary, press to switch from east longitude to west
longitude, or vice versa.
5. Press “▼” key.
6. Key in speed.
7. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key to start the simulation mode.
The icon appears in the plotter 1, 2, and highway display. All controls are operative.
To return to the normal mode:
1. Turn off the power.
2. Press the “Split” button.
3. Press “NU/CU ENT” key and turn on the power.

Menu Settings
GPS Menu
Fix Mode
Two position fixing modes are available: 2D and 2/3D.
The 2D mode provides two dimensional position fixes (latitude and longitude only)
and is used when three satellites are in line of sight of the GPS receiver.
The 2/3D mode switches between two and three dimension position fixing
automatically depending on how many satellites (three or four) are in line of sight
of the GPS receiver.
To select Fix Mode:

1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [6] to display the “GPS SETUP” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Fix Mode”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select fix mode desired.

4. Press “▼” to change other settings, or press “MENU ESC” to register settings
and escape.
Disable Satellite
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal satellite number(s) in the Almanac.
Using this information, the GPS receiver automatically eliminates any malfunctioning
satellite from the GPS satellite schedule. However, the Almanac sometimes may
not contain this information. You can disable an inoperative satellite manually
on the “GPS SETUP” menu.
To disable satellites:
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [6].
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Disable satellite”.
3. Key in satellite number, in two digits (01–32). Three sets of satellite numbers
may be entered.
4. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. If an invalid number is entered, the buzzer sound.

Note: To enable all disabled satellites, select Disable satellite line in the GPS
SETUP menu and press the “CLEAR” key. All satellite numbers on
the “Disable satellite” line are erased.

GPS Smoothing, Position

When the DOP or receiving condition is unfavorable, the GPS fix may change greatly,
even if the vessel is dead in water. This change can be reduced by smoothing the raw
GPS fixes. A setting between 0 and 9 is available. The higher the setting, the more
smoothed the raw data, however too high a setting slows response time to change
in latitude and longitude. This is especially noticeable at high ship’s speeds. “0”
is the normal setting; increase the setting if the GPS fix changes greatly.
To enter GPS position smoothing:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Posn”.
3. Enter smoothing factor in three digits (001–999).
GPS Smoothing, Speed
During position fixing, ship’s velocity (speed and course) is directly measured by
receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw velocity data may change randomly
depending on receiving conditions and other factors. You can reduce this random
variation by increasing the smoothing. Like with latitude and longitude smoothing,
the higher the speed and course smoothing, the more smoothed the raw data.
If the setting is too high, however, the response to speed and course change slows.
For no smoothing, enter “0”; “5” is suitable for most conditions.
To enter GPS speed smoothing:

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Spd”.
3. Enter smoothing factor in three digits (001–999).

Speed Average
Calculation of ETA and TTG, etc. is based on average ship’s speed over a given
period. The default setting is one minute.
To enter speed averaging:

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Speed Average”.
3. Enter smoothing factor in two digits (00–99).


RAIM Function/RAIM Accuracy

RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a diagnostic function which
tests the accuracy of the GPS signal within the range set with “RAIM Accuracy” on
the GPS SETUP 2/2 menu. The receiver displays (provided the RAIM function is active)
three levels of position confidence according to the results of the test as shown below.
“CAUTION” indicates that RAIM could not be assessed. If the GPS signal is normal,
GPS position is safe to use.
SAFE: GPS signal is safe to use.

CAUTION: RAIM accuracy is shorter than
protected level, or RAIM measurement
not possible.
UNSAFE: GPS signal is not safe to use.
Enter the range for which you want to know position confidence.
To select RAIM Function:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “RAIM Function” on page 2.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “RAIM Function” desired.

To enter RAIM Accuracy:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “RAIM Accuracy” on page 2.

3. Key in the range for which you want to know RAIM Accuracy (1 to 999 m).
Note: Unit is meter only.
Geodetic Datum
WGS-84 geodetic chart system (standard GPS chart system) is used only in
the simulator GPS.
Position Offset
You may apply an offset to position generated by the internal GPS receiver,
to compensate for difference between GPS position and chart position.
To enter Position Offset:
Note: If you do not know the type of chart you are using, GPS position may be
wrong. Note the difference in position when moored to a pier, and enter
it on the GPS SETUP menu to get correct position.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Posn Offset” on page 2.
3. If necessary, press to switch from north latitude to south latitude, or vice versa.

4. Key in latitude correction.
5. If necessary, press to switch from east longitude to west longitude,

or vice versa.
6. Key in longitude correction.

Time Difference
The GPS system uses UTC time. If you would rather use local time, enter the difference
in hours between local time and UTC. Use the [+] and [-] keys for times later or
earlier than UTC, respectively.
Position
When executing cold start, there is no satellite information in the unit’s memory, thus
it may take some time to find position. To fix position faster, enter estimated position.
To enter position:

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Posn” on page 2.
3. If necessary, press to switch from north latitude to south latitude, or vice

versa. Key in latitude.
4. If necessary, press to switch from east longitude to west longitude, or vice

versa. Key in longitude.
5. Press the “NU/CU ENT]” key.
Selecting Units of Measurement

Unit of Distance
Distance can be displayed in nautical mile, kilometer or statute mile as follows.
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [2]. The UNIT SETUP menu appears:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Unit of Distance”.

3. Press “◄” or “►” to select unit: nm, km or sm.

Mark, Character Size and Brilliance

The “DISPLAY SETUP” menu lets you select the size and brilliance of various markers.
Grid Tone
The grid can be displayed in light or dark tone, or turned off:
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [1]. The DISPLAY SETUP menu appears.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Grid”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select brilliance.
4. Press “NU/CU ENT” and “MENU ESC”.
Course Bar Tone
The course bar can be displayed in light or dark tone, or turned off:
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [1].
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Course Bar”.
Time Mark Tone

The time mark can be displayed in light or dark tone, or turned off:
2. Press “▲” or ▼ to select “Time Mark”.

Waypoint Mark Size
The size of the waypoint mark can be selected to large or small.

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Waypoint Size”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Large” or “Small”.
4. Press “NU/CU ENT” and “MENU ESC”.

Cursor Size
The size of the cursor can be selected to large or small.

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Cursor Size”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Large” or “Small”.
4. Press “NU/CU ENT” key.

5. Press “MENU ESC” key.
Enlarging Characters
The size of the indications of position or user defined display areas can be enlarged
on the Data display:
1. On the Data display, with no enlarged characters, press the “CURSOR ON/OFF”
key to turn on the cursor.
2. Operate the cursor keys to select data to enlarge in the window:
3. Press the “ZOOM IN” key:
4. To switch character size from enlarged to normal, press the “ZOOM OUT” key.
Receiving Data from Personal Computer

Loading Waypoints/Routes data
Waypoints and routes data can be downloaded from a personal computer, through
the DATA 4 connector.
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [5]. The “DATA 4 I/O SETUP (1/2)” menu appears:

2. Press “◄” or “►” to select level of personal computer; RS232C or RS422.

3. Press “▼”twice to select “To Next Page”:
4. Press “▼” to select “Command” line under the “Load Data WPT/RTE” line.
5. Press “►” to select “Start”. The message appears:
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The message appears:
7. When data is loaded successfully, the message appears:
8. Press the “MENU ESC” key twice.
Saving data to personal computer

Waypoint and route data can be saved to a personal computer:
2. Press “◄” or “►” to select level of personal computer; RS232C or RS422.
3. Press “▼”twice to select “To Next Page”.
4. Press “▼” to select “Command” line under the “Save Data WPT/RTE” line.
5. Press “►” to select “Start”. The message appears:
6. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. The message appears:
7. When data is saved, press the “MENU ESC”.

DGPS Settings
A DGPS beacon receiver (built in or external) may be connected to the GP-90 to
further refine position accuracy. Set up to receive the DGPS beacon signal as follows.
Selecting the DGPS Station

The default setting is “manual”.
Automatic
The unit can automatically select optimum reference station by feeding it position
data. If it takes more than 5 minutes to fix DGPS position at the automatic mode,
switch to manual mode:
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [9] and [7] to display the DGPS SETUP menu.
2. Set DGPS MODE “On”.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Ref. Station”.

4. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Auto”.
Manual
Enter four digit ID number, frequency, and baud rate of station:
1. Press “MENU ESC” [9] and [7] to display the DGPS SETUP menu.
2. Set DGPS MODE “On”.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Ref. Station”.
4. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Man”.

5. Enter four digit ID number. You can clear an entry by the “CLEAR” key. If the
number entered is invalid, the buzzer sounds, and the message “INVALID ID”
appears on the display for three seconds. If there is no ID number, press the
“CLEAR” key.
7. Enter frequency in four digits (283.5 kHz to 325.0 kHz).
8. Press the “NU/CU ENT” key. “Baud Rate” appears in reverse video.
9. Press “◄” or “►” to select baud rate; 25, 50, 100 or 200 bps.

Displaying GPS Monitor Displays

Three GPS monitor displays provide GPS information:
• Satellite monitor which shows position of GPS satellites;

• Beacon receiver monitor which displays DGPS beacon station information;
• DGPS beacon station message monitor which displays messages received from
beacon stations.
To display the GPS monitor displays:
2. Press to display the GPS monitor you want to view.

3. Press the “MENU ESC” to escape.
Number, bearing, and elevation angle of all satellites in view of the GPS receiver
appear. Satellites being used in fixing position are circled with a solid line.
Satellites Monitor
Beacon Receiver Monitor
Station Message Monitor

Alarms
There are six alarm conditions which generate both audible and visual alarms. When
an alarm setting is violated, the buzzer sounds, and the name of the offending alarm
appears on the display. The alarm icon also appears on the Plotter 1, Plotter 2,
and Highway displays.
Arrival Alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that own ship is approaching a destination waypoint.
The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from
the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if own ship enters the circle.

2. Press [4] to display the ALARM SETTINGS menu:
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Arrival/Anchor”.

4. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Arr”.
5. Press “▼” to select “Alarm Range”.
6. Key in alarm range (0.001–9.999 n mile).

When own ship approaches a waypoint by the range set here, the buzzer sounds
and the message “Arrival alarm” appears. You can silence the audible alarm by
pressing the “CLEAR” key. To erase the visual alarm, press the “CLEAR” key again.
To disable the alarm, select “Off” at the “Arrival/Anchor” line.

Anchor Watch Alarm

The anchor watch alarm sounds to warn you that own ship is moving when it should
be at rest.
Before setting the anchor watch alarm, set present position as destination waypoint
(see Setting Destination paragraph):
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Arrival/Anchor”.

3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “Anc”.
When own ship drifts by the range set here, the buzzer sounds and the message
“Anchor alarm” appears. You can silence the audible alarm by pressing the “CLEAR”
key. To erase the visual alarm, press the “CLEAR” key again.
To disable the alarm, select “Off” at the “Arrival/Anchor” line.
Cross Track Error (XTE) Alarm

The XTE alarm warns you when own ship is off its intended course.

2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “XTE”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “On”.
When own ship strays from the intended track by the range set here, the buzzer sound
and the message “Cross track error alarm” appears. You can silence the audible alarm
by pressing the “CLEAR” key. To erase the visual alarm, press the “CLEAR” key again.
To disable the alarm, select “Off” at the “XTE” line.

Ship’s Speed Alarm

The ship’s speed alarm sounds when ship’s speed is lower or higher (or within)
the alarm range set:
1. Press [MENU ESC] and [4].
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Ship Speed”.
3. Press “◄” or “►” to select “In” (or “Over”).
Note: In – alarm sounds when speed is within range set; over – alarm sounds
when speed is higher or lower than range set.
4. Press “▼” to select “Speed Range”.
5. Key in low speed.
6. Key in high speed.
When speed is higher or lower (or within) than the speed set here, the buzzer sounds
and the message “Speed alarm” appears. You can silence the audible alarm by
pressing the “CLEAR” key. To erase the visual alarm, press the “CLEAR” key again.
To disable the alarm, select “Off” at the “Ship Speed” line.
Trip Alarm
The trip alarm sounds when the distance run is greater than the trip alarm setting:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Next Page”.
3. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Trip”.

4. If necessary, press “CLEAR” to reset the trip distance and trip elapsed time.
5. Press “◄” or “►” to select “On”.
6. Press “▼” to select “Trip Range”.
7. Key in trip range.
When the ship’s distance run is higher than the trip range set here, the buzzer sounds
and the message “Trip alarm” appears. You can silence the audible alarm by pressing
the “CLEAR” key. To erase the visual alarm, press the “CLEAR” key again.
To disable the alarm, select “Off” at the “Trip” line.

DGPS Alarm
The DGPS alarm sounds when the DGPS signal is lost. This alarm may be enabled
or disabled as below:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “DGPS Alarm”.
3. Press “◄” to select “On”, or “►” to select “Off”.
4. Press the “NU/CU/ENT” key.
Maintenance
Clearing the Memory
The GP-90 has two memories: GPS memory and plotter memory.
Clearing the plotter memory
The plotter memory holds plotted track and mark data. When you clear the plotter
memory, all tracks and marks are cleared, and all corresponding defaults settings
are restored:
1. Press “MENU ESC” [9] and [9] to display the “CLEAR MEMORY” menu.
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Clear Plotter”.
3. Press “►” to select “Yes”. The following message appears:

Clearing the GPS memory
The GPS memory stores GPS information, including the Almanac. When you clear
the GPS memory, all GPS information is erased:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Clear GPS”.

Clearing GPS and plotter memories

To clear both GPS and plotter memories:
2. Press “▲” or “▼” to select “Clear All”.

Note: The equipment may lock after clearing the GPS and plotter memories.
Reapply power to the equipment to restore normal operation.
GPS Error Message

GPS Error
When GPS signal is suddenly lost and position cannot be calculated within one
minute, the message “GPS No fix” appears.
This message may appear when there is an interfering object between the satellite
and GPS receiver (for example, mast), or the antenna cable is disconnected.
Press the “CLEAR” key to silence the buzzer. If the “CLEAR” key is not pressed,
several beeps sound every three minutes.
DOP error
When PDOP value exceeds 6 in the 3D mode, or HDOP value exceeds 4
in the 2D mode, this error occurs, and the message “DOP error” appears.
Press the “CLEAR” key to silence the buzzer. If the “CLEAR” key is not pressed,
several beeps sound every three minutes.
DGPS error
When DGPS data contains errors or the DGPS beacon station is experiencing
transmitting problems, the message “DGPS Error” appears.
Diagnostic Tests
Memory and I/O Circuits Test
1. Press “MENU ESC” and [8] to display the “SELF TESTS” menu:

2. Press [1].
3. When testing is finished, press the “MENU ESC” key to escape and return
to the “SELF TEST” menu. (Testing continues if the key is not pressed.)
“OK” appears to the right of “PROGRAM MEMORY”, “SRAM” and “Internal
Battery” when those devices are normal. “NG” (No Good) appears when
an abnormality is found. “OK” appears to the right of “GPS” and “BEACON”
when they are normal; “NG” and appear when an abnormality is found.
DATA 1 PORT, DATA 2 PORT and DATA 4 PORT show results of communication
interface test. A special test connector is required to test those ports. “NG” appears
as the result of the self test when there is no test connector attached.
4. Press the “MENU ESC” key to escape.
Keyboard Test
1. Press “MENU ESC”, [8] and [2] to display the “KEYBOARD TEST” screen.
2. Press each key one by one. A key’s corresponding location on the screen lights
in reverse video if the key is normal:
3. To quit the keyboard test, press the “CLEAR” key three times. Control
is returned to the “SELF TESTS” menu.
Display Test
1. Press “MENU ESC” [8] and [3] to display the test pattern screens.
2. To change the test pattern, press the “NU/CU ENT” key. Each time the key is
pressed, one of the patterns appears.
3. To quit the test pattern, press the “CLEAR” key three times. Control is returned
to the “SELF TESTS” menu.

UAIS MKD Imitator
Automatic Testing
This feature conducts all self tests continuously:
1. Press “MENU ESC” [8] and [4]. Self tests are conducted continuously
in the order of memory, I/O test, keyboard test, and test pattern.
2. To stop testing, press the “MENU ESC” key.
UAIS MKD IMITATOR
General
The Imitator of the Minimum Keyboard Display (MKD) of an UAIS transponder
is intended for displaying the received target data and text messages exchange
between ships.
For internal navigation, the simulator supports the Inland AIS functionality. As Inland
AIS is compatible with sea AIS, it provides direct exchange of data between sea and
internal ships.
Power On
To call the MKD imitator page, press “UAIS MKD” button on “Nav. Aids” page of
the ship Conning Display. The screen will display MKD imitator (model T102 VDU):
To turn on the MKD power supply, press and hold 2 seconds the power button
on the front panel. If the UAIS transponder is switched off (from the Instructor
workplace), the screen will display the following message:

UAIS MKD Imitator
Otherwise, the entire screen will display the MKD logo and “OK” button:
Main Menu
Press “OK” button to access the MKD main menu:
To choose the required item of the MAIN MENU, use <↑> <↓> buttons and press “Select”
button.
Viewing Sensors Data

Choose the SHOW SENSORS item in the MAIN MENU. The screen will display information
from the position and heading sensors connected to UAIS transponder.
Press “Return” button to go back to the MAIN MENU.

UAIS MKD Imitator
Viewing and Editing Static and Voyage Data

For editing the own ship data related to the current voyage, choose
the STATIC AND VOYAGE DATA item of the MAIN MENU. The screen will display the list
of parameters related to the own ship static data and current voyage:
• Call sign – ship call sign;

• Name – ship name;
• Dist. GNSS – Bow/Stern/Port side/Starboard – GNSS antenna position relative
to the ship’s bow/stern/port/starboard.
• Type of cargo – type of ship and cargo;
• Max static draught – maximum present static draught;
• Persons on board – number of persons on board;
• Dest – ship destination;
• ETA<time/date> – estimated time/date of arrival;
• Status – current navigational status;
• Display present – availability of the display (the received message can be read
on the display).
In addition for Inland AIS it is possible to set the following parameters:
• Ship or combination type;

• Air draught;
• Number of crew members;
• Number of passengers;
• Number of ship personnel;
• UN dest. country code – UN destination country code;
• UN dest. location code – UN destination location code;
• ERI dest. terminal – ERI destination terminal code;
• Blue sign status – intention blue sign;
• Number of assisting tugboats.
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the parameter required to be modified, and press
“Change” button.

UAIS MKD Imitator
The screen will display an alphanumeric keyboard for the parameter input:
By using the alphanumeric keyboard, type in the required value and press “Ok”
button to confirm input. Use “Del” or “BS” buttons to delete the entered symbol
or “Cancel” button to cancel the input. Press “PrSet” or “NxSet” button to access
the alphanumeric keyboard previous or next page respectively.
If the “Status” parameter is chosen, the screen will display the list for a choice of
current navigational status:
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the navigational status, and press “OK” button.
To go back to the MAIN MENU, press “Return” button in the STATIC AND VOYAGE DATA menu.
Other Stations
To get an access to the data received from other AIS stations, choose OTHER STATIONS
item of the MAIN MENU. The screen will display the list of available AIS stations which
information can be retrieved on:

UAIS MKD Imitator
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the AIS station which information should be displayed on,
and press “Detail” button. The screen will display the table containing the basic station
parameters:
Press “More” button to look up other information on the station:

Target information can be displayed in a form of a simple tactic display. To do this,
press “GrView” button:
“Txt off”\“Txt on” button are intended for hiding\displaying the text tag near the target
symbol.
To decrease or increase the display scale, press the “Zm.in” or “Zm.out” buttons
respectively.
Press “Return” button to go back to the main stations list.

UAIS MKD Imitator
Sending Text Messages

To send a text message to any AIS station, choose OTHER STATIONS item of
the MAIN MENU. The screen will display the list of available AIS stations which the text
message can be sent to.
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the AIS station which the text message should be
sent to, and press “SndMsg” button. The screen will display a page for entering
the message.
To select the message addressee, choose “To:” line and press “Change” button.
The screen will display a page for entering the addressee MMSI (MMSI of the selected
station by default):
Use digital on-screen keyboard to type the addressee MMSI or 0 to broadcast,

and press “Ok” button to confirm input.
For entering the message text, choose “Txt:” line and press “Change” button.
The screen will display the alphanumeric on-screen keyboard for entering the message text:
Type the necessary message text and press “Ok” button to confirm input.
The screen will return to the main message input window. Press “Send” button
to transmit the message.

UAIS MKD Imitator
Viewing Received Messages

To get an access to the received messages, select RADIO EXCHANGE item of
the MAIN MENU. The screen will display a prompt to choose broadcast or addressed
messages to your own ship, or all messages that have been received:
Press “Yes” or “No” buttons respectively. The screen will display the list of AIS
station which the text messages have been received from:
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the AIS station which you wish to read text messages
from. “TEXT:” line will contain the text of a message from the highlighted station.
Press “Reply” button to reply to the station. The screen will display the page
for entering the message text (see Sending Text Messages).
Report ETA Lock/Bridge/Term

When using Inland AIS it is possible to choose REPORT ETA LOCK/BRIDGE/TERM item in
the MAIN MENU:

UAIS MKD Imitator
You can set the following data on the “Report ETA lock/bridge/term” screen:
• Destination ID;
• UN country code;
• UN location code;
• Fairway section number;
• Terminal code;
• Fairway hectometre;
• ETA date – estimated date of arrival at lock/bridge/terminal;
• ETA time – estimated time of arrival at lock/bridge/terminal;
• Number of assisting tugboats;
• Air draught.
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to choose the parameter required to be modified, and press
“Change” button. By using the alphanumeric keyboard, type in the required value
and press “Ok” button to confirm input.
To send the report on ETA at some certain location (lock, bridge, terminal), press
the “SndMsg” button.
Enter Setup
The UAIS transponder may be in one of the modes:
• operating mode;
• setup mode.
Use <↑> <↓> buttons to select ENTER SETUP item from the MAIN MENU and press
“Select” button. The screen will display a page requesting to suspend
the transponder operation:
Press “Yes” button to stop data transmission.

UAIS MKD Imitator
The screen will display a page requesting to enter the password for accessing
the transponder setup menu:
Press “Ok” button to by-pass this request.

The screen will display the MAIN SETUP menu:
Select the required menu item and press “Setup” button.
General Setup
To set the main UAIS transponder parameters, choose GENERAL SETUP item from the MAIN
SETUPmenu. Press “Setup” button.
The screen will display GENERAL SETUP menu:

UAIS MKD Imitator
You can change the following parameters:
• MMSI – the Maritime Mobile Service Identifier;

• Purpose – purpose of AIS;
• IMO number;
• RAIM present;
• Setup password;
• Addressed message filter – the display shows only the messages addressed to
the ship. The messages addressed to other ships are not shown;
• Media analyser mode – the mode of transmission channel analyzer. In normal
mode should be switched off;
• Max repeating mess. 6,12 – the maximum number of message repeating;
• Transmission w/o sync – transmission without synchronization. The
transmission of messages is performed when there is no direct, indirect or
semaphore synchronization;
• Enable deleting regions – allowing deleting regions from the memory.
In addition for Inland AIS it is possible to set the following parameters:
• ENI – the Unique European Vessel Identification Number;

• Hazardous cargo – hazardous cargo on board;
• Loaded/unloaded status.
Press “Return” button to go back to the MAIN SETUP menu.
Extra Setup
To set additional UAIS station parameters, choose EXTRA SETUP item from MAIN SETUP
menu.
The screen will display EXTRA SETUP menu which can be used for enabling\disabling
the use of the internal GNSS unit and setting the antenna position relative to the ship’s
bow, stern, portside or starboard.

Loran-C Receiver (LC-90 MARK-II)
LORAN-C RECEIVER (LC-90 MARK-II)
Operational Overview
To call the Loran-C Receiver control panel, press “Loran-C” button on “Nav. Aids”
of the ship’s Conning Display.
A large LCD readout is taking up most of the left-hand side of the front panel,
a keyboard on the right-hand side, and all sorts of abbreviations printed on the panel
below the display. These nine abbreviated labels indicate the various modes in which
the LC-90MKII may be operated.
In addition, there are 6 secondary functions which may be called up to do less-often
used operations. These functions are accessed by use of the [#] key, followed
by a number from [1] to [6].
The keyboard itself contains twenty-three membrane-sealed touchpad keys, and
is divided roughly into four functional areas, delineated by different color schemes.
A distinctive “beep” is generated to confirm to the user that something did indeed
occur whenever he presses a key.
The functional groupings of the touchpad keys are as follows.
Power On/Off and Dimmer

These three brown keys are located at the top right of the keyboard.
When the operator presses the [PWR] key, the LC-90MKII is activated.
After several seconds, the display will begin to show some activity. It is
necessary to press [OFF] the key during several seconds in order to turn
off power to the unit. This procedure is necessary to prevent unintentional
interruption of power should the user accidentally hit the [OFF] key.
The [DIM] key is used to vary the level of backlighting of the display and
keyboard for nighttime operation. There are four levels of backlighting
intensity: bright, medium, dim, and off. Each time the [DIM] key is pressed,
the level will change in the above sequence.
Numeric Keys
There are ten numeric touchpad keys, and these are orange in color.
The keys [0] through [9] are employed to enter all numeric data.

The blue key is a general purpose key that is used to change from North to South
latitude, or East to West longitude when entering data for modes or functions requiring
Latitude/Longitude data, change default values for many modes and functions
that can be used either automatic or manually, and turn on/off many functions.
This key is also used to change position data from Latitude/Longitude
format to TD format, and vice versa.
In each mode or function where data may be entered, leading zeroes must be
entered (for example, waypoint “01” must be entered fully, rather than as “1”).
The LC-90MKII will reject entries; it cannot understand where leading zeroes haven’t
been entered. Trailing zeroes needn’t however be entered fully. For example,
a latitude entry of “37” degrees is just as valid as the full entry of “370000” degrees.
Operating Mode/Function Selector Keys

The three blue keys on the lower left of the keyboard are the mode selector
keys. The blue [mode] key, consisting of two arrow-shaped keys, selects
one of the nine mode screens. Pressing these keys causes the mode
indicator arrow to move sideways to align itself above the labels
for the operating mode on the panel beneath the LCD display.
The readouts on the LCD itself will change in accordance with the mode
selected. Pressing the left arrow on the [MODE] key when the mode
indicator is located at the left-hand edge of the panel, will shift the indicator
to the far right-hand mode. Similarly, when the indicator is at the far right
end, the arrow will shift the indicator to the far left-hand mode.
The blue [#] key label led is used to select one of the six secondary
functions. Press the key followed by a number from [1] to [6] to access
these secondary functions. Note that it isn’t necessary to press the blue
[ENT] key to activate a function. The LCD display will change
in accordance with the secondary function selected by the operator.
Other Keys
At the top left of the keyboard there are two the orange [SAV] [RCL] keys
and two the brown [CLR] and [u] keys. [SAV] stands for Save, and is used
when a position is to be stored in the Event Memory, or when an external
plotter or printer is connected to the LC-90MKII. The position, at the
moment this key is pressed, is sent out to the external instrument. [RCL]
stands for Recall, and is used when calling up the stored data from
the Event Memory.
The brown [CLR] key stands for Clear. It is used to clear a number from
the display or to silence the audible alarm.
The arrow shaped key is used to select where the data entry cursor will
be located on one of the five lines on the display. The cursor is indicated by
the flashing of the far left character on the desired line.
After entering new data, the blue [ENT] key (standing for Enter) should be
pressed. The cursor automatically advances to the next line where data
may be entered after the [ENT] key is pressed.

Summary of Modes and Functions

Primary Modes, Data Readouts
S/C: Speed Made Good and Course Made Good, together with present
position (in L/L or TD’s, at the discretion of the operator) and the Route
and/or Waypoints in use.
TTG: Velocity To Destination (in knots) and Time to Go (in hours and minutes),
again together with present position and Route and/or Waypoints in use.
R/B: Range (in nautical miles) and Bearing (in degrees magnetic or true,
at the operator’s discretion) from present position to destination waypoint,
again together with present position and Route and/or Waypoint in use.
XTE: Cross-Track Error (in nautical miles off the desired track), with arrow
indicators to show direction of offset and direction to steer to get back
on track. As usual, present position and Route and/or Waypoints in use
are shown. Course offset in degrees and Range to destination waypoint
are displayed as well.
Primary Modes, Data Entry
NAV: This is the Navigation mode. Cross-Track Error with Course offset
and Range and Bearing to the desired waypoint are also displayed.
RTE: This is the Route Planning mode. The waypoints involved in up to ten
different Route Plans are selected in this mode.
WPT: This mode is used to enter position data into a waypoint. Waypoint data
may be entered or recalled for confirmation either as L/L or as TD’s.
CLC: This is the Calculation mode. Trial RO-RO calculations of Range and Bearing
from waypoint to waypoint may be done here. It is also possible to define
a waypoint by Range and Bearing from present position in this mode.
ALM: This is the mode where alarm limits are defined for the Cross-Track Error
alarm, the Border alarm, the Arrival alarm and the Anchor Watch alarm.
Secondary (#) Function

In each of these function, the blue [#] key is pressed, followed by a single number.
The function “#” in use is showing at the right end of the third line of the display.
To leave a secondary function, hit either the left or right arrow keys.
#1: This is the Initialization function. The user enters the approximate present
position, and if he chooses to Disable automatic selection, the GRI
and the slave secondaries for use by the LC-90MKII.
#2: This is the Position Offset function. The operator may enter the amount
of delta L/L or delta TD offsets desired for a particular area. There are
nine “pages” of offset information that may be stored in memory.
#3: This is the Averaging Time function. The operator may choose the amount
of smoothing time constant to be applied to the L/L and speed display.
The type of output data available at the rear panel for external devices such
as plotters or printers is specified in this function as well.

#4: This is the automatic ASF (Additional Secondary Factor) and automatic
Magnetic Variation function. Both functions may be disabled manually.
The amount of ASF correction automatically used by the LC-90MKII
in the present geographic area is displayed. Note that at 0 degrees
variation, True North referenced bearings will be obtained.
#5: This is the Cycle Selection function. The amount that the tracking point
is to be slowed manually is entered in this function.
#6: In this function, the SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) and ECD (Envelope
to Cycle Difference) are displayed. These numbers give the operator
an indication of the quality of the incoming Loran signals. The display
shows which cycle of the master and two secondary stations the LC-90MKII
is presently tracking, and shows in addition the deviation of the internal
reference oscillator from the ideal frequency.
Basic Level Operations

Turning the Unit On and Off
Press the [PWR] key. After several seconds (during which time the LC-90MKII
will be performing an internal self-check), the display will activate. If an error
should be detected during the self-check sequence, an error message will be
displayed on the screen.
To turn the LC-90MKII off, you must press [OFF] key.
Initializing the Navigator for Your Own Geographical Area

The LC-90MKII is designed to retain in memory all information, necessary for operation,
whether it is turned on or off. An internal “keep-alive” battery performs this function.
Once the LC-90MKII has been initialized for your area, you need do nothing more than
turn the power back on when you want to set out on a new voyage.
Thus the first time you use the unit, you must initialize it for your geographic area.
From then on, unless you wish to override its automatic selections, the unit will
determine the exact position automatically. You must enter your approximate location
within about +/-3 degrees, although you may have to be more accurate than that
if you are located in an area close to a baseline extension. In this case, the unit
requires a starting location within about 1 degree of the actual location.
Similarly, if you move the LC-90MKII more than about 60 miles (approximately 1 degree
in latitude) with the power off, you will need to re-establish the approximate starting
position. Before you start operation, obtain a Navigation Chart for your area, preferably
one with Loran-C TD lines overprinted on it. Keep this chart nearby, as you go through
the various procedures, so that you can verify that the LC-90MKII is giving you reliable
and sensible numbers.
Clearing the Memory

The very first time you turn on your new unit, you will have to clear the internal memory
to ensure that no stray data has been stored there. Make very sure that you want
to clear the memory completely before you do this: all information, including waypoints
that you may want to keep, will be lost after this operation!
Make sure the LC-90MKII is turned off first, and then hold down the [CLR] touchpad
while pressing the [PWR] key. Hold the [CLR] key down until you hear two beeps,
and then you may release it.

Initializing Latitude/Longitude (Function #1)

After the memory has been cleared (or after you call up Function #1), you will find
the cursor on the latitude line. After clearing memory you will find that the line is full
of dashes. (After hitting the [CLR] button after calling up Function #1 you will
find the line full of dashes.) Enter your approximate latitude. Assume for sake
of illustration that you are in San Francisco, and that the approximate location
is 37 degrees North latitude and 122 degrees West longitude. The sequence
of keystrokes to enter this information would be:
[3] [7] [ENT] 37°00.00’ N Latitude
The entry of trailing zeroes is optional. For example, you could have entered the full
latitude of “370000” rather than the short-form “37” if you wanted to. The cursor will
automatically move down to the next line, where you will enter the longitude.
The keystrokes for this operation are:
[1] [2] [2] [ENT] 122°00.00’ W Longitude
That if the longitude were for example, 22 degrees West, you would have to enter
the leading zero:
[0] [2] [2] [ENT] 022°00.00’ W Longitude
Also that the default values for latitude is North latitude and West longitude.
If you are in the Southern latitudes or Easterly longitudes, you will need to override
the default hemispheric values by using the key. For example, if you are located
in Osaka, Japan, at 34 degrees North latitude and 135 degrees East longitude, you
would enter:
[3] [4] [ENT] 34°00.00’ N Latitude
[1] [3] [5] [ENT] 135°00.00’ E Longitude
Now you should find that the cursor has automatically moved to the third line,
and that the “A” on that line is flashing. This gives you the opportunity to Disable
the Automatic selection of GRI and the two slave secondaries. At this time we
suggest that you let the LC-90MKII automatically select these values. In a later section
of this manual you will learn the procedure to Disable the automatic process.
Now the LC-90MKII will begin searching for the master and slave stations to verify
the present approximate position you just entered. The display will show “9999”
for the GRI, and “99” for both slave stations. The “MCYC”, “MSNR”, “SNR” and “CYC”
signal warning indicators will flash at this time. After about a minute, these warning
indicators will cease flashing, and the appropriate GRI and slave secondary TD numbers
will appear on the fourth and fifth lines. A typical Function #1 is shown below.
Note that the secondary stations are represented by the first two digits
of the appropriate number of microseconds.

You should now go back to the S/C Mode to observe the receiver while
it is locking onto the Loran signals. Press either the “3” or the “4” key
([MENU] key) to exit Function #1, and then press either one of these keys
until the Mode indicator arrow is lined up over the “S/C” label on the front
panel under the display. Now, press the “Arrows” key to watch the TD’s
change while the unit is locking onto the Loran signals.
After acquisition and locking is complete, all the signal warning indicators will be
extinguished, and the TD readings will be stable.
Note: The unit is not ready for navigation until these signal warning indicators
are extinguished.
The acquisition process will take between three and five minutes, depending
on the quality of the Loran signals in your area. In areas of signal interference,
position data is unreliable for the first 20 minutes because the notch filters are
seeking out offending signals.
Switch to the Latitude/Longitude display by pressing the “arrows” key again.
Note that the L/L readout is stable, and that your position is displayed
in degrees, minutes and tenths of minutes (not seconds!). Check the Loran-C
MKII’s position with that shown on your chart. It normally should be reasonably
close, but while you are in port, the position may be as far off as a quarter mile,
or so because of signal distortion, caused by passage of the signals over land
nearby. Don’t worry: things will get more accurate once you are out of harbor.
However, it is still a good idea to check your TD numbers against those from a nearby
vessel, and with your chart to ensure that the unit has locked onto the correct point
of the slaves and the master signals, and that no strange things have occurred
during the acquisition process. It is well to remember that the TD lattice printed
on a Loran-C chart is adjusted before printing to compensate for warping of the
grid because of ASF (Additional Secondary Factors), and that TD’s plotted on such
a chart are thus inherently more accurate than the Latitude/Longitude calculated
from TD’s. In other words, TD’s are observed phenomena, and Latitude/Longitude
numbers are derived mathematically from this observed data.
Reading Speed and Course (S/C Mode)

Verify that the Mode indicator arrow is lined up over the “S/C” label. It will take
a minute or two after the receiver has finished its acquisition process, but you will
eventually see the display showing the Speed Made Good and Course Made Good.
Of course, if you are presently at the dock, the speed should be close to zero,
and the course will randomly vary around the compass rose.
Note: This function as well as many others will only work after the receiver has
completed the acquisition process and after all warning indications have
been extinguished.
The Speed Made Good is defined as the speed over ground, and is calibrated in knots.
The Course Made Good is referenced to Magnetic North whenever the MAGV label
is shown in the upper right-hand side of the display. The amount of Magnetic Variation
is automatically calculated by the Loran-C for the your geographic area. You may at
this time wish to look at the amount of magnetic variation, presently being used.
This can be done by accessing Function #4. Press the [#] key, followed by the [4] key.
A typical display is shown in fig. below. The label “vAr” in the top line of the refers
to “Magnetic Variation”, and the “A” shown refers to “Auto”, indicating that the variation
is applied automatically.

The preprogrammed magnetic variation values are the average of those in an area
of approximately 10 degrees latitude by 10 degrees longitude. The preprogrammed
variation is typically accurate within plus/minus 3 degrees, which is within the limits
of accuracy to which most compasses have been compensated anyhow. However,
if more accurate magnetic bearings are needed, enter the local variation manually,
using the following procedure.
Manual Entry of Magnetic Variation (Function #4)
1. Verify that the unit is in Function #4.
2. Press [CLR]. The “A” will change to a dash next to the label “VAR” on the top line.
3. Press “arrows” and then [ENT]. You will see the “A” change to a “d”, indicating
that the Automatic mode has been Disabled. Now the unit has been placed
in manual magnetic variation mode. The cursor will automatically advance
to the next line.
4. Type in the desired magnetic variation, followed by [ENT]. For example,
if the magnetic variation for your area is 12 degrees West, the keystroke
sequence would be [1] [2] [ENT]. If however the magnetic variation is 12 degrees
East, then the sequence would be [1] [2] [ENT], since the default (+) value,
standing for West variation, must be overridden. The MAGV indicator at the top
of the display will be on whenever Magnetic bearings are in use.
True Bearings (Rather than Magnetic Bearings) (Function #4)

If you would rather have the LC-90MKII display bearing in True (relative to True North
rather than magnetic north), this can be accomplished by setting the magnetic variation
in the Disable automatic mode to be zero degrees. Verify that the LC-90MKII
is in Function #4, and then select the “d” mode using the key. Move the cursor
down to the second line and type in 00 for the variation. The entire sequence is:
[#] [4] [CLR] [ENT] [0] [0] [ENT] True North bearings
The MAGV indicator at the top of the display will disappear.
Setting the Averaging Time (Function #3)

If you are still presently sitting at the dock while you are learning the operation
of your new Loran-C navigator, you may note that the speed reading varies a bit,
in a random fashion. This is a function of several factors, most noteworthy being
the strength of the incoming Loran-C signals and the minute random variations
of the propagation path between you and the transmitting station.
The calculation of speed is sensitive to these random variations, especially at low
speeds. You may smooth out excessive speed fluctuations by specifying an “averaging”
time constant that in essence lengthens the time interval over which the calculation
is done. The tradeoff for a less-jittery speed readout is that sudden changes in speed
(actual acceleration or deceleration of the boat) take longer to show up on the S/C
readout. In general, an Averaging time constant of 1 to 4 is a practical value for most
people, but you may want to experiment some with the value that most suits you.

It should be noted that the Averaging time constant will affect the speed that the
Latitude/Longitude readout changes as well as the Speed readout, but that the TD
readout will not be affected. To change the Averaging constant, access Function #3.
The amount presently used will be shown on the first line, to the right of the label “AvE”.
To enter an averaging constant of 4, you would use the following keystroke sequence:
[4] [ENT] Entering Averaging constant of “4”
For the time being, don’t worry about the other lines on the display. We’ll get into
those subjects later.
Automatic ASF (Function #4)

The LC-90MKII has a built-in capability of using TD offsets to compensate for warpage
of the TD grid occurring due to ASF (Additional Secondary Factors) caused
by propagation of the Loran signals over part-land, part-sea paths. This automatic
ASF compensation will yield better accuracy of the calculated Latitude/Longitude
than will the raw calculation using uncompensated TD numbers.
When the LC-90MKII is first used after the memory has been cleared, the default
setting for automatic ASF compensation is “off”. For most operations using latitude/
longitude it is desirable to have the automatic compensation engaged all the time.
Only when TD numbers (perhaps from a fishing buddy or your own old records
from another Loran-C receiver) are used, will it be necessary to disable automatic
ASF compensation.
The LC-90MKII contains a built-in table of ASF compensation values for some
geographic areas, but other areas of the world have not been measured as of this time.
To activate the automatic ASF compensation, you must call up the Function #4
by first typing [#] followed by [4]. As with all the Functions, it isn’t necessary to use
the [ENT] key after typing in the [4].
You should now see a screen where the cursor will be on the “A”, since it is flashing.
This is the Automatic Variation function. You will need to hit the down arrow key twice,
and hit [CLR] followed by . You should see the “OFF” indication next to the label
“ASF” change to “On”. If your geographic area is one of those that have ASF
compensation values tabulated for it, after less than about 2 minutes of computations,
you will see the values of TD offsets that will now automatically be factored into
the L/L computations. If your area doesn’t have any ASF compensation values available,
the “ASF” indicator that has now appeared on the top of the display will blink. Otherwise
this indicator will be steady, indicating that automatic ASF compensation is in effect.
Note that the ASF compensation values programmed into the LC-90MKII, are
the average values for a 1 degree by 1 degree grid. If for some reason you need more
accurate compensation values, you will have to enter these manually. This procedure
will be covered in the Customized Operations subsection later in this manual.
Meanwhile, go back to any of the Modes showing present position (Modes S/C,
TTG, R/B, XTE, and CLC) to see your present position. Compare this indicated
position to that on your chart, and you should see that it compares more closely
than it did before ASF compensation was applied.

Navigation Operations
In this subsection we will start dealing with functions that will allow you to plan,
and then actually make voyages to destinations of your choice. You may wish to go to
a specific position such as a particular buoy, or you may wish to return to a place
where the fishing was good previously.
Entry of a Position into a Waypoint (WPT Mode)

In Navigation terminology, a particular location is known as a “Waypoint”, whether
it be a starting point, a destination point or an intermediate point on a voyage.
The LC-90MKII is capable of waypoint entry by four different methods:
• by Latitude and Longitude coordinates of a location;
• by TD’s (Time Differences) of a location;
• by using the [SAV] button to store present position in a waypoint;
• by Range and Bearing from your present position.
Waypoint Entry By Latitude/Longitude Coordinates (WPT Mode)
Entry of a position into a waypoint is a two-step process. First you assign a number
to identify a particular waypoint, and then you enter the desired position into that waypoint.
The LC-90MKII has one hundred waypoints into which position information may be
entered. These are numbered from 00 to 99. The LC-90MKII allows you to look
at the position already stored in each numbered waypoint by specifying the waypoint
and then using either the L/L or the TD format to read the stored position.
Some people might search through the waypoints already stored in the unit in order to find
an empty waypoint in which to insert new information. However, it is probably less
confusing to insert data sequentially, starting at waypoint one and proceeding upwards,
one by one, in the sequence that the waypoints will actually be encountered on the voyage.
Obviously, it’s important that you write down your voyage plan in your log so that you have
a permanent record of which waypoint is which.
Some operators prefer to reserve Waypoint 99 as a sort of “scratchpad”, so that any
interesting position, information they might for instance hear on the radio, may be
entered at the moment it is heard. Any position data that have been stored in other
waypoints thus will not be disturbed, or even lost, in the heat of the moment.
Waypoint “00” is a special one. It is reserved for use when your present location
is used in a navigation calculation. This will be explored in more detail later.
Conceptually, waypoints are best thought of as being “Waypoints From” a desired
origin or as “Waypoints To” a desired destination. Several navigation functions that will
often be used in planning voyages, make this distinction between “From” and “To”,
even though any one particular waypoint may be used for either purpose, since each
waypoint defines a specific location on earth, whether you want to go towards it or
away from it.
Let us assume for purposes of illustration that we wish to enter the Latitude and
Longitude position of San Francisco into Waypoint Zero Seven. The coordinates are:
37 degrees, 40.00 minutes North Latitude, and 122 degrees, 24.00 minutes
West Longitude. You would of course enter your own approximate L/L coordinates.

The sequence of keypunch operations would be as follows:

1. Move the right arrow key until the Mode indicator arrow is directly over
the “WPT” label on the front panel beneath the display. Observe the waypoint
number in use there now. The waypoint number is located on the third line
next to the “WPT” label. The first digit of the waypoint number will be flashing
to indicate that the data-entry cursor is presently at this location. The latitude and
longitude of the waypoint in use at this time are displayed on lines four and
five of the display. If you want to see the TD’s that correspond to the L/L for this
waypoint, hit the key. Hit the key again to get back to the L/L readout.
Note: If the L/L is zero degrees latitude and longitude in a waypoint, the corresponding
TD’s will be non-zero values representing the TD’s that would be present
at zero latitude, zero longitude. The exact value of these TD’s will change
depending on the GRI in use by the LC-90MKII at that moment. The important
thing to remember is that the LC-90MKII stores positions in L/L format in its
waypoint memory, and that an L/L position of zero/zero degrees indicates that
the waypoint is empty.
2. Now re-specify the waypoint to be waypoint zero seven. Use the following
touchpad sequence: [0] [7] [ENT].
Note: The entry of the leading zero is necessary. Entering “7” after [CLR]
will simply cause the LC-90MKII to ignore the input as invalid. If waypoint
zero seven is presently empty, you will see zeroes on lines four and five.
3. Now go ahead and enter the San Francisco numbers:
[3] [7] [3] [8] [ENT] 37°38.00’ N
[1] [2] [2] [2] [4] [ENT] 122°24.00’ W
Note: The entry of trailing zeroes is optional. The LC-90MKII senses when trailing
zeroes are necessary and adds them as needed.
4. Now you may hit the “arrows” key to see what TD’s correspond to the L/L you
just entered.
5. If we were operating in Southern Latitudes and Easterly Longitudes, we would
have to override the North and West defaults that the LC-90MKII has been normally
set up to use. For example, if the position of our Waypoint zero seven were
37 degrees, 38.00 minutes South Latitude, and 122 degrees, 24.00 minutes
East Longitude, we would punch in the following sequence:
[3] [7] [3] [8] [ENT] 37°38.00’ S
[1] [2] [2] [2] [4] [ENT] 122°24.00’ E

Waypoint Entry By TD’s (WPT Mode)

The second method of specifying a waypoint position is by TD’s. This process
involves converting the TD’s to appropriate Latitude/Longitude coordinates and
then using those coordinates for the waypoint. This sounds like an involved process,
but the LC-90MKII makes it straightforward, provided that the operator uses some
degree of caution.
Let us use the following numbers as an example. The GRI in use is 9940, and the Slave
stations in use are the “11” and the “27” lines. We assume here that LC-90MKII has
already locked onto the signals, and that the desired TD’s are relatively close by –
for example, they may have been sent to you over the VHF radio by a fishing buddy.
The TD’s to be converted are: 12885.0 and 27932.4 microseconds. The approximate
Latitude/Longitude at these TD’s is 44 degrees, 30 minutes North Latitude, and
124 degrees, zero minutes West Longitude.
Note that the slave stations, that the LC-90MKII is presently tracking, should be
the same as the TD’s, you want to use to make the conversion between TD’s
and Latitude and Longitude, and it is necessary for the GRI in actual use to be the same
as the one that was originally used for generating the TD’s, you want to enter.
Another important point: if the automatic ASF compensation function is activated
(as recommended for most operations), and if you wish to make a conversion from TD’s
to L/L, you should manually compensate your TD’s to reflect local ASF values before
making the conversion to L/L. See the paragraph Using ASF When Entering TD’s
under Customized Operations for details.
Alternatively, you might disable the ASF function, when using a waypoint converted
from raw TD’s to L/L, in order to obtain accurate Range/Bearing readings, especially
when you get near the desired waypoint. You can disable the automatic
ASF compensation function using Function #4.
The sequence of operations is:
1. Call up Function #4 and disable the ASF Auto function if it is on. The keystroke
sequence is as follows:
[#] [4] [6] [6] [CLR] [ENT]
2. Call up the WPT Function by moving the left or right arrow key until the Mode
indicator arrow is lined up directly over the “WPT” label on the panel under
the display. Specify the waypoint number into which you wish to store
the TD information (we’ll use waypoint “08” here), and then enter the desired
information. The following touchpad sequence would be used:
[0] [8] [ENT] [1] [2] [8] [8] [5] [0] [ENT]
[2] [7] [9] [3] [2] [4] [ENT]
3. Now switch back to the L/L display to see the resulting L/L. You must wait
for the L/L display to settle down with all numbers and indications stable before
proceeding on to any other mode or function.

Waypoint Entry of Present Position ([SAV] Key)

There are times when you will want to store your present location into a waypoint.
For example, you might have come across a particularly good fishing spot, and
want to record it as a waypoint so that you may return to this location at a later date.
The procedure is simple: first, store the present position into the Event Memory
by pressing [SAV]. Then, transfer the data from an Event Memory to the Waypoint
Memory. For example, if you want to store your present location into waypoint 09,
the entire sequence is [SAV] [0] [9] [ENT].
Waypoint Entry by Range/Bearing from Present Position (CLC Mode)
The LC-90MKII provides for waypoint entry by using Range/Bearing from present
position in the CLC Mode. The calculated position from the range and bearing, you have
entered are displayed in the upper two lines and stored into the “To” waypoint selected
in the third line. You will see the “N”, “S”, “E”, “W” hemisphere indicators flashing
in the CLC Mode to warn you that the L/L shown is not your present position.
You must be very careful that the waypoint, into which you want to put the new
information, is empty before doing this operation. Otherwise, a waypoint with desired
position already entered into it will be overwritten instantly, and you will lose any
information you may have wanted to keep. Before calling up the CLC mode, look
at the target waypoint to make sure that the L/L stored there is zero/zero by using
the WPT mode.
Assume for sake of illustration that your present position is 37 degrees 38.01 minutes
North latitude, 122 degrees 24.01 minutes West longitude in San Francisco, and
that you have found an interesting target on your radar with a range of 3.4 n mile
and a relative bearing of 135 degrees off your starboard bow. The magnetic
compass reading at the time is 46 degrees.
The target of interest is thus at a bearing of 46 plus 135 degrees magnetic,
or in other words, a magnetic bearing of 181 degrees. We assume now that your
LC-90MKII is set up for automatic Magnetic Variation operation. Let’s put the position
of this target into waypoint 32. First, get into the CLC Mode:
1. Type the desired “To” waypoint on the third line, where at this time the cursor
is blinking, waiting for data entry:
[3] [2] [ENT]
The cursor will automatically advance to the next line.
2. Type in the range of 3.4 n mile and 181 degrees magnetic, using the following
keystroke sequence:
[0] [3] [4] [ENT] [1] [8] [1] [ENT] Range = 3.4 n mile
Bearing = 181 deg. Mag.
The result will be displayed in the upper two lines. During the calculation, the degree
indications will be flashing. Wait until the L/L readout and the flashing degree
indications stabilize before proceeding to another mode or function.

Selecting Waypoint(s) for Use with Other Modes and Functions

To prepare for making navigation calculations using waypoint(s) you must first select
either the single waypoint towards which you want to proceed from your present
position, or you must specify the two waypoints between which you want to travel.
The FR/TO display is used to select waypoint(s) for later use in other modes.
To specify the waypoint(s) of interest, call up the “FR/TO” screen by

pressing [FR/TO] button.
There are three ways in which Waypoint information may be selected

in the “FR/TO” display:
• as a destination waypoint from your present position (00);

• as a pair of waypoints, the left-hand one being the “From” waypoint,
and the right-hand one being the “To” waypoint;
• as a pair of waypoints in a Route, which is a pre-planned set of waypoints
which you want to follow in sequence. This latter type of waypoint selection
will be covered later on in this subsection when Route Planning is discussed
(see Route Functions (RTE Mode) paragraph).
Selection of a Destination Waypoint from Present Position
First, let us select a single waypoint towards which you want to navigate from
the present position. This is normally used when you want to do a simple Range/Bearing
computation from your present position to the desired waypoint location.
Waypoint zero zero (“00”) has been described as a unique waypoint. “00” always
refers to the present position of the LC-90MKII. In fact, if you call up “00” in the WPT
Mode, you will find that you cannot enter data into it. In order to specify a waypoint
to navigate towards from your present position, you need to specify the waypoint
selection as “From 00” to the “To waypoint” of interest.
As complicated as this is to explain in words, it is really a simple process. Let us say
that you want to proceed to waypoint number “04” from your present location. Suppose
further that waypoint number “04” has already had a position stored in it, let’s say
the position of a buoy outside the harbor.
Press the [FR/TO] key, and then key in the following:
[0] [4] [ENT] From waypoint 00 To waypoint 04
It is not necessary to type the “From” waypoint (00).

You should see an arrow in the third line separating the “From 00” and the “To 04”
waypoints. In other words, the two digits on the left-hand side represent the starting
waypoint and the right-hand digits represent the destination waypoint.
If you would like to confirm the coordinates of each waypoint, call up the WPT
Mode and enter the waypoint number desired. If the waypoint has been
specified by TD’s, you may hit the “arrows” key to see the TD’s. Make sure
that you hit the “arrows” key again to get back into the L/L format.
Specification of a Pair of Waypoints (From/To Waypoints)

Now let’s try selecting a pair of waypoints. This is done whenever you want to go
between two waypoints. This is also needed when you wish to specify a line defining
the border of a particular zone, which you want to avoid. Border alarm will be described
in detail later (see Alarm Function (ALM Mode) paragraph).

Press the [FR/TO] key, then type:
[CLR] [5] [5] [5] [6] [ENT] From waypoint 55 To waypoint 56
The display will show the starting waypoint “55” on the left-hand side, with an arrow
pointing to the right towards the destination waypoint “56”.
You can now go to another function, which uses waypoints, since you have specified
the waypoints of interest.
Range and Bearing Calculations (R/B and CLC Modes)

To steer to a waypoint, you would like to have two pieces of information:
the direction in which to steer, and the distance to the waypoint. The LC-90MKII
provides two forms of Range/Bearing calculations to aid you in navigating
to a waypoint or in navigating from waypoint to waypoint:
• Simple Range/Bearing from Present Position to a waypoint (R/B Mode);

• Range/Bearing from waypoint to waypoint (CLC Mode).
Simple Range and Bearing from Present Position to a Waypoint (R/B Mode)
The range and the bearing from present position is the most basic information you
can use to navigate to a waypoint. You have learned how to select a destination
waypoint in the FR/TO screen in the section above. Now, select the R/B Mode
by moving the Mode indicator with the left or right arrow ([MODE]) key until it is lined
up directly over the “R/B” Mode label. The range and bearing from your present
position to the waypoint selected in the FR/TO display (calculated on the basis
of a Great Circle course) will be displayed on the bottom two lines in the R/B display.
The range is in nautical miles and the bearing is normally Magnetic. If the indication
“MAGV” doesn’t appear at the top right of the display, this indicates that you have
manually set “00” as a variation, and that the bearing is thus relative to True North.
The following figure shows a typical R/B display:
Range and Bearing Between Two Waypoints (CLC Mode)

In the process of planning a voyage, a series of waypoints is usually selected in advance,
and a Range/Bearing calculation is made to get the heading to use for the first leg
of the voyage. As you approach the first waypoint, you then will want to calculate
in advance the next heading to take in order to get to the second waypoint after you round
the first one. To do this, you will need to use the CLC Mode in the LC-90MKII.
The procedure is straightforward. In this mode you needn’t respecify the waypoints
presently being used by using the FR/TO screen. Instead, you may make
this calculation “offline” (to use some computer jargon) without affecting normal
operations of the LC-90MKII, which may have been navigating between two
waypoints, already previously selected in the FR/TO screen. You wouldn’t want
to change the present voyage parameters in order to do a planning calculation.
Let’s say that you are presently travelling from waypoint 03 to 04 (selected in the FR/TO
screen), and that you want to determine in advance the heading to set into your
autopilot after you round waypoint 04 on the way to the next waypoint 07:

1. First, get into the CLC Mode, using as usual the left or right arrow key to line up
the mode indicator arrow over the “CLC” label. The cursor will automatically
place itself on the third line.
2. Now key in the following:
[0] [4] [0] [7] [ENT] From waypoint 04 to 07
You will now see the Range and Bearing for the voyage from waypoint 04
to waypoint 07 displayed on the fourth and fifth lines respectively.
See the figure below for a typical display screen.
Cross-Track Error Functions (XTE Mode)

On a voyage between a starting waypoint and a destination waypoint, the desired
course between the two positions is known as a “track”. It could just as well be termed
the “intended track” because, although it is the intention of the user to follow this course
faithfully, in reality, he never can do so perfectly. The forces of wind, waves, current
and even steering errors or boat loading imbalances and propeller speed mismatches
on multi-screw boats can combine to throw the vessel off the desired track.
Of course, a sailboat has an even tougher time sticking to an intended track, since
it must constantly tack to move in spite of the wind direction. We’ll describe another
function later (see Velocity to Destination and Time to Go (VTD, TTG Modes)
paragraph) which is designed to help the sailboater achieve maximum efficiency
in spite of the vagaries of the wind.
The amount, which the boat is thrown off the intended track, is termed the “Cross-Track
Error”, often abbreviated “XTE”. The angle of offset from the intended track due to current,
wind and other factors is referred to as the “Course Offset”. The LC-90MKII is capable
of calculating the offset necessary to get back on course to your intended destination.
Note: If whatever was causing you to be off-course in the first place remains in effect,
there will be a continuous series of commands to change heading to get back
on course, unless you use an autopilot, where you can add the course offset
angle, and in effect “crab” your way to the destination.
In order to use the Cross-Track Error function, you must first select a starting waypoint
(“Waypoint From”) and a destination waypoint (“Waypoint To”), using the FR/TO screen.
Get into the FR/TO screen and enter your starting waypoint and destination waypoint.
For example, if you are in the process of making a voyage “From” waypoint 03
“To” waypoint 04, and you are thrown so far off course by wind or current that it is
inefficient merely to return back to the original track to continue on to waypoint 04,
then you may use the FR/TO screen to specify a new track by keying in “04”, which
translates to: “From present position To waypoint 04”.

Get into the XTE mode by pressing the [MODE] key. Fig. below shows a typical
XTE display. Your present position is displayed on the upper two lines. The waypoint
numbers selected are displayed next to the label “WPT” on the third line. The XTE
on the fourth line varies from 0.01 to 9.99 n miles. The bar indicates to which side
of the desired track the vessel is off track, and the arrow points in the direction in
which you must steer to get back on course. If the XTE is within the preset alarm
zone, a single arrow and bar will appear. If the XTE exceeds the preset value, two
arrows and bars will be displayed. (We will get into the setting of the various alarm
zones, see Alarm Function (ALM Mode) paragraph.)
The numbers on the bottom line describe the Course Offset (“tC”) and the Distance
to the waypoint. The minus sign in front of the offset indicates that it is necessary
to steer to the left. The offset angle is indicated up a maximum of 99 degrees.
When you have passed the “To” waypoint, a minus sign will appear to the left
of the distance display.
Velocity to Destination and Time to Go (VTD, TTG Modes)

Velocity to Destination (VTD) is differentiated from Speed Made Good in that VTD
is a “vector” quantity while speed is a “scalar” quantity. A vector quantity denotes
not only the magnitude of speed movement, but also the direction, whereas a scalar
quantity denotes magnitude only. In this particular case then, VTD defines the amount
of speed in the direction of the desired destination.
The reason for all this seeming complication is that not only can wind and current
move a vessel off its intended track, but so can intentional movements, such as when
a sailboat tacks into the wind.
In the case of a sailboat, it is very beneficial for the skipper to know how much
headway he is making toward the desired destination, as he tries various tacking
angles to optimize his progress towards a mark.
The Time To Go (TTG) is the amount of time necessary to get to the desired
destination if the present VTD is maintained. TTG is obviously an estimate, since
in the case of a sailboat a series of tacking maneuvers is usually necessary in order
to get to a location, and in the case of a powerboat, the effects of wind and current
are usually not constant over a voyage.
The VTD is displayed in units of nautical miles per hour (knots), and the TTG is
displayed in hours and minutes, up to a maximum of 99 hours, 59 minutes. Presuming
that you have set up a “From” waypoint of 02 and a “To” waypoint of 03, the display
screen below might be typical of what you would see when you call up the TTG Mode.

Alarm Function (ALM Mode)

There are four conditions that can trigger the audible and visual alarms in the LC-90MKII:
• an Off-Course Alarm which warns you that the Cross-Track Error has exceeded
a preset value;
• a Border Alarm which warns that you are approaching too close to the border
of an unauthorized zone (such as the border of another country);
• an Arrival Alarm to signal that you have arrived near a destination waypoint;
• an Anchor-Watch Alarm which warns that the boat may be dragging its anchor.
For each of these functions, the operator may preset the limits he wants to work with.
Fig. below shows a typical ALM display. The present position is displayed on the upper
two lines. The “ON” or “OFF” on the third line indicates whether the unit is preset
to sound an audible alarm or not. This status can be changed by using the key sequence
of [CLR] [ENT].
The value for the “Off-Course” or “Border” alarm is entered on the fourth line,
and that for the “Anchor Watch” or “Arrival” alarm is entered on the fifth line.
The alarm will sound when the boat crosses the preset alarm zone from inside or
outside. The “In” and “Out” on the bottom two lines indicate which direction is preset
for the alarm function. “In” indicates that the alarm will sound if the vessel ventures
into the area, and “Out” indicates that the alarm will sound if the vessel ventures
outside the desired area.
If an alarm is activated, a visual alarm indication (“WCH” and/or “XTE”) will also
appear at the top of the display.
Off-Course Alarm (ALM Mode)

The Off-Course alarm is used when the Cross-Track Error function is being used.
You may preset the alarm limit from 0.00 n mile (i.e., the alarm is disabled) to a
maximum lane width of 20 n mile (that is, 9.99 n mile each side of lane center).
The Off-Course alarm will sound if you go out of the lane limits.
For example, the touchpad sequence to use to enter a lane limit of one-half nautical
mile is:
1. Select the fourth line by pressing [6].

2. Press [CLR].
3. Confirm that “OUT” is displayed next to the message “XTE”. If not, press
to change the display to “Out”.
4. Type [0] [0] [5] [ENT].

Border Alarm (ALM Mode)

The Border Alarm is used when you wish to define, between two waypoints,
a line that you don’t wish to cross. The alarm will sound when the boat comes
into the hatched area.
For example, assume that you want to draw a line between Waypoints 7 and 8,
and that we want to be sure you don’t come closer than 1.5 n mile to that border.
Once you are in the ALM Mode, the touchpad sequence would be:
1. Select the fourth line by pressing [6].

2. Press [CLR].
3. Press if “OUT” is displayed on the fourth line to change it to “In”.

4. Press [1] [5] [ENT].
Arrival Alarm (ALM Mode)

The Arrival Alarm is used to warn that the boat is approaching a destination
waypoint. The area that defines an Arrival zone is that of a circle, which you approach
from outside the circle. The alarm will sound if the boat enters into the circle.
Note carefully that how “tight” the Arrival Alarm is set defines, how close the boat
must come to a desired destination waypoint before the alarm sounds. It also
determines when the LC-90MKII will automatically switch to the next waypoint
in a planned Route mode. Setting the Arrival alarm too loosely (i.e., with a large
radius) will cause the waypoint to be switched automatically too far away from
the desired point, possibly causing a dangerous situation. You must be very careful
thus when setting the Arrival alarm limit if automatic waypoint sequencing is in use.
A setting of about 0.1 to 0.2 n mile should be reasonable for most situations.
For example, to set an Arrival Alarm limit of 0.1 n mile, you would use the following
touchpad sequence, once you are in the ALM Mode:
1. Select the bottom line by pressing [6].
2. Press [CLR].
3. Press if “OUT” is showing already, to change it to “In”.

4. Type [0] [1] [ENT].
Anchor Watch (ALM Mode)
The Anchor Watch alarm function is used to ensure that you are notified should
the boat drift outside a predetermined area while it is supposed to be at rest.
The area, that defines the Anchor Watch zone, is a circle within which you want
to stay, and the alarm will sound if the vessel goes out of the desired circle.
For example, to set an Anchor Watch alarm limit of 0.03 n mile, you would use
the following touchpad sequence, once you are in the ALM Mode:
1. Make sure the audible alarm is set. The third line should say “On”.
2. Select the bottom line by pressing [6].

3. Press [CLR].
4. Confirm that “Out” is displayed next to the “WCH” indication. If not, press
to change the indication to “Out”.
5. Press [0] [0] [3] [ENT].

Note: That if you set the Anchor Watch alarm zone too “tight”, that you may have
to get up in the middle of the night to reset it due to minor fluctuations in the
Loran signals. You may need to do some experimentation to determine just
how closely you want to set the alarm limit depending on your particular
geographical area.
6. Now, store your present position into an open waypoint (perhaps, 99) by hitting
[SAV] [9] [9] [ENT]. Then, select waypoint 99 as “To” waypoint; [FR/TO] [9] [9]
[ENT]. Now, if you drift out of the Anchor Watch zone, the alarm will sound.
Route Functions (RTE Mode)

In many cases, a trip from one place to another involves several course changes
requiring a series of waypoints, which you navigate to, one after another.
The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination, is called a “Route”.
The RTE Mode is used to create a Route Plan.
You may store a maximum of 10 routes in the LC-90MKII, and the unit will tell you how
to steer along each of these routes when you call them up. Routes are stored
permanently in the unit’s memory even when the unit is turned off. Each route consists
of a maximum of 10 waypoints and is given an identification number so that you may
call up any route and use it. The LC-90MKII can automatically advance to the next
waypoint on a route, so you don’t have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly
on a voyage, provided that you have activated the Arrival alarm in the ALM Mode.
Note very well and very carefully: although the Route Planning Mode is a very useful
and beneficial one to have available, the ability to switch waypoints automatically
during a voyage can potentially lead to some very dangerous situations. If when using
the automatic waypoint switching facility you set the Arrival alarm too loosely, you can
“cut a corner” around a waypoint, leading to possible collision with other vessels or
leading to a possible grounding if you come too close to land. Use of any navigational
aid requires constant exercise of common sense and caution!
Routes can be used for:
• Point to point navigation (steering a precise, straight line between two points
over which you often travel);
• Repetitive running of a complex route, such as a harbor entrance channel;
• Returning to particular areas, such as locations of lobster traps or prime
fishing spots.
Storing a Route (RTE Mode)
Before entering waypoints, the coordinates for each waypoint should be determined
and entered in the WPT Mode. See the paragraph on using the WPT Mode. In addition,
you should set the Arrival Alarm limit, as described in the paragraph Alarms.
CAUTION!
Be sure to record all important routes in a separate log. The LC-90MKII is intended
for use as a navigational aid; not a fail-safe record keeping device. Neither is it
intended to be used without caution regarding possible dangerous navigational
situations. A sequence of waypoints leading out of harbor does not take into account
any vessels recently anchored nearby, nor does it take into account buoys
or navigation markers which may have drifted.

Press [MODE] to get into the RTE Mode. The display will look similar to the one below.
The number on the top line is the route number. The LC-90MKII is capable of storing
a maximum of 10 routes, numbered 01 to 10. Each waypoint in the route is shown
in numerical sequence, starting at 01 and continuing to 10.
A maximum of ten waypoints can be stored and then observed later by scrolling
the display upward by one line with the [6] key. A symbol “- -” in the display shows
that no waypoint has been previously stored there.
Now as an example, let’s enter waypoint 04 as the first waypoint in a Route we shall
create, called Route 01. The touchpad sequence would be:
1. Press [0] [1] [ENT] to enter Route Number 01 on the first line. After [ENT] is
pressed, the left bar on the second line will blink, indicating that the cursor has
automatically advanced to this position.
2. Press [0] [4] [ENT] to enter waypoint 04.
3. Repeat step 2 for succeeding waypoints of your choice.
Following a Route
Following a route in the forward or the reverse direction is the process by which
a stored route is used for navigation. The LC-90MKII displays navigation information
to guide you from one waypoint to the next, as it automatically switches from waypoint
to another in sequence (if the Arrival alarm has been activated) and if you do actually
arrive at a particular waypoint. More on this point later.
To follow a route which you have previously programmed into the unit:
1. Press the [FR/TO] key.

2. Press the [CLR] key, and then type two digits designating the desired route
on the third line of the display.
If you would like to traverse the route in the reverse order, for example, to return
back to port, press the key before typing the route number. For example, to follow
route 02 in the reverse order, type [CLR] [0] [2] [ENT].
The selected route number is displayed on the third line followed by the waypoint
numbers in the route. The next waypoint is shown as the two digits on at the right-
hand side of the arrow. Note that the LC-90MKII will automatically select the first
waypoint in the Route plan for you to go towards from your present position.
Thus if the first waypoint in a Route is, for example, waypoint 34, then the display
would show “00-34”. Once you arrive within the radius of the Arrival Alarm limit,
the LC-90MKII will signal your arrival by sounding the “WCH” buzzer for ten seconds.
Then it will automatically switch to the next waypoint in sequence. For example,
if the next destination waypoint is 35, then the display would show “34-35”.
As described before, the LC-90MKII will automatically display the next waypoint after
passing the waypoint in use. Get into the TTG, R/B or XTE Modes so that you can
see your navigation information to the destination waypoint.

In many common situations you may never actually “arrive” at a destination waypoint,
and thus you may not see the unit automatically switch to the next destination
waypoint. For instance, if you have specified an Arrival Alarm radius of 0.10 n mile,
and your destination waypoint 35 is a buoy in a busy harbor, you may find when you
get close to that buoy that a tanker has anchored nearby, blocking you from ever
reaching your destination.
Obviously, you are going to have to dodge the obstacle, and in so doing you would
find that your Range to the desired waypoint would be increasing rather than decreasing
as you swerve around the tanker. In this case, you will manually have to override
the automatic waypoint sequencing.
You might also try another way to “arrive” at your destination waypoint. This involves
changing the Arrival Alarm limit to a larger number. This way too is fraught with danger,
for if you specify the Arrival limit too loosely, let’s say 0.50 n mile, you will indeed
allow the automatic switching to the next destination waypoint to occur, but you
may then define a new course to the next waypoint that takes you through a seawall
or over land!
It is far better to leave a reasonable Arrival Alarm limit of, say 0.10 n mile, and when
you get as close as safely possible to the desired waypoint which is now blocked,
then manually override the Route Planning mode and go to manual waypoint
sequencing. If you are adamant about staying in the automatic waypoint sequencing
mode, then you may take another tack: you may temporarily deselect waypoints
that you have already passed, and then proceed automatically again.
Temporarily Deselecting a Waypoint in a Route (RTE Mode)

A waypoint in a route may be deselected temporarily by entering a symbol “-” (minus)
to the left of the waypoint number selected in the RTE mode. The temporarily neglected
waypoint may be used again at any time by changing the “-” with the key.
For example, let’s use our tanker problem situation, where the original Route Plan was:
Route 02 1 01
2 02
3 05
4 06
5 07
6 08
Let’s assume that you have successfully negotiated waypoints 01 and 02, and
that you are presently going from waypoint 02 to waypoint 05. You find that you
are blocked from arriving at waypoint 05 by the tanker. After you dodge the obstacle,
you now want the LC-90MKII to get you from your present position to waypoint 06,
and then from waypoint 06 to 07, etc. afterwards.

You must temporarily delete route waypoints 01, 02, and 05 before calling up your
desired Route plan 02 in the FR/TO screen. You would use the following key sequence
to temporarily delete these waypoints:
1. Put the unit in the RTE mode.
2. Select waypoint 1 by pressing the down arrow cursor.
3. Press [CLR] [ENT]. (Typing waypoint 01 is not necessary.)

4. Do the same for the next two waypoints.
Now, when you respecify Route Plan 02 in the FR/TO screen, you will find that
the LC-90MKII tells you that your waypoints are from “00-06”. When you do pass
waypoint 06 successfully, the unit will sound the ten second long Arrival Alarm, and
will then switch to the “06-07” waypoint sequence.
Event Memory ([SAV] Key)

Storing Present Position into an Event Memory
When you press [SAV] in any mode, the position of the vessel at the exact moment
the key is pressed will be stored in the Event Memory for future reference. Up to 20
such event locations may be saved, having Event Memory number 100 to 119. If you try
to save more than 20 locations, the earliest locations will be overwritten, one at a time,
to make room for the latest positions.
CAUTION!
Be sure to keep a separate copy of important positions. The LC-90MKII is
a navigation aid; it is not intended to be a secure record-keeping device.
Press [SAV] in any mode. The stored position is automatically put into Event Memory
number 100. When there are 20 event numbers already stored in memory, putting
in another one will cause event number 100 to be overwritten. Event number 101 will
be overwritten by the next new event location. Fig. below shows the typical Event (Save)
screen. The used Event Memory number is shown on the second line.
Press [MODE] to get back to the Mode or Function screen being used before
pressing [SAV].
On the Event screen, you may transfer the stored data to Waypoint Memory:
type a waypoint number, followed by [ENT].
Recalling an Event Memory
To call up the event data, press [RCL]. The latest event data will be displayed after
the message of “rECALL LASt” is shown at the lower two lines. Further pressing
of the [RCL] key will display the data from second to the latest one, third, etc. To scroll
the event data backward, press [6].

If you want to call up the desired event data directly, press [RCL], [#] and type two digits
of Event Memory number, followed by [ENT]. It is not necessary to enter the hundredth
digit of the Event Memory number. The fig. below shows the Recall screen.
Transferring Event Data to Waypoint Memory

The LC-90MKII allows you to transfer the data from an Event Memory number
to the Waypoint Memory if you want to. You need only specify the Waypoint number
where you want to data from the Event Memory transferred. Be careful here. Any data,
that is already stored in the targeted waypoint, will be automatically overwritten
when you do the transfer. It is advisable to check the target waypoint before you
attempt to transfer position data from an Event Memory to make sure it is unused.
For example, let’s say that you want to observe the position stored in Event Memory
number 105, and that you then want to transfer that data into Waypoint number 59.
The touchpad sequence would be as follows:
1. Press [RCL].
2. Hit [#] [0] [5] [ENT]. (Calling up Event Memory 105.)
3. Hit [5] [9] [ENT]. (Transferring the data to Waypoint 59.) After hitting [ENT],
the screen will automatically change to the previous one.
4. Now verify that Waypoint 59 actually contains the Event data by accessing
the WPT Mode and calling up Waypoint 59.
Converting Coordinates (WPT Mode)

The LC-90MKII enables you to convert position coordinates from TD format
to Latitude/Longitude format, and vice versa, in the WPT Mode. First, get into the WPT
Mode using the [MODE] key. Select an empty Waypoint Memory number; i.e. one
where the L/L is all zeroes. If you try to make a conversion using a waypoint
that already has data stored into it, you will lose the earlier information completely.
Note also that the TD’s you enter must be the same as the slave TD’s actually in use
by the LC-90MKII and that the GRI must be the same as the one presently in use.
For example, assume the GRI is 9940, and the two slaves in use are the 27 and
43 lines. We want to convert the following TD’s to L/L: 43156.7 and 27245.9
microseconds:
1. Call up the WPT Mode.
2. Select an empty Waypoint number (a waypoint where the L/L is all zeroes)
on the third line.
3. Press to change the position display to the TD format, if necessary.

4. Type TD1 on the fourth line: [4] [3] [1] [5] [6] [7] [ENT].
5. Type TD2 on the bottom line: [2] [7] [2] [4] [5] [9] [ENT].
6. Press to perform the conversion.

To convert L/L to TD’s, specify the desired (empty) Waypoint number, type in
the desired Latitude and Longitude while in the L/L format, and then press the
conversion key.
Note that the LC-90MKII stores all way points as L/L positions rather than as TD
positions. The conversion between L/L and the corresponding TD’s thus may be
a little bit different from measured TD’s, perhaps as much as 0.1 microsecond.
This is the result of normal computational accuracy due to rounding-off of numbers
in the internal calculations.
Customized Operations
Warning Indicators
The warning indications on the LC-90MKII serve important functions, advising
you when extra caution should be exercised because of a possible problem
with the Loran signals.
Don’t use position data from the display until all signal warning indicators have been
extinguished. These include “MCYC”/“MSNR” for master, “CYC”/“SNR”/“BLK” for both
slaves, and “PF”.
The fig. below shows secondary Function #6, displaying various receiving status
indications.
SNR Indicator (Function #6)

If the SNR warning indicator for any of the stations appears, the signal may have
become too weak to use. In fact, the receiver may have lost track completely or
the station may have gone off the air.
SNR means “Signal to Noise Ratio” and is a relative measure of the quality
of the signal in the presence of noise, either generated locally on the boat or
generated in the ionosphere.
The SNR function is also used by a servicing technician to evaluate problems
either in the set itself or problems with noise generated on the boat.
To call up the SNR function, type [#] [6]. The SNR for each station will be displayed
on the lower three lines as shown in fig. above.
The table below lists the numerical values for SNR and shows what the various
values mean.
SNR Value Table
SNR Reading Description SNR Indicator
00 to 09 Too weak to track (signal lost) ON
10 to 99 Auto-acquisition/tracking OK OFF

CYC Indicator (Function #6)

If the “MCYC” (Master Cycle) indicator for the master or “CYC” (Cycle) indicator for
either of the two slaves is on, the LC-90MKII is trying to warn the operator that
it may well have locked onto the wrong cycle of the Loran-C signal.
All modern receivers track on the third cycle of the pulse. The signal amplitude
at this point is not terribly high, so in weak areas, the receiver might become confused
and lock onto the fourth rather than the third cycle, since the fourth cycle is stronger.
If this occurs on the master signal alone, the slave signals will be 10 microseconds
lower, and the position data (TD’s) obtained will be in error; by as much as 3 n mile.
The LC-90MKII employs sophisticated mathematical algorithms to reduce the possibility
of a 10 microsecond error caused by weak signals, but if the shape of the Loran-C pulse
is distorted by passage over land, or by reflection from other vessels, or even from masts
or conductors on your own vessel, cycle locking problems could occur.
In the top line of the secondary Function #6, the LC-90MKII displays which cycle
is tracked by the receiver.
“000” is displayed at the left-hand side of the top line (see fig. above). The figures
from left to right indicate the tracking points for the Master, Slave 1 and Slave 2 signals,
respectively; “0” indicates that the receiver thinks it is tracking on the correct cycle,
and “1” indicates that the receiver suspects that it is tracking on the wrong cycle.
ECD (Function #6)

The definition of “ECD” is Envelope to Cycle Difference. This refers to the distortion
of an actual pulse received off the air as compared to the theoretical shape.
The LC-90MKII can display a relative indication of the magnitude of the problem
by using secondary Function #6.
Table below lists the numerical values for ECD.
ECD Reading Description CYC Indicator

-17 Tracking on earlier cycle ON
-16 to -11 Signal distorted, might be tracking on earlier cycle
-10 to 10 Tracking on correct cycle OFF
11 to 16 Signal distorted, might be tracking on later cycle
17 Tracking on later cycle ON
– Signal too weak to measure ECD OFF
Deviation (Function #6)

The amount that the internal reference oscillator in the LC-90MKII has drifted from its
preset value, is called the Deviation. The LC-90MKII compares the frequency of its
own internal oscillator with that transmitted by the Loran-C stations, all of which have
extremely precise master oscillators. The nominal value for DEV is 000, set at the factory.
If the oscillator drifts too far, signal acquisition time may increase and tracking accuracy
may be affected. If this should occur, the unit must be serviced.

Table below lists the numerical values for DEV.
DEV Reading Description

-99 to 99 Normal acquisition/tracking attainable
Less than -99 or It may not acquire signals, or even it once acquired, might lose tracking easily
more than +99
BLINK Indicator
If there is a problem at one of the transmitting stations, it will begin to transmit a warning
indication called Blink. The LC-90MKII responds by producing a blink indication that
tells the operator which station is having problems. If Slave 1 is faulty, the blink
indicator (BLK) will come on at the far left-hand side of the top line; if Slave 2 is faulty,
the blink indicator (BLK) will come on at the far left-hand side of the second line and
both blink indicators will come on if the master station is faulty.
In some areas of Loran-C coverage, it may be possible to switch to a different slave
station if the one in use begins to blink, but if the master station is faulty, all you can
do is wait for the problem to be fixed at the station.
Power Failure Indicator
If the main power for the LC-90MKII has gone off sometime during operation,
and if the operator hasn’t noticed this, the LC-90MKII will automatically re-acquire
the Loran-C signals after power is restored. However, there is a possibility that a tracking
or acquisition error may have occurred. To warn the operator to check the position
for accuracy, the LC-90MKII turns on the “PF” (Power Failure) indicator to tell
the operator that power was lost sometime in the past. To extinguish this indicator,
press any key.
Manual Control of Loran Reception

Though fully automatic, the LC-90MKII has several manually activated signal reception
controls, which may need to be employed on rare occasions.
The experienced operator should become familiar with these controls and their use,
as navigation under extraordinary conditions may demand some degree of manual
Loran signal control.
Note: It is strongly suggested that these manual controls not be used unless they are
required due to especially poor signal conditions, and unless they are fully
understood by the user.
Manual Cycle Selection (Function #5)
When navigating at long distances from the Loran transmitters, it may become
necessary to step the cycle track points forward to a stronger part of the pulse.
Also, under conditions of extremely severe signal distortion, it might be necessary
to aid the LC-90MKII in selecting the correct 10 microseconds tracking point.
Manual cycle stepping may expose you to skywave contamination, with consequent
navigational inaccuracy. However, you would only use this function in extreme fringe
areas anyway, where some Loran coverage is better than none at all.
When employing the manual cycle selection, remember these points:
• increasing a secondary transmitter by 10 microseconds will cause that TD

to read 10 microseconds higher;
• increasing the master by 10 microseconds will cause both of the slave TD’s
to read 10 microseconds lower;
• increasing all transmitters by 10 microseconds will leave the TD’s unchanged.

The tracking point is stepped manually by the following procedure:

1. Enter Function #5 by pressing [#] and [5]. Do not press [ENT] at this time.
The display will look like fig. below. The TD’s being received are displayed
in the upper two lines.
2. Enter a 10 microsecond value (or multiples of 10 microseconds) for the correction

on the lower three lines: the third line is used for the master, the fourth line is for S1
and the bottom line is for S2. Type the correction value, followed by [ENT].
For example, if you want to shift the tracking point of the S2 secondary
10 microseconds higher, you would enter “10.0” on the bottom line by
typing [1] [ENT]. It is not necessary to type [0].
Manual Position Offset Corrections
The LC-90MKII is capable of storing L/L correction and/or TD corrections internally
for compensation of the L/L readout, so that it more closely matches the actual position
of the vessel as shown on a navigation chart. This manual compensation facility is
in addition to the automatic ASF compensation function. You must thus be careful
that you don’t inadvertently call up both functions simultaneously, because then you
will be in effect making a double compensation you probably didn’t intend to invoke.
The LC-90MKII has ten “pages” into which correction information either by L/L
and/or by TD may be entered. These pages are identified by the exact GRI and
slave TD’s that are entered into each page, and are invoked by the computer only
once, after power has been turned on and Loran signals have been first acquired.
For example, if you specify a set of correction values in page 01 using a GRI of 4990
(Central Pacific chain), with slaves of 11 and 29, then this page will be invoked only
when the first two digits of the slave TD’s after acquisition are equal to 11 and 29,
and when the GRI in used is 4990. This is true for both Automatic or Manual selection
of GRI/S1/S2 in Function #1.
This manual position offset correction facility should be specified only for areas
where automatic ASF corrections are not available. At present, the LC-90MKII has
correction values built-in for the entire U.S. and Canadian coasts, but since correction
values are presently not available anywhere else in the world, the ASF corrections
outside these areas are absent.
L/L Correction (Function #2)
Variations in signal propagation velocity can cause constant errors in the computed
Lat/Long position. In geographic areas, where automatic ASF corrections, aren’t
available you may want to enter manual L/L corrections.
In other cases, you may want to further refine the absolute accuracy of L/L coordinates
to match a particular chart, where the chart has been drawn using a different datum
reference than the WGS-72 datum used by the LC-90MKII.
In either of these cases, you must first determine the amount by which you need to shift
the L/L readings. This is done by comparing the displayed L/L with the actual L/L that
you want the unit to read, or by using the correction data printed on the chart itself.

In the first case, where you are presently located at a position whose L/L coordinates
are accurately known, you may compute the difference in L/L between what
the LC-90MKII is showing and what you know to be the actual coordinates.
Then you would enter the differential values as manual L/L corrections.
The second case is where you want to match up your L/L coordinates with that
of a chart printed using a different datum reference. The LC-90MKII calculates
Latitude/Longitude coordinates according to the “WGS-72” (World Geodetic
System 1972) datum model. Many older charts are drawn using other datum
models, for example, “Clarke 1866/1880” or “Bessel 1841”. The position calculated
by the LC-90MKII may not be the same as the expected position on these older
types of charts.
For example, on the chart it is necessary to add corrections of 11.49 seconds South
(11.49/60 = 0.19 minutes South) and 10.33 seconds East (10.33/60 = 0.17 minutes
East). Remember, the LC-90MKII uses tenths minutes rather than seconds:
1. Get into Function #2 by pressing [#] followed by [2]. You should see a display
similar to the one below. The previously used offset values are displayed
on the readout (the offsets will be zero if they haven’t been specified previously).
2. The page identification number is displayed on the left-hand side and the offset
value for Latitude is on the right-hand side on the top line. The offset value
for Longitude is displayed on the second line.
The GRI and slaves, where the corrections will automatically be used, appear
at the left-hand side of the lower three lines as shown in fig. above. As explained
previously, these values for GRI, S1, and S2 are important, for only when the boat
enters the exact area bounded by these values will this page of corrections
come into effect automatically.
3. Specify a page identification number and enter the offset value for Latitude
on the top line. (If you want to enter TD corrections instead of L/L corrections,
you would skip this step, and go on to the section for entering TD corrections.)
For example, an identification page № 09 (two digits) and a correction of 00.19
minutes South may be entered by using the following keystroke sequence:
[0] [9] [ENT] [0] [0] [1] [9] [ENT] 00.19’S Latitude Correction
4. The cursor will automatically advance to the next line after the [ENT] key is hit.
Type the correction value for Longitude on the second line. For example, to enter
0.17 minutes East, use the following keystroke sequence:
[0] [0] [1] [7] [ENT] 00.17’ East Correction
Note that the key causes the corrections to be entered in South Latitude
and West Longitude.

5. Now you must define the GRI and the slave TD’s where these corrections will
automatically go into effect. Let us use an example of a geographic area which
has not been surveyed by actual at-sea measurements of TD grid warpage: Japan.
In this case, we want to specify the GRI to be 9970 and the first two digits
of S1:18 and 36 respectively. The following keystroke sequence would be
appropriate once the cursor has automatically moved down to the third line after
[ENT] was hit in step 4 above:
[9] [9] [7] [0] [ENT] [1] [8] [ENT] [3] [6] [ENT]
6. The above L/L offset values will now be applied whenever you are in the geographic
area bounded by these values; in our example above, when you move the vessel
to where the first two digits of the slave S1 are 18, and where the first two digits
of the slave S2 are 36. Whenever L/L or TD corrections are automatically applied,
a “5T/L” symbol will appear.
If by chance you try to specify a new page using the same GRI and slave station
values that you have used for a previously specified page, the LC-90MKII will flash
the GRI and slave offset values to warn you that in effect a contradictory command
has been given to it.
TD Corrections (Function #2)

Normally, you will be using the LC-90MKII with automatic ASF corrections so that
the L/L readout will be as accurate as possible. You may however enter your own TD
correction factors if you want to do so, or if your particular geographic area doesn’t
have ASF compensation values available for it. The procedure to enter TD correction
factors would be very similar to that above for L/L corrections, except that you wouldn’t
enter Latitude or Longitude corrections on line one and two after specifying a page
number, but would proceed to lines four and five directly to specify GRI, S1, S2,
and their associated TD correction values.
Using ASF When Entering TD’s

You will remember that cautions were given in the section subsection Navigation
Operations concerning disabling the automatic ASF compensation facility if you are
trying to navigate to a waypoint defined by raw TD’s uncompensated for ASF values.
You should also remember that we suggest that in general you should keep the automatic
ASF compensation engaged for more accurate L/L readings. There is a way around
this seeming contradiction in instructions when you are entering TD values for conversion
to L/L coordinates and storage as waypoints. It involves a little more work on your part,
but it will give more accurate R/B readings with ASF constantly engaged for all functions.
Basically, the process involves looking at Function #4 to determine what the actual
values for the ASF compensation are, and then manually adding or subtracting the same
values from whatever TD’s you wish to enter into the LC-9OMKll for conversion into
a waypoint in the WPT Mode. An example should serve to illustrate this technique.
Assume that you are in the San Francisco area, at L/L coordinates of 37 degrees,
38 minutes North latitude and 122 degrees, 24 minutes West longitude. Call up
Function #1. Make sure you are in the Automatic mode. (If you aren’t in the Automatic
mode you should turn off the [PWR], call up Function #1, then call up the Automatic
Selection process.) You will see that the optimum GRI is 9940, and that the LC-90MKII
has automatically selected the slave secondaries 27 and 43.
Now call up Function #4. The value for ASF for S1 (the 27 line) is +1.2 microseconds,
and the value for ASF for S2 (the 43 line) is -0.4 microseconds. When the LC-90MKII
is using the automatic ASF compensation facility, it takes the TD’s displayed
on the front panel and adds these compensation values internally before making
the TD to L/L conversion. You will be doing the same thing manually.

Let’s say that your fishing buddy gives you a set of TD’s where the fishing is particularly
good, at 27260.0 and 43143.0 microseconds. To the 27260.0 value you would add
the ASF of 1.2 microseconds, yielding 27261.2 microseconds. To the 43143.0 value
you would add -0.4 microseconds, yielding 43142.6 microseconds. Now enter these
into your “scratchpad” waypoint 99 by TD’s (WPT Mode) and convert to L/L.
The resulting L/L in WPT Mode will be:
37 degrees 39.00 minutes North latitude
122 degrees 23.94 minutes West longitude “Scratchpad” Waypoint 99
Now, a R/B calculation from your present position to this waypoint (with the ASF
enabled – use Function #4) will result in the correct bearing to take for you to join up
with your friend.
This method of specifying a waypoint by manually adding the ASF compensation
values will allow you to keep the ASF function constantly engaged, and will result
in less confusion when making any calculation involving waypoint(s), plus it will result
in more accurate L/L readouts all the time.
Manual GRI/Slave Selection (Function #1)

So far you have been using your LC-90MKII on one Loran-C chain, and have been
using the pair of slave stations selected automatically for you by the unit. In many
geographic areas, however, there may be more than one pair of slave stations available.
The most important factors to consider when selecting slaves manually are:
(1) TD Gradients, (2) Angle of Crossing, (3) Baseline Extension and (4) Signal Strength.
The operator should choose the best combination of TD’s, taking into account all
of these factors to obtain the best accuracy when operating the LC-90MKII manually.
The values for GRI and the slave station selection chosen automatically by the LC-90MKII
are derived from considerations of station geometry and signal strength for each
geographic area. We are going to have to look again briefly at some basic Loran-C
theory to give you some insight into how these considerations were derived.
TD Gradients
For example, take a look a section of chart was given showing an area off Yokohama,
Japan. We determined that for the island of Mikura Jima there were three LOP’s
(TD’s) that all crossed at its Southwestern corner, the 9970-X-36800, 9970-Y-60600
and 9970-W-17750 microsecond lines.
The spacing between adjacent TD’s for the 9970-X TD’s is 200 microseconds.
The spacing between adjacent TD’s for the 9970-Y TD’s is also 200 microseconds.
The spacing between adjacent TD’s for the 9970-W TD’s however is only
100 microseconds. What this means is that for any given change in position, the X and
Y TD’s change more than does the W TD. This phenomenon is known as “gradient”,
and denotes the amount of change of position for a given change of Time Difference.
Conversely, for any change in TD’s for the X and Y TD’s there would be a greater
change in position than for the W TD’s. Obviously, the smaller the position shift
for a given change in TD’s, the better the accuracy we can expect in determining
our exact position.
There is however a fly in the ointment. While the W slave station would be a better
choice (on the basis of gradient alone) in the area we are considering near Yokohama,
the station is located farther away then the Y slave, which would otherwise be chosen
to cross with the X TD’s. The W signal thus might be weaker and thus less reliable
than the Y signal, even with the less desirable gradient characteristics of the Y station.
However, stations sometimes will go off the air for scheduled maintenance or because
of a problem. At these times it may be necessary to choose manually another slave

station in spite of the fact that it may show less than optimum geometry or signal
strength in your area.
Angle of Crossing
In an ideal Loran-C world all TD’s would cross at an angle of 90 degrees. Unfortunately,
we don’t live in such a world, so we must consider the angle of crossing that actual
TD’s create. The closer the angle of crossing is to a right angle the better the accuracy
of positioning will be. The X and the Y TD’s cross at a better angle than do the X
and the W TD’s or the W and Y TD pair, and thus are a better choice to use. Note that
the differences in angles of crossing of the X-Y, X-W and Y-W pairs is really not dramatic.
Sufficiently accurate navigational accuracy for most purposes actually could be
obtained by use of any of these pairs of TD’s. It is merely better to use the more
optimum X-Y pair. It is a general rule of thumb that you should be very wary of using
TD pairs that cross at an angle less than 30 degrees.
The LC-90MKII will automatically select the preferred GRI as well as the preferred
slaves for the desired position without user intervention if the Automatic function is
in use; however, you may choose to use another GRI and/or slaves in your area
if available. This is done by using the secondary Function #1:
1. Get into Function #1 by pressing [#] followed by [1]. On the third line of the resulting
display, the label “GRI” will be followed by a flashing “A”, indicating that automatic
operation has been selected previously. This must be disabled to use manual
operation. Press [CLR] (followed by a four digit code for a GRI if you wish
to change the GRI also), and then press [ENT]. A “d” will appear replacing the “A”.
You will now have to select the proper slaves to use.
2. For example, if the slaves automatically selected were “27” and “43”, and you wish
to use “27” and “11”, move the cursor down to the fifth line and hit: [1] [1] [ENT].
Selecting Output Data Format (Function #3)

The LC-90MKII sends out to external devices (such as plotters and printers) the position
and autopilot data through a connector on the rear panel. The position data may be
sent out in either Furuno CIF format (Computer InterFace) or in the NMEA 0183
complex format. The autopilot data is sent out in the NMEA 0180 simple format.
To choose the format for the output data, access Function #3, then use the following
touchpad sequence:
1. Hit the down arrow key once to move the cursor down to the third line.
2. Press [CLR]. Pressing the key will alternate the display between the following
output data formats:
– “CIF” for Furuno CIF (Computer InterFace);
– “dSP” for displaying screen on outside terminal;
– “183” for NMEA 0183 data format output.
3. Select the desired output format (CIF or 0183) and press [ENT].
The selected data is sent out from pins #1 and #2 of “OUTPUT” connector.

Once the [ENT] key is pressed, the cursor will advance to the next line, where you may
select the autopilot output format. Many modern pilots are designed to interface with a
Loran-C receiver that produces the NMEA 0180 simple data format. In the future, it is
expected that some autopilots will be able to use the more complicated NMEA
0183 complex format. For now, though, if you want to interface your compatible pilot
with the LC-90MKII, you would select the 0180 format on the fourth line.
[CLR] (to show “180”) and then press [ENT].

The contents of the NMEA 0183 data may be changed at the bottom line
of the Function #3 screen. There are seven data types to be selected as below:
• SORT 1: $LCGLL, LCXTE, LCAAM, LCVTG, LCBWC, LCBOD;

• SORT 2: $LCBWW, LCWNC, LCWCV, LCZTG, LCWPL;
• SORT 3: Sort 1 + Sort 2;
• SORT 4: $LCRMA, LCRMB;
• SORT 7: Sort 1 + Sort 2 + Sort 4.
If you would like to select the SORT 3, move the cursor to the bottom line, and then,
type [CLR] [3] [ENT].

Direction Finder (Furuno FD-177)
DIRECTION FINDER (FURUNO FD-177)
Operation
Function of Front Panel Controls
POWER (PULL) and VOLUME Control

Double click the knob to turn on/off the set. Turn the knob to adjust
audio volume.
RF GAIN Control
The “RF GAIN” control adjusts the strength of an incoming signal, and
is usually set at the maximum (fully clockwise) position. If the incoming
signal is too strong, error may result. In this case, turn the control counter
clockwise so the bearing pointer becomes stable.
BFO Control
This control adjusts tone during reception of A1A (CW) or SSB signals.
COMPASS Knob
This knob rotates the bearing scale. Usually “0” of the bearing scale
is placed just under the “▼” mark at the top of the bearing scale for
reading the bearing relative to the ship’s bow. For reading a bearing
relative to north, set the magnetic heading on the bearing scale by
rotating this knob.

Bearing Pointer
This pointer indicates the direction of receive signal. When the signal strength
is insufficient, indication is unstable. In this case, try to move the pointer slightly
by turning the bearing dial.
Channel Indicator
The spot channel number (00 to 99) appeared here.
Sensitivity Indicator
The sensitivity indicator is made up of 10 light emitting diodes.
The number of lighting LED varies with the level of incoming signals.
Frequency Indicator
The receiving frequency appears by 5-digit frequency display.
Keyboard
For entering data and recalling contents of memory:
Emission Selector (DSB/SSB/CW Keys)

Select class of emission of desired station:
• “DSB” – conventional broadcast reception;
• “SSB” – signal reception;
• “CW” – receive buoy signal.

MODE Selector (MAN/CH/CAN Keys)

• “MAN” – for “frequency set”, “memory” and “search”;
• “CH” – for spot reception;
• “SCAN” – for scanning reception.
RSV Key
This key alternates direction finder and receiver modes. The light on
the keypad lights in the direction finder mode.
DIM Key
This key adjusts the illumination of bearing dial, frequency windows
and brightness of enunciators on the keypad.
Manual Mode
The manual mode allows you to:
1. Set frequency by keyboard and change by [▲] and [▼] keys.
2. Store frequency and class of emission in the memory. The memory can also
be erased.
3. Change frequency in 0.1 kHz steps by [▲] and [▼] keys.
4. Conduct search reception.
5. Change speed of search reception in 6 steps.

6. Change dwell time (search stop period) in 4 steps.
Press the “MAN” key to select the manual mode.
Channel Mode
The Channel mode allows you to:
1. Register up to 100 channels (00 to 99 ch).
2. Recall frequency and class of emission.
3. Change channel by [▲] and [▼] keys. These keys change the channel
continuously at the rate of 0.3 s/ch.
Press the “CH” key to set into the channel mode.
Scan Mode
Press the “SCAN” key to get into scanning receiving mode:
• Scans the channels memorized;
• The number of tens digit of channel number is assigned as a “band number”.
Scan range setting is assigned by this “band number”;
• The maximum scanning range is 10 bands, that is, 100 channels
(00 to 99 channels).

Erasing Channel Memory

1. While pressing the [MEM] key, turn on the power to the equipment to get into
the memory erase mode.
2. Press [C] key to erase the contents of the channel memory.
3. Press [ST] or turn on/off the power to escape from the memory erase mode.
Direction Finding
1. Press [MAN] key and receive a desires station.
If the received signal strength is enough for ADF operation, the bearing pointer
rotates to indicate the direction of coming signal.
2. Adjust the RF control so that the wiggle of the pointer is minimum.
3. For reading the bearing of the incoming signal relative to the ship’s bow, place the “0”
of the bearing scale just under the bow mark (▼) by turning the COMPASS knob,
as shown in the figure, and read out the indication of the pointer on the bearing scale.
For reading the true bearing of the incoming signal, read out the indication
of the ship’s compass and adjust the COMPASS knob so that the same reading
is obtained on the bearing scale at the bow mark. Read out the indication
of the pointer on the bearing scale.
Note: To confirm that the bearing indication is correct, rotate the Bearing Dial
to either direction slightly by hand and release. The pointer should return
to the original position quickly.
Range Measurement
The sensitivity indicator is made up of 10 light emitting diodes (LED’s) in array above
the digital frequency display.
As the number of lighting LED varies with the level of incoming signals, this indicator
can be used to indicate approximate distances to signal sources with a definite output
power and aerial system, such as from radio buoys.
The nearer, the more LED’s lighting. Relative distance is proportional to the number
of lighting LED’s. For range measurement, set the “RF GAIN” control at maximum.

Navigation by Direction Finder

Homing
The method of rectilinear returning navigation by measuring the electromagnetic
wave toward the land station is known as “HOMING”. On the contrary, the navigation
method toward an appointed destination far from the land station is known as
“REVERSE-HOMING”. Usually, homing is performed by repeating measurement.
However, in the case of the Automatic Direction Finder, the homing is easily carried out,
provided that the ship is steered in such a way that the bearing pointer points toward
the bow mark. In the case of reverse-homing, operate in such a way that the bearing
pointer points opposite to the bow mark.
Even when the boat is drifting due to tides or wind, the destination can be reached
by steering the boat keeping zero reading of the bearing pointer as shown in figures:
If a certain amount of experience is gained, it may be possible to steer the boat

straight to the destination by applying proper deviation correcting angle to the reading
of the direction finder to compensate for the effect of the wind or tides.
Position Fixing by Using One Land Station

In this case, the boat should be steered in a constant direction at a constant speed.
In the figure below, first measure station “A”, strike a position line (a) and record
the time of measuring (t1), mark P at any point on the line (a) and draw a hypothetical
course line (c). Next, after some time has passed, measure station “A” again, strike
another position line (b) and mark the time of measurement at (t2). Obtain the distance
that the boat travels between the first and second measurements. If the speed
of the boat is V, multiply by the time required for travel and the distance travelled
is given as below:
Distance “D” = V × (t2 – t1)
Plot Q at a distance D from P on hypothetical course line (c). Strike a parallel line
to the position line (a) through Q and obtain position Q'. The position Q' is the boat’s
position at time t2. Consequently, the position where the first measurement was made
at time t1, was point P'.

Position Fixing by Using Two Land Stations

Prepare a navigational chart and select two proper stations, “A” and “B”. Determine
the bearings of “A” and “B” respectively. Supposing the true bearing for the station “A”
as 280° and compass centre. The boat is somewhere on this line (a'). Next, strike
another line (b') piercing the station “B”, and in parallel with the line (b) piercing
the compass 320° and centre. Position, where two lines (a') and (b') intersect,
represents the position of the boat. Since the boat runs, measurement should be
performed as quickly as possible to obtain accurate position.
Position Fixing by Three Land Stations

Prepare a navigational chart and select three stations “A”, “B” and “C”. If three
position lines (a'), (b') and (c') are drawn on the chart, intersection of the three lines
will provide a small triangular area. It is considered the centre is the position of own
boat. This triangular zone results from measuring errors, the time difference between
respective measurements, and other relative errors. When the centre is taken,
these errors will be compensated for and position fixing is more accurate than by using
two stations only.
Setting-Up
Errors in Direction Finding
Several inherent errors exist in direction finding:
• Coastal error – caused coastal refraction;

• Night error – caused by the refraction on the ionosphere;
• Quadrantal error – caused by the effect of surrounding metallic structure.
For accurate measurement of bearing by the direction finder, the operator should
familiarize himself with these errors.

Coastal Error
The electromagnetic wave has, in proportion to its wave length, the nature of refraction
when passing a large object of propagating along coastline. This results in measurement
error. If there are many stations available for measurement, use stations from which
radio waves pass as perpendicular to the coastline as possible to minimize error.
Night Error (Night Effect)

For the MF and IF direction finders, only the groundwave gives accurate results
in direction finding, since the loop antenna is subject to polarization error.
On the contrary, the skywave is received with random polarization, marking accurate
determination of signal null difficult or impossible. This is especially true at night
when the skywave becomes stronger; errors of as much as 3 to 5 deg are common
at the extreme range of the ground wave. This effect is called “Night Effect”.
Quadrantal Error
The radio wave received at the loop antenna may interfered by the ship’s
superstructures (masts, stays, etc.), causing error. This is known as “hull error”,
but is more commonly referred to as “quadrantal error”.
Since this error is peculiar to the incoming wavelength, size of the ship and ship’s
superstructure it can be eliminated mathematically by measuring the amount of error
in each direction and plotting it on a correction curve.
If you click the left mouse button on the direction finder control panel button
with a picture of a graph, the screen will display “Radio deviation curve” of corrections.
To return to the direction finder control panel, close the curve by clicking the left
mouse button on the standard “r” button in the top right corner of the panel.

Loading the Own Ship Route
LOADING THE OWN SHIP ROUTE

After the simulator session start the own ship route (from the Instructor exercise),
is automatically loaded in the following program modules:
• Plotter (ECDIS);
• Autopilot where the trainee has selected Track Control mode;
• GPS receiver;
• Radar;
• Instructor station.
“Use Exercise route” button is lighted on the ship control console
(“Nav. Aids” page).
Loading the route from the ECDIS

Before the start or in the process of the voyage, the trainee can plan
his/her route by using the ECDIS. The trainee should save the route
under a certain name, unload the route which was taken from the
exercise and load own route in the plotter. For the new route to get
into the aforementioned program modules, the trainee should press
“Use Plotter route” button.
Loading the route from the Loran-C receiver

The trainee should create a route in the Loran-C receiver (LC-90
Mark-II) and make it active. For the new route to get into the
aforementioned program modules, the trainee should press
“Use MarkII route” button.
Loading the route from the GPS receiver

The trainee should also create a route in the GPS GP-90 and make
it active. For the new route to get into the aforementioned program
modules, press “Use GPS route” button.

CHAPTER 4
Handling of Vessels
with Specific Propulsion
System
The chapter contains a description of specific features
of controlling models of tugboats (of 4 types),
Ice breaker and Fast Ferry.

General .................................................................................................................... 377
Handling of the Tug Models .................................................................................. 377
Conventional Tug (Single Screw)..................................................................... 377
Conventional Tug (Twin Screw) ....................................................................... 378
Voith Schneider Type Tug ................................................................................ 381
Z-Drive Type Tug ............................................................................................. 383
Handling of Ice Breaker Model ............................................................................. 385
General ............................................................................................................. 385
Rudder Control ................................................................................................. 385
Control of РМ Connection Option .................................................................... 386
Control of Diesel RPM ...................................................................................... 386
Power Motors Control ...................................................................................... 387
Handling of Fast Ferry Model ............................................................................... 387
Components and Characteristics of the Propeller and Rudder Unit..................... 387
Conning Display ............................................................................................... 388
General Description ............................................................................... 388
Thruster Control ..................................................................................... 388
Main Engines Start/Stop Control ........................................................... 389
Switching Water Jet Control Modes ....................................................... 390
Ship Control in Separate Mode (Manual) .............................................. 390
Ship Control in Separate Mode (Auto) ................................................... 391
Ship Control in Normal Mode ................................................................. 392
Ship Control in Harbour Mode ............................................................... 393
Physical Interpretation of the Ship Handling by Using the Water Jets .. 394
Joystick Harbour Mode .................................................................................... 396
Selection of the Joystick Harbour Mode ................................................ 396
Joystick Harbour Mode Strategy ............................................................ 396
Explanation to the Figures ..................................................................... 396
Changes in the Normal Joystick Lever Steering Modes when Using
Moment Commands ............................................................................... 398
Moment Command Indication ................................................................ 398
Chapter 4. Handling of Vessel with Specific Propulsion System 375

General
GENERAL
During the work on the bridge with the majority of the ship models, supplied with
the simulator, a generalized control console is used. In the simulator, however,
there are some vessels with specific propulsion systems which require an individual
Conning Display configuration.
In the manual are described the specific features of control over four types of tug
models, a Fast Ferry and Ice Breaker.
HANDLING OF THE TUG MODELS
Conventional Tug (Single Screw)
The tug Conning Display includes:
• “Start engine” button;

• “Stop engine” button;
• Telegraph for the control of rpm and propeller pitch;
• Rudder and buttons for steering gear pumps control;
• “RPM” indicator;
• “Pitch” indicator;
• “Rudder angle” indicator;
• “Rate of turn” indicator.
In the initial state:
• The engine is started;

• The propeller “RPM” indicator shows 80 rpm;

Handling of the Tug Models
• The relative propeller “Pitch” indicator shows a zero pitch;

• “Start engine” indicator button “ON”;
• “Stop engine” indicator button “OFF”.
Operation Result
To start the forward motion, switch the telegraph The propeller “RPM” indicator shows the growth
to D.Slow ahead position of revolutions up to 111 rpm.
The needle of the relative propeller “Pitch” indicator
will deviate to the green zone
To start the motion astern, switch the telegraph Revolutions on the propeller “RPM” indicator should
to the D.Slow astern position drop to 80 rpm and grow to 111 rpm again.
The needle of the relative propeller “Pitch” indicator
will deviate to the red zone
Perform the same procedure for other telegraph positions
To switch off the engine, press “Stop Engine” • “Stop engine” indicator button will be
button illuminated in the green colour;
• “Start engine” indicator button will go out;
• The propeller “RPM” indicator begins to show
the drop of RPM down to zero;
• The engine is switched off
To switch on the engine, press “Start engine” • “Start engine” indicator will be illuminated in
button the green colour;
• “Stop engine” indicator button will go out;
• After a short delay, the propeller “RPM” indicator
begins to show minimum stable revolutions
(80 rpm);
• The needle of the relative propeller “Pitch”
indicator will be in 0 position if the telegraph
is switched to Stop;
• The engine is switched on
Conventional Tug (Twin Screw)

• “Ready to start” – indicators of the portside and starboard engines being ready
for the start;
• “Start engine” – buttons for starting the portside and starboard engines;
• “Stop engine” – buttons for stopping the portside and starboard engines;
• “Clutch Ready” – indicator of the portside and starboard clutches being ready
for the engaging;
• “Engage” – buttons for engaging the portside and starboard clutches;
• “Disengage” – buttons for disengaging the portside and starboard clutches;
• Command-controllers for the control of the starboard and portside propeller rpm
and pitch, and the turn of the starboard and portside steering nozzles;
• “Portside RPM”, “Starboard RPM” – indicators of propeller rpm;
• “Portside Pitch”, “Starboard Pitch” – indicators of propeller pitch;
• Telegraph for the control of the starboard and portside propeller rpm and pitch;
• Rudders for a synchronous and asynchronous control of the starboard and portside
steering nozzles’ turn;
• Buttons for steering gear pumps control.
• The starboard and portside engines are started, and the clutches are
in the engaged position;
• The propeller RPM indicator shows the minimum revolutions (80 rpm);
• “Start engine” indicator button – green;
• “Stop engine” indicator button – OFF;
• “Engage” indicator button – green;
• “Disengage” indicator button – OFF.
Operation Result
To stop the engine and disengage the clutch “Stop engine” indicator button will be illuminated
at the same time, press “Stop engine” button in the green colour.
“Start engine” indicator button will be turned off.
The propeller RPM indicator begins to show the drop
of revolutions.
When the rpm drops to zero:
• “Engage” indicator button will be go out;
• “Disengage” indicator button will be light up in the
green colour;
• “Ready to start” indicator will be activated;
• The engine will be fully turned off and
the clutch disengaged
To switch on the engine, press “Start engine” • “Start engine” indicator button will light up
button in the green colour;
• “Engage” indicator button will go out;
• “Dis-Engage” indicator button will light up
in the green colour;
• After a short delay “Clutch Ready” indicator will
become active;
• The engine is turned on. The clutch is ready
to engage
Note: The clutch cannot be turned on unless “Clutch Ready” indicator is active.

Operation Result
To engage the clutch, press “Engage” button • “Clutch Ready” indicator is disabled;
• “Disengage” indicator button will go out;
• “Engage” indicator button will light up
• The clutch is engaged;
• The propeller RPM indicator begins to show
the growth of revolutions to 82 rpm or 88 rpm
depending on the tugboat type
To disengage the clutch without stopping • “Disengage” indicator button will light up in
the engine, press “Disengage” button the green colour;
• The propeller RPM indicator starts to show zero
propeller rpm;
• “Clutch Ready” indicator is activated;
• The clutch is disengaged without stopping the engine
For the ahead motion, move the handles of
both command-controllers several divisions
forward
For the astern motion, move the handles of
both command-controllers several divisions
back
For the sideward motion to the starboard, After some time, the tug starts sideward motion
stop the tug. to the starboard
Turn the handle of the portside command-
controller to the leftmost position, and the
handle of the starboard command-controller –
to the rightmost position.
Move the handle of the portside command-
controller 6 divisions forward, and the handle
of the starboard command-controller 7 divisions
back
For the sideward motion to the portside, After some time, the tug starts sideward motion
stop the tug. to the portside
Turn the handle of the portside command-
controller to the leftmost position, and the
handle of the starboard command-controller –
to the rightmost position.
Move the handle of the starboard command-
controller 6 divisions forward, and the handle of
the portside command-controller 7 divisions back
Piece of advice:
1. To set the thrust of the starboard of portside propulsor, move the command-
controller handle forward or back by the set number of divisions.
2. To turn the steering nozzles, position the mouse cursor on the outside circle
of the command-controllers opposite the needle, press the left mouse button
and move the needle in the desired direction.
3. If you wish to control synchronously the turn of propeller blades and
of the steering nozzle, use the standard telegraph and helm respectively.

Voith Schneider Type Tug
• “Ready to start” – indicators of the portside and starboard engines being ready
for the start;
• “Ready to engage” – indicator of the portside and starboard clutches being
ready: for the engaging;
• “Engage” – buttons for engaging the portside and starboard clutches;
• “Disengage” – buttons for disengaging the portside and starboard clutches;
• “MAX”, “85%”, “60%”, “Idle” – control buttons of the starboard and portside
engines’ rpm;
• Rudder for setting the transverse displacement of the control center of the starboard
and portside Voith-Schneider propellers (setting the transverse thrust);
• “Transverse thrust” – indicator of the transverse synchronous displacement
of the control center of the starboard and portside Voith-Schneider propellers;
• Buttons for steering gear pumps control;
• Telegraph for setting the longitudinal displacement of the control center of the
starboard and portside Voith-Schneider propellers (setting of the longitudinal thrust);
• “Portside RPM”, “Starboard RPM” – propeller RPM indicators;
• “Portside Pitch”, “Starboard Pitch” – propeller pitch indicators.

• The starboard and portside engines are started, and the clutches are engaged;
• The propeller RPM indicator shows rpm corresponding to the maximum engine
revolutions (depending on the tugboat power);
• The relative propeller “Pitch” indicator shows zero value;
• “MAX” engine rpm button lighted;
• “85%” engine rpm button OFF;
• “60%” engine rpm button OFF;
• “Idle” engine rpm button OFF;
• “Start engine” indicator button lighted green;
• “Stop engine” indicator button OFF;
• “Engage” indicator button lighted green;
• “Disengage” indicator button OFF;
• “Zero pitch indicator” lighted.
Operation Result
To reduce rpm to 85% from the maximum rpm, The propeller RPM indicator shows the rpm
press “85%” button corresponding to 85% of the maximum revolutions
To reduce rpm to 60% from the maximum rpm, The propeller RPM indicator shows the rpm
press “60%” button corresponding to 60% of the maximum revolutions
To reduce revolutions to the idling rpm, press The propeller RPM indicator shows revolutions
“Idle” button corresponding to the idling rpm (25 rpm)
To stop the engine and disengage the clutch • “Stop engine” indicator button will light up in the
at the same time, press “Stop engine” button green colour;
• “Start engine” indicator button will go out;
• The propeller RPM indicator starts to show
the rpm reduction.
When the revolutions drop to zero:
• “Disengage” indicator button will light up
• “MAX”, “85%”, “60%” “Idle” buttons will go out;
• “ready to start” indicator is activated;
• The engine is fully turned off and the clutch
disengaged
To switch on the engine, press “Start engine” • “Start engine” indicator button will light up
button in the green colour;
• “Idle” button is activated;
• After a short delay, “ready to engage” indicator
becomes active;
• The engine is turned on. The clutch is ready
to engage
Note: The clutch cannot be engaged unless “ready to engage” indicator is active.
Operation Result
To engage the clutch, press the “Engage” button • “Ready to engage” indicator is inactivated;
• “Disengage” indicator button will go out;
• “Engage” indicator button will light up
• The clutch is engaged;
• propeller RPM indicator begins to show the
growth of revolutions up to the level which
depends on the rpm control selection: “MAX”,
“85%”, “60%”, or “Idle”

Operation Result
To increase rpm to 60% of the maximum The propeller RPM indicator shows rpm
revolutions, press “60%” button corresponding to 60% of the maximum revolutions
To increase rpm to 85% of the maximum The propeller RPM indicator shows rpm
revolutions, press “85%” button corresponding to 85% of the maximum revolutions
To increase rpm revolutions to the maximum, The propeller RPM indicator shows rpm
press “MAX” button corresponding to the maximum rpm
To disengage the clutch without stopping the • “Disengage” indicator button will be light up
engine, switch to the “Idle” mode and press in the green colour;
“Disengage” button • “Engage” indicator button will be go out;
• The propeller RPM indicator begins to show
zero propeller rpm;
• “ready to engage” indicator is activated;
• The clutch is disengaged without stopping
the engine
To start the motion ahead, switch both telegraphs The needles of the relative propeller Pitch indicators
to D.Slow ahead position will deviate by 20 divisions to the green zone
To start the astern motion, switch both The needles of the relative propeller Pitch indicators
telegraphs to D.Slow astern position will deviate by 20 divisions to the green zone
Perform the same procedure for other telegraph positions
For the sideward motion to the portside, stop In some time, the tug begins to move broadside
the tug. to the left
E.g., select “Max” mode for both engines.
Set the portside telegraph to Full Ahead, starboard
telegraph – to Full Astern, and turn the helm
portside to 38% or 50% respectively, depending on
the tugboat power
For the sideward motion to the starboard, stop In some time, the tug begins to move broadside
the tug. to the right
E.g., select “Max” mode for both engines.
Set the portside telegraph to Full Ahead, starboard
telegraph – to Full Astern, and turn the helm
starboard to 38% or 50% respectively, depending
on the tugboat power
Z-Drive Type Tug

• Command-controller for the control of the starboard and portside propeller rpm
and pitch and the turn of the starboard and portside steering propellers;
• “Portside RPM”, “Starboard RPM” – indicators of propeller rpm;
• Telegraph for the control of the starboard and portside propeller rpm and clutches;
• Rudders for a synchronous and asynchronous control.
• The starboard and portside engines are ready for operation (“Engine ready”
indicator lighted), and the clutches are engaged;
• The propeller RPM indicator shows zero rpm;
• “Start engine” indicator button: lighted;
• “Stop engine” indicator button: OFF.
Operation Result
To start the engine, press “Start engine” button “Start engine” button will light up in the green colour.
The engine is turned on
For the motion ahead, turn the command- The propeller RPM indicator will show the growth
controllers should be set to 0 degree position. of revolutions
Use the telegraph to set the identical engine rpm
For the astern motion, switch the handles of The propeller RPM indicator will show the growth
both command-controller to Clutch Out position. of revolutions
Turn command-controller downward.
Use the telegraph to set the identical engine rpm
Piece of advice: before turning the steering propellers, disengage the clutch (set the handles in Clutch
Out position)
For the sideward motion to the starboard, turn the After some time, the tugboat will start the sideward
portside command-controller 20 degrees to the motion to the starboard
starboard, and the starboard command-controller
160 degrees to the starboard. Move the handles
of both command-controllers 10 divisions forward
For the sideward motion to the starboard, turn the After some time, the tugboat will start the sideward
portside command-controller 160 degrees to the motion to the portside
portside, and the starboard command-controller
20 degrees to the portside. Move the handles of
both command-controllers 10 divisions forward
Note: The Z-drive tugboat azimuth thruster turn indicator shows an average turn angle.
The direction of the command-controller pointers coincides with the direction
of the thrust.

Handling of Ice Breaker Model
HANDLING OF ICE BREAKER MODEL
General
The Ice Breaker control panel has some characteristic features connected with specifics
of its power and propulsion plant:
• The Ice Breaker is a diesel-electric ship. Nine diesel generators produce current
which is fed to three tandem power motors – РМ;
• Each power motor (PS PM, Mid PM, SB PM) rotates its own fixed pitch propeller;
• Accordingly, rpm of the portside, central and starboard propellers depend on:
– number of diesel generators connected to each power motor (one, two or three);
– rpm of diesel generators providing different current to the power motor controller;
– set power motor controller position.
• The direction of rotation at ahead speeds for the central and starboard
propellers is clockwise, and counter clockwise for the portside motor;
• The central propeller rotates in water streams produced by side propellers,
so its rpm may be lower, all other things being equal.
Provided below is a description of the ship controls (“Man. Info” page).
Rudder Control
Ice Breaker type rudder is used. The maximum rudder angle is 30 degrees, neutral
angle is 5 degrees a starboard.

Handling of Ice Breaker Model
Control of РМ Connection Option

The pressed “PS PM”, “Mid PM”, “SB PM” buttons determine the diesel generator
connection option.
Analog gauges show rpm for each propeller (Portside/Mid/Starboard RPM).
To connect one, two or all the three diesel generators, press one, two or three buttons
respectively (the button will be backlighted in yellow). As this is done, it is the number
of pressed buttons which is important, not their position (top, bottom, or in the centre).
To disconnect one of diesel generators from the power motor, press the switched-on
button again so that its backlighting disappears.
The number of backlighted buttons for all the РМ determines the connection option.
For example, option 3-3-3 shows that three diesel generators are connected
simultaneously to each РМ. Option 1-3-1 means that side power motors operate
from one diesel generator, whereas the central motor is operated by three diesel
generators. The recommended connection options are provided in Table 1.
Table 1. Recommended connection options
Option Speed Shaft RPM Daily fuel consumption, t
1-1-1 16.7 120/112/120 50.1
1-2-1 17.8 124/133/124 66.8
2-2-2 19.0 146/136/146 100.2
1-3-1 18.3 127/140/127 83.5
2-3-2 19.4 148/151/148 116.9
3-3-3 20.27 162/153/162 150.3
Control of Diesel RPM

Diesel generators have three modes of producing power, i.e. three possible rpm’s:
380, 350 and 280. To select the necessary mode, press the respective button
in the left-hand part of the panel (“Diesel Generators RPM”).
Note: The selected mode is at once set for all the nine diesel generators.

Handling of Fast Ferry Model
Power Motors Control

Power Motors (РМ) are controlled with three engine telegraphs shown to the right
of “Man. Info” panel.
Each engine telegraph is connected to the corresponding PM controller.

The telegraph and controller have from 0 to 25 positions for speeds ahead
(green digits) and from 0 to -25 positions for speeds astern (red digits).
The digital gauges below show the respective propellers’ rpm.
To stop the power motor, set the engine telegraph handle to zero, or disconnect
it from all the diesel generators by releasing the appropriate buttons
(the buttons will go out).
HANDLING OF FAST FERRY MODEL
Components and Characteristics of the Propeller and Rudder Unit

The ship’s Propeller and Rudder Unit (PRU) includes the following ship control
facilities:
• two groups of water jets – one group in the aft of each of the ship’s hulls
designed for ensuring the ship’s principal propulsion and manoeuvring
characteristics;
• two ducted bow thrusters (BT) – one in each of the ship’s hulls designed
for improving the ship’s manoeuvring characteristic at low speeds.
Each control facility can be used independent of each other.
Each group of water jets has:
• a drive to the impellers from one or two main engines. The impellers’ rpm
determines the water jets’ force;
• a drive for turning nozzles to the angle of ±30° from the ship’s centreline plane
which sets the direction of the water jets;
• a drive for changing the position of shutters which control the water jet’s force
and can change its direction to the reverse.
The ship is fitted out with two-degree joysticks for the control of the aforementioned
water jet drives. Joysticks control the water jets via a special control system rather
than directly. The control system can operate in the following four modes:
• “Separate” control mode (Manual);

• “Separate” control mode (Auto);

• “Normal” control mode;

• “Harbour” control mode.
Procedures for the use of these modes are described below.
Each thruster on this ship can be turned on/off independent of each other, but
control of the lateral thrust value and direction can be effected jointly only.
Conning Display
General Description
The full set of the Fast Ferry controls and their indicators is only available when
“Man. Info” page is displayed in the second part of the screen.
The below description of the ship control features is provided for both, the controls
shown in the permanently displayed part of the screen, and the controls presented
on “Man. Info” page (see fig. above). A set of controls and their associated indicators
related to the same control device, will be referred to as “panel”.
Thruster Control
Two panels are used for the control of thrusters: “Bow Thruster” and “RPM” panel.

“En. Port thruster” and “En. Stbd thruster” buttons on “RPM” panel have two states:
• the button is pressed (lighted) meaning that the thruster on the respective side
is ready for operation;
• the button is released (not lighted) meaning that the thruster on the respective
side is turned off.
“Bow Thruster” panel has a controller, common for both thrusters, for setting the lateral
thrust power and direction of the ship’s bow turn. This controller is placed in the top part
of the panel. The indicator of both thrusters’ response is below the controller.
Main Engines Start/Stop Control
The panel provides information on the main engines being ready/not ready for
the operation, and on the value of the water jet impellers’ rpm in both groups.
Each of the main engines can be characterized by four conditions:
• Engine is stopped (the green lamp next to “Stop engine” button is permanently
lighted);
• Engine is being started (this condition arises after the cursor is positioned on
“Start engine” button and the left mouse button is pressed (merely “the button
is pressed” in what follows), continues for about 2 minutes and is indicated by
the flashing of the green lamp next to “Start engine” button);
• Engine is ready for operation (the green lamp next to “Start engine” button
is permanently lighted);
• Engine is being stopped (this condition arises after “Stop engine” button is pressed,
continues for about 1 minute and is indicated by the flashing of the green lamp
next to “Stop engine” button).
When the last engine is stopped, the green “RPM” lamp will go out, and readings
of “RPM” analog and digital indicators will become zero (see fig. above) for the group
of water jets on the appropriate side.
The following should also be noted:
• The ship’s main propulsion plant cannot develop a full power unless all the four
main engines have “ready for operation” status;
• The ship can be propelled by the water jets even if only one engine is ready
for operation;
• “Start engine” and “Stop engine” buttons can be pressed when the engines are
in “being stopped”/“being started” states without giving rise to any emergencies.

For the emergency stop of any group of started engines, “Portside” and “Starboard”
panels have a large “Em. RPM reduction” button, and a small green safety button
next to it. The emergency stop of the engines is effected by first pressing the small
safety button and then the large “Em. RPM reduction” button. The engines switch to
“engine is being stopped” state which continues for about 8 seconds, where after
the engines switch to “engine is stopped” state, but continue their revolutions at
a reducing rate. At this stage, “Start engine” and “Stop engine” buttons are disabled.
To take the engines out of emergency stop state, press “Em. RPM reduction”
button (it goes out), and then the small safety button (it also goes out). At this time,
“Start engine” and “Stop engine” buttons are enabled.
Switching Water Jet Control Modes
The panels enable the system’s operating modes to be switched and, therefore,
the current control mode to be determined. It should be noted that the water jet
control panel (Control Mode) is visible on the screen on “Man. Info” page only.
In addition to the buttons mentioned above, “Control Mode” panel incorporates
a round red lamp. It may have two states:
• The lamp is not lighted (the ship systems implement the requested water jet
control mode);
• The lamp is flashing for about 5–10 seconds (ship systems re-adjust themselves
automatically for ensuring the appropriate control mode).
There may be the following ship control modes:
• “Separate” control mode (Manual);
• “Separate” control mode (Auto);
• “Normal” control mode;
• “Harbour” control mode.
Ship Control in Separate Mode (Manual)

“Separate” and “NonFollowUp” buttons are pressed (lighted).
“Separate” control mode (manual) is implemented. This mode is used for enabling the
ship to perform manoeuvres with the maximum intensity. Each water jet group operates
at a command from its joystick within the entire range of possible rpm and the entire
range of possible nozzle turn angles. Joysticks are shown in a simplified form on the
Conning Display to the left and to the right of the compass card (see fig. above).

The rpm controller (which serves simultaneously for setting the turn angle of the
water jet shutter) is shown in the form of a slider which can be moved with the
mouse along the scale numbered from 0 to 10.
Green figures stand for the ship’s ahead motion, red figures mean the motion astern.
This linear scale together with the slider can be rotated within ±30° range by
positioning the mouse cursor on the circular scale. As a result, the water jet nozzles
will turn accordingly.
Note: With “Separate” and “FollowUp” buttons pressed (lighted), the turn angle
of the water jet nozzles can be controlled by using the scale on the rudder
panel. By manipulating this scale with the mouse, you will ensure
synchronous turning of the water jet nozzles on the starboard and portside
simultaneously. In this case, on-screen joysticks will only set the thrusts
for the propulsion ahead or astern.
The separate response of the water jet nozzles to the turn angle setting is reflected
on the two indicators located below the third joystick (see fig. below). Although the
third joystick is not used in this mode, indicators located below are operating.
Note: The water jet nozzles’ turn is also shown on the rudder indicator (at the right
up part of the Conning Display). The rule underlying the display corresponds
to the following formula:
δ=(δPS+δSB) ½,
where δPS, (δSB) is the current turn angle of the starboard (portside) water jet
nozzles;
δ is a value proportionate to the colour filled fragment of the aforementioned
indicator.
Ship Control in Separate Mode (Auto)

“Separate” and “Auto” buttons are pressed (lighted). The speed of ahead motion is
more than 7 knots.
“Separate” control mode (Auto) is implemented. The switching to this mode is us
associated with the lighting of a green lamp to the right of “Auto” button. This mode
cannot be turned on unless the ship’s longitudinal speed exceeds 7 knots ahead.
Otherwise, “Auto” button starts flashing, indicating that the parameters of the
requested control mode are beyond the permissible range.
The main purpose of this control mode is to ensure the ship’s prolonged automatic
motion ahead along the set course. In this mode, the control of the started main
engines’ power and of the shutters’ position in both groups of water jets, remains
manual and independent. The turn angle of the water jets’ nozzles is controlled
automatically by the autopilot so that the ship is steering along the set course.
The same joysticks as for “Separate” control mode (manual) are used. The user can, by
moving the slider along each joystick’s scale, change the rpm and position of shutters in
each group of water jets. The required turn angle of nozzles in both groups of water jets
is set synchronously by the autopilot. The autopilot characteristics are designated from
the relevant page (“Auto” button on Ship Conning Display).

Ship Control in Normal Mode

“Normal” button is pressed (lighted).
The main purpose of this mode is to enable the manual ship handling in the
relatively simple (from navigational viewpoint) conditions within the entire range
of speeds ahead and astern. In this mode, manual synchronous control of the
portside and starboard water jets is used: synchronously turning are the water jet
nozzles, synchronously operating are the water jet shutter, synchronously changing
are the impeller rpm. The orders are given by using the third on-screen joystick
located in the right-hand part of the ship Conning Display (see fig. above).
The top part of the circular scale within 30°-PS–30°-SB range is used for setting
the starboard and portside water jet nozzles’ angle.
In “Normal” mode, however, nozzles do not always turn to an angle equal to the
set one. This difference is determined by the position of a slider on the Turn Angle
Limiter scale (see the bottom panel on fig. above). Corresponding to the slider’s
position on the scale are the three states of the limiter:
• one of the red lamps is lighted;

• one of the yellow lamps is lighted;
• one of the green lamps is lighted, or no lamp is lighted.
In the first case, the actual turn angles of the water jet nozzles are always equal
to the set angle.
In the second case, actual turn angles of the water jet nozzles are within ±20° range.
In the third case, they will not exceed ±10° range.
Note: The joystick can be turned in azimuth to an angle more than ±30°.
In this case, the water jet nozzles’ turn angle will, nonetheless, remain
within the range set by the Turn Angle Limiter.

Ship Control in Harbour Mode

“Harbour” button is pressed (lighted).
Regardless of the state of “Auto”, “FollowUp” and “NonFollowUp” buttons, “Harbour”

control mode is implemented.
The main purpose of the mode is to facilitate the ship handling during the manoeuvring
within the ports in case of weather and other low level disturbances. In this mode, some
limitations are imposed on the main engines’ power conveyed to the impeller shafts
(the maximum ahead speed is about 14 knots). The capability to change the shutters’
position is used to a full extent, and the capability to change the water jet nozzles’
angle – to a considerable extent. The aforementioned power is controlled by the user
manually, whilst the water jet nozzles’ turn angle is governed by a special algorithm
(see also fifty examples of manoeuvres at the end of this chapter). One of the specific
features of this algorithm consists in that when “Harbour” button is pressed, nozzles
in each water jet group are automatically turned to the same angle, but each in the
direction of its respective side – port or starboard.
The same panels as in “Normal” control mode are used for the ship control in this mode,
but have a different meaning. The joystick is used for the control of the value and
direction of the total force generated by the water jets. The bottom panel, previously
used as the limiter of the water jet nozzles’ turn angle, is now used for varying
the value and direction of the force moment created by the water jets. With its aid,
the ship may be made to rotate practically on a spot, when the joystick is set
in the zero position. This panel will be referred to as the “Moment Knob”.
The joystick’s azimuthal position (“Lever Angle”) determines the angle between
the line of action of the force created by the water jets, and the ship’s centreline
plane. For example, 0°-0° position of the joystick corresponds to the force parallel
to the ship’s centreline plane, whilst 90°-90° position corresponds to the force
perpendicular to the ship’s centreline plane. The direction of this force is coincident
with the direction from the centre of the scale to the joystick slider, whilst its value
is proportional to the slider’s shift from zero mark on the line scale (“Lever Thrust”).
With the Moment Knob in zero position, the line along which the force is acting lies
in the vertical plane incorporating the ship’s gravity centre.
If the Moment Knob is not in the zero position, the ship is acted upon by a pair
of forces whose direction and value is determined by the knob’s shift from the “zero”
position. If the knob is to the right of the “zero” position, the pair of forces acts in
the clockwise direction.

Signal lamps provide information different from that in “Normal” mode. The lighted red
lamp means that the value of the set moment is not less than ≅ 66% of the maximum
possible value, the lighted up yellow lamp means that is not less than 33% but not more
than 66% of the maximum possible value, whilst the lighted up green lamp means that
it is not more than 33% of the maximum possible value. The lighted up right-hand lamps
mean that a pair of forces is acting in the clockwise direction.
The joint use of the joystick and the Moment Knob results in that the ship is acted
upon by the force with the set direction, but applied to a point which does not coincide
with the gravity centre. With the correct choice of the joystick and knob positions
and, therefore, of the vector of the force applied to the ship, the user effects direct
control of the ship’s longitudinal speed and rate of turn (see fifty examples
of manoeuvres at the end of this chapter). So, without a thought for the water jets
operating parameters, the user ensures, external disturbance permitting, the ship’s
propulsion in the required direction.
Physical Interpretation of the Ship Handling by Using the Water Jets

By way of illustration of the control capabilities, several basic diagrams will be
considered below.
In the general case, forces FPS and FSB applied to the ship by the water jets
are shown in fig. below (a).
One by one (Fig. а, b) they can be identically transformed to one force F (Fig. c)
applied to a certain point with coordinates (х, у).
In its turn and also identically, force F (Fig. c) can be transformed (Fig. d, e) to force F
applied to the ship’s gravity centre, with the simultaneously acting moment MF (Fig. f).
In “Separate” control mode (manual), the user actually implements the diagram
shown in (Fig. а) where vectors FPS and FSB are arbitrary (within the water jet
parameters variation range).
In “Harbour” control mode, the user deals with the diagram shown in (Fig. f).
Direction of F force and MF moment is set.
In “Separate” control mode (Auto), the diagram of the way the forces are acting
corresponds to (Fig. a), forces FPS and FSB acting along the parallel lines.

In “Normal” control mode, the diagram of the forces action also corresponds
to (Fig. а), FPS and FSB being parallel and acting in the same direction.
Let us suppose that the forces under consideration do not change with the ship’s
speed (for ships with water jets this is not a too far fetched supposition).
The possible ship’s motion is required to be characterised.
Assuming that the weather conditions are ideal (no wind, or waves, or current), and that
the ship is initially at a standstill, then according to (Fig. е) the ship is acted upon by
forces Fx and Fy applied to the ships gravity centre, and the aforementioned MF
moment. In a short while, according to Newton’s second law, the ship will acquire
longitudinal speed (Vx), transverse speed (Vy) and rate of turn (ω) in the direction
of action of Fx , Fy and MF respectively. The ship’s speeds Vx, Vy and ω occurring
relative to the liquid at rest will cause a response on the part of the water (R). The relevant
diagram of the forces’ action may acquire the following form (see fig. below).
As a result, it is possible to forecast the reduced acceleration along axes х and у

(vectors Fx and Rx , Fy and Ry are oppositely directed) and the increased
acceleration along ω (vectors MF and MR have the same direction).
It should be noted that the point of R force application (centre of the hydrodynamic
pressure – CHP) may be at any distance from the ship’s gravity centre depending
on Vx, Vy and ω correlations.
The following points may be considered to be the characteristic positions of the centre
of hydrodynamic pressure:
• in the ship’s bow (forward of the gravity centre) in case of the ship’s motion
with the prevailing longitudinal speed Vx ahead;
• in the ship’s stern (aft of the gravity centre) in case of the ship’s motion with
the prevailing longitudinal speed Vx astern;
• in the vicinity of the gravity centre in case of the ship’s motion with the prevailing
transverse speed Vy.
Let us consider an example where the situation described above is supplemented
with action of other external disturbances, e.g. wind. The relevant diagram of forces
may acquire the following form (see fig. below):

Then, by comparing it with the situation shown in fig. above (b), it is possible to
forecast the increased acceleration along х axis, and a reduced acceleration along
у axis, and in the transverse speed.
It is apparent that the point of RA force application (centre of aerodynamic

pressure – CAP), depending on the wind direction to the ship’s centreline plane,
may travel considerable distances relative to the ship.
The diagrams shown on fig. above, can basically be used for assessing any
situation related to the ship’s motion. In actual practice, however, when all the
components of forces acting upon the ship vary in time (sometime gradually and
sometimes unexpectedly), the navigator is required to have a very high qualification
to be able to take correct decisions.
Joystick Harbour Mode

This section describes a new joystick “Harbour” mode which is added to the normal
joystick lever steering mode in the Water Joystick system for Fast Ferry. Also some
smaller changes made in the normal joystick lever steering mode are described.
Selection of the Joystick Harbour Mode

The requirement for selection of a new joystick “Harbour” is that joystick lever
steering mode is in command. The “Harbour” mode is switched on/off by activation
of a digital signal input (connected to a push button). When the “Harbour” mode
is in command, a digital signal output is activated (connected to a lamp).
In the following cases the “Harbour” mode is auto switched off:
• Joystick tiller steering mode selected;
• Auto Harbour mode selected (TAP system Harbour Track Follow mode);
• Separate levers selected.
Joystick Harbour Mode Strategy

The purpose with the “Harbour” mode is as long as possible to get a motion of the
craft in the same direction as the joystick lever angle and to minimize the water jet
angle and bucket transitions at command changes. Also to get a calmer behaviour
when using the turning knob and when the joystick lever is straight ahead or astern.
When zero command is ordered (zero thrust position and zero moment command),
the jets will have a configuration where the port jets steering angle to port and stbd
jets the same steering angle to stbd. The jet angles is the same as when pure
sideways moment is ordered (i.e., around 20°).
Explanation to the Figures

The water jet forces (one for each side) are indicated with lines in the stern. Ahead
line from the stern means ahead force. Astern line from the stern means astern force.
The total force from the water jets is indicated with the line working on the mid ship
line. The direction of the force is out from the mid ship line.
The point (small circle) inside the craft is the centre of gravity.
Water jet angles: Negative value means water jet steering angle to port. Positive
value means water jet steering angle to starboard.

Joystick commands:
• Lever thrust=50 percent means joystick lever thrust position 5;
• Positive lever angle means direction of the joystick lever to starboard. Negative
lever angle means direction of the joystick lever to port;
• Positive moment knob value means moment command clockwise. Negative
moment knob value means moment command counter clockwise. The figures
only show joystick lever angles to starboard.
Alongships Movement
When the lever angle is straight ahead or straight astern (within a deadband
of a few degrees), the jets will have a configuration where the port jets steering
angle is to port and the stbd jets have the same steering angle to stbd. The jet angle
is the same as when pure sideways moment is ordered (i.e., around 20°). All four
jets are given the same thrust. The thrust commands follow the lever thrust position
where the max thrust astern is max possible thrust to astern and the max thrust
ahead is around 40 percent of max possible thrust ahead. This is done to get
a smooth thrust change when the lever direction is changed (see Fig. 1 and 11).
Sideways Movements
When the lever is turned to ±90°, the aim is to obtain a pure sideways movement.
The jets will have a configuration where the port jets steering angle is to port and stbd
jets have the same steering angle to stbd. The angle has a value which minimizes
the turning of the vessel (i.e., around 20°). The jets on the side which the vessel is
moving away from have ahead thrust. The other side jets have astern thrust to achieve
the ordered sideways movement. The ahead thrust is compensated to balance the
astern thrust for alongships movement (see Fig. 6).
Combination of Sideways and Alongships Movements
An alongships thrust component is added by turning the lever away from the ±90°
position. The direction of the thrust change equals to the direction in which the lever
is moved. Both ahead and reversed jets are given the same addition (with sign) to
the thrust command within max limits, i.e., an ahead compensation increases the power
on the ahead jets and decreases the power on the astern jets (see Fig. 2–10).
Combination of Sideways and Alongships Movements and Rotation
To turn the vessel at the same time as side and alongship thrust in order, the turning
knob is used. The first thing that happens for small turnings of the knob (less than
±60%, can be adjustable) is that the steering angles of the jets are changed while
the thrust is kept at previous value. For bigger turnings of the knob also more thrust
is added if possible (see Fig. 12–31).
Combination of Alongships Movements and Rotation

To turn the vessel at the same time as alongship thrust is ordered (lever angle
straight ahead or straight astern within a deadband of a few degrees), the turning
knob is used. For small turnings of the knob (less than ±60% can be adjusted) is
that the steering angles of the jets are changed. At 60% moment command, port jets
will have max steering angle to port, and stbd jets will have max steering angle to
stbd. The thrust is linear changed from zero moment command to ±100% moment
command. Both ahead and reversed jets are given the same addition (with sign)
as long as possible (see Fig. 32–43).
Pure Rotation
When pure moment is ordered, the port jets steering angle is max to port, and stbd
jets steering angle is max to stbd. This is done to minimize the angle transition at
command changes between pure moment and a combination of sideforce and
moment (see Fig. 44 and 45).

Important Things in the New Harbour Mode Strategy

1. Big changes in thrust and jet angles when a combination of lever command and
rotation command is ordered and the lever angle is changed around 0° or 180°.
For example: if the lever thrust command and the rotation command are kept,
and the lever angle is changed to outside 0° or 180°, the jets thrust may be
changed to opposite direction, and jet angles may change from 30° to 10°
depending on the ordered command combination. Compare the figures 34
and 37 with 22 and 27.
Same thing also happens with change between pure rotation and combination
of sideways moment and rotation. Compare the figures 44 and 45 with 24 and 29.
2. In the new harbour mode strategy, the max thrust ahead is only 40 percent
of maximum possible thrust ahead.
Changes in the Normal Joystick Lever Steering Modes when Using

Moment Commands
To get a calmer behaviour of turning the ship in the normal joystick lever steering
mode when using moment command in the transit sector or when pure moment
command in the manoeuvring sector, it is possible to get a stepwise increase
of the water jet steering angles instead of maximum angle. There are three steps
depending of the moment command:
• moment command 0–33% clockwise or counter clockwise;

• moment command 34–67% clockwise or counter clockwise;
• moment command 68–100% clockwise or counter clockwise.
See figure 46 to 49 where the water jet angles are set as follows:
• moment command 0–33% clockwise or counter clockwise gives jet angles

on port side 10° to starboard and on starboard side 10° to port;
on port side 20° to starboard and on starboard side 20° to port;
on port side 30° to starboard and on starboard side 30° to port. The thrust from
the moment command is linearly increased as before.
Moment Command Indication

Six new indication signal outputs are introduced to indicate ordered moment
command from the turning knobs as follows:
• moment command > 0% clockwise;

• moment command > 0% counter clockwise;
• moment command > 33% counter clockwise;
• moment command > 67% counter clockwise. This indication is enabled
in all modes where the turning knobs can be used.

Fig. 1
Fig. 2

Fig. 3
Fig. 4

Fig. 5
Fig. 6

Fig. 7
Fig. 8

Fig. 9
Fig. 10

Fig. 11
Fig. 12

Fig. 13
Fig. 14

Fig. 15
Fig. 16

Fig. 17
Fig. 18

Fig. 19
Fig. 20

Fig. 21
Fig. 22

Fig. 23
Fig. 24

Fig. 25
Fig. 26

Fig. 27
Fig. 28

Fig. 29
Fig. 30

Fig. 31
Fig. 32

Fig. 33
Fig. 34

Fig. 35
Fig. 36

Fig. 37
Fig. 38

Fig. 39
Fig. 40

Fig. 41
Fig. 42

Fig. 43
Fig. 44

Fig. 45
Fig. 46

Fig. 47
Fig. 48

Fig. 49

CHAPTER 5
Tow Winches Control
Consoles
The chapter describes the consoles for the control
diesel and hydraulic tow winches.

Diesel Tow Winch Control Console ..................................................................... 429
General ............................................................................................................. 429
Winch Drive Control Unit .................................................................................. 430
Pins Control Unit .............................................................................................. 431
Sensors Data Display Unit ............................................................................... 431
Display in the Normal Operating Mode .................................................. 431
Main Menu Screen ................................................................................. 432
Hydraulic Tow Winch Control Console ............................................................... 437
General ............................................................................................................. 437
Winch Selection Scheme ................................................................................. 438
Indicators of Winch Operation Current Parameters ......................................... 438
Winch Drive Manual Control Unit ..................................................................... 438
Tension Mode Unit ........................................................................................... 439
Pins Control Unit .............................................................................................. 439
Winch Clutch Control Unit ................................................................................ 440
Chapter 5. Tow Winches Control Consoles 427

Diesel Tow Winch Control Console
DIESEL TOW WINCH CONTROL CONSOLE
General
The model of the diesel tow winch operates for the Conventional Twin Screw
tug 4 (bp 46.3t).
The “Winch” console is used for the control the winch on the simulator bridge of this
type of tug. The console contains:
• Winch drive control unit “Drum 1” (starboard drum “Drum 2” winch drive is
currently not implemented);
• Line colour indicator;
• Stern pins control unit (“Pins”);
• winch sensor data display unit;
• built-in visualisation panel;
• visualisation controls (arrow-buttons and gyro compass card azimuth disk for
changing the view point);
• Buttons for switching the “Winch” and “Moor” panels (the description of the “Moor”
panel see under Chapter 1, section Mooring Operation Control Panel
(Moor));
• “Light” – console brightness change button;
• “Dimmer” – button for changing the brightness of control buttons highlight;
• Exercise current state indicator (Pause, Ready, Running, Grounding, Collision).
A view of the “Winch” console is provided in fig. below:

Winch Drive Control Unit
The winch drive control unit includes:

• Line colour indicator;
• Drum operating mode setting buttons:
– “IN” – to heave;
– “DOG” – to stop;
– “OUT” – to render.
• Winch “Power” control telegraph (scale from 0 to 100%);
• “Brake” control telegraph (scale from 0 to 100%);
• “RPM” indicator;
• “Clutch Engaged” lever and indicator;
• “Emergency Breakout” – line discharge stop breakout button. After pressing the
button, the rope is not held and freely slacked away.
• “Emergency Breakdown” button to give a command for the emergency line
break.
To switch from one drum operating mode to another, the line is required to have
no speed, and the “Power” telegraph handle should be on the zero.
In render mode with the gear engaged, the winch is controlled with the “Power”
telegraph. With the gear disengaged, the line is rendered by the force of the line itself.
Work with the winch is shown on the sensors display unit and on the built-in visualisation
panel.

Pins Control Unit
The unit contains four pairs of buttons for the control of stern pins directing the tow line
(two on the starboard – “Stbd 1”, “Stbd2” and two on the portside – “Port1”, “Port 2”):
• green – to lift the pins;

• red – to lower the pins.
Pin control buttons are not active unless the “Power” button power supply is ON.
The “Hold-Down System” button turns on holding down of the line’s vertical motion.
This is necessary to prevent the line sliding down from the pins.
Work with pins is shown on the built-in visualisation panel.
Sensors Data Display Unit

Display in the Normal Operating Mode
The figure above shows the display in the normal operating mode. The display
is divided into three areas: top, middle and bottom. The top and middle areas are
combined into the Run Display intended for displaying data from the winch sensors.
The bottom part of the display is designed for the visual presentation of alarms and
for showing the current operating modes. Ranged under the display are five buttons,
each corresponding to a certain function shown in the bottom-most part of the display.
In the normal operating mode, the Run Display is divided into three separate parts:
top, middle left and middle right which can be independently adjusted at the
operator’s option to display the line pull, rendering speed, and paid-out line length.
In the top part, under the displayed parameter’s digital indicator, there is a graphic
indicator adjusted by the user and intended for presenting visually the current value
of the given parameter, as well as its minimum and maximum values.

The following current parameters are shown on the Run Display:
• Line pull (Tension);

• Length of rendered line (Payout);
• Line rendering speed (Speed).
In the normal operation mode, the bottom part of the display contains names
of the following functional keys:
• “MENU” – to call the device adjustment “MAIN MENU”;

• “DIAG” – to turn on the diagnostics screen which shows raw sensor inputs
and scaled Tension and Payout values (this function is not implemented
in the current version);
• “ALRM” – to call the “SET ALARMS” menu for setting the alarm values;
• “CALB” – to call the “CALIBRATION” menu for calibrating parameters
(the function is not implemented in the current version);
• “RSET” – to reset Payout to zero. Requires two key-pushes within a 2 second period
to zero the Payout display (the function is not implemented in the current version).
Main Menu Screen
The “MAIN MENU” screen contains the following items:
1. “SET ALARMS”.
2. “CALIBRATION” (not functioning in the current version).
3. “DISPLAY CONFIGURATION”.
4. “SYSTEM CONFIGURATION”.
Note: The “SET ALARMS” and “CALIBRATION” menus can also be called from
the Run Display by using “ALRM” and “CALB” functional keys respectively.
The “MAIN MENU” screen contains the following functional keys which retain similar
functions in all the submenus (Menu mode):
• “RUN” – to return to the normal operation mode screen, saving any changes
made to menu items;
• “UP” – to move the cursor up the menu;
• “DOWN” – to move the cursor down the menu;
• “ENT” – if the pointer indicates, a sub-menu jumps to that menu. If the pointer
indicates a data field, enters Edit mode to allow changes on the selected field;
• “ESC” – to move back one menu level, or to exit from the parameter editing mode.

Note: When reaching the top menu, displays the message: “DISCARD CHANGES?
NO YES”. Pressing “ESC” (under the “YES” label) will discard all changes made
while in the menu and return to Run mode; to save new values, press the “ENT”
functional key.
In the parameter editing mode, the screen will display the following functional keys
(Edit mode):
• “DECR” – to decrease the selected digit by one when editing a numeric field,
or reverse scrolls through a list of available options;
• “INCR” – to increase the selected digit by one when editing a numeric field,
or scrolls through a list of the available options;
• “→” – to move the edit cursor to next digit in data field, or scrolls through a list
of choices;
• “ENT” – to accept the changed parameter value and return to the Menu mode;
• “ESC” – to cancel editing of the parameter value and return to the Menu mode.
Set Alarms Menu
There are two ways to call the “SET ALARMS” menu: either press “ALRM” button
twice within 2 seconds in the normal operation mode (Run Display), or press
the MENU button and select the “SET ALARMS” menu item.
The top limit of the parameter value is indicated with the “>” sign “more than”,
the bottom limit of the parameter value is indicated with the “<” sign “less than”.
In the “SET ALARMS” menu, you can set the limit alarm generation values
(minimum and maximum) for the following parameters:
• Line pull (“TENSION”);

• Length of rendered line (“PAYOUT”);
• Line rendering speed (“SPEED”).
To change the alarm configuration, select the “CHANGE CONFIGURATION” menu item.

Alarm Configuration Menu

The ALARM CONFIGURATION menu is designed for the independent adjustment
of six visual alarms shown in the bottom part of the display.
There are two ways to call the ALARM CONFIGURATION menu: either
via MAIN MENU/SET ALARMS/CHANGE CONFIGURATION, or via
MAIN MENU/SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/ALARM CONFIGURATION.
The following parameter values can be adjusted in the “ALARM CONFIGURATION”

menu:
1. “ALARM NO.” – to select the number of the alarm to be adjusted (from 1 to 6).
2. “VARIABLE” – to select the parameter which the alarm is being set for
(“TENSION”, “PAYOUT”, “SPEED” or “NONE”).
3. “OUTPUT TO” – determines the output module for the alarm (in the current
version, the output module is assigned to the SCR screen and is not changed).
4. “ALARM TYPE” – selects HIGH or LOW alarm conditions. A high alarm is active
when the variable exceeds the limit. A low alarm is active when the variable is
below the limit.
5. “LIMIT” – this is the numerical value at which the alarm is triggered. This number
can also be changed in the SET ALARMS menu.
6. “DEADBAND” – sets the dead-band associated with the alarm setting.
The dead-band value prevents chattering. The alarm turns on at the limit
specified and remains on until the line variable is less than LIMIT - DEADBAND
for high alarms, or greater than LIMIT + DEADBAND for low alarms.

Display Configuration Menu

The “DISPLAY CONFIGURATION” menu can be called via the MAIN MENU.
This menu item can be used for looking up or changing position of the monitored
parameters display on the normal operation mode screen (Run Display), for changing
the measurement units and accuracy of the selected parameter display.
In the normal operation mode, the Run Display has three areas for the display
of monitored parameters:
• TOP area which can display up to 6 digits;

• LEFT area which can display up to 4 digits;
• RIGHT area which can display up to 5 digits.
Note: If the parameter value exceeds the display field, the right-hand digits are cut
off and “0L” value is displayed over the rightmost digit.
The “DISPLAY CONFIGURATION” menu contains the following items:
1. “TENSION DISPLAY” – line pull.
2. “SPEED DISPLAY” – rendering speed.
3. “PAYOUT DISPLAY” – paid-out line length.
4. “SCREEN SAVER” (the function is not implemented in the current version).
Selection of menu items 1, 2, 3 opens the submenu “TENSION DISPLAY SETUP”

which contain settings for the on-screen display of Tension, Speed and Payout
parameters:

1. “LOCATION” – to set position of parameters on the normal operation mode

screen (Run Display):
– at the TOP – the field can display up to 6 digits;
– to the LEFT – the field can display up to 4 digits;
– to the RIGHT – the field can display up to 5 digits;
– not to display the selected parameter (NONE).
Note: LOCATION setting is required to be changed successively for each parameter
(Tension, Speed and Payout).
2. “UNITS” – to set parameter measurement units (see the table below).
Parameter Measurement unit – notation

Tension • Pounds – LBS;
• Tons – TONS;
• Kilopounds – KIPS;
• Kilograms – KGMS
Speed • Feet per minute – FPM;
• Metres per minute – MPM
Payout • Feet – FT;
• Metres – M
3. “DECIMAL PLCS” – to set the maximum number of digits after the decimal point
in the parameter value (0–3).
Note: If the number is still too wide for the assigned space, then the rightmost digits
are clipped to make it fit. In this case, the screen displays “0L” on top of the
rightmost digit to indicate that the display is over the digit limit for that field.
4. “FULL SCALE” – to set the graphic indicator scale range.
5. “SMOOTH (0–5)” – a modified running average filter can be enabled to reduce
wave motion effects on the Tension display (not functioning in the current version).
System Configuration Menu
The menu is designed for changing the system configuration. The current simulator
version implements only the “ALARM CONFIGURATION” function which allows
the alarm settings to be entered or changed. The function can also be called from
the “SET ALARMS” menu, “CHANGE CONFIGURATION” item (for the description,
see above).

Hydraulic Tow Winch Control Console
HYDRAULIC TOW WINCH CONTROL CONSOLE
General
The hydraulic tow winch model works on tugs with special fastening points (winch
points), for example: Z-Drive Tug 1, Z-Drive Tug 3 and Fin First VS tug 1.
The “Winch” console is used for the control the winch on the simulator bridge of this
type of tugs. The console contains:
• Winch selection scheme;

• Indicators of winch operation current parameters;
• Winch drive manual control unit:
• Tension mode unit;
• Stern pins control unit;
• Winch clutch control unit;
• Line material and color indicators;
• Visualization panel;
• Visualization controls (buttons-arrows and gyrocompass card for changing the
view point);
• Buttons for switching the “Winch” and “Moor” panels (the description of the “Moor”
panel see under Chapter 1, section Mooring Operation Control Panel
(Moor));
• “Light” – console brightness change button;
• “Dimmer” – button for changing the brightness of control buttons highlight;
• Exercise current state indicator (Pause, Ready, Running, Grounding, Collision).
A view of the “Winch” console is provided in fig. below:

Winch Selection Scheme
The indicator buttons to choose the winches are displayed on the scheme.
As a button is pressed, the respective winch is chosen to control, and observer’s
viewpoint is switched accordingly.
The color of button means the following:
• Green – the line is sent from winch point;

• Yellow – the line is not sent from winch point.
Note: To send or let go the line from the winch point is allowed on “Moor” panel
(“Moor” button).
Indicators of Winch Operation Current Parameters

• “RPM” – winch drum rotation (RPM indicator is displayed only if the Instructor
has selected the “Fixed length" mode, and if a line is sent from the winch point).
• “Speed” – line slack/heave speed, m/s;
• “Length” – line length, m;
• “Tension” – line tension, tons.
Winch Drive Manual Control Unit

The winch drive manual control unit contains:
• “Speed” – winch power control telegraph (the scale form -100 to100 %). Push up
the handle, to heave the line. Pull down the handle, to slack away the line.
• “Brake” – winch brake control telegraph (the scale form 0 to100 %). At the
exercise start the telegraph is set in the 100% position. To start slacking away
the line, release the brake.
In the manual mode, when the clutch is switched on (the “Clutch” button is pressed
and the “Clutch state” indicator is light up), the slaking speed is controlled by the
“Speed” and “Brake” telegraphs. When the clutch is off, the line is slacked away
under the impact of the line weight. The slacking speed can be controlled by the
winch brake (the “Brake” telegraph).
Tension Mode Unit

In the automatic mode of maintaining the set line tension (Tension mode), use the
control handle to set the required line tension in percents from the maximum tension
force for this winch. This tension is maintained constant. The line is either
automatically heaved or slacked.
The “Tension” unit contains the following control elements:
• Line tension control handle. The tension value is displayed in percents on the
indicator above the control handle;
• “Tension” – button for switch the Tension mode on/off ;
• “EMCY breakdown” – button for the line emergency let go.
To switch on the Tension mode, press the “Tension” button. The button turns red,
and the “Clutch state” indicator is lights up. The winch manual control stops.
To switch to the manual control, press again the “Tension” button. The button
highlight puts out.
Pins Control Unit

The unit contains two pairs of buttons for the control of stern pins directing the tow line
(on the portside – “PS” and on the starboard – “SB”):
• Green “UP” – to lift the pins;

• Red “DOWN” – to lower the pins.
Winch Clutch Control Unit
Winch clutch control unit contains the following control elements:
• “1” и “2” – buttons for changing the gear;

• “Clutch” – button for turning winch clutch on/off;
• “Clutch state” – clutch state indicator. The “Clutch state” indicator is lights up,
when:
– the “Clutch” button is pressed;
– the line is sent;
– the Tension mode is turned on.
If the clutch control fault is set, the Clutch state” indicator doesn’t light up.
If the winch drive fault is set, the “Clutch state” indicator doesn’t put out.

CHAPTER 6
Ship Communication Aids
The chapter contains instructions for working with Intercom
and VHF Station Simulators.

Intercom Simulator ................................................................................................ 445
Simulator Purpose ............................................................................................ 445
Controls and Indicators .................................................................................... 445
Controlling the Volume of Loudspeakers and Brightness
of Display Highlight........................................................................................... 446
Calling a Subscriber ......................................................................................... 446
Responding a Subscriber Call.......................................................................... 446
Finishing a Communication Session ................................................................ 446
VHF Station Simulator ........................................................................................... 447
Simulator Purpose ............................................................................................ 447
VHF – General Information .............................................................................. 447
Controls and Indicators .................................................................................... 448
Switching ON/OFF ........................................................................................... 449
Squelch, Volume and Dimmer Control ............................................................. 449
Set-Up of VHF Station ...................................................................................... 449
Set-Up of Channel Mode .................................................................................. 450
Listening to Radiotelephone Calls.................................................................... 450
Dual Watch ....................................................................................................... 450
Receiving a Radio Telephone Call ................................................................... 451
Radio Telephone Call ....................................................................................... 451
Distress Call ..................................................................................................... 452
Chapter 6. Ship Communication Aids 443

Intercom Simulator
INTERCOM SIMULATOR
Simulator Purpose
The ship intercommunication station simulator (Intercom) is intended for communications
within a ship and with the Instructor Station.
The simulator provides modeling of the following main functions:
• Selection of a subscriber;
• Set up of the connection with one or more subscribers;
• Volume control;
• Variation in display brightness.
The device has the following controls and indicators:

1 – Device for presenting the subscriber list (Display).
2 – Loudspeaker.
3 – Select keys for selecting a subscriber.
4 – Call/response keys for calling/responding a subscriber.
5 – Volume control keys.
6 – Microphone.
7 – Digital display brightness control keys.

Intercom Simulator
Controlling the Volume of Loudspeakers and Brightness

of Display Highlight
To set the volume of the loudspeaker, use the following keys:
• – to increase volume;
• – to decrease volume.
To set the brightness of the digital display highlight, use the following keys:
• – to increase brightness;
• – to decrease brightness.
Calling a Subscriber
To set up communication with any subscriber from the list, use the following
procedure:
1. Push the select key to the right from the subscriber name. The selected name
will get highlighted.
2. Push the key for calling the subscriber. The selected name will be blinking.
3. Before the subscriber answers the call, the device produces the long beeps
if the subscriber’s line is free, and the short beeps if the subscriber’s line is busy.
4. After the subscriber answers the call, the name will be highlighted.
Responding a Subscriber Call

When receiving a call, the device produces a dedicated audio signal, and the caller
starts blinking in the subscriber list.
To set up communication with caller, push the key simulating the lifting
of the receiver. The caller name will be highlighted.
Finishing a Communication Session

To finish the communication session at any point, push the key.
This operation is possible for both the calling and responding stations.

VHF Station Simulator
VHF STATION SIMULATOR
Simulator Purpose
The VHF simulator is designed for communicating in a telephone mode, radio
watchkeeping and transmitting a distress signal.
The simulator provides modelling of the following main functions:
• Turning ON/OFF;
• Volume control;
• Noise suppression adjustment;
• Selection of any out of 55 international channels;
• Prompt selection of call and distress channel 16;
• Function for keeping watch on two channels;
• Reduction of the station’s transmitting power;
• Setting of channels used in the USA;
• Changing the display illumination;
• Operation in telephony mode;
• Transmission of distress call by means of the hotkey.
VHF – General Information

The ship radiotelephone communication VHF station has a limited number of called
channels. The general system has 57 channels which are allocated numbers from 1
to 28 and from 60 to 88. Each channel has a particular designation: ship-to-ship,
ship-to-port, ship-to-shore. You can have private channels, too (not modelled).
In the US territorial waters the channels have differences, which involves setting
the station to “US” channels in case you are there. Other water areas, e.g.
the Rhine River, have their own systems (not modelled):
Four channels have special functions:
• Channel 16 – used only for transmitting distress calls, which are usually
addressed to all stations, in a telephone call mode. Auditory watchkeeping
on this channel is required from all conventional ships.
ATTENTION!
Never to be used for chatting, etc.
• Channel 70 – Digital Selective Calling (DSC);

• Channels 75-76 – used as Guard Band for distress channel 16. Operation
on these channels is ceased.
All channels, except for channel 70, are used for voice communication.
There are two types of channels:
• Simplex. On the simplex channel, both sides transmit and receive on the same
frequency, so you cannot talk and listen at the same time. When you have
finished talking, say “Over” and release the receiver talk-listen button or push
the button;
• Duplex. On the duplex channel you talk and listen on two different frequencies,
so you can speak and listen at the same time.

Digital Selective Calling is a data digital transfer system using a VHF channel 70.
The transmitter waits until the channel is free and transmits data to the selected
address or all stations, e.g. in case of a DSC distress call. Digital Selective Call is
mainly used for getting in contact in order to establish verbal communication.
Note: The simulator models only distress call transmission to all stations with
the use of digital selective calling.
The device has the following controls and indicators:

1 – Display.
2 – Indicators for the current mode activation:
– Tx – transmitting;
– 1W – 1 watt transmission mode;
– US – US channel system activated;
– DW – two-channel watchkeeping.
3 – Loudspeaker.
4 – Squelch control buttons.

5 – Digital display brightness control buttons.
6 – Volume control buttons.
7 – Talk-listen button (under the VHF station control panel).
8 – The button used during distress signal transmission (under the VHF Station
control panel).
9 – Channel 16 shortcut button.
10 – ON/OFF push button.

11 – Digital enter buttons (from 0 to 9) panel.
12 – Register shift button for enabling the functions marked in blue.

Switching ON/OFF
To switch ON the device, push the button.
The VHF Station will automatically be activated on channel 16 or on the channel set
at the moment of the latest deactivation in the current session.
To switch OFF, push and hold the button within 4 seconds.
Squelch, Volume and Dimmer Control

The following buttons are used to set the squelch level:
• – to increase the squelch level;
• – to decrease the squelch level.

The squelch level is predetermined in the range from 0 (low squelch level)
to 9 (high squelch level).
The following buttons are used to set the brightness of the digital display light:
• – to increase brightness;
• – to decrease brightness.
The brightness level of the digital display light is predetermined in the range
from 0 (minimum brightness) to 9 (maximum brightness).
The following buttons are used to set the volume level of the loudspeaker:
• – to increase volume;
• – to decrease volume.
The volume level is predetermined in the range from 0 (minimum level)
to 9 (maximum level).
Note: Throughout set up of the VHF Station (volume, squelch, brightness) indication
of the current channel ceases, the indicator second position shows
the current level of the respective setting. Channel indication is automatically
activated if none of the control buttons is pushed within 2 sec.
Set-Up of VHF Station

The VHF Station allows controlling the transmitter power level. The transmitter
power can be set at 1 W or 25 W.
To activate a reduced power mode, perform the following actions:
1. Push the button.
2. Push the button within 2 sec.
The indicator will light up under the digital display.

Note: Some channels operate if the output power of the transmitter is 1 W. In this
case, setting up such a channel involves automatic shift of the transmitter
to a reduced emission power mode.

Set-Up of Channel Mode

The VHF Station has two sets of channels ready for operation (international
and US channels).
To activate/deactivate channels used in the US, perform the following actions:
1. Push the button.
2. Push the button within 2 sec.
The indicator will light up under the digital display. To deactivate the mode,
repeat the above-mentioned actions.
Listening to Radiotelephone Calls

According to international rules, all ships shall monitor channel 16 constantly.
To activate listening channel 16, perform the following actions:
1. Select channel 16 by pushing the button.
2. Set the squelch level by means of the and buttons:

– Step down squelch level until noise is heard on free channel;
– Then step up to the first level where just silent.
To listen for calls on other channels, select the channel number or use the scanning
facility.
Dual Watch
Dual Watch is a mode under which the priority channel (channel 16) is periodically
scanned in order to detect a signal during listening on the working channel.
The VHF Station provides simultaneous watchkeeping on the priority channel and
the one selected by an operator. To start a dual watch, e.g. on the priority channel
16 and channel 12, perform the following actions:
1. Select working channel 12.
2. Push the button.
3. Push the button wihin 2 sec.
The indicator will light up under the digital display.

Duty interval in an auditory dual watch mode depends on the following schedule:
• Channel 16 – 0.15 sec;

• Channel, set by an operator – 1 sec.
If a radio signal appears on channel 16 in a dual watch mode, the transceiver
automatically blocks the mode, switches to the frequency of channel 16 (156.800 MHz)
and stays at the frequency until the radio signal disappears. Then the transceiver will
re-activate the dual watch mode. If a radio signal appears on the working channel,
the dual watch mode will be preserved with the above-mentioned channel listening mode.

To stop a dual watch, use select of the following ways:
• Push the button, then the button within 2 sec;
• Push the PTT key or the button.
Receiving a Radio Telephone Call

When a call comes in and your call name is heard in the loudspeaker, perform
the following actions:
1. Push the PTT key or the button.

2. Answer the call by saying:
– Channel < suggested channel number>;
– “Over”.
3. Release the PTT key or the button to allow the calling side switching
to the suggested channel.
4. Switch the station to the agreed working channel and start communication.
Hold the PTT key or the button only when you talk. If you maintain simplex
communication, say “Over” each time you switch from transmitting to receiving.
Radio Telephone Call

To call, perform the following actions:
1. Select channel 16 or other specified and agreed channel.
2. Push the PTT key or the button and call according to the following form:
– <Name of called station> (3 times);
– This is <Name of your station> (3 times);
– “Over”.
3. Release the PTT key or the button and listen to the answer.
4. After you have heard the answer, agree the working channel, switch the station
to the mentioned channel and maintain communication.
Hold the PTT key or the button only when you talk. If you maintain simplex
communication, say “Over” each time you switch from transmitting to receiving.

Distress Call
To transmit a distress call, perform the following actions:
1. Push the button (under the VHF Station control panel), the cursor
indicator will be bisected during the operation.
2. Press the and buttons within 2 sec and hold them within 4 sec,
the indicator of the current channel will show the inverse time reading 4 – 3 – 2 – 1.
Note: If you release the and buttons within 4 sec, transmission

of a distress alert call will be cancelled.
The distress call will be sent automatically within 4 sec, the VHF Station will switch
to the distress call standby mode from the shore-based station (Instructor),
the channel indicator will show channel 70.
Note: The distress call is automatically repeated every 3-4 min until call
confirmation is received.
When reception of the distress call is confirmed, the distress call mode will be
deactivated, and the transceiver will automatically switch to channel 16.
For forcible deactivation of the distress call mode, power down and then power up
the VHF Station.

CHAPTER 7
Fishing Module
The chapter contains the description of work with
fish-finding hydroacoustic devices and fishing gear (pelagic
and bottom trawls, purse seine and long line).

Introduction ............................................................................................................ 457
Fish-Finding and Trawl Controlling Devices....................................................... 457
Furuno CH-26 Sonar Imitator ........................................................................... 459
Specification ........................................................................................... 459
Controls .................................................................................................. 460
On-Screen Indicators ............................................................................. 462
Changing the Basic Factory Settings ..................................................... 463
Furuno FCV-780 Sounder Imitator ................................................................... 464
Specification ........................................................................................... 464
Controls .................................................................................................. 465
Changing Operating Specifications in the Menu.................................... 469
Furuno CN-24 Net Recorder Imitator ............................................................... 470
Specification ........................................................................................... 471
Controls .................................................................................................. 471
Changing Operating Specifications in the Menu.................................... 474
Trawl Controlling Device .................................................................................. 476
Controls .................................................................................................. 476
Display Operating Modes....................................................................... 477
Environment Situation Display ......................................................................... 485
Fishing Gear ........................................................................................................... 486
Fishing Gear Models ........................................................................................ 486
Trawl Models .......................................................................................... 486
Purse Seine Models ............................................................................... 487
Long Line Models ................................................................................... 488
Control of Pelagic and Bottom Trawls .............................................................. 488
Trawl Control Panel ............................................................................... 488
Trawl Settings ........................................................................................ 490
Trawling.................................................................................................. 492
Control of Purse Seine ..................................................................................... 493
Purse Seine Control Panel..................................................................... 493
Purse Seining ......................................................................................... 495
Control of the Long Line ................................................................................... 496
Long Line Control Panel ........................................................................ 496
Long Line Settings ................................................................................. 498
Long Lining............................................................................................. 498
Underwater Visualization Control ..................................................................... 499
Chapter 7. Fishing Module 455

Introduction
INTRODUCTION
A fishing module as part of the Navi-Trainer Professional 5000 simulator is designed
to form and develop navigational and fishing professional skills, such as:
• ship handling during work with fish-finding hydroacoustic devices;

• handling of the fishing gear and deck machinery (pelagic and bottom trawls,
a purse seine and a long line);
• safe navigation during work in a group of ships.
The fish-finding devices listed below are simulated:
• FURUNO CH-26 fish-finding sonar;

• FURUNO FCV-780 hull-mounted sounder;
• FURUNO CN net-mounted sounder;
• Trawl controlling device (based on the ScanBas devices by ScanMar).
The following fishing gear models are simulated:
• pelagic and bottom trawls;

• purse seines;
• long lines.
Trawl, seiner and long line winches are simulated to train the setting/heaving of
fishing gear on fishing ships.
The fish shoal model simulates the behavior of fishing objects. Fish shoal is a cluster
of fish, which consists of several groups of fish. Each group is able to respond to
external irritants, while trying to stay in one cluster. Fish shoal can move with the
defined speed and course on a plotted route. The fish shoal properties set by the
Instructor.
The control of fishing gear and underwater visualization is performed on
the “Fishing Gear control” console.
FISH-FINDING AND TRAWL CONTROLLING DEVICES

Based on the universal hydroacoustic model, the following fish-finding equipment
is imitated in the simulator:
• Furuno CH-26 fish-finding sonar;

• Furuno FCV-780 hull-mounted sounder;
• Furuno CN-24 net-mounted sounder;
• Trawl controlling device (the ScanBas type).
Note: The Furuno CH-26, Furuno FCV-780, Furuno CN-24 imitators are located
on the same console which is started when the “Japanese hydroacoustic
set” task is selected in the Configuration editor. The trawl controlling device
console is started when the “European hydroacoustic set” task is selected in
the Configuration editor.

Fish-Finding and Trawl Controlling Devices
Generally, the following physical phenomena of the acoustic wave propagation

are taken into account in the simulation of the fish-finding devices:
• frequency-dependent propagation loss, caused by the absorption in water;

• refraction, caused by the variation of propagation velocity in water, and as
a result, the appearance of convergent and acoustic shadow zones;
• propagation losses, caused by reflection from the bottom and surface;
• doppler effect.
The received echo signal includes the following components:
• volume reverberation;
• bottom reverberation;
• surface reverberation;
• own ship noise;
• ambient sea noise;
• echoes from fish shoals and single fish;
• echoes from fishing gear (ground rope, trawl doors, seine);
• echoes from the wake;
• first and second echoes from the seabed;
• interference.
The following parameters affect the acoustic device response:
• transmitted power;
• sensitivity and preamplifier gain;
• time varying gain and automatic gain control;
• beam pattern of transmitting and receiving acoustic arrays (beam width and side
lobe level);
• frequency bandwidth.

Furuno CH-26 Sonar Imitator

To call the Furuno CH-26 Sonar imitator control panel, press “Sonar” button at
the bottom of the devise console.
The outward appearance and arrangement of the sonar imitation controls are shown
in fig. below:
Specification
Furuno CH-26 is color searchlight sonar for trawlers and seiners.
Range: 30–1600 m.
Pulse length: 0.4–20 ms (automatically switched with range in use).
Frequency: 60 kHz.
Color: 8 colors depending on received echo strength.
Display mode:
• Full circle PPI + historical presentation;
• PPI + historical presentation (enlarged);
• Vertical sounding presentation (transducer is automatically tilted down to -90°).
Output Power: 1.2 kW.
Beam width (at 3 dB): horizontal – 15°, vertical – 12°.

Tilt: manual control from +5° to -90° in 1° steps.
Train: automatic training at 6° steps.
Train sector can be selected from 36° to 360° in 36° steps.

Train centre can be set in any direction in 6° steps.
Target Lock: Auto in horizontal plane.
Other Functions: Interference Rejecter, TVG, AGC, Noise limiter.
Controls
“PWR” (POWER) – this control is used for switching on/off the sonar.
“TRANSDUCER” – these controls are used for raising and lowing

the soundome. LED lamps (green for raising, red for lowering)
flicker during the raising or lowering and light up after the operation
is completed.
“MODE” – this control is used for selecting Display Mode 1, 2 or 3:
• Mode 1: Full Circle PPI Sonar Display + Historical Display.

Full circle picture is displayed in the upper portion of the screen and the historical
display picture in the lower portion. Select this mode to observe the entire area
around the ship.
• Mode 2: PPI Sonar Display + Expanded Historical Display.

The area of the historical display is expanded twice as large as the one
in Mode 1.
This mode is mainly recommended for detecting fish in the forward direction.
• Mode 3: Vertical Sounding Display.

When this mode is selected, the transducer is automatically tilted to 90°
and Furuno CH-26 operates as a vertical sounding echo sounder.
Note: The length of the picture displayed in the lower part of the historical display
is equal to four full circle pictures approximately. This allows you to observe
the fish movement history, which cannot be readily detected on the
instantaneous PPI display.
“SECTOR” – these controls are used for setting the training sector
width. Each press of the left control narrows the training sector by
36° down to 6°. Each press of the right control widens the training
sector by 36° up to 360°. The training sector is displayed in degrees
for a few seconds at the top of the screen when its width
is changing.
“TRAIN” – this control is used for determining the centre direction
of the train sector. Each press on the control rotates the centre of train
sector clockwise or counter clockwise by 6°. The bearing angle of
the train centre is displayed for a few seconds at the top of the screen.
Note: Press and hold right mouse button to move the control to the right position,
and left button to move the control to the left position.

“DIM” – this control is used for selecting the hue of the display: DAY
(bright), STD (medium), NIGHT (dark). Every time the control is pressed,
the hue changes (DAY→STD→NIGHT→DAY…).
“OUTPUT” – the output control is used for reducing the output power
of the transducer. Every time the control is pressed, the power changes
(1.2 kW→120 W→12 W→1.2 kW…). When operating in the shallow waters,
the lower output power may help to reduce unwanted echo that a reduction
in gain cannot. The output power in use, denoted by rectangles, is displayed
at the upper right side of the screen.
“MARKER” control performs different functions depending on

the display mode:
• Mode 1 and 2 (PPI Sonar + Historical Display).
These four controls are used for moving the “TARGET MARKER” (“+”)
or two “ZONE MARKERS”.
• Mode 3 (Echo Sounder Display).

Moves VRM marker vertically.
“TARGET LOCK” control performs different functions depending on

the display mode:
• Mode 1 and 2 (PPI Sonar + Historical Display).

The target lock function is turned on/off with this control. To use it, take
the following steps:
– Press the “TARGET LOCK” control. The target lock indicator in yellow and
two zone markers will appear on the screen;
– Set the target lock zone by moving the zone markers with the “MARKER”
controls. The zone can be set as the area between the two zone markers.
Note: “MARKER” controls with ⇐ and ⇒ move inner zone marker, ⇑ and ⇓
for the outer marker.
– The target lock is activated when the fish shoal, displayed in red or reddish
browns, is detected in the specified zone, and the target lock indicator
appears in red;
– To turn off the target lock function, press “TARGET LOCK” control again.
• Mode 3 (Echo Sounder Display).
The alarm function is turned on/off with the “TARGET LOCK” control:
– Press “TARGET LOCK” control. The alarm indicator appears at the left top
on the screen, indicating that the alarm function is activated;
– Set the alarm zone by moving the VRM marker with ⇑ and ⇓ keys of the
“MARKER” control;
– The alarm indicator blinks when the fish shoal is detected in red or reddish
brown between the transmission line and VRM.
“TILT” – this control is used for changing the transducer tilt.
Note: Press and hold the left mouse button to change the tilt angle up to 5° above
the horizontal. Press and hold the right mouse button to change the tilt angle
down to 90° below horizontal.

“RANGE” – this control is used for selecting the detection range.

The selected range is shown in the top right corner of the screen
next to the letter “R”.
Note: Press the right mouse button to rotate the control clockwise and the left
button to rotate it counter clockwise.
“NOISE LIM./IR” (Interference Rejecter) control.
When the low-level noise appears on the screen, turn “Noise LIM.”
control clockwise to reduce it. When the interference from other echo
sounders operating nearby or other electric noise can be seen on
the screen, pull out the “IR” control to reduce or eliminate the interference.
When the “IR” is on, “IR” mark is displayed in the right-hand part of the screen.
Note: Press and hold the right mouse button to rotate the control clockwise and
the left button to rotate it counter clockwise. Double click the left mouse
button to push the control in or pull it out.
“GAIN/AGC” – control is used for adjusting the receiver sensitivity. Turning
“GAIN” control clockwise increases the sensitivity. Normally, the gain is set
so that the bottom is displayed in the reddish brown mixed with red. When
changing the range and tilt settings, readjustment of the gain is required.
For a normal use it is recommended to be set around “5” position. AGC
(Automatic Gain Control) reduces strong seabed returns. To detect
the bottom fish, pull out the control. Letters “AGC” will appear in
the right-hand part of the screen.
“TVG” (Time Varying Gain) compensates for the propagation

attenuation of ultrasonic waves. This equalizes echo presentation, so
that fish shoals of identical size appear with the same density in both
shallow and deep water. It also helps to eliminate surface noise which
may mask shallow targets.
“TVG LEVEL” (outer control). Turning this control clockwise reduces noise caused
by strong reflections (mainly in short ranges).
“TVG TIME” (inner control). TVG time control is effective in the range
of up to 1000 meters. Rotating it clockwise extends the effective range.
The level setting of “2” to “5” position is recommended.
On-Screen Indicators
On-screen indicators in Mode 1 and 2 (Sonar Mode) are shown in fig. below:

Fish/Bottom Echoes
The color bar in the bottom right corner shows the relation between echo intensity
and color indication on the screen. The strongest echoes appear in reddish brown
or red (upper color in the bar), and the weakest echoes appear in hues of blue.
Port-Starboard/Training Direction Marker

The port-starboard marker shows the sounding beam position in colors; green
for the starboard, red for the portside, and yellow for the heading.
The training direction marker shows the training direction in the sector area, i.e.
yellow for the clockwise training and black for the counter – clockwise training.
Target Marker
This white cross marker is used for measuring the distance to a target echo with
the “TARGET LOCK” switch “OFF”. When the “TARGET LOCK” switch is turned on,
two zone markers appear instead of the target marker, and the bearing display is
also replaced with target lock indicator in yellow or red.
On-screen indicators in Mode 3 (Vertical Sounding Mode) are shown in fig. below:
Minute Marker
The minute marker is displayed for 30 seconds every minute.
Vertical Range Marker (VRM)
This marker is used for the accurate measurement of the fish echo in the depth.
When the alarm function is “ON”, this marker sets the alarm zone.
Changing the Basic Factory Settings

On the “Settings” panel a Trainee can change the factory settings of the Furuno
СН-26 sonar imitator:
• Unit – measurement units;

• Frequency.
To display the “Settings” panel, press the “Settings” button in the bottom part of the
devise console.
Note: The settings can be changed only before switching on the device.

Furuno FCV-780 Sounder Imitator

To call the Furuno FCV-780 sounder imitator control panel, press “Sounder” button
at the bottom of the devise panel.
The outward appearance and arrangement of the sounder imitation controls
are shown in fig. below:
Specification
Furuno FCV-780 is a color video sounder for most types of fishing vessels such as
shallow water trawlers, deep-water trawlers and seiners. This is a dual frequency
sounder with two transceivers at different frequencies.
The hull-mounted sounder, with a fixed transducer at -90° to the surface, provides
depth and seabed information enabling the skipper to avoid bottom contact. It also
shows when the ship passes over a fish shoal, identifying the fish species and
confirming the capture likelihood and the depth of the shoal below surface.
Display mode The screen is divided into three segments to show

various display modes, specifically: Normal (low
frequency – LF, high frequency – HF, or both), Mix,
Bottom-lock Expansion and Bottom Discrimination (B/L-
B/D), Zoom and A-scope.
Color presentation: Choice of 8 or 16 color presentation. Background color:

black, dark blue and blue.

Range: Operator can pre select and easily change up to 6 most

used range scales among the following: 5, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500,
600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500 or 2000 meters. Measuring
units: Foot, Fathom, Passi/Braza can be selected.
Frequency: Low – 28 kHz, high – 60 kHz.
Phased Range: 10 m steps.
Bottom-lock Expansion 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 meters.

Range:
Zoom Range: 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 meters.
Temperature Range: from -5 °C to +35 °C.
Picture Advance: 0, 1/6, 1/4, 1/2, 1/1 lines/transmission.
Other Functions: Interference Rejecter, TVG, VRM and Clutter control.
Output Power: 3 kW.
Pulse length and Pulse Repetition Rates:
Short Medium Long

PL (ms) 0.2 to 2.5 0.2 to 5.0 0.2 to 5.0
PRR (pulse/min) 600 to 54 400 to 37 200 to 18
Controls
“PWR” and “OFF” controls are used for switching on/off the imitator.
“MENU” control is used for calling the Menu screen.
“RANGE” control is used for selecting the basic detection range.

Six basic ranges can be re-programmed on the Menu screen.
“SHIFT” controls are used for shifting the start depth of the range. Each press shifts
start depth of the range by 10 meters.
“MODE” control is used for selecting presentation mode. Six presentation

modes are available:
• “ZOOM” + “LF” – echoes at low frequency and ZOOM screen;
• “LF” – only echoes at low frequency;
• “DUAL” – echoes at low and high frequencies;
• “HF” – only echoes at high frequency;
• “ZOOM” + “HF” – echoes at high frequency and ZOOM screen;
• “MIX” – blend of low and high frequency echoes.

“GAIN” control is used for adjusting the receiver sensitivity. Normally it

is set between “3” and “5”.
“ADVNC” switch is used for selecting the advance speed of the picture.
Each press changes the advance speed (Stop→ Slow→ Medium→
Fast→ Fastest→ Stop…). When selecting an advance speed, keep
in mind that a fast advance will expand the size of the fish shoal
horizontally on the screen, and a slow advance speed will contract it.
“TVG” (Time Varying Gain) control is used for eliminating surface noise.
When the surface noise masks a shallow target, adjust a TVG setting.
In addition to suppressing the surface noise, the TVG compensates for
the propagation loss of sound so that the echoes from the same size
fish shoals are displayed in the same color. Set it between “3” and “5”
for normal fishing.
“CLUTTER” control is used for eliminating low-level noise. Normally

a setting between “1” and “4” is recommended. Do not turn
the “CLUTTER” control clockwise excessively: in this case, weak
echoes may be eliminated.
When the interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby, or other electric
equipment can be seen on the screen, use noise limiter function, which can be set
on the Menu screen.
“VRM” controls move vertical range marker to measure depth of a fish shoal.
The depth to the fish shoal is digitally read out at the right-hand side of the marker.
“ALARM” control is used for selecting the alarm function, which enables
detecting a fish shoal or seabed appearing in a predetermined zone.
Three types of alarms are incorporated:
• Fish Alarm (FA): only fish echoes can trigger the alarm the echoes below
the seabed contour are ignored;
• Bottom Alarm (BA): only the seabed contour can trigger the alarm;
• Temperature Alarm (TA).
To set the FA or BA alarm:
1. Select the fish alarm (FA) or bottom alarm (BA) on the Menu screen (see
description below).
2. Press “ALARM” control once; “ALARM” label will be displayed at the top
of the screen in grey.
3. Move the alarm zone marker to the desired depth by pressing “VRM” controls
and to the desired length by pressing “SHIFT” controls.
4. Press “ALARM” control to activate the alarm function. “ALARM” label will be
displayed at the top of the screen in white.
5. To disable the alarm function, press “ALARM” switch again.

All fish species have their respective habitable water temperature ranges. The water
temperature alarm function warns you that you are within or out of the desired
temperature ranges.

To activate the water temperature function, press “Alarm” switch after selecting
the temperature alarm (TA, BA+TA, FA+TA) and alarm temperature (TEMP LIM,
TEMP ALM) on the Menu screen.
Note: The alarm indicator is blinking in red when the alarm is triggered.
“SIG LEVEL” control is used for selecting the level above which the echoes
will be displayed. Each press on the control eliminates the weakest colour
echoes on the screen.
Note: If “SIG LEVEL” parameter in the Menu is set to NORMAL, all the echoes
below this level are erased completely. If it is set to GREY, all echoes below
the level are displayed in hues of the grey color.
“A-SCOPE” control is used to select A-Scope presentation. Echoes at each
transmission are displayed with amplitudes and color proportional to their
intensities in the left third of the screen. This will allow close observation
of small fish near the bottom.
“B/L B/D” – button for switching on Bottom Lock/Bottom Discrimination
mode. To set the bottom lock expansion range, use the menu screen.
On-screen indicators in the Normal + Zoom Mode are shown in fig. below:

On-screen indicators in the Normal + Bottom Lock/Bottom Discrimination Mode

are shown in fig. below:
On-screen indicators in the A-Scope + Normal + Bottom Lock/Bottom Discrimination

Mode are shown in fig. below:
Color Bar
This bar gives reference of color gradation, reddish brown for the strongest echo
to blue for the weakest echo return.
Minute Marker
The minute marker is displayed for 30 seconds every minute.
Water Depth
This indicator shows the depth from the transducer to the seabed.

Changing Operating Specifications in the Menu

To change operating specifications in FCV-780 imitation, use the Menu screen:
1. Press “MENU” control to display the Menu screen.
2. Select the desired item with “VRM” controls ⇑ and ⇓. The selected item
is highlighted in green.
3. Select the desired setting with “Shift” controls “+” and “-”.
4. Repeat two preceding steps to change the settings of other items.
5. Press “MENU” control again to quit from the Menu screen.
The list of parameters that can be changed in the Menu screen are shown below.
Item Value of the Description

parameter
NL LEVEL OFF∗ When the interference from other echo sounders operating
N1 nearby or other types of electrical interference exists, you
N2 may use the noise limiter to eliminate or reduce the
N3 interference
BACKGROUND BLK This item determines the background colour of the picture:
D – BLU∗ black, deep blue, or blue
BLU
SIG LEVEL NORM∗ This item selects whether you erase echoes completely, or leave
GRY them in grey when they are eliminated with “Sig Level” key:
• NORM – erase completely;
• GRY – left in grey
HUE STD∗ In this item, you may select the desired picture colours
DAY
NIGHT
USER
COLOR 8COL This item sets the number of colours used for the
16COL∗ presentation: 16 or 8
ZOOM RANGE 2 In this item, the display range of the zoom picture can be
5 selected out of 6 ranges
10∗
20
40
80
PL SHORT The transmission pulse length can be changed in three steps
MID∗ in this item
LONG
RANGE 1–6 5–2000 In this items, 6 basic ranges can be selected out of 22 ranges
UNIT M∗ In this item, you can select the measuring units
FT
FA
P/B
DRAFT -6.0 to Ship draft settings. If the ship draft level is set, the picture
6.0 m starts from the depth of the ship bottom
SCREEN DIV VERT∗ Screen division selection for a dual picture display:
HOR • VERT – divided into the left and right hand halves;
• HOR – divided into the upper and lower halves
B/L RANGE 2 Selection of bottom lock expansion range
5
10
20∗
40
80
∗
– default values.

Item Value of the Description

parameter
ALARM BA∗ Selection of alarm function:
FA • BA – bottom alarm;
TA • FA – fish alarm;
BA + TA
• TA – temperature alarm
FA + TA
TEMP LIM From -5° Setting of threshold temperature to trigger water temperature
alarm
to +35°
TEMP ALARM UP∗ Selection of temperature range within which the water
DOWN temperature alarm is activated:
• UP – alarm is activated if the water temperature is above
the threshold set in TEMP LIM item;
• DOWN – alarm is activated if the water temperature is
below the threshold temperature

On the “Settings” panel a Trainee can change the working frequencies of
the FCV-780 echo sounder imitator.
devise console.
Furuno CN-24 Net Recorder Imitator

To call the Furuno CN-24 net recorder imitator control panel, press “Net Recorder”
button at the bottom of the devise panel.
The outward appearance and arrangement of the imitation controls are shown
in fig. below:

Specification
The Furuno CN-24 is a color net recorder for mid water and deepwater trawlers.
It shows trawl net behavior, net mouth opening, net location in the water, temperature
at the net.
The head rope-mounted transmitter sends the sounding and temperature data
to the ship.
There are three display modes: Downward, Dual (upward & downward) and True
Depth. In True Depth, the transmitter position and fish shoals are displayed relative
to the sea surface. In Downward and Dual modes, targets are displayed relative
to the transmission position. The water temperature at the net is plotted across
the screen and shown digitally at the top of the screen.
Display: 8-color presentation with selectable background color.
Display Mode: Downward, Dual (upward/downward), and True Depth.
Range: four customized ranges up to 80, 160, 320, or 640 m.
Phased Range: steps 10 m up to 2000 m.
Picture advance:
• OFF (freeze), 1/8,1/4, 1/2, 1/1 lines/transmission;
• 5/10/15/30/60/90/120 minutes/full screen for historical presentation.
Temperature Indication: Historical plotting with digital readout in the range of -5 °C
to +40 °C in 0.1 °C steps.
Sounding:
• Frequency 75 kHz;
• Beam width (at 3 dB) 33°;
• Output 100 W;
• Detection Range 640 m.
Data transmission:
• Frequency 33 kHz;
• Beam width (at 3 dB) 34°;
• Output 2.4 W.
Controls
“PWR” and “OFF” controls are used for switching on/off the imitator.
“VRM” controls are used for moving the vertical range marker (VRM) to measure depth
of a fish shoal. The depth is digitally read out on the right-hand side on the marker.

“ADVNC” control is used for selecting the advance speed of the picture
in “Normal” mode of display advance. Each press changes the advance
speed (Stop→Very Slow→Slow→Medium→Fast→Fastest→Stop…).
When selecting an advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance will expand the size
of the fish shoal horizontally on the screen, and a slow advance speed will contract it.
“HUE” control is used for selecting the background color (deep blue or black).
“TEMP” control is used for turning on/off the graphic display of water
temperature at the net position. Water temperature is presented in the range
of 10 °C. If the temperature rises above or falls below the limits of the scale,
the graph shifts so the temperature marker comes to the centre of the scale.
The current temperature appears in the upper corner of the screen.
“SIG LEVEL” control is used for turning on/off the bar graph display of
signal strength. The strength of a signal received by a paravane receiver
appears in a bar graph beside the color pattern.
“EVENT” control is used for drawing an event marker (reddish brown vertical
line), which marks the elapsed time or important points.
“SHIFT” controls are used for shifting the TM range.
“MENU” – these controls are used for selecting items and entering data on the Menu
screen. (The Menu screen is selected by using “MODE” control. See below.)
“NORM/HIST” – these controls are used for selecting the picture advance mode.
“NORM” control turns on the Normal mode, “HIST” turns on the Historical mode.
The picture advance speed in the Normal mode is selected by using “ADVNC” control,
in the Historical mode the picture advancement speed is selected on the Menu screen.
“MODE” control is used for selecting the presentation mode:
• Menu screen. The Menu screen appears when the control is in this
position. It allows setting or selecting those functions that are not
frequently altered in the daily use;
• Downward mode. Displays a downward sounding picture on the entire screen;
• Upward + Downward/True Motion (TM) mode. Displays the upward sounding
picture in the upper half of the screen and downward sounding picture in the
lower half. If the TM mode is selected on the Menu screen, the TM mode picture
is displayed. In TM mode, the sea surface is locked at the screen top and
all echoes are presented in their true depth, enabling the operator to monitor
the true motion of the trawl.

“↑↓/TM RANGE” control is used for selecting upward or TM range.
“↓ RANGE” control is used for selecting a downward range.
Four ranges are available:

Units 1 2 3 4
Downward/ M 10 20 40 80
Upward FT
Ranges FA
P/B
TM Ranges M 20 40 80 160
FT
FA
P/B
“CLUTTER” control is used for adjusting the clutter reduction level.

Turn it clockwise to eliminate low-level noise. Do not use excessively
high settings: weak echoes may be lost.
“GAIN” control is used for adjusting the receiver gain.
On-screen indicators are shown in fig. below:

Minute Mark
Minute Mark is plotted in yellow for 30 seconds every minute.
Color Bar
Echoes are shown in colors depending on their intensity. The strongest echoes
are in the reddish brown color, and the weakest are in hues of blue.
Range Scale
Range scale is calibrated in meters, fathoms, feet, passis/brazars and displayed in white.
Temperature Display
The temperature scale shown in white is calibrated to ± 5 °C. The current water
temperature appears at the screen top, and past water temperature is graphically
overlaid in light blue on the screen picture.
Vertical Range Marker
VRM measures depth and appears in green. Depth appears above the marker.
Depth Readout
Shows the net depth (transmitter) from the sea surface.
Changing Operating Specifications in the Menu

To change operating specifications in CN-24 simulation, use the Menu screen:
1. Use “Mode” control to display the Menu screen.
2. To enter data into the menu item, use keys in “MENU” group to select items and
enter the data on the Menu screen:
– press <↑> and <↓> keys to select the item. The selected item is highlighted;
– press “Enter” key. The list of parameters appears below;
– press <↑> and <↓> keys to highlight the desired parameter;
– press “Enter” key to confirm the selected parameter;
– repeat steps to change the settings of other items.
DSP Menu
Use this menu to set the main parameters.
Item Sub–Menu Description
UP/DN DSP TM Selects the presentation mode for Upward + Downward display.
NORMAL TM – the sea surface is displayed as a straight line at the screen
top, and echoes appear in true depth.
NORMAL – the transmitter is displayed as a straight line in the
centre of the screen, upward sounding appearing in the upper half
of the screen and downward sounding – in the lower half
NOISE LIM OFF When the interference from other echo sounders operating nearby, or
1 other types of electrical interference exists, you may use the noise
2 limiter to eliminate or reduce the interference.
3 “OFF” position turns off the noise limiter function.
Position “3” offers the highest degree of noise rejection
HIST ADV 5 MIN Picture advance speed selection for the Historical advance mode.
10 Speed – is the time, which it takes the echo to move from the right
15 edge to the left edge of the screen
30
60
90
120


MAX 80 Maximum upward range selection
UPWARD 160
RANGE 320
640
MAX 80 Maximum downward range selection
DOWNWARD 160
RANGE 320
640
DRAFT -9.9–(+)9.9 This item permits setting the ship’s draft between -9.9 and
+9.9 m, in order to plot the net depth mark at the correct depth on
the external echo sounder. Set it to 0.0 if the echo sounder
incorporates a draft control
NET DEPTH -99.9–(+)99.9 Compensates for the depth error. The range of compensation
is -99.9–(+)99.9 m
RANGE Opens the RANGE SETTINGS submenu
SETTINGS
Range Settings Submenu

Use this menu to re-program basic ranges:

UP RANGE 10 m Reprograms Upwards ranges
20 m
40 m
80 m
DN RANGE 10 m Reprograms Downwards ranges
20 m
40 m
80 m
TM RANGE 20 m Reprograms ranges in the true motion mode
40 m
80 m
160 m

On the “Settings” panel a Trainee can change the factory settings of the Furuno
CN-24 net recorder imitator:
• Unit – measurement units;

• Frequency;
• Repetition Rate – pulse repetition rate;
• Maximum Upward Range – maximum range in the Upward mode;
• Maximum Downward Range – maximum range in the Downward mode.
device console.

Trawl Controlling Device

The trawl controlling device imitator is developed on the basis of an existing line of
ScanBas devices by ScanMar. The device is intended for the control of trawl
parameters.
Controls
The front panel of the device has the following controls:
• The button for switching on/off the device;
• The buttons for:

– switching the display operating modes: TOP–1, TOP–2, REAR–1 REAR–2,
ECHO–1, ECHO–2 (see below item Display operating modes);
– displaying the data on the hydroacoustic environment: RAYS (see below item
Environment Situation Display).
• The button for switching the depth range (4 ranges up to: 160, 320, 640,
1280 m).

Display Operating Modes

The imitated device has some pre-set display modes that inform the user about data
related to the trawl system.
Independently of the selected display mode, the upper right corner of the display
shows the following data:
• data and time set by the Instructor in an exercise;

• ship coordinates;
• speed over ground (SOG);
• course over ground (COG).
Mode TOP–1 (Vertical Simplified View)
The left part of the screen shows a trawl vertical view and following values:
• Door distance – distance between trawl doors in metres:
• Warp length in metres (L) and tension in the warp lines in tons (T):
• Trawl speed – water speed at the trawl mouth in knots:

• Angle between the trawling direction and the trawl mouth (if the angle is more
than 5 degrees, the value is displayed in red):
• The value of outboard water temperature near the ship (S – surface) and at the
depth of the trawl headrope (B – bottom):
• Indicators of fullness of the trawl bag: (red – the bag is partly empty, green – the
bag contains some catch):
The upper part of the screen has an information panel which displays:
• Fields “C C” – indication of fullness of two parts of the trawl bag (red – the bag is
partly empty, green – the bag contains some catch).
• Field “TSP” (see from top to down):

– the water speed at the trawl mouth in knots;
– value trend of water speed for the one minute;
– the angle between the trawling direction and the trawl mouth.
• Field “DST”:
– the distance between trawl doors in meters;
– value trend of distance in metres per minute.

• Field “TEY” – the information about the trawl opening and the contact with the
bottom represented by three parameters:
– H – the height of the trawl headrope over the bottom in metres;
– O – the trawl vertical opening in metres (the distance between the headrope
and the footrope);
– C – the distance from the bottom to the footrope in metres (equal to zero is
there is contact between the trawl and the bottom).
The right part of the display shows:
• Information about the trawl opening and the contact with the bottom represented
by three parameters H, O, C (the data displayed in the “TEY” field are
duplicated, see the description above);
• The echogram of the trawl mouth for the last five minutes. The centre of the
echogram shows the vertical scale of depths. The bottom right of the echogram
displays a colour intensity scale of echo signals (bottom-up the colour change
with the signal intensification). The upper part of the echogram displays a minute
marker in yellow: The current data on the trawl run depth are displayed in the left
bottom corner of the echogram.

Mode Top–2 (Vertical Full View)
The left part of the screen shows a vertical trawl view and the values of its
parameters which are similar to the parameters displayed in the TOP–1 mode (see
above item Mode TOP–1 (Vertical Simplified View)). Additionally, the screen
displays:
• S – the value of outboard water temperature near the ship and value trend of
temperature in degrees per minute;
• B – the depth of the trawl headrope and value trend of temperature in degrees
per minute.
The upper part of the screen has an information panel which displays:
• Three fields “DP”:

– the depth of trawl doors and the trawl headrope;
– the value trend of depth in meters per minute (arrow shows embedding or
surfacing).
The arrangement of “DP” fields is from the left to the right: an sensor on the
trawl headrope, an sensor on the left door, an sensor on the right door:

• Field “TMP”:
– the temperature in the water layer where the trawl is located;
– the value trend of temperature in degrees per minute.
• Fields “INC” – information on the situation of trawl doors (the first field “INC” for
the left door, the second – for the right one. Each field shows:
– the door inclination angle in degrees;
– the door inclination angle value trend in degrees per minute.
The inclination angle is considered positive if the door upper edge inclines to the
trawl towing and negative if the door upper edge inclines outside from the trawl
towing.
• Fields “TSP”, “DST”, “TEY” – see the description of fields for the TOP–1 mode.
The right part has an echogram of the trawl mouth (see the description of the
echogram in the TOP–1 display mode).
Mode Rear–1 (Horizontal View 1)

The left part of the screen shows a horizontal trawl view and the values of its
parameters, such as:
• The distance between the trawl doors in metres and value trend of distance in
metres per minute (arrows indicate the trawl closure/opening):
• The length of veered warps – L, and the tension in the warp lines – T
(similarly as in the TOP–1 mode);
• D – the depth of the trawl headrope in metres and value trend of depth of the
trawl headrope in metres per minute; H – the height of the trawl headrope over
the bottom and value trend of height of the trawl headrope in metres per minute:
• Trawl vertical opening in metres:
• The distance between the trawl footrope to the bottom and the value trend of its
parameter in metres per minute:
• The depth of trawl doors and the value trend of its parameter in metres per
minute:
• Trawl doors inclination angles:
• Angle between the trawling direction and the trawl mouth:
The left upper part of the screen has an information panel which displays:
• Two fields “TLT” – the tilt angle of doors in degrees and the value trend of tilt
angle in degrees per minute:

• Fields “DP”, “TEY”, “DST”, “TSP”, “TMP” (see the description of fields for
previous modes).
Mode Rear–2 (Horizontal View 2)
The left part of the display shows a horizontal trawl view and the values of its
parameters which are similar to the parameters displayed in the REAR–1 mode (see
description above).
The upper left part of the screen has an information panel which displays:
• Fields “TSP”:
– the water speed in different parts of the trawl in knots;
– value trend of water speed for the one minute;
– the angle between the trawling direction and the trawl mouth:
• Fields “DP”, “TMP”, “DST”, “TEY” (see the description of fields for previous
modes).

Mode ECHO–1 (Simplified View of Trawl Opening Echogram)
The upper part of the screen has an information panel where the “DP”, “DST”, “TEY”
fields show the information about a set of general parameters and characteristics of
the trawl device (see the description of fields for the previous modes).
Below there is the echogram of the trawl mouth displayed in the TOP–1 mode in full
scale showing the history of the processed hydro acoustic signal for the latest thirty
minutes.
Mode ECHO–2 (Full View of Trawl Opening Echogram)

The upper part of the screen has an information panel where the “DP”, “TMP”,
“DST”, "TEY" fields show the information about a set of general parameters and
characteristics of the trawl device (see the description of fields for the previous
modes).
Below, there is the echogram of the trawl mouth displayed as in the ECHO–1 mode
(see the description above).
Environment Situation Display

Simulator has environment situation display that helps to understand the processes
of propagation and reception of acoustic signals.
The environment situation display is switched on by using the “View” button on the
front panel of the echo sounder, sonar and net recorder imitators or by selecting the
“RAYS” mode on the panel of the trawl controlling device imitator.
In the “Environment” window the following items are displayed: bottom contours, the
ship with fish-finding device and used fishing gear, fish shoals, and pinnacles:
Pressing the “RAYS” button will open a window:

Fishing Gear
The window contains the following information:
• the probing direction and the range of action of the device (in case of the sonar);
• the vertical distribution of sound speed;
• the section of irradiation structure of the acoustic field in the probing direction;
• the scan of the received signal.
Pressing the “Audio” button in the bottom right corner of the devices console (echo
sounder, sonar and net recorder imitators) switches on the sound presentation of the
acoustic ray of the device.
Fishing Gear
The main fishing gear includes: pelagic and bottom trawls, purse seines and a long
line.
The “Fishing Gear control” console is designed for the control of the fishing gear and
underwater visualization.
Note: To display the fishing gear console, start the "Fishing Gear Control" task in
the Configuration editor.
The upper part of the console has the buttons for selecting the required fishing gear:
• Trawl – control of pelagic and bottom trawls;

• Seine – control of a seine;
• Long Line – control of long line;
• Visual – control of underwater visualization.
Fishing Gear Models

Trawl Models
The model of a complete pelagic trawl consists of:
• four seam net portions;

• two warps;
• two trawl doors with door pendants and brackets;
• two low bridles with adjustable chain;
• two upper bridles;
• headrope with floats;
• footrope with ballast chain;
• hydrodynamic wing;
• wing depressors;
• bag.

Fishing Gear
The following types of pelagic trawls are simulated:
Parameter Pelagic trawl 2559 Pelagic trawl 2674

Headrope\Footrope length, m 54 145
Side line, m 44.8 116
Perimeter, m 280 720
Aggregate resistance, tf 8 36
Trawling speed, kt 3.9 5.5
Vertical opening, m 36 78
The model of a complete bottom trawl consists of:
• two seam net portions;

• two warps;
• two trawl doors with door pendants and brackets;
• two low bridles with adjustable chain;
• two upper bridles;
• headrope with floats;
• footrope with ballast chain;
• bag.
The following types of bottom trawls are simulated:
Parameter Bottom trawl 2561 Bottom trawl 2517
Headrope\Footrope length, m 28.5/22.0 45.3/37.6
Perimeter, m 37.6 47.0
Vessel power, kW 850 1500–2000
Trawling speed, kt 3.1–3.6 3.5–4.2
Vertical opening, m 6.0–5.5 10.5–9.5
Horizontal opening, m 17.0–18.0 28.0–30.0
Aggregate resistance, tf 7.0–8.0 13.0–16.0
Purse Seine Models

The model of a complete purse seine consists of:
• cork line;
• lead line with depressors and purse rings;
• towing line;
• pursing line;
• net portion;
• buoy anchor.
The following types of purse seines are simulated:
Parameter Purse seine 680\175 Purse seine 990\200

Cork line length, m 680 990
Max. height, m 175 200
Vessel power, kW 840 840

Fishing Gear
Long Line Models

The model of a complete long line consists of:
• main line with floats;
• buoy lines;
• pennants with hooks;
• front and end buoy anchors.
The following types of long lines are simulated:
Parameter Long line (drifting/moored)

Max. main line length, m 300
Max. branch length, m 30
Max. number of baskets 50
Max. buoyline length, m 30
Vessel power, kW 250–900
Control of Pelagic and Bottom Trawls

Trawl Control Panel
The appearance of the trawl control panel is shown on fig. below:
The panel has the following controls and indicators:
• Trawl model selection button .

Press the button until you select the required trawl model: Pelagic trawl (2559),
Pelagic trawl (2674), Bottom trawl (2561), Bottom trawl (2517).

Fishing Gear
• Set trawl button ;
• Button to open the trawl settings window ;

• Warp state indicators:
– “Length – the portside and starboard warp length, m;
– “Tension” – the portside and starboard warp tension, ton;
– “Speed”– the portside and starboard warp paid out or hauling speed, m/s.
• Warp winch lever – is used for operating the trawl winch.
When the lever is in zero position, both winch drums are braked with band
brakes. To start the operations with warps, adjust the position of lever (forward –
for paying out, backward – for hauling in). The lever position determines
the paying out and hauling in speed.
• Arrow-buttons to set the following parameters:

– “Brake” – is used for adjusting the braking effort of the band brakes.
The scale is calibrated in percent of the maximum braking effort.
The “Brake” initial position is 100%, which corresponds to the maximum
braking effort equal to 1.5 rated winch pull;
– “Unbrake” – is used for adjusting the braking effort whereby the brakes are
automatically released to prevent the winch overload in case of warp tension
growth. The “Unbrake” initial position is 100%, which corresponds to
unbraking in case of an effort exceeding 3 rated pulls.
• Alarms:
– “B. Off” (Brake Off) – indicates that the drums brakes are released;
– “Unb. On” (Unbrake On) – indicates that there has been an emergency
unbaked;
– “W. Slip” (Winch Slip) – indicates that the winch slips. Usually winch slips
when the warps tension exceeds the brake force;
– “L. Layer” (Last Layer) – indicates that the last layer of warps remains on
drums.
• Trawl emergency state indicator:
– “Trawl on ground” – this message appears when the trawl footrope is
draggled over the bottom;
– “Board on ground” – this message appears when the trawl doors are draggled
over the bottom.
• “Trawl Status” – indicates the current trawl status:
– “On board” – indicates that the trawl is taken aboard;

– “At Sea” – indicates that the trawl is ready for operations with warps;
– “Lost” – indicates that the trawl is lost.
• Catch indicators:
– “Current catch” – current value of catch in kilograms;
– “Overall catch” – summary value of catch in kilograms.

Fishing Gear
Trawl Settings
The settings can be applied for two models of pelagic trawls and two models of
bottom trawls.
To open the trawl settings window, press the “Settings” button on the trawl control
panel.
The selection of values is performed by using the arrow-buttonsv.

Note: The setting is possible when the trawl is located on the ship board and
during the trawling, if the option which allows the editing of trawl parameters
is switched on by the Instructor on his\her workplace.
Settings of Pelagic Trawl
The following parameters of trawl rigging can be adjusted:
• “Door” parameters:
– “Upper fasten pos” – joining position of upper door pendant;
– “Lower fasten pos” – joining position of lower door pendant;
– “Weights number” – number of door balancing weights.
• “Floats number” – number of headrope floats;
• “Lift device square”;
• “Length” – length of low bridles; length of footrope ballast chain;
• “Depressor number” – number of loads suspended to each trawl wing for every
loading.
The trawl of each type is provided with three pre-programmed rigging configurations for:
• surface trawling (from 5 to 50 m);

• trawling on middle depths (from 50 to 100 m);
• deep-water trawling (from 100 to 500 m).
The Trainee can select one of these riggings by pressing the buttons “Surface”,
“Mid Water”, “Deep Water” respectively and then “Apply” button.

Fishing Gear
Settings of Bottom Trawl
The following parameters of trawl rigging can be adjusted:
• “Trawl” parameters:
– “Lift device square”;
– “Floats number” – number of headrope floats.
• “Door” parameters:
– “Upper fasten pos” – joining position of upper door pendant;
– “Lower fasten pos” – joining position of lower door pendant;
– “Weights number” – number of door balancing weights;
– “Wire longitude pos” – warp binding longitudinal position;
– “Wire lateral pos” – warp binding lateral position.
• “Ground Rope” parameters:
– “Chain weight” – weight of the chain;
– “Rope weight” – weight of rope;
– “Bobbin type”;
– “Bobbins (D 300, 400, 500 mm)”;
– “Coils (L 75, 200, D 300 mm)”;
– “Washers”.

Fishing Gear
Trawling
Before trawl setting, select the required trawl model, using the trawl model selection
button, and adjust trawl setting in the “Settings” window (if necessary).The trawl
adjustment includes:
• balancing the trawl doors;

• changing the trawl doors attack angle;
• changing the trawl depressors weight;
• changing the headrope’s buoyancy;
• changing the length of footrope chain;
• changing the length of bridles.
The balancing of trawl doors consists in changing the number of removable weights.
Doors angle is controlled by means of setting the desired joining position for the
door pendants.
The trawl is weighed down with depressors attached to each wing and chains
attached to footrope.
Adjustment of the headrope buoyancy consists in changing the number of floats.
The length of bridles is changed by using an adjustment chain.

The hydrofoil wing’s attack angle varies from 0° to 40°.
The square of the lifting device is changed within the limits of 0 – 5 square metres.
Work with trawl includes the following operations:
• Setting;
• Warps paying out;
• Towing;
• Warps hauling in;
• Taking trawl on board and catch calculations.
To set the trawl, press the “Set Trawl” button. The “At Sea” message will appear in
the trawl status dialog box. In a few moments the trawl will spread in the water.
Note: After the trawl is set, its view appears on the monitor of the Instructor’s
display. The Trainee can control the trawl behavior on the display of the
Furuno CN-24 imitator and the display of the trawl controlling device
imitator.
A multi-speed electromechanical warp winch is modelled for the work with the trawl.
To pay out of the warps, set warp winch level to one of “pay out” position (move the
lever forward).
In the lever’s zero position, both winch drums are braked. When the level is set in “pay
out” position, the winch brakes are released. The lever position determines the speed of
paying out the warps.
The tension of the portside and starboard warps is shown on the “Tension” displays.
To stop the paying out of warps, set the warp winch lever to the zero position. If the
entire warp length is paid out, “L. Layer” (Last Layer) signal lamp is lighted.

Fishing Gear
To haul in the warps, set warp winch lever to one of hauling positions (backward).
The warp hauling continues until 20 meters of warp length is left. The trawl is
automatically picked up on board. The trawl status window displays “On Board”
message.
The current fish caught in kilograms (shown on the “Current Catch” indicator) is
added to the summary catch (shown on “Overall Catch” indicator). The” Current
Catch” indicator is returned to zero.
After the trawl has been hauled on board, it is ready for the next setting.
Emergency situations can lead to the break and loss of the trawl. If the trawl is lost,
the “Lost” message appears in the trawl status box. The information about different
critical deviations of trawl parameters is shown on the display of the trawl controlling
device simulator (see the description above in Trawl Controlling Device).
The work with the bottom trawl is similar to the work with the pelagic one.
Control of Purse Seine

Purse Seine Control Panel
The appearance of the purse seine control panel is shown on fig. below:

Fishing Gear
The panel contains the following controls and indicators:
• Purse seine model selection button .

Press the button until you select the required purse seine model: Purse seine
(680\150) or Purse seine (990\200).
• “Set Net” – button for setting the buoy anchor into water.
When this button is pressed, forward towline and purse lines, attached to the
buoy anchor, are dropped into water. Band brakes of purse line winch are
automatically released, and the net paying out starts.
• “Take buoy” – button for picking up the buoy anchor with forward purse line and
towline.
When this button is pressed, forward and aft towlines are automatically attached
to the bow capstan and net (stern) winch drums respectively. After that towing
operation can be started. When the buoy anchor is picked up, forward purse line
is automatically attached to left drum of purse line winch, and pursing operation
can be started.
Note: To pick up the buoy on board only, the following conditions must be met: the
buoy is on the starboard, the ship's speed and the distance to the buoy do
not exceed the values set by the Instructor.
• The “Settings” button is intended for displaying the settings of the purse seine
(the settings cannot be changed);
• “Length”, m – indicator for displaying the purse line length being in water, m;
• “Tension”, ton – indicator for displaying the purse line tension, ton;
• “Speed” – indicator for displaying the purse line setting or pursing speeds, m/s;
• Winch lever – this control is used for pursing. The lever’s initial position is
backward. To start the purse operations, adjust the lever forward. The lever
position determines the pursing speed;
• “Brake” – arrow-buttons for adjusting band brakes of purse line winch in %. The
winch can be slowed down when the purse is dropped;
• “Last ring in water” – indicates that the entire lead line is in the water;
• “All seine in water” – indicates that the entire net is in the water and setting is
completed;
• “Heave alerts” – the indicators which show the reasons why the buoy cannot be
taken on board are:
– “Too far to heave” – the distance to the buoy is too large;
– “Bad heading” – the buoy is on the portside;
– “Bad velocity” – the velocity is too high.
• “Bow capstan”, “Net winch” – buttons are used to start/stop bow capstan and net
(stern) winch. When the setting is completed, forward and aft towlines are
automatically attached to the drums of bow capstan and net winch respectively.
After that, towing operation can be started.

Fishing Gear
• “Seine status” – window for showing the seine status:

– “On board” – indicates that the seine is taken aboard;
– “Setting” – indicates that the setting operation is in progress;
– “Setting complete” – indicates that the seine setting is completed, and towing
and pursing operation can be started;
– “Pursing” – indicates that the pursing operation in progress;
– “Lost” – indicates that the seine is lost.
Purse Seining
Work with the purse seine contains the following operations:
• setting the anchor buoy with forward purse lines;
• setting the net;
• picking up of the anchor buoy with forward purse line;
• towing;
• pursing;
• lifting of the net on board and catch calculations.
Before setting the net, a trainee can select the desired net type.
Note: Selection cannot be made unless the seine is on board the vessel.
To start setting the seine, press “Set Net” button. The seine status window will display
“Setting” message. The length of the set net is shown on “Length” indicator.
The seine winch is provided with band brakes, which can be used for controlling the
speed of reeling off the purse line from the seine winch drums. To set the brake effort,
use the “Brake” buttons-arrows (initially the zero value is set, which corresponds to
the unbraked state).
To reduce the speed of reeling off the purse line, change the “Brake” value. The
speeds of reeling off the purse line and its tension are shown on “Speed”
and “Tension” displays respectively.
There are two signal lamps showing that the process of seine setting is being completed:
“Last ring in water” and “All seine in water”. “Last ring in water indicator” is lighted when
the last purse line ring is in the water. “All seine in water” indicator is lighted when the
seine’s last section is in the water.
Note: The trainee can use imitator of Furuno CH-26 Sonar to monitor the process
of setting the seine.
After the seine setting is completed, the towline is fixed on the bow capstan. This
procedure is completed automatically when “Take buoy” button is pressed. The process
is indicated by “Setting complete” message, displayed in the seine status window.
The buoy anchor cannot be picked up unless the following conditions are met:
• the whole seine in water;
• the distance from vessel to buoy is less than preset by Instructor;
• the buoy remains at starboard;
• the speed of vessel is less than preset by Instructor.

Fishing Gear
The towlines are hauled by using the bow capstan and the net winch. To start the
winches, press “Bow capstan” and “Net winch” buttons. The hauling may be carried
out in an arbitrary order. When buoy anchor is taken aboard, the forward purse line
is automatically fixed on left drum of purse line winch. At this moment, pursing can
be started. The lever’s position determines the speed of pursing.
The pursing process is considered to be completed when the length of the purse line
is less than 150 meters. After this, seine is automatically picked up on board and
the catch is calculated. The seine net status window displays “On Board” message.
The current fish caught (shown on the “Current Catch” indicator) is added to the
summary catch (shown on “Overall Catch” indicator). The” Current Catch” indicator
is returned to zero.
After the seine net has been picked up on board, it is ready for the next setting.
Control of the Long Line

Long Line Control Panel
The appearance of the long line control panel is shown on fig. below:

Fishing Gear
The panel contains the following controls and indicators:
• Long line type selection button .

Press the button until you select the required long line type: Drifting or Moored.
• “Set Long Line” – button is used for setting the front buoy anchor into water.
When this button is pressed, the setting of the long line is started;
• “Settings” – button to open the long line settings window;
• “Complete the set” – button is used for setting the end buoy anchor into water.
When this button is pressed, the setting of the long line is completed;
• “Heave” – button is used for picking up the front or the end buoy anchor of
the long line. When this button is pressed, the heaving of the long line can be
started;
• “Heave alerts” – the indicators which show the reasons why the buoy cannot be
taken on board are:
– “Too far to heave” – the distance to the buoy is too large;
– “Bad heading” – the buoy is on the portside;
– “Bad velocity” – the ship velocity is too high.
• Line hauler lever – this control is used for heaving the long line. The lever’s
initial position is backward. To start the heaving operations, adjust the lever
forward. The lever position determines the heaving speed;
• “Long line Status” – this control is used for showing the line status:
– “On board” – indicates that the long line is taken aboard;
– “Setting” – indicates that the setting operation is in progress;
– “Fishing” – indicates that the long line setting is completed, and picking up
and heaving operations can be started;
– “Heaving” – indicates that the heaving operation is in progress;
– “Lost” – indicates that the long line is lost.

Fishing Gear
Long Line Settings

To adjust the setting of the long line (drifting and anchored), press the “Settings”
button on the control panel of the long line.
Note: The setting of parameters is possible only when the long line is located on
the ship board.
The setting of parameters is performed by using the arrow-buttons v.
The following parameters of long line rigging can be adjusted:
• main line length;

• buoyline length;
• hooks number;
• branch length.
Long Lining
Work with the long line includes the following operations:
• setting the front anchor buoy;

• setting the long line;
• completing the setting and dropping the end anchor buoy;
• maneuvering to front or end anchor buoy (fishing);
• picking up the front or end anchor buoy;
• hauling the long line.
Before setting the long line, a trainee can select the desired long line type and make
the necessary adjustments.
Note: Selection and adjustment cannot be made unless the long line is on board
the vessel.

Fishing Gear
To start setting the long line, press “Set Long Line” button. The status window will
display “Setting” message. The length of the set line is shown on “Length” display.
To complete the setting, press “Complete the set” button. The status window will
display “Fishing” message.
To complete fishing, the front or the end buoy anchor must be picked up aboard.
The buoy anchor cannot be picked up unless the following conditions are met:
• the distance from vessel to buoy is less than preset by Instructor;

• the buoy remains at starboard;
• the speed of vessel is less than preset by Instructor.
In case the entire conditions are met, the “Heave alerts” indicators become dim, and
the buoy anchor can be picked up aboard by pressing the “Heave” button. From that
moment, the hauling operation can be started. To haul the long line, set line hauler
lever to one of hauling positions (forward). The status window will display “Heaving”
message. After the entire long line is picked up aboard, the status window displays
“On Board” message and the catch is calculated.
The current fish caught (shown on the “Current Catch” indicator) is added to the
summary catch (shown on “Overall Catch” indicator). The” Current Catch” indicator
is returned to zero.
After the long line has been picked up on board, it is ready for the next setting.
Underwater Visualization Control

The view of the underwater visualization control panel is shown in fig. below:

Fishing Gear
The underwater visualization control panel contains:
• “Trawl view points” buttons – are used for selection of underwater camera
attachment point on trawl:
– “Left Board” – view from left trawl door;
– “Right Board” – view from right trawl door;
– “Center” – view from trawl mouth;
– “End point” – view from trawl bag.
• “Seine view points” buttons – are used for selection of underwater camera
attachment point on purse seine:
– “Anchor buoy” – view from anchor buoy;
– “Center” – view from net center.
• Three levers are used to select view direction:
– “Turn horizontally” – change the horizontal view angle;
– “Turn vertically” – change the vertical view angle;
– “Change distance” – zoom view.

NT 5000 5 20 Bridge Manual Eng PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

NT 5000 5 20 Bridge Manual Eng PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

NAVI-TRAINER 5000

© Transas Marine Ltd. June, 2011

Preamble Preamble contains general information, brief outline of the simulator,

Chapter 1 Conning Display

Chapter 2 Transas Radar/ARPA Imitators

Chapter 3 Navigational Aids

Chapter 4 Handling of Vessels with Specific Propulsion System

Chapter 5 Tow Winches Control Consoles

Chapter 6 Ship Communication Aids

Chapter 7 Fishing Module

NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge 1

Copyright Transas Marine Ltd., 2011

PRINTING HOUSE CONVENTIONS

NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). To highlight names of documents

CONFIG To highlight path to a file, folder

SYSTEM\EXIT To highlight menu items

<Enter> To highlight names of keyboard keys

“Next” To highlight names of windows, pages, buttons, etc.

Simulator Capabilities of NTPro 5000

BRIEF OUTLINE OF THE SIMULATOR COMPLEX

6 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

The instructor workplace is in a separate room enabling him/her to work with

The software includes the following program modules:

• Network operation manager;

• Library of visual 3D scenes of specific gaming areas;

BRIEF OUTLINE OF THE TRAINEE CAPABILITIES

8 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

GENERAL NOTES AND WARNINGS

Compliance with International Standards

Training Type IMO document (s)

• facility for accumulating data on the training procedure;

• programs of the simulation training course;

10 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

Warnings on the Unauthorised Use

You Will Need for Your Work

– NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (V. 5.20). INSTRUCTOR MANUAL;

– NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION;

– NAVI-SAILOR 3000 ECDIS-I (V. 4.00.01). USER MANUAL.

Copyright Transas Marine Ltd., 2011

Chapter 1. Conning Display 15

16 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

CONNING DISPLAY STRUCTURE

• Help for using the Conning Display (“Help” button);

• Help in using navigation instruments panels (“Help” button);

Chapter 1. Conning Display 17

• Help in using ship signals panels (“Help” button);

• Help in using navigation aids panels (“Help” button);

• Help in using alarm signals panels (“Help” button);

18 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

DESCRIPTION OF THE DISPLAY’S COMMON PART

Control of the Ship’s Main Engine

Chapter 1. Conning Display 19

Control of the Ship Steering Gear

The rudder controls include:

20 NAVI-TRAINER 5000 (v. 5.20). Navigational Bridge

Selecting Rudder Control Mode

Chapter 1. Conning Display 21

Control of the Viewing Direction on the Visualization

Default View Mode

• Digital displays under the gyro compass card which show:

Vertical direction of the line of sight in degrees.

Change of the View Direction

• click the mouse in the required point of the azimuth disk;